Practice 670 250 0020

Publication Date 13Nov96

Page 1 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PIPING ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDE

ADMINISTRATIVE
PRACTICES
670.250.0020: Table Of Contents: Piping Engineering Design Guide
670.250.0100: Organization Chart
670.250.0120: Discipline Responsibilities
670.250.0170: Operation Numbers And Activity Codes
000.000.0310: Safety In The Home Office
670.250.0750: Project Discipline Responsibilities - General
670.250.0755: Design Documents - Descriptions / Requisites

TECHNICAL
PRACTICES
670.200.1005: Drawing Numbering Systems
670.250.1037: Drawing Checking
670.250.1038: Drawing Corrections - Piping
670.250.1039: Drawing Checking - Piping Isometrics
670.200.1050: Drawing Practices
670.250.1055: Drawing Practice - Simplified Method Of Drawing Elliptical And
Dished Vessel Heads
670.200.1060: Supplier Drawing And Data Review
670.250.1060: Supplier Drawing And Data Review
670.250.1061: Supplier Submittal Review - Exchangers
670.250.1062: Supplier Review - Pumps And Turbines
670.250.1063: Supplier Review - Reciprocating Compressors
670.210.1150: Storm Drainage
670.210.1160: Sanitary Sewer Systems
670.210.1200: Outside Underground Piping
670.210.1210: Loads On Underground Pipe
670.210.1211: Thrust Restraint Design
670.250.1601: Heat Tracing Practices
670.250.1610: Heat Tracing - Isometric And Plan Instructions
670.250.1630: Heat Tracing - Sample Title Block Instructions
670.250.1635: Heat Tracing - Sample Isometric - Single Tracer

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0020
Publication Date 13Nov96
Page 2 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PIPING ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDE

670.250.1636: Heat Tracing - Sample Isometric - Dual Tracer

670.250.1640: Heat Tracing - Sample Isometric - Steam Supply Manifold
670.250.1641: Heat Tracing - Sample Isometric - Condensate Return Manifolds
670.250.2005: Plant Arrangement - Plot Plan Development - Instructions
670.250.2010: Plant Arrangement - Flow Diagram Transposition Instructions
670.250.2015: Plant Arrangement - Location Control Plan Instructions - Onsites
670.250.2020: Plant Arrangement - Pipeway Control Drawing And Procedures
670.250.2021: Plant Arrangement - Pipeway Interface Control Chart And Procedure
670.250.2030: Plant Arrangement - General Recommendations For Spacing
670.250.2031: Plant Arrangement - Valve Accessibility And Clearance
670.250.2040: Plant Arrangement - Typical Unit Plot Arrangement
670.250.2041: Plant Arrangement - Pipeway Layout - Allowable Pipe Spans
670.250.2050: Piping Plans - Aboveground Piping Plan Instructions
670.250.2051: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Minimum Detail
670.250.2052: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Simple Detail / Dimension
Method
670.250.2053: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Full Dimension Method
670.250.2054: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Fully Detailed With Full
Dimensions
670.250.2055: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Fully Detailed / Dimension
Method
670.250.2070: Piping Plans - Drawing Area Chart For Metric And English Systems
670.250.2080: Piping Isometrics - Piping Isometrics Drawing Instructions
670.250.2081: Piping Isometrics - Manual Components Drawing Instructions
670.250.2082: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Field Fabrication, Pipeway
670.250.2083: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Shop Fabrication, ASME Butt
Weld, Dimension Method
670.250.2084: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Shop Fabrication, Post Heat
Treated And Stainless Steel Butt Weld, Dimension Method
670.250.2085: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Field Fabrication, Non-Post
Heat Treated Butt Weld, Dimension Method
670.250.2086: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Field Fabrication, Screwed Or
Socket Weld Dimension Method

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0020
Publication Date 13Nov96
Page 3 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PIPING ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDE

670.250.2087: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Shop Fabrication, Non-Post

Heat Treated Butt Weld Coordinate And Elevation Method
670.250.2088: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Field Fabrication, Non-Post
Heat Treated Butt Weld Coordinate And Elevation Method
670.250.2089: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Field Fabrication, Screwed Or
Socket Weld, Coordinate And Elevation Method
670.250.2090: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric And Procedure - Shop / Field
Fabrication Of Vacuum Stiffener Rings
670.250.2091: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Field Fabrication, Steel
Underground
670.250.2093: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Shop / Field Fabrication,
Non-Post Heat Treated Butt Weld, Dimension Method
670.250.2100: Offsites - Refinery Plot Plans
670.250.2105: Offsites - Tank Spacing
670.250.2110: Offsites - Atmospheric Storage Tank Piping Layout Guide
670.250.2111: Sleeve Through Dike
670.250.2120: Model Piping - Piping Design Instructions For Models
670.250.2121: Model Piping - Piping Design Instructions For Plot Development
Model
670.250.2122 Model Piping - Instructions For Model Preparation And Review
670.250.2150: Supports - Supports - Base Supports, Base Springs, Base Anchors,
Angle Base Supports, and Concrete Pads
670.250.2151: Supports - Field Supports
670.250.2152: Supports - Cradles, Dummy Supports, Trunnions, Shear Lugs, Riser
Clamps, And U-Bolts
670.250.2153: Supports - Shoes, Load Pads, Slide Plates, Stiffener Plates, Anchors,
Directional Anchors And Guides - Metallic Piping
670.250.2154: Supports - Hanger Rods - Metallic Piping
670.250.2155: Supports - Base Supports, Cradles, Anchors, And Holddowns - Low
Temperature
670.250.2156: Supports - Holddowns And Adjustable Spring Wedges - Pulsating
Piping
670.250.2157: Supports - Gusset Supports
670.250.2158: Supports - Structural Steel (For Piping Layouts Only)
670.250.2159: Supports - Concrete (For Piping Layouts Only)
670.250.2170: Spectacle Blind Layout, Design, Handling, and Removal

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0020
Publication Date 13Nov96
Page 4 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PIPING ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDE

670.250.2172: Detail - Utility Station Piping

670.250.2174: Detail - Vents And Drains
670.250.2175: Sample Connections And Sample Cooler Details
670.250.2190: Material Sketching - Procedure For Preliminary And Secondary
Material Takeoff
670.250.2191: Material Sketching - Material Sketching Instructions
670.250.2210: Stress Design - Responsibilities
670.250.2220: Stress Design - Sketch Procedure
670.250.2221: Stress Design - Sketch Information
670.250.2230: Stress Design - Layout Aids For Rotating Equipment
670.250.2231: Stress Design - Layout Aids For Equipment - Exchangers And Vessels
670.250.2232: Stress Design - Layout Aids For Pipeway
670.250.2240: Stress Design - Spring Hangers And Hanger Rods
670.250.2250: Stress Design - Piping Flexibility Log
670.250.2291: Stress Design - Reinforcing Pad Requirements
670.250.2301: Tie-In Practices - General Design
670.250.2340: Tie-In Practices - Tie-In List Instructions And Sample Form
670.250.2350: Pumps And Turbines - Typical Piping Arrangement For Centrifugal
Pumps
670.250.2351: Pumps And Turbines - Reduction At Pump Suction
670.250.2352: Pumps And Turbines - Pump Piping (Steam) Turbines And
Reciprocating Pumps
670.250.2353: Pumps And Turbines - Misc Pump Piping - Coolant, Flush Oil, Vent,
And Drain
670.250.2360: Pumps And Turbines - Strainers, Pump Suction, Conical
670.250.2470: Compressor Piping - Reciprocating Compressors - Piping And
Arrangement
670.250.2475: Compressor Piping - Pulse Dampener Type And Location Of
Mounting On Reciprocating Compressors
670.250.2480: Compressor Piping - Pipe Support Spacing For Reciprocating
Compressors
670.250.2481: Compressor Piping - Line Spacing Using Holddowns
670.250.2485: Compressor Piping - Centrifugal Compressor General Arrangements

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0020
Publication Date 13Nov96
Page 5 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PIPING ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDE

670.250.2490: Compressor Piping - Steam Turbines For Compressor Piping And

General Arrangements
670.250.2520: Fired Equipment Piping - Plot Layout
670.250.2521: Fired Equipment Piping - Plot Location And Arrangement
670.250.2525: Fired Equipment Piping - Piping Design
670.250.2526: Fired Equipment Piping - Burner Piping
670.250.2561: Fired Equipment - Ladder And Platform Requirements - Heaters
670.250.2580: Heater Squad Checking - Fired Equipment Piping
670.250.2600: Exchangers - TEMA Nomenclature
670.250.2601: Exchangers - Equipment Location And Piping Layout Shell And Tube
Heat Exchangers
670.250.2602: Exchangers - Forced Draft And Induced Draft Air Cooler
Arrangements
670.250.2603: Exchangers - Double Pipe Exchangers Piping Arrangements
670.250.2650: Vessel Layout And Orientation - Piping
670.250.2651: Vessel Layout And Orientation - Trays
670.250.2660: Vessel Layout - Classification Of Vessels Vs Piping
670.250.2701: Instruments - Control Valve Manifold Arrangement And Layout
Guide
670.250.2702: Instruments - Control Valve Manifold Clearances And Camflex Type
Layout Guide
670.250.2705: Instruments - Tagging For Piping Plans, Isometrics, And Models
670.250.2710: Instruments - Meter Runs - Orifices, Flow Nozzles, And Venturi
Tubes
670.250.2711: Instruments - Orifice Flange Tap Piping
670.250.2720: Instruments - Pressure Instrument Branch Connection And Layout
Clearances
670.250.2730: Instruments - Thermowell Details Selection Chart
670.250.2740: Instruments - Level Instrument Piping Layout Guidelines
670.250.2750: Instruments - Relief Valve Piping And Locations
670.250.2752: Instrument Piping - Steam Trap, Continuous Drainer, And Drip Pot
Pipng
670.250.2790: Instruments - Piping Layout Requirements - Misc Items
670.250.9100: TOC: Piping ApplicationsGuide fro Intergraph PDS

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0020
Publication Date 13Nov96
Page 6 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PIPING ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDE

DETAILS
670.240.4000: Table Of Contents: Plumbing Details
670.245.4000: Table Of Contents: Fire Protection Details
670.250.4200: Table Of Contents: Fabrication Details
670.245.4300: Table Of Contents: Steam Tracing Details
670.250.4301: Maximum Steam Tracer Length And Pocket Depth
670.250.4302: Tracer Supply And Condensate Header Sizing
670.250.4303: Maximum Instrument Tracer Lengths And Pocket Depth
670.250.4304: Tracer Position
670.250.4305: Tracer Expansion Loops Tracer Anchor And Guide
670.250.4306: Valves, Flanges, And Control Valve Manifold
670.250.4307: Steam Jacketing
670.250.4308: Pump Case Tracing
670.250.4309: Steam Tracing - Liquid Level Instruments
670.250.4310: Steam Tracing Manifolds

RESOURCES
670.250.9801: Dimensional Chart - Overall Dimensions - Weld Fitting And Branches
670.250.9804: Formulas For Rolled Offsets Using Bends Or Elbows
670.250.9809: Dimensional Chart - Nominal Wall Thickness For Pipe
670.250.9810: Dimensional Chart - Dimensions - Fittings, Flanges, And Valves
670.250.9811: Dimensional Chart - Slip-On Flanged Fittings
670.250.9812: Dimensional Chart - Standard Dimensions - Ring Joint Weld Neck
Flanges
670.250.9813: Dimensional Chart - Large Diameter Fabricated Type Reducers
670.250.9814: Dimensional Chart - Dimensions - Two And Three Weld Mitered
Elbows
670.250.9815: Dimensional Chart - Line Spacing - Pipe
670.250.9816: Dimensional Chart - Cutting And Dimensioning Pipe At Odd Angles
670.250.9817: Symbols For Piping Plan Drawings - Valve And Fitting
670.250.9818: Symbols For Piping Isometrics - Fittings And Flanges
670.250.9820: Dimensional Chart - Spectacle Blinds

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0020
Publication Date 13Nov96
Page 7 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PIPING ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDE

670.250.9821: Table Of Weights - Piping Components

670.250.9822: Properties Of Pipe
670.250.9823: Coefficient Of Expansion Tables
670.250.9830: Acceptance Criteria - Flange Face
670.250.9835: Application Of Pipe Fabrication Tolerances
670.250.9853: Pressure Conversion Table - PSI To Bars
670.250.9856: Piping Codes And Standards
670.250.9860: AWS Standard Welding Symbols
000.000.9910: Abbreviations - Terms And Phrases
670.250.9965: Decimal Equivalents Of Feet And Inches
670.250.9966: Trigonometric Functions

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Topical Index of Piping Practices by Subject - Piping Engineering Design Guide

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0020
Publication Date 13Nov96
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TOPICAL INDEX OF PIPING PRACTICES BY SUBJECT - PIPING ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDE

Note!!! The purpose of this attachment is to sort the Piping practices by subject. The subject
areas are the following:

Miscellaneous
Plant Arrangement
Offsites - Plant Arrangement
Underground
Equipment Studies
- Vessels
- Pumps and Turbines
- Exchangers
- Fired Equipment
- Compressors
Instruments
Supplier Data
Stress
Material Sketching
Plastic Model Piping
Miscellaneous Details, Utility Stations, Spectacle Blinds
Drawing and Drawing Checking
Piping Isometrics
Heat Tracing
Piping Plans
Supports
Dimension Charts and Tables
The listings in this attachment are not automatically updated with the table of contents.

Miscellaneous
670.250.9100: Table Of Contents: Piping Applications Guide For Intergraph PDS
670.250.0100: Organization Chart
670.250.0120: Discipline Responsibilities
670.250.0170: Operation Numbers And Activity Codes
670.200.0310: Safety In The Home Office
670.250.0750: Project Discipline Responsibilities - General
670.250.0755: Design Documents - Descriptions / Requisites

Plant Arrangement
670.250.2005: Plant Arrangement - Plot Plan Development - Instructions
670.250.2010: Plant Arrangement - Flow Diagram Transposition Instructions
670.250.2015: Plant Arrangement - Location Control Plan Instructions - Onsites

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0020
Publication Date 13Nov96
Attachment 01 Page 2 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TOPICAL INDEX OF PIPING PRACTICES BY SUBJECT - PIPING ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDE

670.250.2020: Plant Arrangement - Pipeway Control Drawing And Procedures

670.250.2021: Plant Arrangement - Pipeway Interface Control Chart And Procedure
670.250.2030: Plant Arrangement - General Recommendations For Spacing
670.250.2031: Plant Arrangement - Valve Accessibility And Clearance
670.250.2040: Plant Arrangement - Typical Unit Plot Arrangement
670.250.2041: Plant Arrangement - Pipeway Layout - Allowable Pipe Spans

Offsites Plant
Arrangement
670.250.2100: Offsites - Refinery Plot Plans
670.250.2105: Offsites - Tank Spacing
670.250.2110: Offsites - Atmospheric Storage Tank Piping Layout Guide
670.250.2111: Sleeve Through Dike
670.250.2301: Tie-In Practices - General Design
670.250.2340: Tie-In Practices - Tie-In List Instructions And Sample Form

Underground
670.210.1150: Storm Drainage
670.210.1160: Sanitary Sewer Systems
670.210.1200: Outside Underground Piping
670.210.1210: Loads On Underground Pipe
670.210.1211: Thrust Restraint Design
670.240.4000: TOC Plumbing Details
670.245.4000: TOC Fire Protection Details

Equipment Studies:

Vessels
670.250.2650: Vessel Layout And Orientation - Piping
670.250.2651: Vessel Layout And Orientation - Trays
670.250.2660: Vessel Layout - Classification Of Vessels vs Piping

Pumps And Turbines

670.250.2350: Pumps And Turbines - Typical Piping Arrangement For Centrifugal Pumps
670.250.2351: Pumps And Turbines - Reduction At Pump Suction

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0020
Publication Date 13Nov96
Attachment 01 Page 3 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TOPICAL INDEX OF PIPING PRACTICES BY SUBJECT - PIPING ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDE

670.250.2352: Pumps And Turbines - Pump Piping (Steam) Turbines And Reciprocating
Pumps
670.250.2353: Pumps And Turbines - Misc Pump Piping - Coolant, Flush Oil, Vent, And
Drain
670.250.2360: Pumps And Turbines - Strainers, Pump Suction, Conical

Exchangers
670.250.2600: Exchangers - TEMA Nomenclature
670.250.2601: Exchangers - Equipment Location And Piping Layout Shell And Tube
Heat Exchangers
670.250.2602: Exchangers - Forced Draft And Induced Draft Air Cooler Arrangements
670.250.2603: Exchangers - Double Pipe Exchangers Piping Arrangements

Fired Equipment
670.250.2520: Fired Equipment Piping - Plot Layout
670.250.2521: Fired Equipment Piping - Plot Location And Arrangement
6700.250.2525: Fired Equipment Piping - Piping Design
670.250.2526: Fired Equipment Piping - Burner Piping
670.250.2561: Fired Equipment - Ladder And Platform Requirements - Heater
670.250.2580: Heater Squad Checking - Fired Equipment Piping

Compressors
670.250.2470: Compressor Piping - Reciprocating Compressors - Piping And
Arrangement
670.250.2475: Compressor Piping - Pulse Dampener Type And Location Of Mounting On
Reciprocating Compressors
670.250.2480: Compressor Piping - Pipe Support Spacing For Reciprocating Compressors
670.250.2481: Compressor Piping - Line Spacing Using Holddowns
670.250.2485: Compressor Piping - Centrifugal Compressor General Arrangement
670.250.2490: Compressor Piping - Steam Turbines For Compressor Piping And General
Arrangements

Instruments
670.250.2701: Instruments - Control Valve Manifold Arrangement And Layout Guide
670.250.2702: Instruments - Control Valve Manifold Clearances And Camflex Type
Layout Guide
670.250.2705: Instruments - Tagging For Piping Plans, Isometrics, And Models

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0020
Publication Date 13Nov96
Attachment 01 Page 4 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TOPICAL INDEX OF PIPING PRACTICES BY SUBJECT - PIPING ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDE

670.250.2710: Instruments - Meter Runs - Orifices, Flow Nozzles, And Venturi Tubes
670.250.2711: Instruments - Orifice Flange Tap Piping
670.250.2720: Instruments - Pressure Instrument Branch Connection And Layout
Clearances
670.250.2730: Instruments - Thermowell Details Selection Chart
670.250.2740: Instruments - Level Instrument Piping Layout Guidelines
670.250.2750: Instruments - Relief Valve Piping And Locations
670.250.2752: Instrument Piping - Steam Trap, Continuous Drainer, And Drip Pot Piping
670.250.2790: Instruments - Piping Layout Requirements - Misc Items

Supplier Data
670.200.1060: Supplier Drawing And Data Review
670.250.1060: Supplier Drawing And Data Review
670.250.1061: Supplier Submittal Review - Exchangers
670.250.1062: Supplier Review - Pumps And Turbines
670.250.1063: Supplier Review - Reciprocating Compressors

Stress
670.250.2210: Stress Design - Responsibilities
670.250.2220: Stress Design - Sketch Procedure
670.250.2221: Stress Design - Sketch Information
670.250.2230: Stress Design - Layout Aids For Rotating Equipment
670.250.2231: Stress Design - Layout Aids For Equipment - Exchangers And Vessels
670.250.2232: Stress Design - Layout Aids For Pipeway
670.250.2240: Stress Design - Spring Hangers And Hanger Rods
670.250.2250: Stress Design - Piping Flexibility Log
670.250.2291: Stress Design - Reinforcing Pad Requirements

Material Sketching
670.250.2190: Material Sketching - Procedure For Preliminary And Secondary Material
Takeoff
670.250.2191: Material Sketching - Material Sketching Instructions

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0020
Publication Date 13Nov96
Attachment 01 Page 5 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TOPICAL INDEX OF PIPING PRACTICES BY SUBJECT - PIPING ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDE

Plastic Model Piping

670.250.2120: Model Piping - Piping Design Instructions For Models
670.250.2121: Model Piping - Piping Design Instructions For Plot Development Model
670.250.2122: Model Piping - Instructions For Model Preparation And Review

Miscellaneous Details,
Utility Stations, Spectacle
Blinds
670.250.2170: Spectacle Blind Layout, Design, Handling, And Removal
670.250.2172: Detail - Utility Station Piping
670.250.2174: Detail - Vents And Drains
670.250.2175: Sample Connections And Sample Cooler Details

Drawing And Drawing

Checking
670.200.1005: Drawing Numbering Systems
670.250.1037: Drawing Checking
670.250.1038: Drawing Corrections - Piping
670.200.1050: Drawing Practices

Piping Isometrics
670.250.1039: Drawing Checking - Piping Isometrics
670.250.2080: Piping Isometrics - Piping Isometrics Drawing Instructions
670.250.2081: Piping Isometrics - Manual Components Drawing Instructions
670.250.2082: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Field Fabrication, Pipeway
670.250.2083: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Shop Fabrication, ASME Butt
Weld, Dimension Method
670.250.2084: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Shop Fabrication, Post Heat Treated
And Stainless Steel Butt Weld, Dimension Method
670.250.2085: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Field Fabrication, Non-Post Heat
Treated Butt Weld, Dimension Method
670.250.2086: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Field Fabrication, Screwed Or
Socket Weld Dimension Method
670.250.2087: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Shop Fabrication, Non-Post Heat
Treated Butt Weld Coordinate And Elevation Method
670.250.2088: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Field Fabrication, Non-Post Heat
Treated Butt Weld Coordinate And Elevation Method

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0020
Publication Date 13Nov96
Attachment 01 Page 6 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TOPICAL INDEX OF PIPING PRACTICES BY SUBJECT - PIPING ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDE

670.250.2089: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Field Fabrication, Screwed Or

Socket Weld, Coordinate And Elevation Method
670.250.2090: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric And Procedure - Shop / Field
Fabrication Of Vacuum Stiffener Rings
670.250.2091: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Field Fabrication, Steel
Underground
670.250.2093: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometrics - Shop / Field Fabrication, Non-Post
Heat Treated Butt Weld, Dimension Method

Heat Tracing
670.250.1601: Heat Tracing Practices
670.250.1610: Heat Tracing - Isometric And Plan Instructions
670.250.1630: Heat Tracing - Sample Title Block Instructions
670.250.1635: Heat Tracing - Sample Isometric - Single Tracer
670.250.1636: Heat Tracing - Sample Isometric - Dual Tracer
670.250.1640: Heat Tracing - Sample Isometric - Steam Supply Manifold
670.250.1641: Heat Tracing - Sample Isometric - Condensate Return Manifolds
670.250.4300: Table Of Contents: Steam Tracing Details
670.250.4301: Maximum Steam Tracer Length And Pocket Depth
670.250.4302: Tracer Supply And Condensate Header Sizing
670.250.4303: Maximum Instrument Tracer Lengths And Pocket Depth
670.250.4304: Tracer Position
670.250.4305: Tracer Expansion Loops Tracer Anchor And Guide
670.250.4306: Valves, Flanges, And Control Valve Manifold
670.250.4307: Steam Jacketing
670.250.4308: Pump Case Tracing
670.250.4309: Steam Tracing - Liquid Level Instruments
670.250.4310: Steam Tracing Manifolds

Piping Plans
670.250.1055: Drawing Practice - Simplified Method Of Drawing Elliptical And Dished
Vessel Heads
670.250.2050: Piping Plans - Aboveground Piping Plan Instructions
670.250.2051: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Minimum Detail
670.250.2052: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Simple Detail / Dimension Method

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0020
Publication Date 13Nov96
Attachment 01 Page 7 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TOPICAL INDEX OF PIPING PRACTICES BY SUBJECT - PIPING ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDE

670.250.2053: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Full Dimension Method

670.250.2054: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Fully Detailed With Full
Dimensions
670.250.2055: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Full Detailed / Dimension Method
670.250.2070: Piping Plans - Drawing Area Chart For Metric And English Systems

Supports
670.250.2150: Supports - Base Supports, Base Springs, Base Anchors, Angle Base
Supports, And Concrete Pads
670.250.2151: Supports - Field Supports
670.250.2152: Supports - Cradles, Dummy Supports, Trunnions, Shear Lugs, Riser
Clamps, And U-Bolts
670.250.2153: Supports - Shoes, Load Pads, Slide Plates, Stiffener Plates, Anchors,
Directional Anchors And Guides - Metallic Piping
670.250.2154: Supports - Hanger Rods - Metallic Piping
670.250.2155: Supports - Base Supports, Cradles, Anchors, And Holddowns - Low
Temperature
670.250.2156: Supports - Holddowns And Adjustable Spring Wedges - Pulsating Piping
670.250.2157: Supports - Gusset Supports
670.250.2158: Supports - Structural Steel (For Piping Layouts Only)
670.250.2159: Supports - Concrete (For Piping Layouts Only)
670.250.4200: Table Of Contents: Fabrication Details

Dimension Charts And

Tables
670.250.9801: Dimensional Chart - Overall Dimensions - Weld Fitting And Branches
67.250.9804: Formulas For Rolled Offsets Using Bends Or Elbows
670.250.9809: Dimensional Chart - Nominal Wall Thickness For Pipe
670.250.9810: Dimensional Chart - Dimensions - Fittings, Flanges, And Valves
670.250.9811: Dimensional Chart - Slip-On Flanged Fittings
670.250.9812: Dimensional Chart - Standard Dimensions - Ring Joint Weld Neck Flanges
670.250.9813: Dimensional Chart - Large Diameter Fabricated Type Reducers
670.250.9814: Dimensional Chart - Dimensions - Two And Three Weld Mitered Elbows
670.250.9815: Dimensional Chart - Line Spacing - Pipe
670.250.9816: Dimensional Chart - Cutting And Dimensioning Pipe At Odd Angles

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0020
Publication Date 13Nov96
Attachment 01 Page 8 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TOPICAL INDEX OF PIPING PRACTICES BY SUBJECT - PIPING ENGINEERING DESIGN GUIDE

670.250.9817: Symbols For Piping Plan Drawings - Valve And Fitting

670.250.9818: Symbols For Piping Isometrics - Fittings And Flanges
670.250.9820: Dimensional Chart - Spectacle Blinds
670.250.9821: Table Of Weights - Piping Components
670.250.9822: Properties Of Pipe
670.250.9823: Coefficient Of Expansion Tables
670.250.9830: Acceptance Criteria - Flange Face
670.250.9835: Application Of Pipe Fabrication Tolerances
670.250.9840: Flanged Steel Safety Relief Valve Dimensions
670.250.9853: Pressure Conversion Table - PSI To Bars
670.250.9856: Piping Codes And Standards
670.250.9860: AWS Standard Welding Symbols
670.250.9910: Abbreviations - Terms And Phrases
670.250.9965: Decimal Equivalents Of Feet And Inches
670.250.9966: Trigonometric Functions

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9100
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PIPING APPLICATION GUIDE FOR INTERGRAPH PDS

TECHNICAL
PRACTICES
670.250.9100: Table of Contents: Piping Application Guide for Intergraph PDS
670.250.9101: Introduction
670.250.9102: Project Setup
670.250.9103: Plot Plan, Indexes, and LCP
670.250.9104: Equipment Modeling
670.250.9105: Pipe Modeling
670.250.9106: Underground Piping
670.250.9115: Interference Detection
670.250.9120: Design Review
670.250.9125: Isogen
670.250.9126: Checking and Auditing
670.250.9130: Drawing Extraction and Composition
670.250.9135: MTO Reporting
670.250.9136: Material Interface
670.250.9137: Reference Database
670.250.9141: Plotting
670.250.9142: Forms
670.250.9143: Memos
670.250.9190: Glossary

RESOURCES
090.203.9000: Table of Contents: PDS Base Case Project Execution Plan

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0120
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

DISCIPLINE RESPONSIBILITIES

PURPOSE
This practice defines the discipline responsibilities of Piping Engineering and Design.

GENERAL
Piping Engineering and Design is comprised of five subgroups:
Piping Design
Piping Material Control
Piping Material Engineering
Model Shop
Pipe Stress Analysis Engineering
These groups, under the direction of the assigned project piping engineer, are responsible for
all piping engineering and design on a given project, and are commonly referred to under the
collective title of Piping.
Piping provides the resources and talent for producing all piping related deliverables required
on a project. Since this department usually is the focal point of a project's detail design
coordination, Piping engineers, designers, and drafters may be involved in the engineering
work from concept to startup.
To efficiently perform this work, many computer engineering programs are utilized to provide
engineering calculations, three dimensional plant design, and two dimensional drawings and
isometrics. These electronic methods, in conjunction with design models and conventional
drawing methods, are evaluated for each project, and the combination providing the best value
in engineering production is selected.

MAIN AREAS OF
RESPONSIBILITY
Plant layout and equipment arrangement drawings.
Piping layout, design, detail, and isometric drawings.
Design, material, fabrication, and installation for piping, insulation and coatings.
Material take-off requisitioning and control.
Pipe stress analysis and pipe supports.
Modeling technology to produce scaled models for layout, site arrangement, architectural
features, detailed design, and working models.

REFERENCES
The following documents are related to the use of this practice:
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.0750: Project Discipline Responsibilities - General
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.0755: Design Documents - Descriptions/Requisites

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0170
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

OPERATION NUMBERS AND ACTIVITY CODES

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for standardized Operation Numbers and Activity Codes
to be used by Piping Engineering and Design. Using these numbers and codes on timesheets
during the course of each project will provide historical data, enabling the Piping Engineering
discipline to produce more accurate and timely factors to measure the engineering effort.

SCOPE
Refer to General Engineering Practice 670.200.0170: Common Engineering Activity Codes,
for common Engineering Activity Codes applicable for all disciplines. This practice covers
the range of technical activities on projects for the following groups:
250 Piping Engineering
Covers labor for the activities of the Lead Piping Engineer and detailed tasks associated
with that position.
251 Piping Design
Covers labor expended for Piping design activities including plant layout and design of
Piping systems. Includes drawing production of plans, elevations, isometrics, equipment
locations, and modeling (plastic and electronic).
When P&ID (Piping and Instrumentation Diagram) drafting is done by Piping, it will be
done under Operation 251.
252 Piping Material Engineering
Covers labor expended for the specification of Piping materials of construction.
Activities include specification, line list and P&ID input, commodity catalog, and related
computer data base functions.
253 Piping Material Control
Covers labor expended in the Engineering control of piping materials from the initial
material takeoff to final installation.
254 Piping Stress Engineering
Covers labor expended for the Piping stress activities of stress analysis, engineered pipe
supports, standard support details, and evaluation of the effect of loads on rotating
equipment.

APPLICATION
The Lead Piping Engineer is responsible for the proper application of this practice on a
project.

REFERENCES
General Engineering
Practice 670.200.0170: Common Engineering Activity Codes

Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.0730: Estimating Engineering Labor And Expenses - Piping Engineering
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.0770: Scheduling - Project Discipline Responsibilities

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0170
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

OPERATION NUMBERS AND ACTIVITY CODES

Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.0786: Engineering Project Completion Report - Project Discipline
Responsibilities

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Operation Number and Activity Code Matrix

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0170
Publication Date 07Aug95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

OPERATION NUMBER AND ACTIVITY CODE MATRIX

Op No
2 2 2 2 2
5 5 5 5 5
Activity Discipline Specific Activity 0 1 2 3 4

E. Unassigned
F. Specifications ...................................... (Includes Datasheets) .............................. - ü ü ü ü
G. Unassigned
H. Permitting ............................................................................................................. - ü ü - ü
I. Unassigned
J. Flow Diagrams .................................... Reviews And P&ID Drafting .................. ü ü ü ü ü
K. Interdiscipline Drawing Squad Checks ................................................................. - ü ü ü ü
L. Revamp Activities ............................... Tie-Ins .................................................... - ü - - -
Demolition Drawings ............................. - ü - - -
M. CIE Support ........................................................................................................... ü - - - -
N. Project Standard .................................. Drawings ................................................ - ü - - -
Details .................................................... - ü - - -
O. Unassigned
P. Technical Support Activities ................................................................................. ü ü ü ü ü
Q. Modeling ............................................ Plastic (Including Review) ...................... - ü - - -
Specialty Items List ............................................................................................... - - ü - -
Project Specification Database (PDS - RDB) ......................................................... - - ü ü -
Stress Analysis Activities (Calculations) ............................................................... - - - - ü
R. Spare Parts ............................................................................................................ - - - ü -
Engineered Component Design ............................................................................. - - - - ü
S. Electronic Modeling ............................ Computer - PDS ..................................... - ü - - -
Project Commodity Catalog ................. PDS ....................................................... - - ü - -
FACET .................................................. - - ü - -
Other ..................................................... - - ü - -
Preliminary MTO Activities .................................................................................. - - - ü -

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0170
Publication Date 07Aug95
Attachment 01 Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

OPERATION NUMBER AND ACTIVITY CODE MATRIX

Op No
2 2 2 2 2
5 5 5 5 5
Activity Discipline Specific Activity 0 1 2 3 4

T. Drawings ............................................ Plot Plans ............................................... - ü - - -

Plant Layouts ......................................... - ü - - -
Stress Sketches ....................................... - ü - - ü
Flow Diagram Transposition .................. - ü - - -
Intermediate MTO Activities ................................................................................ - - - ü -
U. Drawings ............................................. Isometrics (PDS, 2 - D, And Manual) ..... - ü - - -
Final MTO Activities ............................................................................................ - - - ü -
V. Drawings (Equipment Locations) ........ Equipment Locations .............................. - ü - - -
General Arrangements ........................... - ü - - -
W. Material Sketches ................................................................................................. - ü - - -
Pipeline List / Line No. / Specification P&ID ....................................................... - - ü - -
X. Drawings ............................................. Aboveground (PDS, 2 - D, And Manual) - ü - - -
Y. Drawings ............................................. Underground (PDS, 2 - D, And Manual) - ü - - -
Z. Drawings ............................................. All Other ............................................... - ü - - -

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0750
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 1 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

PROJECT DISCIPLINE RESPONSIBILITIES

PURPOSE
This practice defines the responsibilities of the Piping discipline during a project's
development.
Members of the Piping discipline are responsible for performing those portions of the scope of
work assigned them. The assigned PPE (project piping engineer) will enforce the using this
practice.

SCOPE
The definition and scope of project discipline responsibilities will vary from project to project.
The roles, activities, and responsibilities will include but not be limited to the following
functions:
Project Piping Engineer (PPE)
Piping Design
Piping Material Engineering
Piping Material Control
Pipe Stress Analysis and Engineering
Model Shop

APPLICATION
The Piping discipline usually is the focal point of the detail design coordination for industrial
and process oriented projects. Therefore, the tempo of major projects is often set by the
ability of Piping personnel to identify problem areas, respond to them on a timely basis, and
be a leader in the design and engineering coordination efforts.
Even though the major portion of Piping work is centered around process oriented projects,
there is a significant amount of work involved in commercial and general engineering projects.
The discipline's responsibilities within these types of projects are equally as important as those
within process oriented projects, but are not as complex or extensive.
In general, Piping will do the following:
Prepare piping design, material, fabrication, and specialties specifications as required for
items such as the following:
- Insulation
- Coatings -Expansion joints
- Engineered supports
Overall plant layout.
Coordinate piping design with vendor equipment drawings.
Prepare scale models for process plant, topographical or architectural requirements.
Prepare bulk material takeoffs and requisitions.
Perform technical bid analysis, and approve vendor drawings.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0750
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 2 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

PROJECT DISCIPLINE RESPONSIBILITIES

Project Piping
Engineer
The project piping engineer is responsible for the following:
Administering corporate personnel policies.
Preparing the piping scope of work and design basis for the project; preparing estimates
of manhours, computer time, and expenses.
Initiating and maintaining a front-end work plan.
Supervising the five engineering and design functions within the discipline; coordinating
their work with other disciplines and with the client through project management.
Providing discipline staff with all technical assistance required, and supervising the
quality of the design work of the engineers, designers, and drafters, including all
calculations, drawings, and specifications.
Providing reporting and budget control, which includes:
- Meeting notes
- Estimate Deviation Notices
- Information needs lists
- Monthly summaries of work for engineering reports
- Control of manhours within the discipline
Providing schedule input for the discipline's activities, and assuring preparation and
maintenance of control level schedule.
Maintaining the piping discipline's input to project status reports.
Performing engineering inspections on the jobsite and at vendor facilities.
Enforcing department and project procedures.
Reviewing and approving vendor drawings.
Projecting estimated manpower requirements, and coordinating schedule and budget
requirements with the discipline department manager and the project engineering
manager.
Providing performance appraisals and counseling for direct reports assigned to the
project, and input to performance appraisals for others on the project.
Instituting and monitoring formal checking practices and quality audits throughout the
five Piping functional groups.

Piping Design
The piping design function on a project will do the following:
Prepare all specifications required for plant layout and design, pipe fabrication,
winterizing and heat tracing, and other piping specifications.
Develop the overall and area plot plans; size process equipment buildings; locate all
major equipment consistent with job specifications, codes, economics, safety,
maintenance, and constructibility requirements.
Prepare project planning, plot development, and design models for client review.
Interface with Construction and all design and engineering groups during development.
Develop design manhour estimates, trends, and detailed work schedules.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0750
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 3 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

PROJECT DISCIPLINE RESPONSIBILITIES

Work directly with Equipment Engineering to select major items of equipment. This
service includes economic studies of equipment and piping systems, and participating in
vendor and client conferences.
Interface with the equipment engineers establishing preliminary equipment data
requirements and outlines. Review Seller's drawings; where necessary, review "in-house"
drawings developed by other design groups.
Coordinate Piping Design activities with other groups within Piping to ensure control of
piping material quantities, completion of piping model work, and stress analysis of
required systems.
Provide piping plans and related piping isometrics that supply construction and
fabricators with sufficient details for prefabrication and installation of piping systems.
Provide scope of work narratives and supporting drawings for piping subcontracts (e.g.,
shop fabrication; insulation; erection of above and below ground systems).
Coordinate with Project Controls to provide data necessary for developing project piping
estimates and schedules.
Provide personnel for shop assistance, subcontract monitoring, and inspection and
construction assistance at the jobsite.

Piping Material
Engineering
The piping material engineering function on a project will do the following:
Establish basic piping material specification requirements, and prepare all detailed
material and purchase specifications. Prepare other specifications including material
certification, valve nondestructive examination, and fiber reinforced plastics.
Initiate and maintain the Summary of Heat Treatment and Related Requirements
document.
Assign line classifications, line identification, and insulation codes to all piping systems.
Prepare Piping Line List. Review all P&IDs for conformance to the piping material
specifications.
Select special piping material components not covered by piping material specifications.
Prepare pipe wall (pressure and vacuum), spectacle blind, and other required material and
component pressure-retaining thickness calculations.
Technically evaluate piping material bidder's lists; assist inspection in evaluating
manufacturing and fabrication facilities.
Evaluate and approve quotation summaries, products, and material and component
substitutions for all piping materials and components.
Develop inspection, examination, and quality control requirements for all piping systems
material and components.
Provide control and coordination procedures for certification and traceability of piping
materials and components, when so dictated by Contract.
Prepare field pressure test specification, calculation summary, and instructions.
Provide consultation services regarding piping, insulation and coating materials. Assist
all engineering groups and Construction with piping material interfaces or applications.
Monitor trends and developments in the piping component fields to ensure that Fluor
Daniel and Client have the benefit of the latest technology.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0750
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 4 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

PROJECT DISCIPLINE RESPONSIBILITIES

Develop material and application specifications for heat conserving insulation, including
acoustical control. Develop specifications for internal and external coatings, including
the following:
- Concrete coated pipe applications
- Internal cleaning, passivating
- Underground steel pipe coatings
- Galvanizing
- Heat transfer cements
- Intumescent mastic fireproofing
- Internal linings
Technically evaluate insulation bidder's list in cooperation with Procurement for Client
and project approval.
Prepare Request for Quotation design packages for insulation materials or subcontracts.
Participate in technical evaluation of insulation quotations, preparation of bid summaries,
and appropriate bidder recommendations.
Initiate insulation Purchase Requests, Supplements, and all necessary procurement
support documentation, including interface with subcontracts manager.
Monitor insulation manufacturer and subcontractor's performance; provide inspection,
examination, and quality control services for materials and application.
Monitor new developments in insulation and coating materials and in applicable codes,
standards, and regulations.

Piping Material
Control
The piping material control function on a project will do the following:
Prepare piping material acquisition plan and milestones commensurate with Construction
and Engineering schedules.
Prepare material logistics diagrams, and provide materials management resources.
Prepare piping, insulation, and coating material takeoffs, and bills of material.
Prepare Request for Quotation and Purchase Request with required attachments for piping
materials.
Monitor the bidding's progress; coordinate the review of bid summaries.
Provide Project Controls with piping material data and requirements for development of
estimates.
Provide Project Controls with Purchase Order Committed Dollar reports, and provide
other cost information for cost accounting and cost controlling.
Provide Construction with reports and other information necessary to maintain field
material inventory control.
Coordinate special material handling procedures with Construction.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0750
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 5 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

PROJECT DISCIPLINE RESPONSIBILITIES

Piping Stress
The piping stress engineering function on a project will do the following:
Analyze and approve piping systems for effects of the following:
- Thermal expansion and contraction
- Dead weight from operating and test loading
- When required, dynamic or static seismic loading
- Wind loads
- Vibration
- Live loads
- Thermal transients
- Thermal shock
- Earth loads
Analyze the system for compliance with state, local, and national codes as well as
contractual obligations.
Provide engineering direction to meet allowable criteria for above parameters.
Evaluate equipment and piping layout to optimize installation.
Determine requirements for formal and informal documentation of calculations.
Technically evaluate and approve bidder's list; initiate Request for Quotation and
Purchase Request packages for spring hangers, expansion joints, slide plates, and other
stress related components.
Develop and provide specifications for stress analysis requirements and related
engineered piping and support items.
Evaluate the effects of new tie-ins on existing systems within existing plants.
Develop inspection, examination, and quality control recommendations for piping support
items.
Monitor developments in applicable codes and standards to ensure necessary compliance.
Determine piping loads at structures, vessels, and equipment; transmit them to related
disciplines for incorporation into Equipment and Structural designs.
Provide assistance to construction for field checkout of piping.

Model Shop
The model shop function on a project will do the following:
Provide scaled model components mounted on plot boards and necessary services to
construct planning, plot development, and design models.
Provide specialty, large scale models to evaluate clearance or other problems.
Provide special topographic or portable sales models to illustrate overall planning
requirements of a project.
Develop manhour and model material estimates and schedules.
Provide photography service.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0750
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 6 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

PROJECT DISCIPLINE RESPONSIBILITIES

Crate and arrange for shipment or disposal of model upon the project's completion.
Perform material takeoff for model supplies and components; procure material and
supplies. Establish and maintain inventory control and material transfer.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0755
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 1 of 11

FLUOR DANIEL

DESIGN DOCUMENTS - DESCRIPTIONS / REQUISITES

PURPOSE
This practice defines the various types of design documents produced by Piping on a typical
project.

SCOPE
This practice is organized into the following major sections:
CODES, STANDARDS AND PRACTICES
SPECIFICATIONS
DRAWINGS
LISTS
CALCULATIONS AND ANALYSIS
REPORTS
PDI (PIPING DESIGN INSTRUCTIONS) BOOK

APPLICATION
This practice applies to all projects in all Fluor Daniel Operations Centers. Flexibility is
allowed based on project needs, the approval of the project manager, and the Operations
Center Manager of Piping Engineering.
Each Project Piping Engineer needs to review the data listed here, analyze the specific project
needs, and make sure the project management team and the client fully understand what is to
be included as part of the job.

RESPONSIBILITY
The responsibility for ensuring compliance with this practice rests with the assigned project
piping engineer.

CODES,
STANDARDS
AND PRACTICES
The design, materials, and methods of construction for all piping systems and accessories will
comply with the current editions of the practices, methods, or standards prepared by the
technical societies, associations and regulatory agencies as applicable:
ANSI (American National Standards Institute)
ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)
ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)
DIN (Deutsche Industrie Norm)
FDA (Food and Drug Administration)
GMP (Good Manufacturing Practices)
MSS (Manufacturers Standard Society)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0755
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 2 of 11

FLUOR DANIEL

DESIGN DOCUMENTS - DESCRIPTIONS / REQUISITES

NCPWB (National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau)

NFPA (National Fire Protection Agency)
NIH (National Institute of Health)
OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration)
USDA (United States Department of Agriculture)
The overall design and material selection is also guided by Fluor Daniel project documents
and standards. In the event of a conflict between the various documents listed in this section,
the more stringent criteria as determined by the project piping engineer will govern.

SPECIFICATIONS
Piping specifications are narrative definitions of various technical aspects of the piping effort
on a project. Depending on project requirements, some or all of the following specifications
may be used. Additional specifications may also be developed to meet specific project
requirements.
50001: Process And Utility Design, Layout, And Drawing
This specification prescribes the specific design, layout, and drawing criteria,
and procedures to be used on the specific project. It includes spacing criteria for
equipment, access clearances, and other safety, maintenance, and constructibility
guidelines.
Prerequisite: Interface meetings to define Client and construction criteria.
Originator: Project Piping Engineer / Lead Piping Design Supervisor
50002: Piping Design Models
This specification is a basic overview of the methods, procedures, and
components used for modeling an engineering project.
Prerequisite: Decision as to requirement and definition of any unusual project
requirements.
Originator: Lead Piping Design Supervisor
50003: Piping - Line Class Material Specification
This specification prescribes all material required to assemble piping systems by
line class based on pressure, temperature, corrosion, and commodity criteria.
Prerequisite: Process and metallurgical flow diagram developed to a high level
of definition; and a design criteria flow diagram review.
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer
50025: Piping -- Shop Fabrication And Handling-Process And Utility Piping
This specification prescribes the specifics of vendor shop-oriented fabrication of
metallic piping systems.
Prerequisite: Determination of piping systems to be shop-fabricated; and
Specification 50003.
Originator: Project Piping Engineer

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0755
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 3 of 11

FLUOR DANIEL

DESIGN DOCUMENTS - DESCRIPTIONS / REQUISITES

50026: Piping -- Field Fabrication And Installation-Process And Utility Piping

This specification prescribes the specifics for the field-site fabrication, assembly,
and installation of all piping systems required by the project.
Prerequisite: Determination of construction responsibility; and Specification
50003.
Originator: Project Piping Engineer
50027: Piping Tie-ins
This specification prescribes the scope, criteria, and technical requirements for
piping tie-ins to existing plant systems.
Prerequisite: Definition of responsibility for tie-ins; I.F.A. P&IDs showing
tie-ins; and Specification 50003.
Originator: Project Piping Engineer / Lead Design Supervisor
50028: Internal Cleaning Of Piping Systems
This specification prescribes the scope, criteria, and method for internal cleaning
of piping systems.
Prerequisite: Definition of the process for any special cleaning requirements;
and Specification 50003.
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer
50029: Cleaning, Testing, And Passivation Of Hygienic Systems
This specification prescribes the special scope, criteria, and methods for internal
cleaning, and passivation of hygienic systems.
Prerequisite: Process definition of any special cleaning requirements; and
Specification 50003.
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer
50030: Geographic Color Coding
This specification prescribes the logic and method for marking piping and other
materials with a construction site, area-oriented, geographic color code.
Prerequisite: Overall plot or site plan, definition of construction responsibility,
and requirements.
Originator: Project Piping Engineer / Lead Design Supervisor
50035: Pipe Markers And Valve Tags For Commodity And Safety-Related
Identification
This specification expands on industry standards and provides client specific /
project specific criteria for the identification and tagging of pipe lines for
commodity and safety.
Prerequisite: Project Material Specification (50003) Commodity Key Sheet.
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0755
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 4 of 11

FLUOR DANIEL

DESIGN DOCUMENTS - DESCRIPTIONS / REQUISITES

50050: Piping Pressure Testing Specification

This specification prescribes methods, tasks, scope, and criteria for testing
installed piping systems, including hydrostatic, pneumatic, and sensitive leak
testing.
Prerequisite: Preliminary piping line list; Specification 50003; and Client
testing criteria.
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer
The following purchase specifications (50100 - 50108) prescribe the scope, criteria, and
technical requirements for Vendor performance on purchase orders of the applicable items.
Prerequisite: Material Specification 50003; and preliminary material take-off.
Originator: Project Piping Material Engineer
50100: Purchase Specification For Gate, Globe, And Check Valves
50101: Purchase Specification For Ball, Butterfly, And Plug Valves
50102: Purchase Specification For Diaphragm Valves
50103: Purchase Specification For Knife Gate Valves
50104: Purchase Specification For Pipe, Fittings, And Flanges
50106: Purchase Specifications For Bolts, Nuts, And Gaskets
50107: Purchase Specification For RTR Pipe And Fittings
50108: Purchase Specification For HF Modified Castings
50109: Internal Lining Of Piping Systems
This specification prescribes the scope, criteria, and technical requirement for
any Vendor supplying piping components with linings such as glass, Teflon, or
polypropylene.
Prerequisite: Material Specification 50003; and preliminary material take-off.
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer
50110: Cement Lined, Carbon Steel Piping
This specification prescribes the scope, criteria, and technical requirements for
lining of carbon steel pipe, flanges, and fittings with cement.
Prerequisite: Material Specification 50003; and preliminary material take-off.
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer
50111: Galvanizing
This specification prescribes the technical requirements for galvanizing steel
surfaces of components purchased on a project.
Prerequisite: Determination of Client requirement for galvanizing (versus
paint).
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0755
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 5 of 11

FLUOR DANIEL

DESIGN DOCUMENTS - DESCRIPTIONS / REQUISITES

50112: Package Equipment Piping

This specification prescribes the minimum project requirements for piping
furnished as a part of Vendor pre-piped equipment such as pumps, compressors,
lube oil / seal oil consoles, and water treatment skids.
Prerequisite: Determination of application (i.e., existence of applicable
equipment); and direction from the project / Client that furnished piping is to
conform to specific criteria.
Originator: Project Piping Engineer / Lead Piping Material Engineer
50120: Piping Traceability And Certification
This specification prescribes the requirements for various levels of traceability
and certification of piping components including manufacturer's standard
certification of compliance, PMI (positive material identification) and full
traceability.
Prerequisite: Determination of need and application to the project; and
Material Specification 50003.
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer
50200: Piping Flexibility
This specification prescribes the minimums for practices, methods, and criteria
used in the stress analysis of piping systems on a project.
Prerequisite: None, unless Client has special criteria applicable to the project.
Originator: Lead Stress Engineer
50201: Piping Support Elements
This specification prescribes the criteria for all engineered (e.g., spring hangers)
and pre-engineered (e.g., rod-hangers) piping support elements. Includes
attachments defining pre-engineered supports.
Prerequisite: Specific Client input regarding pipe supports, if any.
Originator: Lead Stress Engineer
50202: Metallic Expansion Joints
This specification prescribes the specifics for the design, fabrication, and
installation of metallic expansion joints.
Prerequisite Determination of need and application.
Originator: Lead Stress Engineer
50203: Elastomer Expansion Joints
This specification prescribes the specifics for the design, fabrication, and
installation of Elastomer expansion joints.
Prerequisite: Determination of need and application.
Originator: Lead Stress Engineer

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0755
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 6 of 11

FLUOR DANIEL

DESIGN DOCUMENTS - DESCRIPTIONS / REQUISITES

50204: Shock Arrestors

This specification prescribes the specifics for the design, fabrication, and
installation of shock arrestors attached to piping systems.
Prerequisite: Determination of need and application.
Originator: Lead Stress Engineer
50300: Heat Tracing For Piping, Equipment, And Instruments
This specification prescribes the criteria for providing process heat control, heat
conservation and winterizing of piping systems, some small equipment, and
instruments.
Prerequisite: Client's heat tracing and process control criteria; process data and
requirements updated on P&IDs; and site climate data.
Originator: Lead Design Supervisor
85002: Welding - Pipe, Shop / Field Fabrication
This specification prescribes the scope and criteria for welding, thermal
treatment, examination, and testing requirements for shop and field fabricated
metallic process and utility piping.
Prerequisite: Piping Material Specification 50003
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer and Welding Engineer
85013: Welding - Stainless Steel Hygienic Tubing
This specification prescribes the scope, criteria, materials, and methods for
preparation, execution, acceptance and rejection of orbital and manual welds for
stainless steel sanitary tubing.
Prerequisite: Piping Material Specification 50003
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer and Welding Engineer
86110: Hot Insulation
This specification prescribes the scope, criteria, materials, and methods for
insulating piping systems and equipment for hot applications.
Prerequisite: Client's input for material preference; site climate data; and the
cost of energy.
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer
86130: Cold Insulation
This specification prescribes the scope. criteria, material, and methods for
insulating piping systems and equipment for cold applications.
Prerequisite: Client input for material preference; site climate data; and the
cost of energy.
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer
86150: Acoustical Insulation
This specification prescribes the scope, criteria, materials, and methods for
insulating piping systems and equipment for noise control.
Prerequisite: Definitive determination of need and application.
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer
86210: Painting - Piping Systems

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0755
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 7 of 11

FLUOR DANIEL

DESIGN DOCUMENTS - DESCRIPTIONS / REQUISITES

This specification prescribes the scope, criteria, and technical requirements for
paint systems for piping aboveground and in non-immersion services.
Prerequisite: Determination of any Client product preference criteria; site
climate data
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer
86310: Coating And Wrapping Of Steel Pipe
This specification prescribes the materials and technical requirements for the
external protective coating of steel pipe installed underground.
Prerequisite: Determination of need; interface meetings with Civil; Material
Specification 50003; and preliminary material take-off.
Originator: Lead Piping Material Engineer

DRAWINGS
Drawings are graphic records that are the results of the engineering and design process. They
fall into two categories: issued and developmental.

Issued Drawings
Drawings produced as issued for construction deliverable documents may include, but not be
limited to, the following:
Plot Plans
Plot plan is a scaled drawing of an overall site or unit within a site, and Client approval of this
document is a key milestone to project's progress. (For related document, Site Plan, refer to
Civil Engineering Practice 670.210.0755.)
Prerequisite: Client-furnished data about the site, design criteria, maintenance and operating
philosophy, and process data about the plant(s).
Piping Drawing Index
Piping drawing index is a plot plan-oriented drawing that forms a key to the piping plans
issued on a project.
Prerequisite: Approved plot plan; definitive manhour estimate; and responsible level of plant
layout to establish drawing match lines or partition and limits.
Piping Plans
Piping plan drawings are produced as a standard deliverable on all projects. Piping plans will
be provided at a scale which displays the level of detail necessary to convey quality and
accurate design information.
Prerequisite (Plans and Sections):
Development: Approved plot plans; approved equipment location control plans; issued
for Design P&IDs; and definitive equipment data (and piping design model where
applicable)
Check and Issue: Certified Dimensional outlines or FDOs (Fluor Daniel Outlines) of all
(or most) equipment. (Issued for Approval and Approved for Construction issues with
holds due to late outlines may be required by schedule but should be avoided.)
Demolition Drawings
Occasionally on projects, piping engineering and design will be responsible for the
development of scaled drawings or photo markup drawings showing piping and equipment

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0755
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 8 of 11

FLUOR DANIEL

DESIGN DOCUMENTS - DESCRIPTIONS / REQUISITES

removal in an existing facility. These drawings will depict piping items to be removed from
an existing site prior to a new installation.
Prerequisite: Client furnished data about the site.
Piping Sections
Piping section drawings are developed as required to support the piping plans and isometrics
in providing proper data to Construction for installation.
Prerequisite: (Refer to above Piping Plans.)
Piping Isometrics
The term isometric is used to describe an 11 by 17 inch, 3-dimensional drawing of a line or
part of a line, complete with all information required for purchase, fabrication, and
installation. On a base case, Fluor Daniel project, isometrics are produced for all lines.
Prerequisite
Development: Approved plot plans; issued for Design P&IDs; definitive equipment data
(or piping design model where applicable); piping plans and sections.
Check and Issue: Certified Dimensional outlines of all (or most) equipment. (Issued for
Approval and Approved for Construction issues with holds due to late outlines may be
required by schedule but should be avoided.)
Piping Details
Piping details fall into three categories:
Pre-Engineered Support Details
Pre-engineered support details are generic, miscellaneous items normally used on piping
systems (e.g., field support, anchors, guides, hangers, and pickups). The Fluor Daniel
pre-engineered details are based on the major industry hanger components and are
packaged to reduce cost yet ensure high quality.
Prerequisite
- Development: None.
- Check and Issue: Preliminary material take-off to confirm requirement of existing
detail or need for new assembly.
Engineered Support Details
Project specific items such as spring hangers and expansion joint details are developed for
each individual need.
Prerequisite
- Development: Stress analysis identification of need.
- Check and Issue: Final design check of applicable piping system.
Pre-Engineered Piping Details
Pre-engineered piping details are generic, miscellaneous sub-assemblies normally used in
piping systems (e.g., steam trap, safety shower, pressure, temperature vent, utility station
assemblies).
Prerequisite
- Development: Identification of application and need
- Check and Issue: Final design check of applicable piping system.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0755
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 9 of 11

FLUOR DANIEL

DESIGN DOCUMENTS - DESCRIPTIONS / REQUISITES

Developmental
Drawings
Developmental drawings produced on a project but not normally issued may include the
following:
Equipment Location Control Plan
An equipment location control drawing is generated for all areas of the project. These
drawings will show the locations of hard and soft items that require space. Hard items are
structures, equipment, or physical obstructions that are permanent. Soft items are items such
as clearances, passageways, tube bundle removal areas.
Prerequisite: Client-approved plot plan; specific equipment size data; and preliminary issue
of the applicable P&IDs.
Piping Transposition
A piping transposition, or "one-line," is a simplified plot plan-oriented drawing produced by
superimposing the routing of major process lines on a plot plan or location control plan
background to prove the plot and to support cost estimating. Various versions may be
produced and then checked for cost impact prior to formal issue of a plot plan for Client
approval.
Prerequisite: Not applicable.
Piping Layouts / Studies
Piping layouts, or studies, are produced in various levels of detail and at various times as
required to define plant layout problems and explore economical solutions. Layouts are
rough, informal drawings that are not intended for issue, but do contribute to the final design
deliverable.
Prerequisite: Not applicable.
Nozzle Orientation Sketches
Nozzle Orientation Sketches are produced with enough detail to show locations of vessel
connections in plan and elevation. They are dimensioned and will include projection
dimensions. These are informal sketches not intended for issue. They are used for
preliminary information to the equipment group and for piping to continue design efforts while
formal vendor drawings are being developed.
Prerequisite: IFD P&IDs, equipment data sheets, and preliminary vessel shell and internals.
Stress Sketches
Stress sketches may be in the form of a formal isometric (copy) or a specific sketch developed
for pipe line stress analysis. Data applicable to the stress analysis process is added to the
sketch (or isometric copy); the results of the analysis is also recorded on the sketch.
Recommendations and requirements of the stress analysis process are included in the final
design piping plans and isometrics.
Prerequisite: Process P&IDs; equipment data; Material Specification 50003; and Stress
Analysis Specification 50200.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0755
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 10 of 11

FLUOR DANIEL

DESIGN DOCUMENTS - DESCRIPTIONS / REQUISITES

LISTS
Some piping engineering and design deliverables are lists, as follows:
Piping Line List
The piping line list is a tabulation of each line on the project, complete with all identification,
origin, terminus, pressure, temperature, and other technical data used in design, stress analysis,
fabrication, installation, and testing.
Prerequisite: Preliminary level P&ID development.
Originator: Project Piping Material Engineer
Specialty Piping Items List (SP List)
The specialty piping items list is a tabulation of piping components that fall outside the normal
line class specification (Material Specification 50003). Each item listed is identified by
information that includes a number, P&ID location, line number for installation, description,
manufacturer, and purchase order.
Prerequisite: Definition of need and process criteria.
Originator: Project Piping Material Engineer
Tie-in List
The tie-in list is a tabulation of each connection point of new piping to existing piping. Each
tie-in is identified by number, P&ID origin, line number, tie-in type, responsibility, and other
installation and testing data.
Prerequisite: Determination of need based on development progress or P&ID and input from
Client jobsite.
Originator: Project Piping Design Engineer
Piping Material Commodity Catalog
The piping material commodity catalog is a definitive publication of the full purchase
descriptions of all piping materials specified for the project. The data contained is used by
various home office groups to make initial purchases, and by the field to make subsequent
buys and form a record for Client after job completion for spare parts and replacement.
Prerequisite: Piping Material Specification 50003.
Originator: Project Piping Material Engineer

CALCULATIONS
AND ANALYSIS
Calculations are a function of any engineering effort. A wide range of items are analyzed
during the normal course of Piping engineering and design of a project.
The actual calculations are not normally issued as a deliverable; however, exceptions may
occur. Areas of analysis may include the following:
Material Cost Analysis
Materials of Construction Analysis
Corrosion Allowance Analysis
Flange Design Analysis
Bolt Torque Analysis

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 0755
Publication Date 07Aug95
Page 11 of 11

FLUOR DANIEL

DESIGN DOCUMENTS - DESCRIPTIONS / REQUISITES

Stress and Flexibility Analysis

Spring Hanger Design Analysis
Expansion Joint Design Analysis
Vacuum Stiffener Requirements for Large OD (Outside Diameter) Piping

REPORTS
Reports are a byproduct of many of the Piping engineering and design activities, and are used
to control the work and inform Project and Client management personnel.
Standard reports available on a project may include but are not limited to the following:
Piping Drawing Status Report
Piping Specification Status Report
Piping Isometric Status Report
Piping Tie-in Status Report
Interference Report (Electronic Model)
Shop Fabricated Piping Status Report

PROCEDURE
PDI Book
The PDI is a collection of contract specific data organized in a consistent manner from job to
job, to advise, instruct, guide, or inform all Piping personnel on projects what will be done for
each specific project.
Prerequisite: Not applicable.
Originator: Project Piping Engineer / Lead Design Supervisor

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.0720: Project Requirements Checklist - Piping Engineering

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2005
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT: PLOT PLAN DEVELOPMENT - INSTRUCTIONS

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the sequence of functions and responsibilities in
developing plot plans and is intended to ensure orderly development of plot plans with
participation by responsible disciplines.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
RESPONSIBILITY
PREREQUISITE
TERMINOLOGY
OVERVIEW
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
The practice is to be used by all projects requiring plot plans.

RESPONSIBILITY
Responsible disciplines include, but are not limited to, the following:
Architectural
Building Mechanical
- HVAC
- Plumbing
- Fire Protection
Civil
Construction
Control Systems
Electrical
Environmental
Equipment
Manufacturing Engineering
Piping
Process
Structural
Vessels

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2005
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT: PLOT PLAN DEVELOPMENT - INSTRUCTIONS

PREREQUISITE
Ideally, prior to the application of this interface procedure, the task force has been assembled,
overall project design criteria has been established, and some basic information and
documents are available.

TERMINOLOGY
Transposition: A simplified piping routing plan drawing used to prove plot plan
arrangement.
AFC: Approved for Construction.

OVERVIEW
The plot plan is the starting point planning tool for the physical definition of a project or part
of a project. It will graphically show the key areas, units, equipment, and general features of
the project. As such, it requires the input of all relevant engineering disciplines, construction,
and the client.
The activities outlined in Attachment 01 will be regarded as guidelines and not as rigid
instructions. They may be tailored to fit specific project and client requirements.

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2010: Plant Arrangement - Flow Diagram Transposition
Instructions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2030: Plant Arrangement - General Recommendations For Spacing
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2040: Plant Arrangement - Typical Unit Plot Arrangement
Piping Engineering
Specification 670.250.50001: Process And Utility Piping Design, Layout, And Drawing

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Plot Plan Execution Procedure

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2005
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

PLOT PLAN EXECUTION PROCEDURE

Sequence Activity Responsible Activity Description

Discipline
01 Review site date, All Examine all pertinent
client data, job information including:
criteria, and
maintenance Property maps or site plans
requirements Topographical maps
Preliminary soil reports
Vicinity maps
Locations of process feed
stream such as utilities,
product lines, power supply,
and waste streams
Existing obstructions (above
and below ground) and
buildings
Client maintenance
procedures
Basis for roadways
Construction requirements
02 Process flow Process / Prepare and issue block flow
diagram and Manufacturing diagrams, process flow
equipment Engineering diagrams, and initial equipment
datasheets list. Issue initial process
equipment datasheets.
03 Equipment sizes Equipment, On basis of above documents,
Vessels, Process / establish approximate
Manufacturing equipment sizes for exchangers,
Engineering pumps, compressors, heaters,
vessels, and tanks. Data is
given to Piping.
04 Building sizes As required by Generate approximate building
building function dimensions for all buildings and
electrical structures.
Dimensions are given to Piping.
05 Site preparation Civil Develop preliminary overall site
plans and grading / drainage
requirements. Layouts are
given to Piping.
06 Produce plot Piping On basis of data from preceding
plans steps, produce initial plot plan.
Consult with other disciplines
as needed.
06A Transpositions Piping Develop transposition of critical
piping to minimize cost and
material flow.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2005
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

PLOT PLAN EXECUTION PROCEDURE

Sequence Activity Responsible Activity Description

Discipline
07 Issue Rev. A Piping Issue for internal Fluor Daniel
review and comment to:

Architectural
Building Mechanical

HVAC
Plumbing
Fire Protection

Civil
Construction
Control Systems
Electrical
Environmental
Equipment
Manufacturing Engineering
Piping
Process
Structural
Vessels
08 Issue Rev. B Piping Revise plot plan to incorporate
comments received in Sequence
#07. Hold formal Fluor Daniel
review with disciplines listed in
Sequence 07.
09 Issue Rev. 0 Piping Incorporate changes for
Sequence #08, distribute to all
participants and issue for client
approval.
10 Issue Rev. 1 Piping Receive client comments,
review with affected disciplines,
revise as necessary, and issue
AFC.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2010
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 1 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - FLOW DIAGRAM TRANSPOSITION INSTRUCTIONS

PURPOSE
This practice provides instructions that serve as a guide for developing Flow Diagram
Transpositions. Because each project has its own specific requirements, sound judgment must
be exercised.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
RESPONSIBILITY
INITIAL PLOT ORDER STUDY
STEP I AND II TRANSPOSITION PREPARATION
STEP I TRANSPOSITION
STEP II TRANSPOSITION
ITEMS TO BE INDICATED ON STEP I AND II TRANSPOSITIONS
HEAT TRACING TRANSPOSITION
REVISIONS
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
Flow Diagram Transpositions should be prepared on all projects. The main objective of the
piping transposition is to confirm that the plot plan is arranged for optimum plant design and
economics. Give considerable attention to the line routing and component arrangements.

RESPONSIBILITY
Because the transposition establishes the optimum plant arrangement, the Area/Unit Piping
Design Supervisor should be responsible for their assigned area/unit.

INITIAL PLOT ORDER

STUDY
The purpose of the initial plot order study is to establish basic equipment order and plot shape
by transposing the main process lines from the available process or P&IDs (Process and
Instrumentation Diagrams) to establish logical equipment order. Schedule a review of the
initial plot with Process Engineer. Add any information that can be obtained from Process
Engineering.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2010
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 2 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - FLOW DIAGRAM TRANSPOSITION INSTRUCTIONS

STEP I AND II
TRANSPOSITION
PREPARATION
The transposition is usually prepared on a transparency of the plot plan. Pipeway width will
make it necessary to cut the plot plan in the pipeway area and add a section of paper to
accommodate the lines. If a multilevel pipeway seems required, use a separate transparency
for upper (utilities) and lower (process lines) levels.

STEP I
TRANSPOSITION
Step I transposition should prove plot plan economics and set preliminary pipe support
configurations and sizes by transposing all process and utility lines on a transparency of the
initial plot plan. Divide the pipeway into evenly spaced berths and indicate large and hot lines
near the pipe support column centerlines. Route the remaining lines without regard for
pipeway sequence. Color off a copy of the flow diagram to ensure all lines are accounted for.
Check for the following:
Verify instrument and electrical rack duct requirements, aboveground versus
underground, and size.
Color code 14 inch and larger alloy, exotic, and heavy wall lines on a print of Step I.
Study the transposition for optimum plant design and economics.
Review the transposition with Process Engineer and construction to obtain their squad
check approval of plot arrangement.
Update plot plan as required.

STEP II
TRANSPOSITION
Step II transposition should finalize basic pipeway, including expansion loop bays and anchor
supports; use for preliminary MTO (Material Takeoff) and vessel orientations. Locate
subpipeways. Verify header sizes, pressure drop conditions, and piping flexibility studies; and
provide an initial piping study to be further developed.
Check for the following:
Study Step I in order to sequence pipeway lines. Generally group hot lines to one side to
aid in expansion loop configurations.
Route the lines with the goal that only minor additional studies would be required to
develop the model, pipeway control drawings, and piping plans. Color off a copy of the
mechanical flow diagrams.
Obtain Lead Supervisor's approval.
Readjust transposition as required.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2010
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 3 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - FLOW DIAGRAM TRANSPOSITION INSTRUCTIONS

ITEMS TO BE
INDICATED ON
STEP I AND II
TRANSPOSITIONS
All process lines (Exclude items such as bridles and vent valves.)
Utility lines in any pipeway or connecting to a major piece of equipment (Exclude items
such as utility stations, steam traps, and sample coolers.)
Flow arrows
Line identification
Utility commodities
Line size (Indicate reducers in a pipeway.)
Line risers and drops
Control valve stations and the control valve function (such as PVC, LV, and FV)
Orifice flanges
Relief valves other than atmospheric or bypass systems
Unit battery limit block valves and related platforms
Detached plans for multilevel structures
Distribution chart

HEAT TRACING
TRANSPOSITION
For heat tracing transposition instructions and practices, refer to Practice 670.250.1601: Heat
Tracing Practices.

REVISIONS
After the client has approved the plot plan, only major process or plot changes or an update of
preliminary MTO would require a revision of the transposition.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Initial Plot Order Study - Step I and Step II Transpositions

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2015
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 1 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - LOCATION CONTROL PLAN INSTRUCTIONS

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the format and development of the front end document
locating all equipment and space allocation requirements.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
RESPONSIBILITY
GENERAL DRAWING INSTRUCTIONS
METHOD OF COORDINATING PLOT ITEMS
METHOD OF INDICATING ELEVATIONS
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice and the LCP (Location Control Plan) is intended for use on all projects.
Exception to the use of an LCP will have the approval of the Manager of Piping Engineering
and the respective Project Engineering Manager.

RESPONSIBILITY
The Lead Piping Design Supervisor (or designated area Lead Supervisor) is responsible for
the initiation and maintenance of the LCP.

GENERAL DRAWING
INSTRUCTIONS

Drawing Size And Scale

Size
Roll size drawings are recommended.

Scale
Appropriate scale will be tailored to specific job requirements. The following are
recommended:
One eighth of an inch = 1'- 0" drawing scale is recommended.
One fourth of an inch = 1'- 0" drawing scale may be used if required for clarity (for
example, congested areas).
Items drawn out-of-scale for size and location should be avoided.
Potentially out-of-scale items will be evaluated for impact on other disciplines.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2015
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 2 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - LOCATION CONTROL PLAN INSTRUCTIONS

Match Lines And Plot

Limits
Match lines and plot limits will be shown for drawing continuation and will indicate adjacent
drawing numbers and coordinates.

North Arrow
Orientation of north arrow will be consistent with overall project requirements.

Title Block
Title block will be in accordance with project requirements.
The following items will be noted on drawings:
Last Structural pipe support or sleeper number used.
Last utility station number used.
Last safety shower number used.
Key plan with north arrow is required, if more than 1 location control plan is used for an
area.
Space allocation legend and typical detail will appear on each plan. Legend will include,
but not be limited to, items shown on sample drawing.
Coordinates that have been transferred to foundation location plan drawings will be
encircled on the LCP drawing with a cloud and cross-hatched, to indicate that Structural's
foundation location plan drawing is now the controlling document.

Revisions

Coordinates Or
Dimensions
Neatly cross out portion to be revised on the drawing, add new number and revision triangle,
and encircle with a cloud. Initial and date piping master. Only latest revision will remain on
original.

Relocation Of Equipment
Draw in new location, remove from previous location, add revision triangle, and encircle
change with a cloud. Initial and date piping master.

Addition Of Equipment
Add equipment, revise elevation table, add revision triangle, and encircle revised area with a
cloud. Initial and date piping master.

Deletion Of Equipment
Remove equipment from face of drawing and elevation table. Add revision triangle and
encircle revised area with cloud. Initial and date piping master.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2015
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 3 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - LOCATION CONTROL PLAN INSTRUCTIONS

Distribution
Design Engineering distribution chart will be added to drawing and will include, but not be
limited to, distribution list shown on sample drawing. The distribution chart is to be filled in
with the dates sent to the appropriate department.

METHOD OF
COORDINATING PLOT
ITEMS

Vertical Cylindrical
Equipment
Coordinate centerlines at grade or primary support level only.

Horizontal Cylindrical
Equipment
Horizontal cylindrical equipment is located at grade and in structures. Coordinate longitudinal
centerline and a reference line, usually aisle side head. After outlines have been received,
coordinate centerline of support used for anchor and remove reference line coordinate.
Indicate anchor (X).

Exchangers

Shell And Tube

Exchangers
Coordinate longitudinal centerline and a reference line, usually aisle side head. If
underground cooling water lines are implemented, coordinate longitudinal centerline and a
reference centerline of channel nozzles. After outlines have been received, coordinate
centerline of support used for anchor and remove reference line coordinate. Indicate anchors
(X).

Double Pipe Exchangers

Coordinate longitudinal centerline and centerline of foundation closest to piping connections.
Dimension shell nozzles from foundation coordinate.

Air Coolers
Coordinate centerline of air cooler columns at corner which must be held due to clearances or
other reasons.

Pumps

Horizontal Pumps
Coordinate longitudinal centerline and a reference face of foundation. After receipt of outline,
coordinate centerline of discharge nozzle and remove reference coordinate on face of
foundation. Refer to Attachments 01 and 02.
Vertical Pumps

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2015
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 4 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - LOCATION CONTROL PLAN INSTRUCTIONS

Coordinate centerlines. Refer to Attachment 01.

Compressors
Reciprocating - Coordinate centerline of crankshaft and number 1 cylinder.
Centrifugal - Coordinate centerline of shaft and discharge nozzle.
Auxiliary equipment - Dimension from compressor coordinate lines.

Boilers, Heaters, And

Furnaces
Coordinate longitudinal centerline and a reference line which is part of the equipment (stack,
steam drum, main stay).

Structures
A structure is defined as an open structure designed as a support or access system such as
process column towers, pipe racks, and bridges.
Dimension to centerline of columns from equipment coordinates.
At a structure that supports single horizontal or vertical equipment, dimension to centerline of
columns from equipment coordinates.
Draw section to establish structure elevations.

Pipeways (Overhead And

Grade)

Overhead Bents
Coordinate centerlines of columns (both sides) and longitudinal centerline of each bent.
Dimension cantilever from centerline coordinate.
Indicate pipeway bracing as braced bay.

Overhead "T" Supports

Coordinate centerline of column and longitudinal centerline. Dimension width from centerline
of column coordinate.

Pipe Supports At Grade

(Sleepers)
Coordinate edge that must be held and longitudinal centerline. Dimension overall length.

Buildings
A building is defined as an enclosed structure designed for occupancy by people, equipment,
or both such as process building and control house laboratory.
Buildings with equipment (for example, compressors, pumps, boilers)
Coordinate main equipment and locate building by dimensions from equipment centerline
to centerline of columns or outside face of masonry depending on type of building

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2015
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 5 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - LOCATION CONTROL PLAN INSTRUCTIONS

construction. Dimensions will be given to that part of building which must be held due to
clearances or other reasons.
Buildings without mechanical equipment (for example, control house, laboratory,
administration, and change houses)
Coordinate the corner that must be held due to clearances or other reasons. Coordinate
will be outside face of concrete or centerline of steel depending upon type of building.

Paving
Show and coordinate edge of paving.

Roadways
Coordinate centerline and dimension to edge of road and shoulder.

Miscellaneous Equipment
And Plot Items
Miscellaneous items which require plot space will be shown on the LCP. The space required
will be shown to scale.
Some of the items that could be shown are listed below:
Switchgear
Coordinate face and 1 side and give overall dimension.
Upon receipt of electrical drawings, add coordinate for centerline of columns and remove
reference coordinate for face of rack.
Substations and miscellaneous electrical equipment
Coordinate fence line or edge of concrete slab on corner that must be held due to
clearances or other reasons.
MH (Manholes)
Indicate, but do not coordinate, callout MH.
Sumps and pits
Coordinate inside control corner and define size by dimension or note.
Existing interferences above and below ground including deadmen
Coordinate and dimension for clearance.
Auxiliary equipment
Dimension from main equipment coordinate lines.
Items normally located around pipe supports and major equipment will be shown and
called out.
Items to be shown will include, but not be limited to, the following and those indicated in
legend of sample drawing:
Utility stations
Junction boxes
Emergency shower

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2015
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 6 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - LOCATION CONTROL PLAN INSTRUCTIONS

Eyewash
Electrical and instrument racks
Hose reel
Fire hose cabinet
Fire monitors and hydrants
Piping manifolds (control valve manifolds, steam tracing supply manifolds, and steam
tracing condensate return manifolds)
Security equipment (for example, floodlight pole and TV monitors)
Welding receptacle

METHOD OF
INDICATING
ELEVATIONS
Elevations will be given in elevation table, as indicated below:
Equipment Method
Compressors Centerline of crankshaft elevation
Pumps TOG (Top of Grout) elevation
Heaters and boilers TOG elevation
Shell and tube exchangers Centerline elevation
Double pipe - fins Face Elevation of bottom flanges
Air coolers Base plate elevation
Vertical vessels TOG elevation
Horizontal vessels Centerline elevation
Tanks (concrete foundation) TOG elevation
Mechanical items TOG elevation
Building floors HPFS (High Point of Finished Surface)
Pipe supports TOS (Top of Support) elevation
For elevations on structures, the top of steel or concrete elevation on operating levels is to be
indicated on the section.
For slab elevations, consideration must be given to minimum slab thickness at (low points)
(drain funnel locations).
For pipeway strut elevation, the top of steel elevation will be indicated on the plan.
HPFS elevations will appear on plan.
Note!!! 1. The method of indicating elevation for equipment should be evaluated
for each contract. Example: Air coolers at grade will be indicated as
TOG.
2. Early establishment of TOG for some equipment such as pumps and
vertical vessels will allow Structural an early start for foundation
design.
REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.0755: Design Documents - Descriptions/Requisites

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2015
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 7 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - LOCATION CONTROL PLAN INSTRUCTIONS

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Figure 1. Vertical Pumps - Detail A
Figure 2. Vertical Pumps - Detail B
Attachment 02:
Equipment And Miscellaneous Plot Items Matrix
Attachment 03:
Sample Location Control Plan

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2015
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

EQUIPMENT AND MISCELLANEOUS PLOT ITEMS MATRIX

a. = Indicate by symbol
b. = Show min. Outline to scale
c. = Locate by coordinate
or elevation
d. = Locate by
Dimension Remarks
Vertical Cylindrical Equipment X X
Horizontal Cylindrical Equipment X X
Exchangers X X
Pumps X X
Compressors X X
Auxiliary Equipment X X
Heaters X X
Structures X X
Pipeways X X X Indicate P/W Bracing as "Braced
Bay" Coord. Centerlines and Dim.
L. and W.
Buildings X X X Coordinate Building Without
Mechanical Equipment
Paving X X
Roadways X X X Dimension from Centerline to
Edge of Road and Shoulder
Switchgear X X X Coordinate Face and One Side,
and Indicate Overall Dimension
Substations and Miscellaneous X X
Electrical Equipment
Manholes X Callout "MH"
Sumps and Pits X X Coordinate Inside Control Corner
- Define Size by Dimension on
Note
Utility Stations, Junction Boxes, X
and Eyewash
Instrument and Electrical Rack X
Existing Interference X Dimension for Clearances

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2020
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 1 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - PIPEWAY CONTROL DRAWING AND PROCEDURES

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the contents and preparation of the Pipeway Control
Drawing from the Step II Transposition through the Rack Loading and Final Pipeway Drawing
stages.

SCOPE
This practice provides the following:
Transmission of material requirements to the Material Control group.
A scale drawing for the Stress group to check stress, establish loads, and forces.
Transmission of information to the Structural Design group.
A source of information for Construction for rack loading.

APPLICATION
This practice should be considered for application on any project where there are major pipe
racks where construction would benefit.

PHILOSOPHY
Fabrication philosophy for this drawing (rack loaded portion) is maximum field
fabrication.
Lines in the pipeway that cross 2 or more supports will be rack loaded 2 feet past the last
support it crosses.
Individual projects may alter the fabrication philosophy to meet the requirements of their
Project.

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites apply:
Step II Transpositions.
Pipe support spacing.
Cross section of pipeway showing required clearances such as instrument racks, electrical
racks, deck elevations, and drop areas.

PREPARATION
Pipeway drawings are prepared for each main unit pipeway and main process area
interconnecting pipeway. Offsite pipeways may be handled in the same manner.
Microfilming frames will be placed on all roll size drawings. (Refer to Piping Design
Guide 8.5.)
It should be determined early in the contract life (prior to loading issue) if a roll drawing
can be issued as a contract document. If not, separate drawing numbers must be assigned
to each microfilming frame to facilitate breaking roll drawings into individual drawings.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2020
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 2 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - PIPEWAY CONTROL DRAWING AND PROCEDURES

If contract requirements call for 4 or 5 size drawings for issued contract drawings, the roll
drawing will have to be cut up and given the drawing numbers which appear in the
microfilming frame.
Drawings may be produced utilizing manual, 2D CAD, or 3D CAD methods.
A roll type drawing with the upper and lower racks drawn parallel is preferable for issue
to Construction for rack loading, and for use by Design during the layout drawing and
checking activities.
For rack loading purposes, the drawing must contain line numbers, sizes, pipe support
numbers, elevations, coordinates, and extent of piping to be rack loaded.
The Pipeway Control Drawing will be drawn to the same scale as the area drawings.
The Pipeway Control Drawing will be concerned primarily with lines in the pipeway and
their associated items such as supports, hangers, anchors, and guides. Branch
connections are shown for approximate locations initially, and updated as information
becomes confirmed.
A master copy of the pipeway control drawing is to be maintained by the Unit Supervisor
in the same manner as a master flow diagram. It must be updated and revised to scale as
the area piping plans and isometrics are drawn and checked.

Layout
Investigate for the following:
Space and location for electrical and instrument racks.
Drop areas.
Client requirements for future space.
Box clearances for orifice flange piping and other instruments.
Potential interferences caused by lines dropping out of berth at 45 degrees, or use of SR
ells.
Oversized insulation on steam traced or cold insulated lines.
Insulation of flanges on steam lines.
Hold downs, anchors, guides, special shoes, and cradles.
Sloping lines requiring special supports.
Battery limit manifold requirements.
Valve access requirements.
Lines with valves in run which require more space than normal valves (lift plug VAs).
Hamer blinds.
Interferences caused by expansion such as line dropouts or steam boot leg movement in
pipe supports.
Lines in the main run are indicated including space for steam tracing headers as required.
Utility lines will be located to the side of the heavy user and on the upper level of a
2-level rack.
The hottest line will be located on 1 side of the rack and adjacent lines will be
progressively cooler.
Locate small lines that cannot span the pipe support spacing between the 2 cool
uninsulated lines to enable the use of pick ups. Special consideration must be given to
nonmetallic lines such as PVC, glass, and plastics.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2020
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 3 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - PIPEWAY CONTROL DRAWING AND PROCEDURES

Indicate the required method of support for each line such as 5PU1, 5DS1, or 5HR3.
Indicate the amount of cold spring/prespring.
Locate and size required expansion loops.
Show all lines as single line regardless of size.
Indicate all pressure and nonpressure attachments.
Lines in the pipeway will be located by both dimension and coordinate.
Branch lines are indicated in their approximate location and sequence. They are not
dimensioned or coordinated as this will be done on the isometric and area drawing.
When a line crosses 2 or more supports, the rack loaded piping (portion located between
field welds) will be indicated by a double line, broken off at each end.
Pressure and nonpressure attachments must be indicated and identified on the rack loaded
lines such as shoes, process, hydrotest vents and drains, and instrument air connections.
Allow ample space between branch connections to the pipeway header and header-in-line
items, for branch location adjustment.
A distribution chart is to be added to the Pipeway Control Drawing.

MTO (Material Takeoff)

When the Pipeway Control Drawing is issued for rack loading and pipeway isometrics are
produced, the Pipeway Control Drawing is used for preliminary and secondary MTO.
When the Pipeway Control Drawing is issued for rack loading, and pipeway isometrics
are not produced, the Pipeway Control Drawing is used for preliminary, secondary, and
final takeoff.
A BM/BMFMR (Bill of Material/Bill of Material Field Material Requisition) for each
individual line will be issued with the pipeway control drawing when being issued for
rack loading or final AFC (Approved for Construction) issue.
It is the responsibility of Design to notify MTO of changes in material requirements.

Stress Review
Stress will receive 3 prints of the Pipeway Control Drawing from Piping Design and if
required by Stress, 1 print of the Step II Flow Sheet Transposition.
The Stress Engineer will review size and location of expansion loops, anchors, guides,
and cold spring, and calculate anchor forces for Structural Design.
The Stress Engineer will return 2 copies of the reviewed Pipeway Control Drawing to the
Pipeway Design Supervisor and retain 1 copy for personal files. The Piping Design
Supervisor will forward 1 copy to Structural Design, retain 1 copy for Design's use, and
mark it as "Master Copy."
As the Stress Group evaluates the branch sketches, they may have to modify the Pipeway
Control Drawing. These revisions must by marked on the Piping Design Master and
transmitted to Structural Engineering.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2020
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 4 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - PIPEWAY CONTROL DRAWING AND PROCEDURES

Check
The Pipeway Control Drawing Checker is responsible to verify the accuracy of the
drawing such as spacing, branch location, and stress review comments.
- For checking procedure and checklist, refer to Piping Design Guide 8.3.
Area Checkers are responsible to mark any changes affecting the pipeway control drawing
on the master copy.

Issue
The pipeway control drawing will be issued first for rack loading. Then, after final
design, check will be issued as the pipeway plan or plans.
For reason of control, a reproduction of the Pipeway Control Drawing should be used as
the rack loading original, and should be assigned a sketch drawing number.
Whenever issuing the Pipeway Loading Drawing or the Pipeway Piping Plan or plans
where pipeway isometrics are not drawn, BM/BMFMRs must accompany them.
Revisions including those without material changes must be sent through MTO before
being issued.
The Distribution Chart is to be filled in with the dates and sent to the appropriate
department.

REFERENCES
Piping Design Guide 8.3, 8.5.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Rack Loading Drawing Sample
Attachment 02:
Rack Loading Drawing Typical Notes

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2021
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - PIPEWAY INTERFACE CONTROL CHART AND PROCEDURE

PURPOSE
To provide a document for transmitting design information, and coordinating the
interconnecting pipeway design interfaces.
To provide a uniform method and procedure for conveying design changes promptly.
To ensure quality control and accuracy for the interface match points at battery limits.

SCOPE
This practice provides:
Consistency and direction for interface between individual plant/unit design groups at unit
battery limits.
Instructions for preparation of interface control charts.

APPLICATION
This practice should be on any project where there exists pipeway-to-unit interface
coordination requirements. Example:
Major interconnecting pipeway under 1 Area Lead and multiple onsite areas.
Interconnecting or pipeway interface with another Fluor Daniel engineering office.
Interconnecting or pipeway interface with another engineering company.

RESPONSIBILITY
The Area Lead for the interconnecting pipeway design group initiates the pipeway
interface control chart, maintains control of the master copy, and is responsible for
updating and issuing the latest revision.

General Procedure
The interconnecting pipeway group enters all known information and issues a
reproducible (vellum) work copy to the Unit Design Supervisor.
- All match points will be located with coordinates and centerline or face elevation.
- Add special requirements such as slope (provide rate), or "Do Not Pocket" notes in
the remarks column.
The unit design group checks and modifies the information as required. New information
and changes are added to the reproducible, and after taking a print for unit records, the
reproducible is returned to the pipeway group.
As new information is developed, it is added to the original and distributed to the Unit
Supervisor.
As the pipeway design progresses, the chart will be updated and distributed promptly,
thus ensuring both design groups are developing their pipeways to the latest data.
Prior to check of pipeway control drawings or isometrics, either design group will inform
the other, and design changes will be minimized to avoid rework.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2021
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - PIPEWAY INTERFACE CONTROL CHART AND PROCEDURE

Isometric Interface
The interconnecting pipeway isometrics will indicate all materials up to and including the
flange on the interconnecting side of battery limit block valve. Bolts and gaskets for
connecting flanges will be covered by the unit isometrics.
The interconnecting pipeway isometrics will cover all required materials up to the battery
limit block valves on butt welded, socket weld, and screwed valves.
When a natural breakpoint is not available, such as a valve or flange, piping will
terminate with a plain or beveled end, as applicable. Screwed lines will terminate with a
male threaded connection on the interconnecting pipeway side.
Heat tracing: The process unit's responsibility for tracing will end at the battery limit
connection.

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2020: Plant Arrangement - Pipeway Control Drawing and
Procedures

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Form: 000.250.F3600: Pipeway Interface Control Chart
Attachment 02:
Sample Form: 000.250.F3600:Pipeway Interface Control Chart
Attachment 03:
Example Pipeway Interface Responsibilities

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2030
Publication Date 07Apr98
Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SPACING

PURPOSE
This practice defines recommended spacing for buildings and equipment in oil and chemical
plants.

SCOPE
This practice includes recommendations for spacing in the following types of facilities:
Oil Refineries
Chemical Plants
Gasoline Plants
Petrochemical Plants

APPLICATION
This practice is to be used by Designers for preliminary layout and spacing of facilities and
equipment. The specification 670 250 50001, Process and Utility Piping Design, Layout, and
Drawing, should also be used.
It is important to obtain the clients criteria and approval when developing plant
arrangements.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
General Recommendations For Spacing In Oil and Chemical Plants
Attachment 02:
General Recommendations For Spacing in Oil Pipeline Pump Stations.
Attachment 03:
General Recommendations For Spacing in Public Utility Natural Gas Pumping Stations.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2030
Publication Date 07Apr98
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SPACING IN OIL AND CHEMICAL PLANTS

Inter-Unit Spacing Recommendations (8), (7)

Serv. Elec. Utility Cool. Control Compr. Process Process Process Atmos. Press. Refrig. Unload
Bldg.. sub. & Areas Tower Rooms & Unit Unit Unit Storage Storage Storage .
MCC Pump Mod. Inter. High Tanks Tanks Tanks &
Houses Hazard Hazard Hazard Load.
Racks
Service Buildings (1)
(3)
Electrical Substations (1)
and MCC
Utilities Areas 50 50

Cooling Towers 50 50 100

Control Rooms (1) (1) 100 100

(4)
Compressor & Pump 100 100 100 100 100
Houses

Process Units 100 100 100 100 100 30 50

Moderate Hazard (6) (9)
Process Units 200 100 100 100 200 50 100 100
Intermediate Hazard (6)
(10)
Process Units 400 200 200 200 300 100 200 200 200
High Hazard (6) (11)
Atmospheric Storage 250 250 250 250 250 250 300 350 350
Tanks
Pressure Storage 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 (2)
Tanks (5)
Refrigerated Storage 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 300 (2)
Tanks (5)
Unloading & Loading 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 300 300 250 350 350
Racks
Fire Stations & Fire 50 50 50 50 50 200 300 300 300 350 350 350 200
Water Pumps

Note: Spacings are shown in feet; Also see page 2 for notes ( ).

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2030
Publication Date 07Apr98
Attachment 01 Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SPACING IN OIL AND CHEMICAL PLANTS

Notes for Inter-Unit Spacing Recommendations

(1) The spacing requirements for building to building are based on occupancy, square area, storage criteria, type of
construction, and access requirements. Minimum spacing for buildings shall be obtained from the Architectural
Engineering Group.

(2) The spacing for storage tanks shall be determined using the NFPA 30 principles.

(3) Service buildings generally include: offices, change houses, maintenance warehouses, cafeterias, labs, hospitals, garages,
etc.

(4) Control rooms serving unusually large or hazardous units and central control rooms for multiple units or housing
computer equipment, require greater spacing and may require blast - resistant construction.

(5) LPG tank locations, preferably, should be isolated to remote sections of the plant vessel heads aimed away from major
plant values or occupancies. Spheres also should be remotely located whenever possible.

(6) Distances are from battery limits.

(7) Flare stacks (with knock out vessels) less than 75 feet in height should be 300 feet distance from other equipment and
tankage; with stacks over 75 feet in height 200 feet distance may be considered. These minimum distances shall be
verified by Fluor Daniel Process Engineering.

(8) Inter-Unit Spacing Recommendation are based on the Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI) Guidelines for Loss Prevention and
Control (IM.2.5.2).

(9) Moderate Hazard: "This category includes processes, operations, or materials having a limited explosion hazard and a
moderate fire hazard. This class generally involves endothermic reactions and nonreactive operations, such as
distallation, absorption, mixing and blending of flammable liquids. Exothermic reactions with no flammable liquids or
gases also fit in this group." Typical examples include: Acetic anhydride, Acetone (dehydrogenation of alcohol),
Ammonia, Crude distillation, Ethanol (from methanol) Ethylene glycol, Formaldehyde, Methyl ethyl, solvent
extraction, Urea, Visbreaking.(IRI, IM.2.5.2A)

(10) Intermediate Hazard: "This category includes processes, operations, or materials having an appreciable explosion
hazard and a moderate fire hazard. This class generally involves mildly exothermic reactions." Typical examples
include: Alkylation (Refinery), Benzene Benezene-Taoulene-Zylene, Methanol (Reforming), Polypropylene,
Polystyrene, Reforming (Refinery). (IRI, IM.2.5.2A)

(11) High Hazard: This category includes processes, operations, or materialshaving a high explosion hazard and moderate
to heavy fire hazard. This class involves highly exothermic or runaway reactions and highly hazard products
handling." Typical examples include: Acetic acid, Acetone (cumene oxidation), Acrylic acid, Butadiene, Ethylene,
Hydrocracking (Refinery), Polyethylene LD (high pressure), Polyethylene HD (large units), Propylene oxide, Vinyl
acetate, Vinyl chloride. (IRI, IM.2.5.2A)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2030
Publication Date 07Apr98
Attachment 02 Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SPACING IN OIL PIPE LINE PUMP STATIONS

Control Service Tanks Manual Emerg. Open Loading Dwellings

Room Bldg. Valves Shutdown Flame Docks
(1) Stations
Pump House 0 ft 50 200 100 250 150 200 200
(3)
Tanks 200 200 2 dia. 100 250 200 250 200
(3) largest

Terminal and Tank Farms

Storage Loading Pumps Service Docks Open Compressor Pressure
Tanks Racks Bldg. Flame Tanks
Product Storage Tanks 2 dia. 250 200 200 350 200 200 50
Not LPG largest (3) (4)
Loading Racks 250 50 - 250 200 200 200 200 100 100
(3)
Open Flame 200 200 200 - 200 - 100 200

Pressure Tanks 50 100 100 100 100 200 100 50

(4) (3)

Offshore Properties
Service Proc / Gas Open Gas Emerg Product
Bldg. Separation Flame Compressor Shutdown Storage
Stations
Service Building 20

Process and 50
Gas Separation (3)
Open Flame 100

Gas Compressor 50 50 50
Houses (4)
Emergency 50 100 100 50 - 250
Shutdown Stations
Product Storage 50 50 100 200 100
Tanks (2)
Loading Docks 100 100 100 100 100 100

Note: Spacings are shown in feet; Also see page 2 for notes ( )

Notes:

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2030
Publication Date 07Apr98
Attachment 02 Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SPACING IN OIL PIPE LINE PUMP STATIONS

(1) Control room should be pressurized.

(2) Small open flame devices should be located no less than 50 feet from any vapor hazard area.

(3) Service buildings include: Offices, change houses, maintenance warehouses, laboratories, garages,,
except as specifically indicated.

(4) 500,00 gallons per group: 100 feet groups.

1. Control room should be pressurized.

2 Small open flame devices should be located no less than 50 feet from any vapor hazard area.

3. Service buildings include: Offices, change houses, maintenance warehouses, laboratories, garages, except as
specifically indicated.

4. 300,000 gallons per group; 100 feet groups.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2030
Publication Date 07Apr98
Attachment 03 Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SPACING IN PUBLIC UTILITY NATURAL GAS PUMPING STATIONS

Compr. Gen. Shop Office Boiler Gas Air Gas Jacket Ware- Main Product
Houses Bldg. Bldg. Bldg. Houses Meter Cooled Cooling Water Houses Lines Storage
Reg. Exch. Tower Cooling Tanks
Houses (Gas) Wood Tower
Compressor Houses (4), (6)

Generator Buildings 100 (4)

(5), (6)
Shop Building 100 30 (4)
(5) (4)
Office Buildings 100 30 30
(5) (4) (4)
Boiler Houses 100 30 30 30 (4)
(5) (4) (4) (4)
Gas Meter Regulator 100 100 100 100 100 (4)
Houses
Incombustible or Air 100 100 100 100 100 40
Cooled Exchangers (4)
(Gas)
Gas Cooling Towers 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Wood Construction
Jacket Water 50 30 30 30 30 40 40 50
Cooling Towers (4), (5) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
Warehouses 100 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
(5) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4), (5) (4), (5) (4), (5) (4), (5)
Main Lines 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350
(3) (3) (3) (3) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5)
Product Storage 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 500 -
Tanks 1000
Fire House & 50 - 50 - 50 - 50 - 50 - 50 - 50 - 50 - 50 - 50 - 100 100
Equipment 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

Note: Spacings are shown in feet; Also see page 2 for notes ( ).

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2030
Publication Date 07Apr98
Attachment 03 Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SPACING IN PUBLIC UTILITY NATURAL GAS PUMPING STATIONS

1. There should be a minimum of 2 remote control stations to actuate the main linepower operated valves. One (RCS)
should be located 250 feet or more from any gas pumping building, and 250 feet or more from any gas line. The
second (RCS) should be located 250 feet or more from the other (RCS) or any gas line or gas pumping building, or
shielded by topography or structures so as to be accessible at all times.

2. Power operated valves with no remote control stations and manually operated valves on main suction or discharge
lines should be located no less than 500 feet but not over 1,000 feet from any station building.

3. Main lines when equipped with other than power operated valves with (RCS) should be located no less than 500 feet
but not over 1,000 feet from any station building.

4. Distances indicated are for buildings or structures of incombustible construction. If otherwise, consult you Insurance
Underwriters.

5. All open flame devices or ordinary electrical equipment, should be located 100 feet from any gas vapor hazard area,
gas line or gas pumping building; and 200 feet from Product Storage Tanks.

6. Often electrical generating equipment, gas turbines, or other similar items are housed in the same building with gas
compressors. In such instances, you should consult you Insurance Underwriters concerning the standards for the
installation of this equipment.

General Notes:

(A) Main-line power operated valves with (RCS) should be located 350 feet from all station buildings.

(B) Electrical Equipment should be located 100 feet from gas sources and 50 feet from cooling towers.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2030
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 04 Page 1 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SPACING IN GASOLINE PLANTS

Minimum Distance in Feet

Service Gas Oil Dist Util Press. Atmo Loading Main Fire
Bldg Comp Pump And Tanks Tanks Racks Gas Pumps
House House Frac Vlv
Service Building Refer 50 100
to
Chart
Gas Compressor 100 - 250- 200
House 500

Large Process Oil 100 50 - 250- 200

Pump House 500

Distillation and 100 501 30 - 250- 200

Fractionation 500

Utilities 50 100 100 100 - 250- 0

500

-2
Pressure Tanks 150 200 200 200 150 100 250

Atmospheric Tanks 100 200 200 200 100 50 2 dia 100 250
largest

Loading Racks 100 200 200 200 100 100 100 50- 100 150
100

Fired Heaters 100 100 100 100 50 150 100 100 100 150

Cooling Towers 50-3 50-3 50-3 100 100 250 200 200 200 100
100 100 100

Ski Unit for 100 50 50 40 100 100 100 200 250- 150
Package Plant 500

Control Houses* 50 100 100 50 50 200 200 200 200- 50

500

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2030
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 04 Page 2 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SPACING IN GASOLINE PLANTS

Minimum Distance in Feet

Open Ord Emer Turret Fire Flares Stm Hydr Lean
Flames Elect. Ctrl Nozzle Equip. Snf Oil
Sta House And BD Pump
Service Building 0 ** 50 ** 50-
100 -

Gas Compressor 100 50 50 50 50- 50

House 100

Large Process Oil 100 50 50 50 50- -

Pump House 100

Distillation and 100 50 50- 50

Fractionation 50 50 100

Utilities 0 50- 100

50 100

Pressure Tanks 100 50- 200

50 100 100

Atmospheric Tanks 100 50 100 50- 200

100

Loading Racks 100 100 50 100 50- 200

100

Fired Heaters - 50 50 50- 100

100

Cooling Towers 100 50- 50- 50- 50-

100 100 100 100

Ski Unit for 100 50 100

Package Plant 50

Control Houses* 100 50 50 50- 100

100

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2030
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 04 Page 3 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SPACING IN GASOLINE PLANTS

* Control houses serving unusually large or hazardous units and central control houses for multiple units or
housing computer equipment, require greater spacing and may require blast-resistant construction.

** Both stations should be located at least 250 feet and not over 500 feet from compressor house, process area,
loading racks, heaters, and main gas lines. Minimum 250 feet between stations.

*** Height less than 75 feet, 300 feet from plant. Height over 75 feet, 200 feet from plant.

Service buildings include: Offices, laboratories, change houses, gate houses, shops, maintenance
warehouses, garages, cafeterias, and hospitals.
Utilities include: Boilers, power houses, and water treating.

1. Where equipment is housed because of cold climate, a standard firewall should separate compressor and
process equipment.
2. Maximum of 300,000 gallons per group; 100 feet between groups, or other suitable arrangements.
3. Fifty feet for handling nonflammables, 100 feet for handling flammables.

Note!!! Fire water systems, with locations of hydrants and valves, require special consideration.

4. More spacing may be required in unattended plants or in high-valued attended plants with complex control
systems.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2030
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 05 Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SPACING IN OIL PIPE LINE PUMP STATIONS

Control Service Tanks Manual Emergency

Room Building Valves Shutdown
Stations
Pump House 01 503 200 100 250
3
Tanks 200 200 2 dia lrgst 100 250
Terminal and Tank Farms
Stor Tnk Ldg Racks Pump Serv Bldg Docks
3
Product Storage Tanks, 2 dia 250 200 200 350
Not LPG lrgst
Loading Racks 250 50-250 200 2003 200
Open Flame 200 200 100 - 200
4 3
Pressure Tanks 50 100 100 100 100

Offshore Properties
Serv Bldg Proc / Gas Open Flm Gas Comp Emer Shtdn
Service Buildings 20
Process and 503 -
Gas Separation
Open Flame Devices - 100 -
4
Gas Compressor Houses 50 50 50 -
Emergency Shutdown Stations 50 100 100 50- 250 -
2
Product Storage Tanks 50 50 100 200 100
Loading Docks 100 100 100 100 100

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2030
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 05 Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SPACING IN OIL PIPE LINE PUMP STATIONS

Open Fire Dwellings Fire Ldg

Pump House 100 150 200 100 200
Tanks 100 200 200 100 250
Terminal and Tank Farms
Fire Fire Comp Open Press
Product Storage Tanks, 300 100 200 200 504
Not LPG
Loading Racks 150 100 200 200 100
Open Flame 100 50 100 - 200
Pressure Tanks 200 50- 100 100 200 503

Offshore Properties
Prod Stor Ldg
Service Buildings
Process and
Gas Separation
Open Flame Devices
Gas Compressor Houses
Emergency Shutdown Stations
Product Storage Tanks -
Loading Docks 100 -

1. Control room should be pressurized.

2 Small open flame devices should be located no less than 50 feet from any vapor hazard area.

3. Service buildings include: Offices, change houses, maintenance warehouses, laboratories, garages, except as
specifically indicated.

4. 300,000 gallons per group; 100 feet groups.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2030
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 06 Page 1 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SPACING IN PUBLIC UTILITY NATURAL GAS PUMPING STATIONS

Minimum Distance in Feet

Comp Gen Shop Off Boil Opn Gas Inc / Gas Jack
Hous Bldg Bldg Bldg Hou Flm Mtr FF Clg Wtr
Dev Reg Clrs Twr Clg
Hou Gas Wf Twr
-4,6
Compressor Houses Refer
Generator Buildings 100 5,6 -4 to
Note
Shop Buildings 1005 304 -4

Office Buildings 1005 304 304 -4

No. 5
Boiler Houses 1005 304 304 304 -4

Open Flame Devices Refer to Note No. 5

-4
Gas Meter of Gas 100 100 100 100 100
Regulator Houses
Incombustible or Fin Fan 100 100 100 100 100 404 -
Coolers (Gas)
Gas Cooling Towers 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 -
Wood or Wood
Frame Construction
Jacket Water Cooling 504,5 304 304 304 304 504 404 404 50 -4

Towers
Warehouses 1005 304 304 304 304 - 304,5 304,5 304.5 304
Main-Line Valves Main-Line Power Operated Valves with (RCS)
Should be Located 350 feet from All Station Buildings
Remote Control Refer to Note No. 1
Shutdown Stations
Main Lines 3503 3503 3503 3503 3503 Refer 3505 3505 3505 3505
to
No. 5
Product Storage Tanks 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2030
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 06 Page 2 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SPACING IN PUBLIC UTILITY NATURAL GAS PUMPING STATIONS

Minimum Distance in Feet

Whs Mn- Rem Mn Cp Prop Ord Tur Fire Fire
In Ctrl Lns Bldg P/L Elec Noz Equi Hou
Vlv Shd Dwl Whs Equi Hou
Sta etc. etc.
Compressor Houses ** Refer 1005 *** 50- 50-
to 100 100
Generator Buildings - 50 50-
N 100
o
Shop Buildings t - 50 50-
e 100
Office Buildings - 50 50-
100
No. 1
Boiler Houses - 50 50-
100
Open Flame Devices - 50 50-
100
Gas Meter of Gas 100 50- 50-
Regulator Houses 5 100 100
Incombustible or Fin 100 50- 50-
Fan Coolers (Gas) 5 100 100
Gas Cooling Towers 100 50- 50-
Wood or Wood 5 100 100
Frame Construction
Jacket Water Cooling 50 50 50-
Towers 100
-4
Warehouses - 50 50-
100
Main-Line Valves Refer 1005 100 100
to
No 2
-5
Remote Control - - -
Shutdown Stations
Main Lines 3505 -3
2501 - 1005 100 100

Product Storage 200 200 500- 500- 200 200 100 100 100
Tanks 1000 1000

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2030
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 06 Page 3 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SPACING IN PUBLIC UTILITY NATURAL GAS PUMPING STATIONS

** Main-line power operated valves with (RCS) should be located 350 feet from all station buildings.

*** Turret nozzles should be located 50 to 100 feet from any large structures, gas compressor buildings, cooling towers,
or tanks.

1. There should be a minimum of 2 remote control stations to actuate the main linepower operated valves. One (RCS)
should be located 250 feet or more from any gas pumping building, and 250 feet or more from any gas line. The
second (RCS) should be located 250 feet or more from the other (RCS) or any gas line or gas pumping building, or
shielded by topography or structures so as to be accessible at all times.

2. Power operated valves with no remote control stations and manually operated valves on main suction or discharge
lines should be located no less than 500 feet but not over 1,000 feet from any station building.

3. Main lines when equipped with other than power operated valves with (RCS) should be located no less than 500 feet
but not over 1,000 feet from any station building.

4. Distances indicated are for buildings or structures of incombustible construction. If otherwise, consult you Insurance
Underwriters.

5. All open flame devices or ordinary electrical equipment, should be located 100 feet from any gas vapor hazard area,
gas line or gas pumping building.

6. Often electrical generating equipment, gas turbines, or other similar items are housed in the same building with gas
compressors. In such instances, you should consult you Insurance Underwriters concerning the standards for the
installation of this equipment.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2031
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - VALVE ACCESSIBILITY AND CLEARANCE

PURPOSE
This practice describes the Fluor Daniel method for determining valve accessibility and
operating clearances.

SCOPE
This practice includes information on the following areas:
Vertical Stem Valves
Horizontal Stem Valves
Average Man Clearances

APPLICATION
This practice should be used on all projects. It is intended as a guideline only. It is the
responsibility of both the Designer and Checker to follow this practice where practical.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Valve Accessibility And Clearance - Vertical Stem
Attachment 02:
Valve Accessibility And Clearance - Horizontal Stem
Attachment 03:
Average Man Clearances

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2040
Publication Date 07Apr98
Page 1 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - TYPICAL UNIT PLOT ARRANGEMENT

PURPOSE
This practice establishes recommended guidelines to assist the Piping Designer for
development of a unit plot arrangement.

SCOPE
This practice is arranged in the following major sections:
RESPONSIBILITY
ARRANGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT
EQUIPMENT AND PIPEWAY CLEARANCES
PIPEWAY LAYOUT
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice is to be used as a guideline for the development of the unit Plot Plan.

RESPONSIBILITY
It is the Lead Piping Supervisor's responsibility to ensure that this guideline is followed, along
with any specific client requirements.

ARRANGEMENT OF
EQUIPMENT
Note!!! The numbers enclosed in parentheses below refer to specific notes in circles on
Attachments 01, 02, and 03.

Equipment Structures
The plant layout of equipment shall utilize common structures for equipment vessels and
pumps. As a rule single installation of equipment will not require a structure.

Vertical Vessels
Vertical vessels (A1) will be on a given centerline established by the largest vessel. The shell
of the largest vessel will be 2'- 0" from the aisleway reference line.
Vessels that are considered larger than the average vessel (A1.1) in a unit, will be established
independently with the shell located 2'- 0" from the aisleway reference line.
Manways in vertical vessels will normally be located on the side of the vessel away from the
pipe rack. This leaves the pipe rack side clear for pipes going to and from the rack. Ladders
will be located on either side of the vessel.
Stacking two or more vertical vessels shall be investigated. This investigation shall consider
the process conditions (commodities, temperatures, pressures), vertical height limitations, and

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2040
Publication Date 07Apr98
Page 2 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - TYPICAL UNIT PLOT ARRANGEMENT

piping layout for economic advantages. The stacking of vessels requires the acceptance of
Process and Vessel engineering.

Horizontal Vessels
Horizontal vessels (A2) will have the head of the largest vessel line up with the aisleway
reference line. All other horizontal vessels in the same vicinity will have a common tangent
line coordinate with the largest vessel. It may be economical for adjacent vessels to share a
common saddle coordinate to utilize a common foundation.
The minimum elevation from grade is usually shown on the P&ID if it is critical for process
reasons. If no elevation is expressed and minimum is required, care should be taken to allow
adequate clearance for piping.

Exchangers
Shell and tube heat exchangers (A3.1) will be lined up with their channel heads away from the
pipeways, so that tube withdrawal is toward the outside of the unit.
The shell heads will be lined up so that the largest head is in line with the aisleway reference
line. All other exchangers are to be lined up to have a common channel nozzle coordinate. It
may be economical for adjacent exchangers to share a common saddle coordinate to utilize a
common foundation.
"G"- fin or fin tube type exchangers will be located (A3.2) with the centerline of the shell
nozzles lined up and located such that all piping remains clear of the aisleway reference line.
Horizontal reboilers (A3.3) will preferably be located next to the equipment they service.

Pumps
Locate pumps close to the equipment from which they take suction (A4.1).
Pumps handling flammable products are not to be located under pipeways
carrying major product lines, air coolers, or vessels. Pumps handling
non-flammable products may be located under pipeways and air cooled
exchangers.
Pumps located between pipeways and equipment row should be located to
avoid being hazardous to pipeway and equipment. Industrial Risk Insurers
IM.2.5.2 (IRI) indicates the minimum distance to be 10 feet clear (A4.2); this
distance should be verified by the clients requirements.
Layout pump suctions and discharges on common centerlines, allowing the
use of common pipe supports (A4.3).

Aircoolers
Aircoolers will normally be located above the pipeways (A5).

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2040
Publication Date 07Apr98
Page 3 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - TYPICAL UNIT PLOT ARRANGEMENT

Furnaces
Furnaces should be located upwind or sidewind from the rest of the unit and be separated by at
least 50 feet.

Compressors
Compressors should be located downwind from the rest of the unit, be separated from the
other equipment, and preferably not located in an enclosed building.

Valve Manifolds
Operational valve manifolds, control valve manifolds and utility stations (A6) are to be
located for operability and access.

EQUIPMENT AND
PIPEWAY
CLEARANCES

Walkways
2'- 6" horizontal by 7'- 0" vertical (C1.1).

Aisleway
For fork lift or similar equipment 6'- 0" horizontal by 8'- 0" vertical. For portable manual
equipment operation 3'- 0" horizontal by 8'- 0" vertical (C1.2).

Access Way
Mobil equipment access (hydraulic cranes, trucks, etc.) 10'- 0" horizontal by 10'- 0" vertical
(C1.3).

Flange Clearance
Between adjacent equipment (example: shell and tube heat exchangers) 1'- 6" clearance
between flanges if no other access is required (C2).

Foundation Footings
Minimum (2'- 6") walkway clearances are required between foundations of any equipment and
any adjacent equipment or piping.

Pump Clearances
For pumps extending under the pipeways, a minimum 10'- 0" (C4.1) clearance is required
between pumps at opposite sides of the rack. This clearance need not be in a straight line
down a series of pumps under the rack.
Minimum clearance of 3'- 0" is required between pumps (C4.2). The 3'- 0" dimension is a
minimum requirement between adjacent equipment, foundation or piping.

Exchanger Clearances

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2040
Publication Date 07Apr98
Page 4 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - TYPICAL UNIT PLOT ARRANGEMENT

Clear aisleway for exchanger shell head removal will be 6'- 0" when using a fork lift truck or
portable "A" frame (C4.3).
3'- 0" clear platform is required when using a mobile crane positioned at channel end to
remove shell cover (C4.3.1).
3'- 0" clear when shell cover is fixed and removal is not required.

Miscellaneous Clearances
Platforms will be 1'- 0" minimum clear of piping or pipeway (C4.4.1). Allow clearance for
drain funnels in front of pumps (C4.4.2).

Road Clearances
The requirements for drainage ditches or underground pipeway easement may increase the
dimension from the edge of roads to equipment (C5).

PIPEWAY LAYOUT
For pipeway support elevations (P1), refer to Practice 670.250.2041: Plant Arrangement -
Pipeway Layout - Allowable Pipe Spans.
Pipe support spacings shall be maximized using the limits of pipe spans and structural
integrity.
Location of electrical and instrument raceways will be determined by one of the following:
When electrical is located primarily aboveground (P2.1), raceways for electrical and
instruments will be located as shown (vertical or horizontal, with horizontal being the
alternate location), taking care not to interfere with pipe turn-outs and expansion loops.
On projects where electrical is predominately aboveground, the top level of the pipeway
(P2.2) will be reserved for electrical and instrument raceways.
Drop space (P3), if required, for utility, steam trap, or vent piping drop space width is set by
minimum clearance for largest line and may be on either or both sides of pipeway as required.
The centerline of line drops (P4) will normally be 2'- 0" from centerline of P.S. column or end
of cantilever, whichever is applicable. Special consideration needs to be given to large
diameter lines.
Width of rack (P5) will be determined by the flow diagram transposition.
Refer to Practice 670.250.2010: Plant Arrangement - Flow Diagram Transposition
Instructions.
For pipe support spacing (P6), refer to Practice 670.250.2041.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2040
Publication Date 07Apr98
Page 5 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PLANT ARRANGEMENT - TYPICAL UNIT PLOT ARRANGEMENT

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2005: Plant Arrangement - Plot Plan Development Instructions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2010: Plant Arrangement - Flow Diagram Transposition
Instructions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2015: Plant Arrangement Location Control Plan Instructions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2041: Plant Arrangement - Pipeway Layout - Allowable Pipe Spans

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Unit Plot Arrangement
Attachment 02:
Section Thru Pipeway, Standard Arrangements
Attachment 03:
Space Allocation At Support Columns

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2301
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TIE-IN PRACTICES - GENERAL DESIGN

PURPOSE
This practice establishes general guidelines for various types of tie-ins.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
RESPONSIBILITY
DEFINITIONS
REVIEW REQUIREMENTS
LOCATE TIE-IN IN THE FIELD
PREPARE DEMOLITION ISOMETRIC
DESIGN ROUTING OF LINE TIE-IN TO DESTINATION
REVIEW ISOMETRICS
DOCUMENTATION
MATERIALS
PRESSURE TAPS
BOLT-ON CONNECTIONS
VALVES
TESTING
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice is to be used as a guideline for making piping tie-ins, including selection,
location, and design of tie-in connections to existing piping and equipment.

RESPONSIBILITY
The Lead Piping Engineer will be responsible for the physical location, design, and
initiation of material procurement for the tie-in.
The Lead Process Engineer will establish tie-in process requirements.
Construction will establish blinding, purging, safety procedures, and will perform NDE
(Nondestructive Examination) on the proposed locations.
The client will approve tie-ins.

DEFINITIONS
Tie-In: A new piping connection to any existing pipeline or piece of equipment which is
made in place.
Pressure Tap (hot tap): A tie-in made by drilling or cutting a line or vessel, which is either
under pressure or has been depressurized, but has not been cleared for conventional
construction methods.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2301
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TIE-IN PRACTICES - GENERAL DESIGN

Stopple: A device used to isolate a section of pipe for repair or revision without depressuring
or clearing the entire line.

REVIEW
REQUIREMENTS
Use as-built P&IDs (Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams).
Check for special process requirements such as the following:
- Do not picket
- Vibrating service
- Allowable pressure drop
- Two-phase flow.
Determine hot-tap or cold-cut.
Prepare tie-in list (refer to Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2340: Tie-In List
Instructions And Sample Forms).

LOCATE TIE-IN IN
THE FIELD
The majority of tie-ins to existing facilities will be accomplished during a Plant shutdown.
Those piping systems remaining live during a Plant shutdown and requiring tie-ins will be
identified as such in the preliminary flowsheet markups. As illustrated by the following items,
special care and attention will be given during the design phase, which will be effective in
minimizing system shutdown requirements:
Tie-in points will be tagged with a weatherproof tag indicating the job number and tie-in
number, and will be fixed to the tie-in location by means of a semi-permanent but
removable device such as a wire. The tie-in point will also be painted on the pipe or
valved tie-in point with a color of paint which is acceptable to the Plant Engineer.
Tie-ins will be as shown on applicable P&IDs.
Use existing connections when possible.
- Valve with no connection.
- Blind flange.
- Replace existing flanged spools with new spools incorporating a connection point.
Choose locations which can be blocked by existing valves.
Review tie-in locations with Process, Operations, and Maintenance.
Determine testing requirements.
Use Form: 000.250.F0300: FSR (Field Service Request), from Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2340: Tie-In List Instructions And Sample Forms, for manual
measurements and survey data.
- Determine existing reference coordinates and elevations by survey, and paint the
information on the reference item in the field; for example, pipe support column
coordinates and top of steel elevations.
- Measure from marked columns and steel elevations.
- Take pipe measurements from welds rather than from hard-to-find centerline of
elbows or Tees.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2301
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 3 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TIE-IN PRACTICES - GENERAL DESIGN

- On critical tie-ins, have centerline elevation and 1 set of coordinates surveyed to

complement manual field measurements.
- Perform UT on existing line. (Does it meet code?)
- Determine type of PMI (Positive Material Identification) on the existing line.
- Determine type of existing insulation or tracing.
When the Fluor Daniel Piping Design team is close to completing their work, the Fluor
Daniel Piping and Process Engineers will travel to the plant site and together will check
the Plant Design team work from a Process and constructibility standpoint.
When piping tie-ins are checked by Fluor Daniel Piping and Process Engineers, they will
be reviewed with the plant's Project Engineer for approval.
After preliminary approval by the plant's Project Engineer, Fluor Daniel Piping will
formally draw up the Piping tie-in isometrics and Piping tie-in key plans, and develop the
Piping tie-in list which will be issued formally for approval.

PREPARE
DEMOLITION
ISOMETRIC
Demolition can be shown on existing isometrics or be part of the new tie-in isometric.
Demolition isometrics show Construction exactly where the existing line has to be cut to
install the new tie-in.

DESIGN ROUTING OF
LINE FROM TIE-IN TO
DESTINATION
Field check for clearances.
Try to maximize the use of existing steel.
Do not block future expansions.

REVIEW ISOMETRICS
Verify constructibility (such as crane access and welder access).
Verify clearances for hot-tap machine (if required).
Verify sketch's level of detail; does it show existing anchors, guides, and supports (for
stress review)?
Verify that thermal expansion has been accounted for when taking existing line field
measurements.
Verify that existing isolation valves are shown.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2301
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 4 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TIE-IN PRACTICES - GENERAL DESIGN

DOCUMENTATION
In addition to data normally shown on Piping drawings, the following information will be
given when hot tapping or stoppling piping or equipment:
Process fluid or vapor, and maximum operating pressure and temperature.
Material specifications, acceptable wall thickness (not less than calculated minimum) of
equipment or pipe to be tapped.
Exact location and orientation of tapping nozzle.
Drill or cutter diameter.
Nozzles and adapters will be according to Piping Material Specifications as shown on the
drawings.
For cast iron lines, tapping saddle or sleeve specifications and the exact outside R (radius)
of the lines measured at the point of pressure tapping.
Special welding and heat testing procedures, if required.
Valve size, rating, materials, and type.
Packing material for valve and tapping machine, if other than that shown in the Piping
Material Specifications for the valve.
Gaskets for valve, adapter, and tapping machine, if other than that shown in the Piping
Material Specifications for the valve.
Test fluid and pressures for testing nozzle, valve, adapter and reinforcing pad (if
reinforcing is specified), and special instructions for removal of test fluid and cleaning the
nozzle, if required to prevent product contamination.
Special instruction for work to be performed on equipment containing toxic or potentially
hazardous material, and any other special safety precautions which may be required.
Precautionary notes such as those required when tapping or stoppling ethylene, butadiene,
or acetylene. The minimum clear, full-round valve opening required (allow for 1/8 of an
inch clearance in diameter), and the specific valve meeting this requirement.
If reinforced connections are not commercially available or if excessive time is required
to secure the commercial connections, specify the following and provide the necessary
information for their fabrication:
- Cast iron lines. Design according to applicable code.
- Other than cast iron lines. Specify pad.

MATERIALS
Valves, packing, gaskets, and other piping components will be in accordance with the
Piping Material Specifications.
Nozzle reinforcement material will be of the same nominal chemical composition and
physical characteristics as the branch connection and the equipment being tapped.

PRESSURE TAPS
Pressure taps must be approved by Owner's Engineer.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2301
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 5 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TIE-IN PRACTICES - GENERAL DESIGN

Pressure taps may be used for the following:

- To provide a connection into Piping or Process equipment without disrupting normal
process operations.
- To provide a connection into Process equipment that has been depressured but which
is impractical to prepare for "hot work." An example would be connections into long
underground pipelines.
- To provide a connection into a pipeline for inserting a plugging or stoppling device
to isolate equipment or a section of pipe.
Pressure tapping of lines or vessels containing the following is not permitted unless
written approval is obtained from the client, and client approved procedures are followed:
- Compressed air
- Caustic soda
- Oxygen
- Unsaturated hydrocarbons
- Decomposables
Pressure taps will not be used unless it is impractical to employ conventional methods.
Each tap will be evaluated on its own merits considering operating conditions, material
contents, and location. The following requirements will be met:
- Pressure taps will not be made in equipment while it is operating at a temperature
below the metal transition temperatures.
- Special preheat, welding, and postheat procedures may be required for pressure taps
that will be made at low temperatures (below 40 degrees F).
- Pressure taps will not be specified for equipment handling amine (MEA and DEA) or
caustic, if operating conditions would require stress relief.
- Pressure taps will not be specified for equipment or lines containing flammables
below atmospheric pressure, or containing a mixture within the flammable range and
operating at any pressure.
- Pressure taps will be avoided or special precautions specified when air hardening
alloys are involved.
- Pressure tapping of equipment containing hydrogen is permissible, provided the
equipment has not operated above the Nelson curve limits.
- When equipment containing hydrogen sulfide or other toxic materials is to be
pressure tapped, special safety precautions for these materials will be specified.
- If equipment handling ethylene, butadiene, or acetylene is to be pressure tapped,
special precautions must be taken to maintain circulation and prevent overheating and
thermal decomposition (with possible explosion) of the contents.
Do not pressure tap pressurized piping or pressure vessels at locations where fluid flow
does not exist.
Pressure tapping of storage tanks will not be specified, except at locations on the shell
where the liquid level can be maintained at least 3 feet above the highest point of welding
during welding operations.
Do not pressure tap equipment upstream of rotating machinery, unless facilities exist
(such as strainers) that will prevent cuttings and droppings from reaching the machinery.
Bolt-on connections will be used for pressure tapping cast iron equipment.
Pressure tapping of reinforced concrete pressure piping (or other internally lined
equipment) is allowed; however, special tapping materials, equipment, and techniques are
required.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2301
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 6 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TIE-IN PRACTICES - GENERAL DESIGN

Design of pressure tap connections will be in accordance with the applicable Codes and
Standards.
Locate pressure tap connections according to the following:
- Allow sufficient clearance to install connections and operate the tapping or plugging
equipment.
- Whenever possible, locate connections so welding is performed at least 2 feet from
flanges, threaded connections, and riveted joints. This should prevent leaks from
developing in those joints.
- Locate connections so that no welding is required within 2 inches of an existing weld.
The nozzle length must be determined for the particular tapping machine that will be used
in order to ensure a complete cut through the equipment wall. In addition, for flanged
nozzles, the length should be adequate to permit removal of flange bolts. When
practicable, the face-to-center line dimension of flanged nozzles for perpendicular
connections to pipeline should be the same as the corresponding dimensions for a welding
tee, and welding neck flange of the same size and rating as the tapped line.
Connections will be the reinforced type using 1 of the following:
- Pressure tap connections for size-to-size connections will be a full encirclement
saddle (3-inch minimum width and a minimum thickness of either 1/4 of an inch or
the header wall thickness, whichever is greater).
- Pressure tap connections for other than size-to-size will be 1 of the following:
a) Integrally reinforced welding outlet fitting (fully welded).
b) Reinforcing pad (3-inch minimum width and a minimum thickness of either 1/4
of an inch or the header wall thickness, whichever is greater).
c) Full encirclement, weld-on saddles (3-inch minimum width and a minimum
thickness of either 1/4 of an inch or the header wall thickness, whichever is
greater).
d) Full encirclement, bolt-on saddles where attachment by welding is not permitted.
- Pressure tapping connections for cast iron pipelines will be full encirclement, bolt-on
saddle.
- Stoppling connections will be full encirclement type, fitting equal to T. D.
Williamson's stopple fitting.
Connections will be designed to prevent buckling of the surface being tapped, due to
application of test pressure to the inside of the branch connection. An acceptable method
for calculating the buckling pressures in externally loaded cylinders is given in R. J.
Roark's Formulas For Stress And Strain, Fourth Edition, Page 54, Item S(34).
The minimum pressure tapping nozzle and valve size specified will be 1 inch NPS.
Heating or purging of the tapping or stoppling connection will be specified, if the
equipment contents will be solid at ambient temperatures.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2301
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 7 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TIE-IN PRACTICES - GENERAL DESIGN

BOLT-ON
CONNECTIONS
When welding or other hot work is not allowed, pressure taps using bolt-on connections
will be considered.
When bolt-on saddles are used to pressure tap equipment within limits or in fire
hazardous areas, a fireproof gasket will be specified.

VALVES
Valves must have clear, full round openings at least 1/8 of an inch greater in diameter
than the specified drill or cutter OD. Valves will be inspected for sufficient clearance of
cutter prior to tapping.
Regular-port (not tilted-port or venturi-port) gate valve with the same NPS and rating as
the branch connection will be specified, except as follows:
- Ball valves may be used, if port opening and material specifications are adequate.
- Corporate plug cocks (3/4 of an inch NPS) may be used in water service, if the line
being tapped is cast iron or steel, Schedule 40, and is 4 inch NPS or larger.
- If maximum drill diameter is required for valves size 2-inch NPS and smaller,
full-port valves equal to Smith Valve No. 88 (threaded or socketweld).
- Flanged full-port valves will be either API 600 pattern (available in 1- 1/2 inch and
2-inch sizes) or forged body (available in any size as a special order); check
availability with the Material Engineer.
For valve sizes 2 inch NPS and smaller (other than full-port type), it may be necessary to
use a drill diameter 1 size smaller than that specified in order to clear the valve seat rings.
This decision must be made in the field after the valve has been selected, since inside
dimensions of the smaller valves vary widely with manufacturer and style.

TESTING
The hot tapping or stoppling connections, reinforcing pad, valve, machine, and joints will
be pressure tested prior to tapping the line.
Hydrostatic test shall be specified for equipment operating between 40 and 200 degrees F,
unless other special conditions require a different test medium. Air, nitrogen, or another
inert gas shall be specified for other temperatures.
Test pressure for the valve, nozzles, and reinforcing pad (if required) will be as follows:
- For tanks, test pressure will be 40 psi.
- For piping and pressure vessels, test pressure will be calculated in accordance with
the applicable code and will be based on the most severe combination of design
pressure and temperature (not the operating conditions), since operating conditions
may change from time to time.

REFERENCES
Roark, R.J. Formulas For Stress And Strain. Fourth Edition. Item S(34): 54.
Piping Engineering
Form 000.250.F0300: FSR (Field Service Request)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2301
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 8 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

TIE-IN PRACTICES - GENERAL DESIGN

Piping Engineering
Form 000.250.F4101: Piping Tie-In List
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2340: Tie-In List Instructions And Sample Forms

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Tie-In Examples

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2340
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

TIE-IN LIST AND FIELD REQUEST FORM INSTRUCTIONS AND SAMPLE FORMS

PURPOSE
This practice provides information on Form 000.250.F4101: Piping Tie-In List, and Form
000.250.F0300: FSR (Field Service Request). Instructions for both forms are included. Use
this practice directly with Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2301: Tie-In Practices -
General Design.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
RESPONSIBILITY
FORM INSTRUCTIONS
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice is to be used as a guide for completing Form 000.250.F4101 and
Form 000.250.F0300.

RESPONSIBILITY
The Lead Piping Engineer will be responsible for the use of the tie-in forms.

FORM INSTRUCTIONS

Form 000.250.F0300:
Fsr (Field Service
Request)
Refer to Attachment 01. This form is to be initiated by the Piping Engineer as a request for
service for data from the field.

Form 000.250.F4101:
Piping Tie-In List
Refer to Attachment 02. This form is to be completed as follows:

Header Section
Fill in the title area with the originator's (BY) initials, Checker's (CHK) initials, contract
number, unit and area numbers, sheet number, revision, and date.

Revision Section
Provide revision number indicating when the individual tie-in was added or last revised.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2340
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

TIE-IN LIST AND FIELD REQUEST FORM INSTRUCTIONS AND SAMPLE FORMS

Drawing Reference
Section
Provide Fluor Daniel tie-in number (and Client tie-in number, if required).
Provide Piping line number, sheet number, and pipe size.
Provide Piping plan drawing number on which the tie-in appears.
Provide P&ID number and drawing section where the tie-in appears.

Planning Section
Tie-in line service.
Provide measured wall thickness of the existing pipe. If equipment, list equipment
number and put equipment name or other designator in remarks.
Provide tie-in size and facing; for example, 4"-300RF.
Indicate the material status. (Is the material ready for installation?)
Indicate whether Fluor Daniel or the Client will perform the tie-in.
Indicate how the line will be prepared for making the tie-in; for example, blinding,
purging, and cleaning.
Indicate process and Client approvals.
Indicate start and finish dates of shutdown or shutdown phase period.
Indicate if a hot tap is required. Yes or No.
Indicate if Form 000.250.F0300 was generated. Yes or No.
Indicate date when the tie-in isometric went AFC.

Construction Section
Indicate date when tie-in is complete.
Indicate date when inspection and hydrotest are complete.

Remarks Section
Any pertinent comment regarding a tie-in.

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2301: Tie-In Practices - General Design

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Form 000.250.F0300: FSR (Field Service Request)
Attachment 02:
Form 000.250.F4101: Piping Tie-In List

Piping Engineering
 I I I I I I I I I
01 I I
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 1 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

PURPOSE
This practice provides guidelines for overall storm drainage design for a project site and
applies to projects being performed by the Civil Discipline that require storm drainage design.
Information contained herein should be used by the Civil Engineer as a guide. Many design
criteria, data, charts are available in text books, handbooks, manuals, but some of them are
shown here. The Design Engineer should stay up to date on materials, specifications, and
design criteria.
Each project will have its own set of situations to be analyzed and addressed with the best
engineering concept. Good engineering judgment and most economical solutions should be
utilized.
For complicated projects, obtain appropriate reference publication and design storm drainage
system as specified in the publication. For very large projects, computer programs are
available where time and cost saving is justified. Even for smaller systems, simple computer
programs are available which provide quick and accurate results.

SCOPE
This practice utilizes many design criteria, data, charts, textbooks, handbooks, and manuals
available for storm drainage design.
This practice contains types of commonly used hydrology analysis, hydrology design criteria,
the rational method to determine storm water runoff from a drainage area, hydraulic design of
open channel and closed storm sewers, storage basins, and design of culverts.

APPLICATION
Each engineer or designer performing storm drainage design should utilize this guideline on
each project. It is the overall responsibility of the Lead Engineer to ensure that this practice is
used for storm drainage design on projects.

GENERAL
CONSIDERATIONS
Comprehensive storm drainage design includes more than determination of runoff quantities
and the layout of a collection or conveyance system to dispose of the runoff. Integral to the
design is the consideration of erosion control and its impact on adjacent properties. The
design of the storm drainage system should be prepared in conjunction with the grading design
since the grading directly influences the type and design of drainage system employed. It is
necessary that the drainage philosophy be established before the grading design is prepared.
The impact of increased/decreased runoff from the project site to adjacent properties must be
considered. Further development within the watershed must also be considered. Stormwater
management is integral to the drainage system design. It is becoming more commonplace for
local/state authorities to require stormwater management programs in the form of
retention/detention ponds. The rate of runoff is frequently controlled by statute.

Implementation Of

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 2 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

Storm Drainage
Practice
Implementation of storm drainage practice includes the following:
Data collection
Define existing watershed
Define/develop drainage philosophy for site
Develop proposed layout of system
Prepare calculations for system
Design stormwater management facilities, if required

Data Collection
Review local/state statutes.
- Erosion Control
- Stormwater Management
Establish/determine requirements for permit applications.
- Plan Requirements
- Calculations
Obtain most recent topographic plans of watershed.
- Use USGS to establish general location and define total watershed.
- Use city/county topographic plans for preliminary design in absence of more accurate
data.
- Obtain topographic survey prepared at suitable accuracy for final design.
Obtain rainfall data.
- Obtain latest rainfall data from appropriate governmental agency (weather bureau).

Define Existing
Watershed
Delineate watersheds on topographic plans.
Calculate existing runoff (Q10, Q25, Q50, and Q100) as required.
- Onto site
- From site

Define/Develop
Design Philosophy
For Site
Consider method of collecting runoff.
- Sheet flow versus series of drainage inlets
- Ditches versus underground piping system
Establish design criteria.

Develop Proposed
Layout Of System
Prepare conceptual grading and drainage plan.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 3 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

Delineate drainage area for each inlet or section of ditch.

Note!!! For conceptual design, space inlets based on 1 inlet per 10,000 sf.

Prepare Calculations
For System
Design collection system for design storm frequency.
Refine grading plans and adjust layout of storm drainage.
- Check ponding at inlets. Check capacity of grates.
- Consider special inlets with high capacity grates.
- Check ditch flow for depth and velocity. Consider need for erosion netting, sod, or
rip rap/energy dissipaters. Use available charts for design of open channels.
- Check pipe flow for cleansing/scouring velocity and depth of flow.
- Determine inlet and outlet losses for manholes and culverts.
Pay special attention to details for proper drainage at the following:
- Intersections of roadways
- Truck docks
- Building entrances
- Rail docks/yards
- Pedestrian crossings
- Roof drainage discharge points
- Parking lots

Design Stormwater
Management Facilities
Code search
- Check state/local/federal requirements.
Prepare calculations/drawings for the following:
- Erosion control
- Retention/detention basins
- Outflow structures
- Emergency spillways
- Earth dams

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 4 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

HYDROLOGY
ANALYSIS

Technical Release 55
(TR-55)
Technical Release 55, Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds, presents simplified procedures
to calculate storm runoff volume, peak rate of discharge, hydrographs, and storage volumes
required for floodwater reservoirs. These procedures are applicable in small watersheds,
especially urbanizing watersheds, in the United States.
The model described in TR-55 begins with a rainfall amount uniformly imposed on the
watershed over a specified time distribution. Mass rainfall is converted to mass runoff by
using a runoff CN (curve number). CN is based on soils, plant cover, amount of impervious
areas, interception, and surface storage. Runoff is then transformed into a hydrograph by
using unit hydrograph theory and routing procedures that depend on runoff travel time through
segments of the watershed.
Use peak discharge method for up to 2,000 acres of drainage area. Use tabular method for up
to 20 square miles of drainage area.
In TR-20, the use of TC (Time of Concentration) permits this method for any size watershed
within the scope of the curves or tables, while in TR-55, the procedure is limited to a
homogeneous watershed. The approximate storage routing curves are generalizations derived
from TR-20 routings.
Use TR-20 if the watershed is very complex or a higher degree of accuracy is required.
Use TR-20 if TT (travel time) is greater than 3 hours and time of concentration TC is greater
than 2 hours and a drainage area of individual subareas differ by a factor of 5 or more.
Refer to Civil Engineering software, quick TR-55, and TR-20 for computer application.

Synthetic Unit
Hydrograph Method
(Chapter 16, Pages
16-1 To 16-26)
Over the past 2 decades, the federal, state, county, and local agencies have made numerous
hydrologic investigations of drainage basins using synthetic unit hydrograph methodology.
The synthetic unit hydrograph method should be used on larger drainage areas.

Rational Method
The rational method is 1 of the most widely used techniques for estimating peak runoffs, and
is applicable to most of the drainage problems encountered on Fluor Daniel projects.
The rational formula is Q = CIA
where
Q = Peak runoff, cfs
C = Coefficient of runoff, the rate of direct runoff to rainfall

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 5 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

I = Rainfall intensity, inches per hour, corresponding to the time of

concentration
A = Tributary area, acres
The rational method is commonly used for determining peak discharge from relatively small
drainage areas up to 200 acres.

HYDROLOGY
DESIGN CRITERIA
Normally, design for a storm frequency of 10 years for projects, unless otherwise specified by
the client.
Check for storm frequency of 50 years to estimate the consequences of flooding the site.
For major structures such as culvert under public highway, use a storm frequency of 50 years.
Design major flood control channels and major lift stations for a storm frequency of 100 years.
Stormwater runoff from tank farms is normally not included in the design. Stormwater is
impounded within the dikes and released after the peak stormwater runoff has passed.
Design containment storage within containment areas for a storm frequency of 10 years,
24-hour storm for projects, unless otherwise specified by the client.
Ponding at inlets should be less than 3 inches for a frequency of 25 years storm.

RATIONAL
METHOD

Rational Formula
The rational formula is Q = CIA. On a topographic plan of the drainage area, draw the
drainage system and block off the subareas draining into the system.
Determine A, the area of each subarea in acres.

Coefficient Of Runoff
The coefficient of runoff is intended to account for the many factors which influence peak
flow rate. The coefficient of runoff primarily depends on the rainfall intensity, soil type and
cover, percentage of impervious area, and antecedent moisture condition.
Determine the coefficient of runoff C, for appropriate class of ground surface from the
following table. If more than 1 class of ground surfaces fall in 1 tributary drainage area, use a
composite coefficient of runoff value.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 6 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

Coefficient of Runoff C
Roofs 1.00
Pavements
Concrete 1.00
Asphalt 1.00
Oiled Compacted Soil 0.80
Compacted Gravel 0.70
Compacted Impervious Soil 0.60
Natural Bare Soil 0.60
Uncompacted Gravel 0.50
Compacted Sand Soil 0.40
Natural Soil, Grass Cover 0.40
Uncompacted Soil 0.20
Lawns 0.20
Composite coefficient of runoff C:
A1C1 + A2C2 + A3C3 + −−−−AnCn
A1 + A2 + A3 + An
where
A1 A2 A3 ---- An= Areas in acres of different class of surfaces
C1 C2 C3 ---- Cn = Corresponding coefficient of runoff

Time Of
Concentration
If rain were to fall continuously at a constant rate and be uniformly distributed over an
impervious surface, the rate of runoff from that surface would reach a maximum rate
equivalent to the rate of rainfall. The time required to reach the maximum or equilibrium
runoff rate is defined as the time of concentration.
The time of concentration depends upon the length of the flow path, the slope, soil cover, and
the type of development.
Determine the initial time of concentration using the nomograph on Attachment 01.
Use a minimum time of concentration of 5 minutes for paved areas and a minimum time of
concentration of 10 minutes for unpaved areas.

Precipitation
The various precipitation amounts during specified time periods at recording stations are
analyzed using common models of probability distributions.
A number of alternative statistical distributions such as Log Pearson Type III, Pearson Type
III, Two-Parameter Lognormal, Three-Parameter Lognormal, and Weibull, Type I, Extreme
Value are used in flood hazard analysis.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 7 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

Intensity Duration
Curves
Use the intensity duration curves available from federal, state, county or local agencies for the
project location. If such curves are not available, construct these curves using Weather
Bureau Technical Paper Number 40 (Continental United States); 42 (Puerto Rico and Virginia
Islands); 43 (Hawaiian Islands); 47 and 52 (Alaska); or NOAA Atlas, Precipitation -
Frequency Atlas of the United States, published by the National Weather Service.
For constructing the curves, given only 1 or 2 points, use the following conversion factors
based on 30 minutes as 1.00:

Duration in Duration in
Minutes Factor Minutes Factor
5 2.22 40 0.80
10 1.71 50 0.70
15 1.44 60 0.60
20 1.25 90 0.50
30 1.00 120 0.40

To go from 1 curve to another, use the following factors based on the 50 year maximum
rainfall as 1.000:

1 year 0.428 25 years 0.898

2 years 0.455 50 years 1.000
5 years 0.659 100 years 1.108
10 years 0.762

Rainfall intensity duration curves for more than 100 years can be constructed using rainfall
data for periods of 2, 5, 10, 25, 50, and 100 years; and time periods of 20 minutes, 60 minutes,
2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours; and 24 hours using the following formula:
_ _
Xji = Xi + Kj Si Xi
where
j = Return period in years
i = Specific storm duration in minutes, hours or days
Xji = Precipitation in inches for return period j and duration i
Xi = Mean maximum annual storm for duration i
Kj = Frequency factor (in standard deviations) for a return period of j years
Si = Standard deviation of maximum annual storm for duration i
For more detailed procedures using this formula, refer to "Analysis of Data," Pages 7 to 25 of
Rainfall Depth Duration Frequency for California, Department of Water Resources, State of
California, November 1982.
A sample set of curves is shown in the sample problems in this practice.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 8 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

Using the initial time of concentration, determine "I" intensity of rainfall in inches per hour
from the intensity duration curve for the plant's geographical location using the proper yearly
rainfall frequency.
Compute Q = CIA.
Refer to sample problems in this practice.

Travel Time
Determine the size of the channel or pipe required to carry Q on the slope of the drain.
Determine the velocity of flow.
Measure the length of flow to the point of inflow of the next subarea downstream. Compute
the time of flow for this reach and add it to the initial time of concentration for the first area to

Calculate Q for second subarea, using the new time of concentration and continue in similar
fashion until a junction with a lateral channel is reached.
Start at the upper end of the lateral and carry its Q to the junction with the main channel.

Storm Runoff At
Junction
Compute the Q at the junction.

Tributary area with longer Tributary area with shorter

time of concentration time of concentration
QA QB
TA TB
IA IB

Peak Q cfs (cubic feet per second), time of concentration in minutes, rainfall intensity in
inches/hour.
If TA = TB then Qp = QA + QB
TP = TA = TB

If QA > QB then Qp = QA + QB IA
IB
TP = TA

If QA< QB then Qp = QB + QA IB
IA
TP = TB
Qp = Peak Q at junction
Tp = Peak time of concentration at junction
If more than 2 tributary areas are contributing at 1 junction, combine 2 areas at a time and
proceed similarly until tributary areas are combined.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 9 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

DITCHES AND
CHANNELS

Capacity
The capacity of ditches and channels will be calculated using the Manning's equation:

Q = 1.486 2/3 1/2

n r s A
where:
Q = Capacity in cfs
A = Cross sectional area of flow in square feet
Area of flow
r = Hydraulic radius = in feet
Wetted perimeter
s = Slope of energy grade line in foot per foot
n = Roughness coefficient
Values of roughness coefficient n for ditches and channels
Lined ditches and channels
n = 0.014 for poured concrete
n = 0.016 for shotcrete (gunite)
n = 0.014 for asphalt
n = 0.035 for medium weight rip rap
n = 0.025 for crushed rock
n = 0.030 for grass
Unlined ditches and channels
n = 0.020 for very fine sand, silt or loam
n = 0.025 for sand and gravel
n = 0.030 for coarse gravel
Values of n for other surfaces can be found in Session 7, Pages 7-17 of King and Brater,
Handbook of Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York; and Chapter 5, Pages 110
to 113 of Chow, Ven Te, Open-Channel Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New
York, 1959.
Ditches and channels should be designed with the top of the walls at or below the adjacent
ground to allow interception of surface flows.
The minimum velocity of flow should be 2.0 feet per second in order to prevent the settling of
solids, if there is possibility of solids flowing in the ditches and channels.
Velocities in unlined ditches and channels must be limited to prevent cutting or erosion of the
ditch or channel bottom or sides. Permissible channel velocities for various types of soil can
be found in Session 7, Pages 7-19 of King and Brater, Handbook of Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill
Book Company, New York; and Chapter 7, Page 165 of Chow, Ven Te, Open-Channel
Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, 1959. If the mean velocity exceeds
that permissible for that particular kind of soil, the channel should be protected with some type
of lining.
Freeboard or additional wall heights are to be added above the calculated water surface.
For ditches and channels with capacities to 50 cfs, add 1.0 feet.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 10 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

For ditches and channels with capacities from 50 cfs to 200 cfs, add 1.5 feet.
For ditches and channels with more than 200 cfs capacities, refer to Chapter 7, Pages 159 and
160, of Chow, Ven Te, Open-Channel Hydraulics, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York,
1959.
For curved alignments, add freeboards above the superelevated water surface.
It is desirable to provide a depth greater than critical. If not possible, an energy dissipator
may be required at the end of the ditch section.

Linings
Ditches and channels with a flow velocity that exceeds permissible velocity will be lined.
Lining of ditches and channels will be poured concrete, gunite, asphalt, crushed rock, riprap,
or other type of slope protection.
For design procedure of riprap design, refer to Chapter 3, Pages III-137 to III-150 of Virginia
Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, Virginia Department of Conservation and
Recreation Division of Soil and Water Conservation, 1980.

GRAVITY STORM
SEWER SYSTEM

Capacity
The capacity of a gravity storm sewer system will be calculated using the Manning's equation.
Refer to sections covering Ditches and Channels in this practice.
Closed storm sewers should be deigned to flow full for the design storm, unless otherwise
specified by the Client.
The gravity storm sewer system will be designed in such a manner that at the maximum design
flow, the water level in the most remote catch basin of the system or subsystem is a minimum
of 6 inches below top of grating. The controlling elevation at a junction of a main, lateral, or
sublateral for calculating the hydraulic gradeline upstream will be the hydraulic grade
elevation of the main or lateral at the point or the soffit elevation of the pipe, whichever is
greater.
Values of Manning's n for closed sewers are as follows:
Pipe Material n
Polyvinyl chloride pipe 0.010
Steel 0.011
Ductile iron 0.013
Cast iron 0.013
Cement lined pipe 0.015
Concrete pipe 0.013
Vitrified clay pipe 0.013
Fiberglass reinforced plastic 0.010
Corrugated metal pipe 0.024

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 11 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

The preferred slope for sewer lines will be approximately 0.01 foot (1/8 of an inch) per foot.
The minimum slope will be approximately 0.005 foot (1/16 of an inch) per foot but may be
decreased, if necessary, provided the required minimum velocity is maintained to avoid
disposition of solids.
The minimum pipe size for branch lines will be 4-inch diameter and 8-inch diameter for catch
basin outlet pipes.
The minimum velocity for closed storm sewers should be 2.0 feet per second to prevent the
settling of solids.
For concrete sewers where high velocity flow is continuous and grit erosion is expected to be
a problem, use a maximum velocity of about 10 feet per second.
The alignment chart in Attachment 02 can be used for the solution of Manning's equation for
circular pipes flowing full.
The graph in Attachment 03 is used for the solution of problems involving sewers flowing
only partly filled. The following procedure is used for finding the hydraulic elements of the
pipes.
Compute the ratio of q/Q for each line.
Find the ratio of h/D and v/V.
From the ratio h/D, calculate h.
From the ratio v/V, calculate v.
q = Actual flow, cfs
Q = Quantity if pipe flowing full, cfs
h = Actual depth of flow, feet
D = Inside diameter of pipe, feet
v = Actual velocity, fps (feet per second)
V = Velocity if pipe were flowing full, fps

Losses
Manhole losses will be calculated from the following:
 2  2
hmh = 0.05  v  to0.75  v 
 
2g  2g 
depending upon the inlet and outlet pipe size, elevation and design.
Bend losses will be calculated from the following equations:
 2
hb = Kb  v 
 2g 
where

Kb = 2.0  δ 
 90 
where δ = Central angle of bend in degrees.
Bend losses should be included for closed conduits; those flowing partially full as well as
those flowing full.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 12 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

CULVERTS
Drainage culverts are normally corrugated metal pipe, reinforced concrete pipe, or reinforced
concrete box as necessary to meet the requirements for stormwater drainage flow, truck loads,
and depth of fill above the culvert.
Culverts under roads will be designed to support the earth pressures on the culvert and the
maximum wheel load that will be imposed over it through its design life, plus the applicable
impact, as defined in AASHTO (American Association of State Highway and Traffic
Officials) Standard specifications for Highway Bridges. In the absence of construction or
maintenance vehicles with a greater wheel load, the culvert will be designed to support a
wheel load of 16,000 pounds (HS-20 loading). Minimum cover over culverts will be
12-inches for circular corrugated metal pipe, and 18-inches for reinforced concrete pipe, and
corrugated metal pipe arches.
The minimum size of culvert will be 12-inch diameter for lengths of 30 feet or less and
18-inch diameter for lengths over 30 feet.
Where installation of multiple culverts is required, the minimum clear distance between pipes
will be as follows:

Pipe Diameter Minimum Clear Distance

12 inch to 24 inch 12 inches
27 inch to 72 inch 1/2 diameter
78 inch to 120 inch 36 inches
Culverts will have a slope that will provide a minimum velocity of 2.0 fps. Culverts will be
sized to pass the 10-year storm flow with unsubmerged inlet. However, the culvert will be
checked for the 50-year storm with ponding at the entrance not to exceed the top of the road
subgrade.
In designing any culvert larger than a 36-inch diameter single-barrel pipe (for example, arch
and oval pipe, multiple-barrel culverts, concrete box), design features such as headwalls,
endwalls, transition structures, and energy dissipators will be selected strictly on the basis of
culvert performance and be economically justified.
Procedure for determining culvert size:
List the design data. Refer to sample problems in this practice.
Estimate first trial size.
Find headwater depth.
Inlet Control: Using Attachments 04, 05, or 06, determine HW/D using the appropriate
entrance scale. Convert HW/D to HW (headwater) by multiplying by D (pipe diameter) in
feet.
Outlet Control: Using Attachment 07, 08, or 09, determine H (head) in feet using the
appropriate value for k(e) as given in the following table:

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 13 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

Entrance Loss Coefficients

Coefficient
Type of Entrance k(e)
Concrete Pipe
Projecting from fill, socket end (groove end) 0.2
Projecting from fill, square cut end 0.5
Headwall or beadwall and wingwalls
Socket end of pipe (groove end) 0.2
Square end 0.5
Round radius (radius - 1/2 D) 0.2
End section conforming to fill slope 0.5
Corrugated Metal Pipe
Projecting from fill (no beadwall) 0.9
Headwall or beadwall and wingwalls, square edge 0.5
Beveled to conform to fill slope 0.7
Flared end section (available from manufacturer) 0.5
Beadwall, rounded edge 0.1

Solve for HW in the following equation:

HW = H + ho − SoL
For TW (tailwater) elevation equal to or greater than the top of the culvert at the outlet, set ho
equal to TW.
For TW elevation less than the top of the culvert at the outlet, use the following equation or
TW, whichever is greater, where dc, the critical depth in feet, is determined from Attachment
10 or 11.

ho = dc + D
2
Compare the headwaters for both inlet and outlet control. The higher headwater governs and
indicates the flow existing under the given conditions for the trial size selected.
Select culvert size which keeps headwater depth below allowable limit.

STORMWATER
DETENTION AND
RETENTION
BASINS

Flood Control
Detention Basin
The primary function of the flood control detention basin is to store the storm runoff during
peak flood and reduce the peak discharge.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 14 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

The flood control detention basin is generally the least expensive and most reliable measure.
It can be designed to fit a wide variety of sites and can accommodate multiple outlet spillways
to control multifrequency outflow.
Measures other than flood control detention basins may be preferred in some locations. Any
device selected, however, should be assessed as to its function, maintenance needs, and
impact.
Design flood control detention basins for 50 years storm frequency.
For flood control detention basin storage volume requirement calculations procedure, for up to
2,000 acres of drainage area, refer to Chapter 6 Storage Volume for Detention Basins, Pages
6-1 to 6-11 of Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds, TR-55, United States Department of
Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, January 1975, or use local drainage manual, if
available.

Stormwater Retention
Basin
Regulations require management of storm runoff from industrial plant sites so as not to
discharge toxic or hazardous pollutants to receiving waters.
The purpose of stormwater retention basins is to store the stormwater during periods of storm
runoff and release it at a lower rate to the treatment process.
Retention pond and storage basin capacities will be determined based on the total accumulated
stormwater runoff from the design storm frequency for duration of 24 hours. A minimum
freeboard of 12 inches will be provided on top of water surface.
Lining for ponds and basins will be as recommended in the Geotechnical Investigation Report
or as required by process and environmental criteria for the project.

Sediment Control
Basin
Erosion and sediment control measures are required during construction to prevent surface
storm water runoff pollution into stream channels and water bodies.
The sediment control basin is required to collect and store sediment or debris from affected
areas.
The sediment control basin collects and holds stormwater runoff to allow suspended sediment
to settle out.
Design sediment control basins for 10-year storm frequency, unless regulatory agencies dictate
otherwise.
The surface area of the sediment basin at the height of the rim of the riser pipe is calculated by
using the following formula:
KQ
A=
Vs

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 15 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

where
A = Basin surface area square feet
Q = Storm runoff cfs
K = 1.2
Vs = 0.00096 ft/sec settling velocity for a 0.02 millimeter particle size.
Particles greater than or equal to the 0.02 millimeter particle size are to be retained in the
basin.
The sediment storage volume is 75 cu yd per acre of disturbed construction area. The settling
zone will be a minimum of 2 feet deep.
The combined capacities of the riser pipe and spillway are designed to be sufficient to pass the
peak rate of storm runoff of a 10-year storm frequency.
The sediment control basin will need to be periodically cleaned out to restore the basin to its
original designed volume capacity.
A concentric antivortex device and trash rack should be provided on top of the riser pipe.
A concrete base of sufficient weight to prevent flotation of the riser is attached to the riser
pipe with a watertight connection.
Stone riprap protection should be provided on the spillway to reduce erosion of the spillway
dike.
A protection fence should be provided around the sediment control basin for safety.
The sediment control basin may be used after construction as a permanent stormwater
management basin.
For sediment control basin design requirements and procedure, refer to Chapter 3, Pages
III-59 to III-88 of Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook, Virginia Department of
Conservation and Recreation Division of Soil and Water Conservation, 1980.

STORM DRAINAGE
SOFTWARE
(AVAILABLE
IN IRVINE)
1. Advanced Designer Series
Civil Soft
Storm Plus
Storm Drain Analysis Program
Storm Plus is based on the original computer program F0515P and was developed in
April 1979. This program was written for use by the Los Angeles County Flood Control
District or by its contractors on district projects.
This program computes and plots uniform and nonuniform steady flow water surface
profiles and pressure gradients in open channels or closed conduits with irregular or
regular sections. The flow in a system may alternate between super critical, subcritical, or
pressure flow in any sequence. The program will also analyze natural river channels

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 16 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

although the principle use of the program is intended for determining profiles in improved
Flood Control Systems.
2. Haestad Methods
Civil Engineering Software
HEC-1
Flood Hydrograph Package
This computer program was developed by HEC (The Hydrologic Engineering Center),
Corp of Engineers, Department of the Army.
The HEC-1 model is designed to simulate the surface runoff response of a river basin to
precipitation by representing the basin as an interconnected system of hydrologic and
hydraulic components.
Each component models an aspect of the precipitation runoff process with a portion of the
basin, commonly referred to as a subbasin. A component may represent a surface runoff
entity, a stream channel, or a reservoir. The result of the modeling process is the
computation of stream flow hydrographs at desired locations in the river basin.
HEC-1 has several major capabilities which are used in the development of a watershed
simulation model and the analysis of flood control measures. The capabilities are the
following:
Automatic estimation of unit graph, interception/infiltration, and streamflow routing
parameters.
Simulation of complex river basin runoff and streamflow.
River basin simulation using a precipitation depth versus area function.
Computation of modified frequency curves and expected annual damages.
Simulation of flow through a reservoir and spillway for dam safety analysis.
Simulation of dam breach hydrographs.
Optimization of flood control system components.
3. Haestad Methods
Civil Engineering Software
HEC-2
Water Surface Profiles
This computer program was developed by HEC, Corps of Engineers, Department of the
Army.
The HEC-2 computer program is intended for calculating water surface profiles for
steady, gradually varied flow in natural or manmade channels. Both subcritical and
supercritical flow profiles can be calculated. The effect of various obstructions such as
bridges, culverts, weirs, and structures in the flood plain may be considered in the
computations. The program is also designed for application in flood plain management
and flood insurance studies to evaluate floodway encroachments and to designate flood
hazard zones. Also, capabilities are available for assessing the effect of channel
improvements and levels on water surface profiles.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 17 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

4. Haestad Methods
Civil Engineering Software
HEC-Plot
Plotting Program for HEC-1 and HEC-2
HEC-Plot is an enhanced version of the Plot 2 Program of the US Army Corps of
Engineers, written by HEC.
Computer Program HEC-Plot was developed to provide a quick and simple graphical
display of cross section data and computed results from HEC-1 and HEC-2. The
HEC-Plot Program provides the capability to plot cross section data, including the
changes to the section caused by the HEC-2 options that modify section data. HEC-2
profiles and rating curves of the output variables, available on HAESTAD 95 or TAPE
95, can be plotted. HEC-Plot also plots HEC-1 output hydrographs.
5. Haestad Methods
Civil Engineering Software
Quick HEC-12
Drop Inlet Design and Analysis
Quick HEC-12 handles the following inlet types:
Curb
Grate
Combination curb and grate
4-inch bridge Scupper
Slotted Drain
Grate in trapezoidal ditch
Quick HEC-12 uses the manual procedure outlined by the Federal Highway
Administration, Hydraulic Engineering circular Number 12, Drainage of Highway
pavements, March, 1984.
6. Haestad Methods
Civil Engineering Software
POND-2
Detention Pond Design and Analysis
POND-2 Computer Program is for detention pond design. It estimates detention storage
requirements, computes a volume rating table for any pond configuration, routes
hydrographs for different return frequencies through alternative ponds and plots the
resulting inflow and outflow hydrographs. POND-2 is completely compatible with
LINK-2 and can automatically import inflow hydrographs from QUICK TR-55, TR-20,
and HEC-1 computer files.
7. Haestad Methods
Civil Engineering Software
Quick TR-55
Hydrology for small watersheds
Quick TR-55 Computer Program was developed based on the SCS TR-55 Urban
Hydrology for small watersheds. The program can generate and plot hydrographs,
compute peak discharges, and perform predeveloped and postdeveloped analysis.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 18 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

8. Haestad Methods
Civil Engineering Software
TR-20
Project Formulation Hydrology
The TR-20 Computer Program is a single-event model which computes direct runoff
resulting from any synthetic or natural rainstorm. It develops flood hydrographs from
runoff and routes the flow through steam channels and reservoirs. The following major
Civil Engineering software programs from Haestad Methods are also available:
9. HECWRC
Flood Flow Frequency
10. HMR52
Probable Maximum Storm
11. WSP-2
Water Surface Profiles
12. Hy-4-69
Hydraulics of Bridge Waterways
13. WSPRO (Hy-7)
Bridge Waterways Analysis Model
14. DAMS 2
Structure Site Analysis
15. THYSYS
Culverts Storm Sewer and Inlets
16. SWMM
Storm Water Management Model
17. HEC-6
Scour and Deposition
18. SEDIMOT II
Hydrology and Sedimentology
19. HYDRA
Storm and Sanitary Sewer Analysis Software
PITZER
HYDRA is one of the most practical programs available to analyze storm and sanitary
sewer collection systems. It is structured to work well on both large municipal systems
and small tracks, with or without database files and without or within AutoCAD.
HYDRA allows the designer to generate storm flows by the Rational Method, a modified
SCS Method (Soil Conservation Service) or by continuous simulation. The best method
to use depends upon the situation, available data, and the requirements of the
municipality.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 19 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

REFERENCES
AASHTO (American Association of State Highway and Traffic Officials).
Analysis of Data, Pages 7 to 25 of Rainfall Depth Duration Frequency for California,
Department of Water Resources, State of California, November 1982.
Bureau of Engineering Manual. Part G, Storm Drain Design. City of Los Angeles,
Department of Public Works.
Capacity Charts For the Hydraulic Design of Highway Culverts. Hydraulic Engineering
Circular Number 10. Mar. 1965.
Chow, Ven Te. Handbook of Applied Hydrology. McGraw-Hill Book Company. 1964.
Chow, Ven Te. Open-Channel Hydraulics. McGraw-Hill Book Company. New York. 1959.
Design and Construction of Sanitary and Storm Sewers. American Society of Civil Engineers.
WPCF Manual of Practice Number 9. 1972.
Design Manual. Hydraulic. Los Angeles County Flood District.
Design Manual. Orange County Flood Control District.
Engineering Field Manual. United States Department of Agriculture. SCS. Washington, DC.
1989.
Estimating Probabilities of Extreme Floods: Methods and Recommended Research. National
Research Council. Washington, DC. 1988.
Guide For Sediment Control on Construction Sites in North Carolina. United States
Department of Agriculture. Soil Conservation Service, SCS. North Carolina. 1973.
Guidelines For Determining Flood Flow Frequency. Interagency Advisory Committee on
Water Data, Bulletin #17b of the Hydrology Subcommittee, VA. 1982.
Gumbel, E. J. Statistics of Extremes. Columbia University Press. New York. 1958.
Hydraulic Charts For the Selection of Highway Culverts. Hydraulic Engineering Circular
Number 5. Dec 1965.
Hydraulic Design of Improved Inlets For Culverts. Hydraulic Engineering Circular Number
13. Aug 1972.
Hydrology Manual. Los Angeles County Flood Control District.
Hydrology Manual. Orange County Flood Control District.
Hydrology Manual. Riverside County Flood Control and Water Conservation District.
King and Brater. Handbook of Hydraulics. McGraw-Hill Book Company. New York.
Kite, G. W. Frequency and Risk Analysis in Hydrology. Water Resource Publication.
Littleton, CO. 1977.
Manual For Erosion and Sediment Control in Georgia. Georgia Soil and Water Conservation
Committee. 1975.
Manual of Standards For Erosion and Sediment Control Measures. Association of Bay Area
Governments. Jun 1981.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 20 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

Maryland Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook. United States Department of

Agriculture, SCS. College Park, MD. 1975.
National Engineering Handbook. Drainage of Agricultural Land. United States Department
of Agriculture, SCS. Washington, DC. 1971.
National Engineering Handbook. Hydraulics. United States Department of Agriculture, SCS.
Washington, DC. 1975.
National Engineering Handbook. Hydrology. United States Department of Agriculture. SCS
(Soil Conservation Service). Washington, DC.
NOAA Atlas, Precipitation - Frequency Atlas of the United States, published by the National
Weather Service.
Rainfall Depth Duration Frequency For California. Department of Water Resources. State of
California. Nov 1982.
Urban Hydrology For Small Watersheds. TR-55. United States Department of Agriculture.
Soil Conservation Service. Jan 1975.
Urban Runoff. Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook. United States Department of
Agriculture. Soil Conservation Service, SCS. St. Paul, MN. 1976.
Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook. Virginia Department of Conservation and
Recreation Division of Soil and Water Conservation. 1980.
Water Resources Technical Publication. Research Report Number 24. United States
Department of The Interior, Bureau of Reclamation.
Weather Bureau Technical Paper
Number 40
Number 42
Number 43
Number 47
Number 52

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Overland Flow Time
Attachment 02:
Alignment Chart For Manning Formula For Pipe Flow
Attachment 03:
Relative Velocity And Flow In Circular Pipe For Any Depth Of Flow
Attachment 04:
Headwater Depth For Concrete Pipe Culverts With Inlet Control

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1150
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 21 of 21

FLUOR DANIEL

STORM DRAINAGE

Attachment 05:
Headwater Depth For CM Pipe Culverts With Inlet Control
Attachment 06:
Headwater Depth For CM Pipe Arch Culverts With Inlet Control
Attachment 07:
Head For Concrete Pipe Culverts Flowing Full
Attachment 08:
Head For Standard CM Pipe Culverts Flowing Full
Attachment 09:
Head For Standard CM Pipe Arch Culverts Flowing Full
Attachment 10:
Critical Depth Circular Pipe
Attachment 11:
Critical Depth Standard CM Pipe Arch
Attachment 12:
Form 000.210.F8000: Rational Method Calculation Form
Attachment 13:
Form 000.210.F8001: Peak Q At The Junction Calculation Sheet
Attachment 14:
Form 000.210.F5000: Datasheet - Culvert Design

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1160
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 1 of 10

FLUOR DANIEL

SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

PURPOSE
This practice establishes the parameters of the various components involved in the design of
gravity and force main sanitary sewer systems.
Design of these systems will require compliance with regulations and standards of various
private and public agencies and applicable federal, state, county and city regulations. The
design data, dimensions, regulations and standards will reflect a considerable diversity
between owner and government agencies.
The Civil Engineer must review these various regulations and standards and select the
appropriate ones for the project. This technical practice should be used in conjunction with
textbooks and other publications on the subject, such as those listed in the references. The
design engineer should stay updated on materials, specifications, and design criteria.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
SEWAGE FLOWRATES
GRAVITY SEWER DESIGN
MANHOLES
PUMPING STATIONS
SIPHONS
HYDRAULIC DESIGN
EXAMPLE PROBLEM
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice provides guidelines for the design of sanitary sewers and applies to all projects
and work assignments being performed by Fluor Daniel Civil Discipline. The Lead Civil
Engineer on a project is responsible for the use of these guidelines in designing sanitary sewer
systems.

SEWAGE
FLOWRATES
Domestic sewage quantities normally are to be computed on a contributing population basis,
except as noted in subparagraph d and e on page 3-1 of Hydraulic Design of Sewers.
Subparagraph d (Industrial Waste Flows)
Such industries cannot be computed totally on a population or fixture unit basis.
Industrial waste sewers and sanitary sewers will be designed for the peak industrial flow
as determined for the particular industrial process or activity involved.
Subparagraph e (Fixture Unit Flow) The size of building connections, including those
from theaters, restaurants, chapels, clubs and other such buildings, will, in all cases, be
large enough to discharge the flow computed on a fixture unit basis.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1160
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 2 of 10

FLUOR DANIEL

SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

The population to be used in design depends upon the type of area which the sewer
serves. If the area is entirely residential, the design population is based on full
occupancy. If the area served is entirely industrial, the design population is the greatest
number of employees in the area at any one time.

Average Daily
Per Capita
Sewage quantities for different types of installations are shown on page 3-1 of Hydraulic
Design of Sewers. The average daily flow will be computed by multiplying the resident and
nonresident contribution populations by the appropriate per capita allowances and adding the
two flows.
Nonresidents working 8 hour shifts will be allowed 30 gallons per capita per day.

Flowrate
The average hourly flowrate should be used when designing sewers to serve small areas of the
installation where several buildings or a group of buildings are under consideration and where
the majority of sewage is generated by nonresidents or other short term occupants.
The peak daily or diurnal flowrate is an important factor in sewer design, especially when
minimum velocities are to be provided on a daily basis. The peak diurnal flowrate will be
taken as 1/2 of the extreme peak flowrate.
Extreme flowrates of flow occasionally and must be considered. Sewers will be designed with
adequate capacity to handle extreme peaks flowrates, ratios of extreme peak flowrates at
average flow will be calculated with the use of the following formula:

R = C 0.67
Q
where
R = Ratio of extreme peak flowrate to average
Q = Average daily flow or average hour flowrate in million gallons per
day, gallons per day or gallons per hour
C = Constant 3.8 for MGD, 38.2 for GPD, or 22.5 for GPH

Infiltration And
Inflow
In computing wastewater flows for new sewer design, allowances for groundwater infiltration
will be 500 to 1,000 gallons per day per inch diameter per mile of pipe and will be added to
the peak rate of flow.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1160
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 3 of 10

FLUOR DANIEL

SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

Fixture Unit Flow

The size of building connections will be large enough to discharge the flow computed on a
fixture unit basis. This requirement applies to building connections only and not to the lateral
or other sewers to which they connect.

GRAVITY SEWER
DESIGN
Generally, it is not desirable to design sewers for full flow even at peak rates. Trunk and
interceptor sewers will be designed to flow at depths not exceeding 90 percent of full depth;
lateral and main sewers 80 percent; and building connections, 70 percent. However,
regardless of flow and depth, the minimum sizes to be used are 6 inch for building connections
and 8 inch for all other sewers.
The Manning formula will be used for design of gravity sewers:

V = 1.486 2/3 1/2

n R S
where
V = Velocity in feet per second
n = Coefficient of pipe roughness
R = Hydraulic radius in feet
S = Slope of energy line in feet per foot
Values of n (roughness coefficient) to be used in the formula range from 0.013 to 0.015, with
the lowest n value applying to new or relatively new pipe. Values of n will also depend on
the pipe material. Variation of n with depth of flow has been shown experimentally, and can
be considered in designing sewer to flow partially full.

Velocity
Sewers will be designed to provide a minimum velocity of 2.0 FPS (feet per second) at the
average daily flow, or average hourly flowrate, and minimum velocity of 2.5 to 3.5 FPS at the
peak diurnal flowrate.

Pipe Cover
Adequate cover will be provided for frost protection and against structural damage due to any
superimposed surface loading.

Hydraulic Profile
In most cases where small to medium sized gravity sewers are installed in long runs, it will be
safe to assume uniform flow throughout the entire length of pipe. A hydraulic profile is
recommended showing all the other utilities crossing the sewer line. Sewer plans generally
will be oriented so that the flow in the sewer is from right to left on the sheet and stationing is
upgrade from left to right. Each sewer plan should include a north arrow. Match lines should
be easily identifiable.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1160
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 4 of 10

FLUOR DANIEL

SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

Critical Flow
Gravity sewers will ordinarily be designed to maintain subcritical flow conditions in the pipe
throughout the normal range of design flows. However, there are exceptions in which
supercritical flow may be required and will be justified.

Hydrogen Sulfide
In Sewers
Two of the most important problems occurring in wastewater collection systems are the
corrosion of sewers and appurtenances, and the propagation and emission of odors and toxic
gases. Both of these problems can be attributed in large part to the generation of hydrogen
sulfide (H2S) in sewers. Sewers will be designed hydraulically in accordance with U.S. EPA
(Environmental Protection Agency) guidelines established therein to prevent excessive
generation of hydrogen sulfide.

Corrosion Control
Plastic pipe PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride); HDPE (High Density Polyethylene); ABS
(Acrylonitrile-Butadien-Styrene), fiberglass, and vitrified clay pipe are best suited for
corrosive environments, whereas concrete (including ABS composite), asbestos cement,
ductile iron, and cast iron soil pipe should be avoided unless a special protective lining,
coating or treatment are provided.

MANHOLES
Sanitary sewer manholes will be spaced 300 to 400 feet. When the size is large enough to
permit a man to enter, a spacing of 500 feet may be used. Manholes should be located at the
junctions of sewers and changes in grades, sizes, or alignment. Manholes may be precast
concrete (assembled in the field) cast in place, or brick.

PUMPING
STATIONS
Pumping station and pneumatic ejectors will normally be required to remove waste from areas
which cannot be served hydraulically by gravity sewers. In certain situations, however, a
gravity sewer system can be used, but only at the expense of deep trench excavation. Both
wastewater pumping and gravity flow sewers may be technically feasible and capable of
meeting service requirements, however, they may not be equivalent in economic terms. When
it is not readily apparent which solution would be more economical, the decision to use one or
the other should be based on life cycle cost analysis. Initial capital and construction costs for
pumps, ejectors, structures, force main, plus operation and maintenance costs should be
compared with cost of deep trench excavation or other special construction methods required
for a gravity system. Generally, a gravity sewer system will be justified until its cost exceeds
the cost of a pumped system by 10 percent.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1160
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 5 of 10

FLUOR DANIEL

SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

Pumping Equipment
Pumping equipment used in sanitary sewer systems may be classified into two general types;
centrifugal pumps and pneumatic ejectors. The latter are used only in the smaller installations
where centrifugal pumps, if used, would be too large for the application.
Centrifugal pumps fall into the following three general classifications:
Axial - flow or propeller pumps
Mixed Flow or angle - flow pumps
Radial - flow pumps (commonly referred to as centrifugal pumps)
The classification into which a pump falls usually can be determined by its specific (Ns) at the
point of maximum efficiency.
The specific speed of an impeller may be defined as the speed in rpm (revolution per minute)
at which a geometrically similar impeller would run if it were of such size as to deliver 1 gpm
against 1 foot of head.
The formula for specific speed is as follows:

RPM GPM
Ns =
H 3/4
where H is in feet.

Pump Construction
Most pump casings are made of cast iron. Although for special applications where gritty or
corrosive liquids are involved, other materials sometimes are specified.
Pneumatic ejectors are usually used for lifting sewage from basement of buildings and small
lift stations where their advantage outweigh their low efficiency, which is limited to about 15
percent. Their advantages are the following:
Sewage is completely enclosed an consequently no sewer gases can escape except through
the vent.
Operation is fully automatic and the ejector goes into service only when needed.
The relatively few moving parts in contact with sewage require little attention or
lubrication.
Ejectors are not easily clogged.
The following is an empirical formula for the approximate capacity of air required to operate
an ejector:
Q(H + 34)
V=
250
where
V = volume of free air required in CFM
H = total head in feet
Q = rate of sewage discharge in GPM

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1160
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 6 of 10

FLUOR DANIEL

SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

Datum
All readings for suction lift, suction head, discharge head, and net positive suction head are
taken with reference to the datum which in the case of horizontal shaft, is the elevation of the
pump center line and in the case of vertical shaft pumps is the elevation of the entrance eye of
the suction impeller.

Suction Lift (Hs)

Suction lift exists where the total suction head is below atmospheric pressure. Total suction
lift, as determined on test, is the reading of a liquid manometer at the suction nozzle of the
pump converted to feet of liquid and referenced to datum, minus the velocity head at the point
of gage attachment.

Suction Head (Hs)

Suction head exists, when the total suction head is above atmospheric pressure, as determined
on test, it is the reading of the gage at the suction of the pump converted to head, in feet, at the
point of gage attachment.

Total Discharge
Head (Hd)
Total discharge head is the reading of a pressure gage at the discharge of the pump, converted
to feet of liquid and referred to datum, plus the velocity head at the point of gage attachment.

Total Head (H)

Total Head (H) is sometimes referred to as total dynamic head or TDH. Total head is the
measure of the energy increase per pound of the liquid imparted to it by the pump and is
therefore the algebraic difference between the total discharge head and the total suction head.
Total head as determined on test where suction lift, and, where positive suction head exists,
the total head is the total discharge head minus the total suction head.

NPSH (Net Positive

Suction Head)
The NPSH is the total suction head, in feet of liquid absolute, determined at the suction nozzle
and referred to datum, less the vapor pressure of the liquid in feet absolute.

SIPHONS
The siphon in sewerage practice almost invariably refers to an inverted siphon or depressed
sewer which would stand full even with no flow. Its purpose is to carry the flow under an
obstruction such as stream or depressed highway and to regain as much elevation as possible
after the obstruction has been passed.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1160
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 7 of 10

FLUOR DANIEL

SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

Single And Multiple

Barrel Siphons
It is common practice, at least on large sewers, to construct multiple barrel siphons. The
objective is to provide adequate self-cleaning velocities under widely varying flow conditions.
The primary barrel is designed so that a velocity of 2 to 3 feet per second will be reached at
least once each day, even during the early years of operation. Additional pipe regulated by
lateral overflow weirs assist progressively in carrying flows of greater magnitude, that is
maximum dry weather flow to maximum storm flow.

Profile
Two considerations which govern the profile of a siphon are provision for hydraulic losses and
ease of cleaning. The friction loss through the barrel will be determined by the design
velocity. For calculating the head loss it is sound conservative Hazen-Williams C of 100
(Manning n from 0.014 for small sizes to 0.018 for the largest). Siphons may need cleaning
more often than gravity sewers. For easy cleaning, siphons should not have any sharp bends
either vertical or horizontal; only smooth curves of adequate radius should be used.

HYDRAULIC
DESIGN
The first step in the hydraulic design of a sanitary sewer system is to prepare a map showing
the locations of all required sewers and from which the tributary can be shown. Preliminary
profiles of the ground surface along each line are also needed. They should show the critical
elevations which will establish the sewer grades, such as basements of low lying buildings.
topographic maps are useful at this stage of the design.
Sanitary sewer design computation, being repetitious may best be done on tabular forms. The
attached tabulation form is fairly comprehensive and can be adapted to the particular need of
the designer. In using this form for sanitary sewer design, supplementary graph or tables are
required to calculate wastewater flows and hydraulic data. It is recommended that all flows
should be converted to cubic feet per second (CFS). Calculations should start from the
highest elevation and proceed downward. Each building sewer outlet should be shown and be
connected to the nearest sanitary sewer manhole.
There is a tendency on the part of some designers to increase the size of the sewer in order to
obtain a theoretical velocity of 2 feet per second when the available slope would not produce
this velocity in a smaller pipe. Actually, in the larger pipe, the depth of flow would be
decreased to such extent that the velocity might be no greater, and perhaps less, than in a
smaller pipe laid on the same slope. In such cases, the net result of increasing the pipe size
would be to increase the cost without improving the flow conditions. Errors of this nature can
usually be eliminated through analysis of the velocity at various rates of flow.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1160
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 8 of 10

FLUOR DANIEL

SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

EXAMPLE
PROBLEM
Refer To
Attachment 07:

Column 1 (Total Discharge in GPMs [Gallons Per Minute]) was taken from the 3 buildings
having a total of 236 fixture units designed by the mechanical department. With the use of the
supply demand curve (Refer to Attachment 01), it will read 98.16 GPM.
Column 2, Size of Pipe; Column 3, Length of Line in Feet; Column 4, Slope of Pipe in
Percent; and Column 5, Velocity Flowing Full, use slope of 2.0 percent.
Column 4 and 5 use pipe flow chart (Refer to Attachment 02) = 4.5 FPS.
Column 6 (Discharge Flowing Full) = 1.52 CFS.
Column 7, convert (Column 1) 98.16 GPM into CFS = 98.16 x 0.002228 = 0.2187 CFS =
21.87 (1/100) average flow to be 1/3.8 peak flow = 21.87/3.8 = 5.76 (1/100) CFS.
Column 8 (peak flow 1/100 CFS) = 98.17 GPM x 0.002228 = 0.2187 CFS = 21.87 1/100
CFS.
Column 9 (Discharge Average %) = (Column 7) 5.76 divided by (Column 6) 1.52 = 3.79 CFS.
Column 10 (Discharge Peak %) = (Column 8) 21.87 divided by (Column 6) 1.52 = 14.39
CFS.
Column 11 (Velocity Average %) = use proportionate flow chart on Attachment 03. Column
9 (3.79 discharge to velocity) = 0.46 FPS.
Column 12 (Velocity Peak %) = use proportionate flow chart on Attachment 03. Column 10
(14.39 discharge to velocity) = 0.70 FPS.
Column 13 (average flow velocity FPS) = (Column 11) 0.46 x (Column 5) 4.5 = 2.07 FPS.
Column 14 (Peak Flow Velocity FPS) = Column 12 0.70 x Column 5 4.5 = 3.15 FPS.
Column remarks, the designer will show the total discharge that are being added on that
particular line.
As specified previously, the pipe should not be designed flowing full. Attached are graphs to
be used in calculating the hydraulic elements. To use Hydraulic Elements Graph in
Attachment 04 for circular pipe.
Example:
Flows will be known, extreme peak, diurnal peak and average daily flow.
Extreme Peak = 1.71 CFS
Diurnal Peak = 0.91 CFS
Average Daily = 0.44 CFS
Q = 1.71
S = 0.003
12" Diameter
n = 0.013

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1160
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 9 of 10

FLUOR DANIEL

SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

From Attachment 05, for 12 inch the discharge is 2.0 CFS and the velocity is 2.53 FPS.
1.71 = 0.86 then on Attachment 04 hydraulic elements, with the use of this graph plot 0.86 =
2.0
d/D = 0.71 is less than the lateral and main sewer 0.80. using the same line proceed to the
right where it intersects the dash line for velocity and it reads 1.14. 1.14 x 2.53 = 2.88 FPS.
Same procedure will be performed for the other flows. The minimum velocity for average
flow is V = 2.0 FPS. Q = 0.44 CFS = 0.44 = 0.22 from Attachment 04 = d/D = 0.33. 0.79 x
2.00
2.53 = 2.0 FPS for average flow.

REFERENCES
Design and Computation of Sanitary and Storm Sewers. ASCE Manual and Reports on
Engineering. ASCE. Practice Number 37.
Domestic Wastewater Treatment. Department of the Army Technical Manual (TM 5-814-3).
Engineering Manual. Part VIII, Chapter 1. Corps of Engineers.
Hydraulic Design of Sewers. Department of the Army Technical Manual (TM 5-814-1).
Plumbing. Engineering Manual. EM 1110-345-165. Corps of Engineers.
Sanitary and Industrial Wastewater Collection - Pumping Stations and Force Mains.
Department of the Army Technical Manual (TM 5-814-2).
Selye, E.E. Book of Design.
Sewerage Treatment Plant Design. ASCE Manual and Reports on Engineering. ASCE
Practice Number 34.
Steel and McGhee. Water Supply And Sewerage.
These standards provide guidelines for the design of sanitary sewers and applies to all projects
and work assignments being performed by the Fluor Daniel Civil Discipline.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Supply Demand Curve
Attachment 02:
Pipe Flow Chart
Attachment 03:
Proportionate Flow Chart (Manning's Formula)
Attachment 04:
Hydraulic Elements Graph for Circular Sewers
Attachment 05:
Alignment Chart for Manning Formula for Pipe Flow
Attachment 06:
Critical Depth of Flow and Specific Head In Rectangular And Circular Conduit

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1160
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 10 of 10

FLUOR DANIEL

SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

Attachment 07:
Typical Computation Form

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1200
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 1 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

OUTSIDE UNDERGROUND PIPING

PURPOSE
This practice establishes the general layout and design guidelines for outside underground
piping and should be used for basic design. This practice will benefit Civil, Process, and
Piping Design Engineers, but also can be of assistance to other disciplines as well. It is the
responsibility of the Lead Engineer to ensure application and utilization of this practice.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
DOMESTIC WATER (POTABLE)
SANITARY SEWERS
OIL WATER DRAINAGE
COOLING WATER
FIREWATER
NATURAL GAS
PIPE MATERIALS
PIPE BEDDING
PIPE SETTLEMENT
REFERENCES

APPLICATION
This technical practice should be utilized by engineers and designers when locating outside
underground piping facilities for industrial or process uses as well as commercial and
residential uses. The practice should be used in conjunction with job specifications, client
specifications, and specifications established by the local Purveyor or Government agency and
is not intended to override any of the aforementioned guidelines unless none exist.

DOMESTIC
WATER
(POTABLE)
In general, domestic water lines should be located on the side of the road that provides the
shortest service connections. These lines should not be located under paved or heavily
traveled areas.
Horizontal separation of domestic water lines and other utility lines should be a minimum of
10 feet to avoid potential contamination. If possible, it should be located in its own easement.
Domestic water lines should not be located in the same trench with other utilities.
When domestic water lines cross other utilities, there will not be a joint within 3 feet in either
direction of the crossing. The water line should be located at an elevation higher than other
utilities, when at all possible. If the water line must cross underneath other utilities, the other
pipeline should be enclosed in concrete or incorporate the use of pressure rated pipe.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1200
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 2 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

OUTSIDE UNDERGROUND PIPING

Minimum cover should be 4 feet under heavily traveled roads or railroads. In other
nonstructural areas, 3 feet minimum cover is acceptable. Domestic water lines should always
be located below frost depth.

SANITARY
SEWERS
Sanitary sewers are usually gravity flow and should be located vertically and horizontally
before pressure pipelines.
Sanitary sewers may be located at the centerline of roadways to help avoid conflicts with other
pipelines located on either side of the roadway.
It is preferable to locate sanitary sewers outside of roadways to avoid having to excavate
roadways when repairing or replacing pipe.
In many cases, flat sites may require a sanitary sewer lift station and force main system
installed. The force main should be treated as a pressure line normally located next to
roadways in a dedicated casement or corridor.
Manholes on gravity lines should be used for changes in direction or slope and for
maintenance access and should be spaced at approximately 300 feet for lines up to 12 inches
in diameter and 500 feet maximum for lines larger than 12 inches in diameter.
Minimum cover should be 4 feet for lines under heavily traveled roadways or railroads and 3
feet in nonstructural areas. For larger sanitary sewer mains (12 inches and above), it is not
necessary for the top of the line to be below frost depth. The centerline or Springline should
be at or below the frost line to avoid frost heave problems and provide satisfactory bedding.
Also refer to Practice 670.210.1160: Sanitary Sewer Systems, for more detailed sanitary
sewer design.

Storm Sewers -
Surface Runoff
Storm water runoff is normally collected via overland flow in ditches and culverts designed by
the Civil Discipline. Many projects require enclosed stormwater systems with catch basins
and manholes located as required. Clean stormwater should be discharged into natural site
drainageways as much as possible.
Stormwater runoff during construction may require a runoff pond to settle the solids and let
the clear stormwater flow into the natural waterway. The governing laws on erosion control
should be followed.
In areas where hydrocarbon or other hazardous liquids or materials are present, catch basins or
trench drains should be utilized so as to collect the flow. These hazardous materials should be
piped to the appropriate waste treatment facilities.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1200
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 3 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

OUTSIDE UNDERGROUND PIPING

Storm Drainage
Within Tanks
Compound Areas Arrange grading in tank farm areas so that the surface slopes at a minimum
of the 1 percent away from the tank to swales or ditches along the sides of the enclosure.
Where there are 2 rows of tanks, the pipeway is normally run down the center. Provide a high
point under the pipeway to prevent liquid spills from collecting there.
Terminate the drainage ditches or swales at the corners of the tank enclosure. Provide a
minimum 8 inch drain pipe from this point through the dike with a gate valve or indicator post
valve outside of the enclosure. The drain valve should discharge to the storm ditches. This
valve is normally kept closed and is used only after a rainstorm to discharge accumulated
clean water.
Provide a valved branch line from a point upstream of the drain valve which will give the
operator the option of discharging the tank enclosure to an oily water sewer in the event of a
spill of contamination.
In cold climates, arrange the piping so that water does not stand against closed valves.

OIL WATER
DRAINAGE
Storage tanks are normally provided with a drain valve at the bottom of the tank to permit
periodic drawoff of water which normally collects in the product. The water drawoff valve
should be positioned over an open concrete box with an outlet discharging into the oily water
collection system.
The collecting sewer for a group of tanks is run under the center portion of the compound and
a gate valve or indicator post valve operable outside of the compound is provided. This valve
is normally kept closed so that in the event of spill or tank rupture, the commodity remains
inside the diked enclosure and does not run into the cleanwater storm sewer system.

Routing Of
Clean And Oily
Water Sewers
Routing for main lines from process areas to waste treatment areas should run parallel to roads
and not directly underneath. Where space permits, an easement or corridor alongside the road
should be provided. Avoid routing large mains down the center of roads as it could
potentially leave trenches open for long periods of time. It should be noted that storm sewer
lines alongside of roads also can sustain heavy loads during the construction process.
Consider keeping large trench excavations clear of construction work and access areas. If
possible, discuss routing of all major (24 inches and larger) underground lines with
Construction Manager.
Verify whether or not sewer lines under roads and millroads will sustain earth and traffic
loads. Refer to Practice 670.210.1210: Loads On Underground Pipe.
For large sewer mains, it may not be necessary for the top of the line to be below frost depth.
It is obvious the volumes of water that are flowing in these larger mains are not about to

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1200
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 4 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

OUTSIDE UNDERGROUND PIPING

freeze. To avoid frost heave problems and provide satisfactory bedding, the centerline or
Springline should be at or below the frost line.

Manholes And
Invert Elevations
Provide manholes to access and maintain the system and in accordance with the requirements
set forth in the contract specifications. When separate major groups of storage tanks, process
blocks, and loading facilities are involved, sealed and vented manholes will be required at
strategic points to sectionalize the system.
Sewer invert elevations are set by the slope and size of the line handling the design flow and is
a compromise between a larger line at a flat slope or a smaller line at a steeper slope.
The starting and terminating elevations of the system play an important role in the above
choice. To meet the hydraulic requirements, the system should terminate so that the top of
pipe is 2 to 3 inches higher than the maximum water level in the receiving body of water or, if
an existing sewer, the water level in the manhole.

COOLING
WATER
This system is run underground where the line sizes are large and soil conditions permit. The
supply line starts at the cooling water pumps. Downstream of the associated valving, it drops
underground.
Routing of the supply and return line should parallel main roads running between the cooling
tower and the process area units. The most economical route should be selected with the same
considerations given to these lines as described in the section preceding.
These headers usually run for long distances and depth of cover should be kept to a minimum
giving consideration to the following:
Top of pipe to be at or below frost line.
At least 2 feet minimum cover and more, if necessary, to sustain construction traffic
loads.
Flat turn at changes of direction are preferred, provided all other piping and electrical
ducts in the area can be set to avoid interference.
Spacing of parallel cooling water headers:
- To avoid heat transfer, provide clear space as follows:
-- 18-inches between 24-inches and smaller headers
-- 24-inches between 30-inches and larger headers

FIREWATER
The design responsibility of underground firewater systems varies from office to office
depending on available expertise. Detailed design of these systems are performed by Fire
Protection personnel. The Civil Discipline, as a minimum, provides coordination in the final
system layout and often shows the fire loop and building run-ins on the civil underground
utilities plan.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1200
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 5 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

OUTSIDE UNDERGROUND PIPING

NATURAL GAS
In General, natural gas pipelines are run underground and can be laid out in the form of a
connected loop whenever possible dependent on those facilities requiring gas service.
The mains should be located under or just outside the road shoulders or in a separate easement
or utility corridor, whenever possible.
Separation should be a minimum of 5 feet from pipelines or facilities containing nonhazardous
materials and a minimum of 10 feet from facilities containing hazardous materials. It should
be noted that many local agencies and codes require separation which are more strict than
those mentioned above.
Depth of bury should be at least 3 feet in potential traffic areas to avoid high traffic loading.
Cathodic protection should always be considered for steel pipe, especially in areas with
potentially high soil electrolysis. Coordinate with the electrical discipline.

PIPE
MATERIALS
Several pipe materials are available on the current market and are applicable to a wide variety
of uses. The most common include the following:
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
DIP Ductile Iron Pipe
VCP Vitrified Clay Pipe
CIP Cast Iron Pipe
RCP Reinforced Concrete Pipe
CMP Corrugated Metal Pipe
HDPE High Density Polyethylene Pipe

PIPE BEDDING
When suitable soil is encountered in a trench excavation, it can be used for pipe bedding if it
meets the requirements of Specification 670.210.02224: Excavation, Backfill, And
Compaction For Underground Piping. Any local rules and regulations should also be
consulted along with the recommendations of the pipe manufacturer.
When unstable bedding is encountered and the bottom of the trench is not sufficiently stable or
firm, proper bedding must be installed to prevent vertical or lateral displacement of the pipe
after installation.
Excavate native soil below grade of bedding material and replace with a layer of gravel,
crushed rock, sand, or other coarse aggregate which may produce the desired stability.
Bedding details will be as shown on the drawings.

PIPE

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1200
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 6 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

OUTSIDE UNDERGROUND PIPING

SETTLEMENT
Differential settlement of manholes and connecting sewers can sometimes break the sewer
pipe. A pipe joint just outside the manhole can lessen this danger. If the soil conditions are
unstable or a high water table could leach sand bedding out from under the pipe, a second
joint within 3 feet of the first should be provided. The pipe joints must be flexible such as a
compression or mechanical joint.
Differential settlement of cooling water branch lines and exchangers on piled foundation
which may not settle, can over stress the piping. This problem can be remedied by locating
the headers so that the branch lines are at least 10 feet long and providing flexible connectors,
such as Dresser and Smith-Blair, at either end of the branch of steel pipe, or using mechanical
joints for cast iron pipe.

REFERENCES
Civil Engineering
Practice 670.210.1160: Sanitary Sewer Systems
Civil Engineering
Practice 670.210.1210: Loads On Underground Pipe
Civil Engineering
Specification 670.210.02224: Excavation, Backfill, And Compaction For Underground
Piping

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1210
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 1 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

LOADS ON UNDERGROUND PIPE

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the engineer or designer calculating the loading that
may be expected for various depths of bury and live loads on the surface over underground
pipe and a method to verify that the loading is not excessive. This practice provides a design
methodology to accurately calculate loads on underground pipe. This practice will benefit
engineers and designers when laying out conduits crossings under roads or traffic areas that
could have potentially heavy loading. In most cases, it will be needed to determine the load
produced by the fill and the strength of pipe required to carry the load. In some cases, a
definite strength of pipe will be specified and it will be desired to find a height of fill which
will not produce a load on a pipe greater than that which it is capable of supporting. It is the
responsibility of the engineer or designer to ensure the application of this practice.

SCOPE
This practice provides the following:
Discussion of different types of pipe and the methods for determining the inherent
strength.
Discussion of live and dead loads and the factors affecting the calculations of these loads.
Description of pipe bedding and the applicable load factors.
A design check and sample calculations.

APPLICATION
It is the responsibility of the engineer and/or designer to consult this practice whenever earth
loads or live loads exceed normal conditions. Normal conditions are defined as normal depths
of bury and normal live loads transmitted by vehicles. This information contained within this
practice would apply to new design as well as checking existing pipes for extreme loading
such as that which would be encountered during construction.

PIPE STRENGTH
When designing underground conduits, inherent pipe strength should be known so the
supporting capability of the pipe is not exceeded by the proposed earth and live loads.
Pipe strengths can be obtained from formulas derived using specific tests or are usually
obtained from pipe manufacturers catalogs.
ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) testing standards usually require pipe
strengths to be such that normally expected live and dead loads can be handled. However,
some conditions such as extraordinary loads or very deep or shallow depths of bury require
special attention.
Pipe is normally classified as either rigid or flexible. Rigid pipe such as cast iron, concrete, or
clay fail when the combined load (internal pressure and external load) imposed on them
become greater than their inherent circumferential stiffness and they crack or rupture.

Methods Of Testing And

Specifying Pipe Strengths

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1210
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 2 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

LOADS ON UNDERGROUND PIPE

3 Edge Bearing Strength

(Clay Pipe, Asbestos
Cement Pipe)
The strength of a rigid conduit is normally specified by its resistance in a laboratory test called
the 3 Edge Bearing Test. Since the load is applied to only 3 points on the pipe, the test is
more severe than actual field conditions. To convert the 3 edge bearing strength to the design
or safe supporting strength, multiply by a load factor based on the type of bedding used, then
divide the results by the appropriate safety factor.

D Load Strength
(Concrete Pipe)
For reinforced concrete pipe only, laboratory strength may be expressed as the load per foot of
pipe which causes the pipe to develop an 0.01 inch crack or also as the ultimate load the pipe
will withstand. The strength of the pipe, at either the 0.01 inch crack or ultimate, divided by
the nominal internal diameter of the pipe in feet, is called the D load strength. For example, a
48 inch diameter reinforced concrete pipe has a 3 edge bearing test load at 0.01 inch crack of
8,000 lb/ft and an ultimate strength of 12,000 lb/ft The 0.01 inch crack strength is then 2,000D
and the ultimate strength is 3,000D.

Ring Test Crushing Load

(Cast Iron Pipe)
The crushing load for cast iron pipe varies with the size and wall thickness of the pipe and
must be calculated. The modulus of rupture which governs the maximum crushing load
should be figured as 40,000 psi; although, pipe having a modulus of rupture of 45,000 psi is
available. The crushing load will decrease with an increase in internal pressure.

Flexible Pipe Strength

Load (Steel Pipe)
Flexible pipe such as steel and plastic combine their own strength with the lateral support of
the compacted soil at the side fills to resist deflection. The maximum external load to be
applied to a flexible pipe is the load that will give a deflection of greater than:
5 percent of the nominal diameter for flexible coating.
2 percent of the nominal diameter for rigid coating.
Internal pressure assists flexible pipe in supporting external loads but cannot be relied on since
the pressure could be shut down.
The table in Attachment 01 has been developed using various ASTM testing methods for
various pipe categories.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1210
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 3 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

LOADS ON UNDERGROUND PIPE

TYPES OF BURY
Types of bury are essentially classified as that in cut or that in fill. Pipes in a cut situation are
referred to as trench condition and pipes in a fill situation are referred to as embankment
condition. There can also be a combination of both. Refer to Attachment 02.
To simplify this practice and to induce a certain amount of conservatism, this practice will be
limited to trench conditions and embankment conditions. A combination condition will be
considered as an embankment condition.

PIPE LOADING
Formulas and charts for determining loads on an underground pipe are determined from
theories developed by A. Marston, Iowa State University. Earth loads and live or transmitted
loads must be considered when designing underground conduits. Data on live and dead loads
can be obtained from many different handbooks available as well as from pipe manufacturer's
guidelines.
Every condition of bury or loading does not have to be checked for failure. In most cases,
pipe loading does not need to be checked. Most underground pipe design regulations require
that pipe be designed for normal depths of bury with normally expected live loads. Certain
conditions should be checked for pipe loading conditions. These conditions can be the
following:
Depths of bury exceeding 10 feet
Abnormal soil conditions
Unusually high live or transmitted loads
Live loads for depths or buy less than 3 feet

Earth Loads
The amount of earth loads that is transmitted to the pipe is dependent on many factors. The
primary factors that determine earth loading are:
Depth of cover
Width of trench at top of pipe
Rigid or flexible pipe
Type of construction (trench or embankment)
Soil density and cohesion characteristics
Formulas and charts developed by A. Marston provide a means to closely calculate the earth
loading for the variable factors listed above. This data can be found in many available
handbooks. AWWA (American Water Works Association) C-101, is a good example, as well
as many catalogs and handbooks published by pipe manufacturers. Full descriptions of the
various construction conditions are also given.
In order to simplify the determination of earth loading, Attachment 03 may be used for
approximate values. Approximate values from the table are satisfactory for the following
reasons:
Depths of cover are usually less than 8 feet.
Earth load values for a depth of 8 feet are well below the 3 edge bearing strength of
vitrified clay pipe or reinforced concrete pipe for any properly installed system.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1210
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 4 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

LOADS ON UNDERGROUND PIPE

Unless the width of the trench is specified and controlled during construction, calculating
earth loads from Marston's formula would be impractical.
The unit weight of soil used in Attachment 03 is 120 pounds per cubic foot.
Pipes with 12 inch diameter and less are assumed to have a trench width 1 foot wider than
the outside diameter of the pipe. Pipes from 12 inches to 36 inches are assumed to have a
trench width 2 feet wider than the outside diameter of the pipe.
The table in Attachment 03 is intended to be used as a guide in determining earth loads for
underground conduits with normal bury conditions. For unusual bury conditions such as large
diameter pipes or deep pipes, the designer should consult the pipe manufacturer's catalog for
design criteria.

Live Loads
It is usually not necessary to consider live loads except where they are exceedingly large or
where they occur on conduits with very little cover. A few computations under various
conditions will establish the relative importance of live loads in the designers mind.
Trucks or construction equipment moving over the ground surface above underground piping
subject the piping to loads. A certain percentage of the total load, based on depth of cover and
size of pipe, is transmitted to the pipe. If paving is involved, flexible pavement will transfer
more load to the pipe; whereas, rigid pavement such as concrete will tend to bridge the pipe
transmitting more load to the surrounding soil. For calculating transmitted loads, use the
guidelines that follow and the Table in Attachment 04 which gives the percent of live load that
is transmitted to the pipe for various depths of cover.
For piping under roads, depth of cover should be based on rough grade elevations for the
road, since underground lines will be subject to truck traffic before any asphalt surface is
applied.
For design purposes, use a wheel load of 32,000 pounds (1/2 axle load of 64,000 pounds).
The wheel load may be on dual tires but is still considered 1 wheel. This load is the
heaviest that would be expected from a large unladen truck crane. Heavier loads could be
possible during equipment handling or lifting activities and this point should be reviewed
with Construction Management. Generally, the pipe is protected with timber mats or
omitted entirely during these operations.
The wheel load of 32,000 pounds recommended above is twice that of H-20 truck loading
which is used as a basis for bridge and highway design.
Where loads are known to be less or greater, the calculations should be based on the
actual figures. The minimum wheel load used for design purposes is 16,000 pounds
which is normal H-20 loading.
When expecting heavy 1 time construction or equipment loads, the conduit could be
installed after the loading has been imposed.

PIPE BEDDING
The pipe bedding determines the load factor or number to multiply the 3 edge bearing strength
to determine the field supporting strength. The bedding is the contact between the pipe and
the foundation on which it rests. The soil on the sides of the pipe and above it is the backfill.
The field supporting strength of a rigid pipe and, therefore, the load factor for a particular
conduit, depend chiefly upon 2 characteristics of the installation as follows:

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1210
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 5 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

LOADS ON UNDERGROUND PIPE

Width of the bedding of the pipe and the quality of the contact between the pipe and
bedding as it affects the distribution of the vertical forces.
Magnitude of the lateral pressure acting against the sides of the pipe and the area of the
pipe over which the lateral pressure acts.
Cohesion for trench conduits is assumed to be negligible because of the following:
Considerable time must elapse before effective cohesion between the backfill material and
the sides of the trench can develop.
The assumption of no cohesion yields the maximum probable load on the conduit.

Pipe Bedding Classes

Pipe bedding generally falls into 4 classes. These 4 classes are described below.
Class A Load Factor 3.4
This method of bedding involves either a reinforced 2,000 psi concrete cradle or arch. The
concrete will extend to the springline, which is halfway up the side of the pipe. The cross
sectional area ratio of steel to concrete should be 0.4 percent. If no reinforcing is used then
the load factor will be reduced to 2.4. If p = 1.0 percent for concrete arches, then the load
factor can be increased to 4.8.
Class B Load Factor 1.9
This method of bedding involves well graded crushed stone carefully placed and shaped to the
bottom of the pipe with a minimum thickness below the pipe of 4 inches. The bedding will
extend up the haunches to the springline of the pipe with select material as initial backfill.
Class C Load Factor 1.5
This method of bedding involves carefully placed and compacted material with a wide range
of gradation and possibly locally obtained. The bedding generally extends from 4 inches
below the pipe up to 1/6 of the OD of the pipe. Select backfill will be used as initial backfill.
Class D Load Factor 1.1
This method of bedding involves little or no care when shaping the foundation surface to fit
the lower part of the conduit exterior or to fill all spaces under and around the conduit with
granular materials. Initial backfill will be of select material.
It can be seen by the bedding classes described above that the better quality bedding provides
a higher load factor and, therefore, more load carrying capability.
The economy of the different types of bedding along with the potential live and dead loads
must be taken into account when specifying bedding requirements.
In order to simplify the selection of an appropriate load factor, use a conservative value of 1.5
which is based on ordinary bedding. In special and unusual situations where a line is run
excessively deep (over 10 feet), or for other reasons, it becomes necessary to specify a
particular bedding condition, then the appropriate design handbook listed in Attachment 05
should be consulted.

FACTOR OF SAFETY

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1210
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 6 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

LOADS ON UNDERGROUND PIPE

When the materials are analyzed and the job is properly assembled in the designer's mind, a
factor of safety should be applied to the plans to account the unforeseen stresses which may be
imposed on the structure. This technical practice would not be complete without a discussion
of this factor of safety as applied to the structural design of an underground conduit. A factor
of safety cannot be computed by laws and equations, but depends entirely upon the judgment
and experience of the engineer and/or designer. In general, the Factor of Safety will range
from 1.0 to 1.5 depending on a variety of conditions or situations. Culvert or nonpressure
conduit failures are gradual in occurrence; whereas, pressure conduits usually fail quickly
once a crack develops. Bedding and backfill is another variable factor that must be considered
when selecting a factor of safety. Rigid pipes usually require a higher factor of safety than
flexible pipes since flexible conduits will usually deflect more before they reach failure.

DESIGN CHECK
This section gives the procedure for checking if a line under a given earth cover, subject to
construction traffic loads, will not be excessively loaded.
Minimum cover for protection against traffic loads
Minimum cover depth which is measured from grade to top of pipe is determined by
computing total load on pipe, but in no case should be less than:
- 2'- 6" for cast iron and asbestos cement pressure lines
- 2'- 0" for steel and concrete pressure lines
- 2'- 0" for all nonpressure lines
Bedding conditions
Where calculations indicate that pipe will not sustain loads at the covers specified above,
consideration may be given to improving the load carrying capability of the pipe by specifying
a bedding condition with a higher load factor.
Formulas and table
- Earth loads (dead loads)
We = Earth load based on maximum conditions of trench width and
120 lb./cu. foot soil material using Marston formula. Refer to
Attachment 03.
- Truck loads (live loads)
Wt = Truck load, based on a concentrated wheel load of 32,000 pounds and
an impact factor of 1.0. Use Table in Attachment 04 to determine load
reaching pipe.
If impact factor is required, multiply result by appropriate factor.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1210
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 7 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

LOADS ON UNDERGROUND PIPE

Safety supporting strength rigid pipe - no pressure.

3 edge bearing strength x load factor
Safety supporting strength =
safety factor
Refer to pipe bedding for load factors.
Safety factors - nonpressure systems:
Clay pipe 1.5
Cast iron pipe 1.5
Concrete pipe 1.0
Safe supporting strength must be equal to, or greater than, We and Wt.
Safety supporting strength rigid pipe, pressure systems.
Since there is a relationship between the amount of load a rigid pipe can carry and the internal
pressure it is subjected to, it is necessary to include the effects of pressure in the equation to
determine maximum load that can be applied. The following may be used for cast iron
pressure pipe:

P1 − p
Wd = W
P1
where:
Wd = Safe supporting strength (pound)
W = Crushing load with no internal pressure (pound per linear feet)
P' = Bursting pressure with no external load
p = Working pressure times 2.5 safety factor
The values of W and P are calculated as follows:

W= Rt 2
.0795(d + t)

P 1 = 2St
d
where:
R = Ring modulus of rupture, use 40,000 psi
S = Bursting tensile strength, use 18,000 psi
t = Net thickness (inch) specified thickness less casting tolerance
d = Nominal pipe size (inch)
Wd must be equal to or greater than:
2.5(We + Wt)
Lf
where:
We = Earth load
Wt = Truck load
Lf = Load factor

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1210
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 8 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

LOADS ON UNDERGROUND PIPE

Safety factor is included in equations.

Safe supporting strength - flexible (steel) pipe.
The deflection determined by the following equation should not exceed the following:
Five percent of nominal pipe diameter for flexible coatings.
Two percent of nominal pipe diameter for rigid coatings.
fK W1 r 3
d=
Et 3 + 732r 3
where:
d = ultimate long time deflection of pipe (inches)
f = 1.5 (deflection lag factor)
W1 = We + Wt times 1.25 safety factor (pounds/linear feet) r=radius of pipe
(inches)
E = 30,000,000 psi (modulus of elasticity, steel pipe)
K = Bedding Factor = 0.10
t = thickness of pipe wall (inches)

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Crushing Strength
Attachment 02:
Types Of Bury
Attachment 03:
Dead Load From Earth Cover On Underground Pipes
Attachment 04:
Percentage Of Wheel Load Transmitted To Underground Pipe
Attachment 05:
Design Handbook Listing
Attachment 06:
Sample Design 1

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1210
Publication Date 20Sep95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

CRUSHING STRENGTH

(3-Edge Bearing Test, Lbs. Per Ln. Ft.)

Reinforced Concrete, ASTM C-76

Vitrified Clay Nonreinforced C.I. Soil Pipe Load to Produce a .01" Crack
Pipe Size Extra Strength Concrete Class Extra Heavy
(in.) ASTM C-700 2 ASTM C-14 ASTM A-74 Class II Class III Class IV Class V
4 2,000 2,000 6,500
6 2,000 2,000 4,400
8 2,200 2,000 4,275
10 2,400 2,000 4,275
12 2,600 2,250 4,425 1,000 1,350 2,000 3,000
15 2,900 2,600 5,310 1,250 1,688 2,500 3,750
18 3,300 3,000 1,500 2,025 3,000 4,500
21 3,850 3,300 1,750 2,363 3,500 5,250
24 4,400 3,600 2,000 2,700 4,000 6,000
27 4,700 2,250 3,038 4,500 6,750
30 5,000 2,500 3,375 5,000 7,500
33 5,500 2,750 3,713 5,500 8,250
36 6,000 3,000 4,050 6,000 9,000

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1210
Publication Date 20Sep95
Attachment 03 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

DEAD LOAD FROM EARTH COVER ON UNDERGROUND PIPES

(Loads are Shown in Lbs. Per Ln. Ft. of Pipe)

Depth of
Cover,
Ft. Nominal Pipe Diameter, Inch.
4 6 8 10 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
2 180 240 290 340 390 450 500 560 610 700 750 820 875
3 270 370 460 550 630 750 860 950 1,040 1,120 1,200 1,300 1,400
4 370 520 650 780 920 1,080 1,230 1,400 1,520 1,630 1,750 1,850 2,000
5 470 660 830 1,000 1,160 1,420 1,610 1,810 2,010 2,200 2,340 2,500 2,630
6 570 800 1,000 1,200 1,430 1,710 2,000 2,230 2,500 2,700 2,950 3,180 3,350
7 670 950 1,180 1,420 1,700 2,050 2,400 2,700 3,050 3,300 3,570 3,900 4,100
8 780 1,080 1,370 1,620 1,960 2,400 2,780 3,200 3,550 3,900 4,200 4,500 4,800

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1210
Publication Date 20Sep95
Attachment 04 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

PERCENTAGE OF WHEEL LOADS TRANSMITTED TO UNDERGROUND PIPES

(Figures Show Percentage of Wheel Load Applied to One Ln. Ft. of Pipe)

Depth of
Cover,
Ft. Nominal Pipe Diameter, Inches
4 6 8 10 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
1 9.3 12.8 15 17.3 20 22.6 24.8 26.4 27.2 28 28.6 29 29.4
2 4.3 5.7 7 8.3 9.6 11.5 13.2 15 15.6 16.8 17.8 18.7 19.5
3 2 2.9 3.6 4.3 5.2 6.4 7.5 8.6 9.3 10.2 11.1 11.8 12.5
4 1.2 1.7 2.1 2.5 3.1 3..9 4.6 5.3 5.8 6.5 7.2 7.9 8.5
5 0.7 1.2 1.4 1.7 2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 3.9 4.4 4.9 5.3 5.8
6 0.5 0.8 1 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.1 2.5 2.8 3.1 3.5 3.8 4.2
7 0.2 0.5 0.7 0.8 1 1.3 1.6 1.3 2.1 2.3 2.6 2.9 3.2
8 0.1 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2 2.2 2.3

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1210
Publication Date 20Sep95
Attachment 05 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

DESIGN HANDBOOK LISTING

Pipe Handbook Publisher

Asbestos Cement Standard Practice for the Selection AWWA
of Asbestos Cement Water Pipe
Cast Iron Thickness Design of Cast Iron Pipe AWWA
Concrete Sewer Concrete Pipe Handbook American Concrete Pipe
Association
Steel Steel Pipe Design and Installation AWWA
Vitrified Clay Clay Pipe Engineering Manual National Clay Pipe Institute

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1211
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 1 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

THRUST RESTRAINT DESIGN

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the analysis and design of thrust blocks and joint
restraint for pipelines and underground piping. It is the responsibility of the Civil Lead
Engineer or Designer to utilize this practice where necessary.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following:
Discussions of thrust restraint for pressure piping, including both thrust blocks and pipe
joint restraints.
Typical values for soil parameters.
Thrust values.

APPLICATION
Thrust restraint must be included in the design and construction of pressure piping systems.
Without thrust restraint, piping may separate during service.

THRUST GENERATION
Thrust exists in pressure piping wherever there is a deflection, either horizontally or vertically,
in the line. The thrust forces are generated from the static and dynamic fluid action on the
pipe. Velocities in the majority of lines are of such low magnitude that dynamic thrust can
usually be neglected. However, static thrust in pipes due to internal pressure usually require
some kind of thrust restraint since the forces are of large magnitude. Large pipe diameters
together with large deflection angles and high internal pressure will cause very large thrust
forces that require careful design.

RESTRAINT METHODS
Restraint for unbalanced forces in piping systems may be accomplished using one or a
combination of the following methods:
Concrete thrust blocks
Restrained joints

Thrust Blocks
Thrust blocks are cast in place concrete blocks designed to transmit unbalanced forces from
the pipe fitting to the soil that the block bears against. A thrust block acts similar to a spread
footing, distributing the thrust across an adequate area of undisturbed soil. Thrust blocks must
be cast in place against undisturbed soil which is very important in the selection of a thrust
restraint system. Future excavation will disturb the soil bearing area in congested utility areas.
Also, past excavation in a given area may not allow for thrust blocks to be utilized in such a
case.
Other considerations that must be addressed in the selection phase of a thrust restraint system
is available space, soil parameters, and whether the deflection is vertical or horizontal. A

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1211
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 2 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

THRUST RESTRAINT DESIGN

crowded utility corridor or small plant area may cause the design of a thrust block to be
impractical because of space and excavation limitations. Also poor soil bearing capacities
may require thrust blocks to become too large for the available space. Thrust blocks should
not be used for vertical thrust restraint hat is in the upward direction. Downward vertical and
horizontal thrusts are appropriate directions for thrust block restraint.

Location
Location of thrust blocks:
Horizontal deflections greater than 10 degrees
Downward vertical deflections
Under valves in asbestos cement systems (not used much anymore)
At fire hydrants
The direction of thrust and the direction of the soil resultant reaction must be collinear to
prevent an unbalanced moment from acting on the system. The depth to the bottom of the
thrust block from the soil surface should be equal to or greater than two times the height of the
block.

Sizing
Sizing of thrust blocks, as with all thrust restraint systems, must be designed for the highest
pressure the pipe will experience throughout its service life. Typically, the highest pressure
will occur during testing of the pipe line.
Calculation of thrust resulting from pipe deflection is determined using the following formula:

T = 2PASin  Θ 
2
Equation 1
where:
T = Thrust (pounds
P = Maximum (Test) Pressure psi
A = Cross Sectional Area (Square Inch) of pipe
Θ = Pipe Deflection
Values calculated from the above formula have no factor of safety.
Values of thrust forces have been tabulated by the CIPRA (Cast Iron Pipe Research
Association) and are presented in Attachment 01, Table 1. Values in Attachment 01, Table 1
are higher than those calculated using Equation 1. CIPRA values may contain a factor of
safety that has been included in these values.
As stated above, thrust blocks will be sized on the basis of test pressure in accordance with
Attachment 01, Table 1, or the calculated value, and the bearing capacities of the soil.
Bearing capacities are readily available from the project soils report. For preliminary sizing,
Attachment 01, Table 2 shows typical soil classifications with bearing capacities. Again, these
values should only be used for preliminary sizing of blocks.
Knowing the force and soil bearing capacities, the thrust block size can be calculated. Block
width usually varies from one to two times the height. Again, the height of the block should

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1211
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 3 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

THRUST RESTRAINT DESIGN

be at least as high as the outside pipe diameter and at least as deep as the block is high.
Reinforcement placement, sizing, and spacing for large blocks should be reviewed by
structural engineering for adequacy.
The placement of thrust blocks should be at a 45 degree angle to the soil bearing surface and
should not cover any bolts or fittings of the piping.

Restrained Joints
Restrained joints are specially designed joints that together with soil friction transfer forces at
pipe bends. Restrained joints are predominantly used where thrust blocks are not economical
or practical due to limited space, access, unstable soils, or possible disturbance by future
excavation.
When restrained joints are used, the pipeline becomes its own thrust block. By restraining a
length of pipe near bends and along the pipe line, the thrust force is transferred to the
surrounding soil by the pipe.

Unbalanced Forces
Horizontal Bends:
The length of pipe to be restrained is calculated by the formula
S f PAK
L=
KF s + DP p
Equation 2
where:
L = length of pipe to be restrained (feet)
Sf = safety factor
P = internal pressure (psi)
A = cross sectional pipe area (square inch)
Fs = pipe to soil friction (pounds per feet)
Θ = deflection angle
K = 4 tan  Θ 
2
Pp = passive soil resistance (psf)
D = pipe diameter (feet)
The length (L) calculated specifies the length of pipe that is required to be fitted with
restrained joints to prevent the pipes from separating. Within this length, frictional and
bearing forces of the soil will resist the thrust forces imposed from the pipe line deflection. To
calculate pipe to soil friction, Fs, certain soil parameters are required.
Fs = Ap C + W tan δ

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1211
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 4 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

THRUST RESTRAINT DESIGN

where:
Ap = pipe surface area (SF/LF)
C = pipe cohesion (psf)
W = normal force on pipe (plf)
δ = f φφ
φ = soil internal friction angle (degree)
fφ = pipe friction to soil friction ratio
Also:
C = fc Cs
where:
fc = pipe cohesion to soil cohesion ratio
Cs = soil cohesion (psf)
Typical values of soil parameters are presented in Attachment 02, Soil Friction and Cohesion
Factor, from Thrust Restraint For Underground Piping Systems by R. J. Carlsem. The soil
parameters to be used for the friction calculation should be for whatever soil is in direct
contact with the pipe. For example, if the pipe is surrounded by bedding material and the
trench then backfilled with native material, the bedding parameters should be used for the
calculations.
To calculate the normal force on the pipe (W), the weight of the pipe plus the weight of fluid
in the pipe plus the weight of soil above the pipe are added together. The soil above the pipe
may be simplified to:
We = ω HD
where:
We = weight of earth (plf)
ω = unit weight of soil (pcf)
H = depth of cover (feet)
D = pipe diameter (feet)
The passive soil resistance, Pp, is calculated using Rankine Theory.

P p = ωH c N φ + 2C s N φ

where:
Hc = height of cover (feet)
tan2  45 o + 2 
φ
Nφ =

To accurately account for all forces along the pipe length, an additional force for the added
resistance resulting from pipe bells should be added to Fs to calculate F's.
F's = Fs + Fb

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1211
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 5 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

THRUST RESTRAINT DESIGN

where

P p  D 2b − D 2 
Fb = π
4
Db = outside diameter of bell (feet)
D = diameter of pipe (feet)
If the pipe is to be wrapped or encased with polyethylene, the value of Fs and F's must be
reduced by 30 percent to account for slipping which may occur between the pipe and
polyethylene.
Vertical Bends:
For unbalanced forces resulting in vertical uplift the following formula should be incorporated
for design lengths:
S f KPA
L=
KF s + 2W
Terms have been previously defined.
Dead Ends:
The required length for unbalanced forces resulting from a dead end is calculated as follows:
S f PA
L=
Fs
Passive soil resistance may be included if the soil is to remain undisturbed.

Tees
Tees in pipe line are capable of restraining quite a lot of force through passive soil resistance.
S f (4PA − DP p L x )
L=
4F s
where:
Ls = LT + 2Lp
LT = length of tee (feet)
Lp = length of pipe adjacent to fitting (feet)

General
When designing thrust restraint joints, one problem to be aware of is restraint length overlap
and bend combinations. If two deflections are located near one another, the total deflection to
be designed for may be the sum of the two deflections if bends are within each others restraint
length. Also, joints should always be designed for test pressures if that is the maximum
pressure that the pipe will experience.

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1211
Publication Date 20Sep95
Page 6 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

THRUST RESTRAINT DESIGN

REFERENCES
Carlsem, Roger J. Thrust Restraint for Underground Piping Systems. CIPRA (Cast Iron Pipe
Research Association).
Handbook - Ductile Iron and Cast Iron Pipe. Cast Iron Pipe Research Association. Oak
Brook, Illinois.
Kennedy, H., D.S. Shumard, C.M. Meeks. Ductile Iron Pipe Thrust Restraint Design
Handbook. EBAA Iron Sales, Eastland, Texas.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Table 1. Thrust at Fittings in lbs/100 psi Water Pressure
Table 2. Approximate Values of Soil Capacities for Preliminary Design
Attachment 02:
Soil Friction and Cohesion Factor

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1211
Publication Date 20Sep95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

THRUST RESTRAINT DESIGN

Table 1. Thrust At Fittings In lbs/100 psi Water Pressure

Pipe Size Pipe End or 90 Degree 45 Degree 22.5 Degree 11.25 Degree
Inches Tee Bend Bend Bend Bend
4 1,810 2,559 1,385 706 355
6 3,739 5,288 2,862 1,459 733
8 6,433 9,097 4,923 2,510 1,261
10 9,677 13,685 7,406 3,776 1,897
12 13,685 19,353 10,474 5,340 2,683
14 18,385 26,001 14,072 7,174 3,604
16 23,779 33,628 18,199 9,278 4,661
18 29,865 42,235 22,858 11,653 5,855
20 36,644 51,822 28,046 14,298 7,183
24 52,279 73,934 40,013 20,398 10,249
30 80,425 113,738 61,554 31,380 15,766

Note!!! To determine thrust at pressures other than 100 psi, multiply the thrust obtained in the table by the ratio of pressure
to 100.

For example, the thrusts on a 12 inch, 90 degree bend at 125 psi is

125
19, 353 x 100
= 24, 191 pounds

Carlsem, Roger J. Thrust Restraint for Underground Piping Systems. CIPRA

Table 2. Approximate Values of Soil Capacities for Preliminary Design.

Type of Soil Safe Load lbs/SF

Muck, peat, etc. 0
Soft Clay 1,000
Sandy Silt 3,000
Sand 4,000
Sandy Clay 6,000

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 210 1211
Publication Date 20Sep95
Attachment 02 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

SOIL FRICTION AND COHESION FACTOR

Friction Angle
Soil Description Degrees Cohesion Cs (psf) fφ fc
Well Graded Sand:

Dry 44.5 0 0.76 0

Saturated 39 0 0.80 0

Silt (Passing No. 200):

Dry 40 0 0.95 0
Saturated 32 0 0.75 0

Cohesive Granular:

Wet to Moist 13 - 22 385 - 920 0.65 0.35

Clay:

Wet to Moist 11.5 - 16.5 460 - 1,175 0.50 0.50

At Max. Compact 0.50 0.80

Civil Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2660
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

VESSEL LAYOUT - CLASSIFICATION OF VESSELS VS. PIPING

PURPOSE
Piping assemblies usually are readily differentiated from vessel assemblies; occasionally,
however, this distinction is not easily recognized. This practice provides design personnel
with information that will assist them in recognizing this difference. Proper classification is
important because improper classification affects code compliance, design, purchase,
fabrication, testing, inspection, shipping, and installation.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
RESPONSIBILITY
CLASSIFICATION
EXEMPTION

APPLICATION
This practice applies to all projects in all Fluor Daniel operations centers.

RESPONSIBILITY
Bring any assembly whose classification is questionable to the attention of responsible Vessel
Engineer and Piping Engineer for final disposition. Design personnel are cautioned to take
special note of the following:
Small, independently supported bottle assemblies consisting of a section of pipe with
weld caps at each end and flanged or coupling outlets.
Drip legs with liquid level control or indicators in piping systems.
There have been occasions where such assemblies have been designed and fabricated as
piping, then rejected by Client or by the local agency that has jurisdiction because they should
have been handled as vessels. The mere presence of liquid level indicators or controls shows
an intent to store a liquid, even momentarily; therefore, the assembly may be required to be a
code pressure vessel by some jurisdictional agencies.

CLASSIFICATION

Piping System
A piping system is considered to be a pressure containing system whose primary function is to
transport fluids from one location to another.
A piping system may contain pressure vessels as well as piping components.
The following are to be considered as piping components when used in a piping system:
Expansion joints
Fittings
Pressure containing parts of other components such as small strainers and devices that
serve such purposes as mixing, separating, snubbing, distributing, and metering or

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2660
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

VESSEL LAYOUT - CLASSIFICATION OF VESSELS VS. PIPING

controlling flow, providing that pressure containing parts of such components are
generally recognized as piping components or accessories and are not required to be
classed as vessels according to vessel classification.

Vessel
Usually the assembly is classified as a vessel when any of the following conditions exist:
It has been identified by a vessel item number on flow diagrams and drawings.
It must be designed, fabricated, or certified in accordance with a nationally recognized
code or standard such as ASME, API, AWWA, NFPA, TBMA, or Factory Mutual.
It must be fabricated by a vessel fabricator because of size, shape, construction,
complexity, or economic advantage. The dimensions of the cross section are important
criteria in the determination of whether a vessel is required to be certified to be
constructed according to the Pressure Vessel Code. (Refer to Notes.)
It is classified as a vessel by Client, Client's insurance underwriter, or local, state, and
federal laws and ordinances. (Refer to RESPONSIBILITY.)
It is classified as a vessel by jobsite labor craft jurisdiction.
Its function is storage (even momentary), settling, surge, expansion, accumulation,
separating, reacting, and blowdown; for example, something other than a conduit for
transferring fluids.
It is a nonexempt vessel. (Refer to EXEMPTION.)

EXEMPTION

Piping System
Piping systems recognized as superheaters, economizers, and other pressure parts connected
directly to a boiler without intervening valves will be considered parts of the boiler proper.
Their construction will conform to ASME Section I rules.

Vessel

Notes
Notes regarding the ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) Pressure Vessel
Code, Section VIII, Division I:
Any component or assembly, regardless of size or pressure, may be stamped with the ASME
Code Division 1 symbol if it meets all design, material, fabrication, and testing requirements
of the code. However, Division 1 of the code does not consider the following to be
necessarily within its scope and as such may be handled as either piping or as a vessel when
none of the conditions listed under ASME Vessel Classification is present.
A hot water supply storage tank heated by steam or any other indirect means when none
of the following limitations is exceeded:
- A heat input of 200,000 Btu per hour (58.6 kW)
- A water temperature of 210 degrees F (99 degrees C)
- A nominal water containing capacity of 120 gallons (16 cubic feet)
Vessels having an internal or external operating pressure not exceeding 15 psi with no
limitation on size.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2660
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 3 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

VESSEL LAYOUT - CLASSIFICATION OF VESSELS VS. PIPING

Vessels having an outside dimension not exceeding 6-5/8 inches (or in the case of
rectangular cross section 6-5/8 inch diagonal) with no limitation on pressure.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2580
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

HEATER SQUAD CHECKING - FIRED EQUIPMENT PIPING

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for squad checking heater supplier drawings.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
SUPPLIER CONFERENCE
CHECKLIST GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING
SQUAD CHECKING
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
The assigned Lead Piping Supervisor is responsible for the application of this practice.
The narrative specifications, Mechanical Equipment Datasheets, P&IDs (Piping and
Instrumentation Diagrams), supplier outlines, client data, and the job standards define the
framework of the heater design.

SUPPLIER
CONFERENCE
Preparing for a supplier conference for a heater is a large task. A great deal of information
must be collected and cross checked. Designs must be started with a minimal amount of data
and direction. Most importantly, many design variations must be reviewed and a direction
selected that proves to be the most desirable in regard to economics, safety, and ease of
operation. The preliminary design is presented to the Heater Supplier at the outset during the
preorder (Supplier) conference. In a broad sense, squad checking problems are relative to the
degree of effectiveness with which Piping Design communicates with the Heater Supplier.
This is a stage setting process; that is, the foundation for all further activities in dealing with
the Supplier in design problems.
Presently, a large part of the squad checking effort is the result of not establishing sufficient
ground rules for the required design. Piping Design and Mechanical Engineering should do a
detailed investigation during preliminary design of the equipment and create a sufficient
number of drawings, sketches, and details to describe as much detail to the Heater Supplier as
possible.
There are a number of items that are negotiated with the Supplier during the conference;
therefore, it is important to document the various agreements for future reference.
Note!!! After the Supplier conference, the Supplier starts the detail drawings. The process
continues to a higher and higher level. As time goes on, changes cost Fluor Daniel
and the Supplier more time and more money. The original Supplier conference was
virtually free; however, the fourth squad check can become quite costly.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2580
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

HEATER SQUAD CHECKING - FIRED EQUIPMENT PIPING

CHECKLIST GENERAL
ARRANGEMENT
DRAWING
The key to effective squad checking is to focus fine attention to the Supplier's general
arrangement drawings. This is the drawing that controls the other Supplier's detail drawings.
Make certain that all the items requiring checking are reviewed and back checked. If needed,
support the squad check markups with detail sketches to clearly indicate some requirement by
firmly attaching the sketch to the drawing.
Care must be taken to transfer all marks to the "Return Copy" for the Supplier.
Provide adequate (even liberal) clearances so that minor changes such as line size change
will not necessitate an additional squad check change.
Transfer adequate (even liberal) piping loads (design) to the Supplier so that increases in
line size will not require new support design.

Tubes And Terminal

Connections
Actual and allowable tube movements must be indicated on drawing. The Stress group is
responsible to request this data on the supplier drawing.
Decoking connections, if required, are shown and properly oriented for clearance and
accessibility. Check for decoking connections in stack, if required.
Temperature connections: Correct rating, size, type, and properly oriented for clearance
and operation.
Is taper boring required on terminal connections? Refer to Attachment 01.
Are manifolds properly supported, and guides or anchors indicated? (These supports are
normally shown on a detail drawing. The Stress analysis governs.)
Supplier to indicate on drawing, shop tube test pressure plus field test pressure. Field test
pressure to be maximum allowable pressure at 100 degrees F.
If tubes cannot withstand hydrotest pressure required for Fluor Daniel piping, provide
method for blinding during test; check with Piping Supervisor for method of blinding.
Check for high point vents.
Are tube removal doors accessible to a convenient drop area? Orient tube pulling arm
with doors.
Dimensionally locate all terminal connections. Check connections for correct size, type,
rating, and proper orientation for clearance and operation.

Pipe Supports From

Heater
Dimensionally locate loads and indicate maximum deflections of one-fourth inch on steel
members on supplier drawing. (Stress analysis governs.) Give clearances between pipe
and supporting steel for spring or other type of supports. Verify that supplier will allow
supports or guides from heater. The Pipe Stress Group will indicate and locate all special
supports such as counter weights on general arrangement drawings.

Miscellaneous Items
Check heater floor height. Refer to contract standard (narrative specifications) when air
preheater is required. Check clearance under duct.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2580
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 3 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

HEATER SQUAD CHECKING - FIRED EQUIPMENT PIPING

Check instrument connections. Narrative specification governs.

- Orient for most economical arrangement of piping and instrument leads. Check for
accessibility from platform or ladder.
Check stack damper wheel. Locate near or close to heater support leg in general
operating area (unless there is automatic control).
Are explosion doors located away from operating areas and other equipment?
Check observation doors; are they approximately 5'- 0" above platform? Do not obstruct
with internal piping.
Where are burners located? Datasheets will indicate type. Supplier general arrangement
drawing should indicate make, model, and locate connections.
Are snuffing steam connections shown? Size, type, rating, elevation, and orientation must
be indicated.
Stack height agrees with narrative specification? Check for height above adjacent
platforms.
Are floor access openings sized, located, and clear of piping?
Do burners have vertical or horizontal clearance for removal?
Use Fluor Daniel North arrow and orient on Supplier's general arrangement and
foundation loading drawing. Verify that foundation drawing and general arrangement
drawing have same support column orientation.
Is high point of grade shown in elevation on general arrangement drawings? (Reference
elevation 0'- 0" bottom of heater support steel.)
Where are floor sight ports located?
Do header box doors have clearance for opening?

Platform Drawings
The following should agree with heater narrative, Piping specifications, and Structural
contract standard drawings. Check for the following:
Effective widths.
Clearances around crossovers, overhead, and windbracing.
Convection section tube removal doors can be opened without interfering with platform
or handrail. Removable platforms or handrails may be required.
Piping plus insulation clears steel knee braces and wind braces. Check fireproofing
requirements.
Pipe openings located and sized.
Platform design agrees with structural specifications.
- Side or front step-off ladders.
- Maximum pitch and height of stairways runs.
- Maximum runs of ladders. (Intermediate platforms may be required.)
- Area of 200 square feet or more requires additional ladder or stairway for escape.
- Check for access, area, and configuration.

Foundation Loading
Drawing
Check for orientation and location of supports, ladders, and stairways.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2580
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 4 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

HEATER SQUAD CHECKING - FIRED EQUIPMENT PIPING

Drawings That Will

Normally Require
Checking By Piping
The extent of checking these drawings is as outlined under the appropriate section of these
sheets.
General Arrangement Plan and Elevation Drawing
Ladders and Platforms
Foundation Loading and Anchor Bolt location

Detail Drawings That

May Require Checking
By Piping
The extent of checking these detail drawings is limited to those areas which specifically affect
piping design; that is, the preparation of piping arrangement drawings and piping spools.
Burner Outlines
Sootblower Outlines
Air Preheater Outlines and Supporting Drawings
Manifold and Header Drawings
Special Piping Support Details

Drawings That Are

Available For Reference
These drawings do not necessarily require checking by Piping Design. The drawings are to be
checked by appropriate department.
Tube Assembly Drawing
Tube and Return Bend Details
Stack and Breeching Details
Access and Observation Port Details
Header Box Arrangement Details
Tube Support Details
Damper and Damper Control Details
Structural Steel Details
Refractory Details
Instrument Connection Details
Platform and Ladder Details
Parts and Hardware Description and Lists
Shipping Lists and Details
Heater Datasheets
Fire Eye

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2580
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 5 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

HEATER SQUAD CHECKING - FIRED EQUIPMENT PIPING

SQUAD CHECKING
Helpful hints that would improve squad checking effectiveness are as follows:
Create a control list describing briefly all the markups on each drawing and make sure a
copy is forwarded to the Supplier in the transmittal letter. This helps as a reference
during phone calls and project cost control record keeping.
If the markups are not perfectly clear, make a sufficient number of sketches to back up the
changes. Use reference marks or section arrows to clearly indicate the view reference.
Attach copies of the sketches to the squad check. This greatly helps in speeding marks
transfer as well as eliminating the possibilities of errors.
Provide ample design tolerances for possible changes so that changing Supplier criteria is
reduced; for example, a 3-inch line with 1-inch insulation and a 400-pound load is
designed as if it were a 14-inch pipe with a 600-pound design load. Usually, for small
pipes and loads, a 100 percent overage is not expensive. Check with the Pipe Stress
Engineer for design tolerance when loads exceed 1,000 pounds.
When it appears that markups will create significant changes on the design of the heater,
communicate these comments to the Fired Equipment Engineer prior to forwarding the
squad check. Design, scope, schedules, and costs may be adversely affected; for example,
changing vertical heater supports from top to bottom supports.
Always maintain a copy of each squad check.
Do not waste time squad checking detail heater drawings; emphasize the general
arrangement drawing as far as controlling the design.
Have the Stress group squad check the general arrangement drawing during Piping squad
check. Do not waste time rerouting material through Supplier data.
Do not waste time asking questions that could have answers generated by design, for
example, rather than asking the question, "What is projection of 1-1/2 inch snuffing steam
connection?", state that, "Projection of all snuffing connections will be 6 inches." The
Supplier wants answers, not more questions. This is an important item. Many squad
check comments contain too many questions rather that stating conditions or giving
answers.
Make certain that plan and elevation drawings of the general arrangement are squad
checked at the same time. With the Supplier via the Fired Heater Engineer, schedule the
arrival of drawings in related batches rather than piecemeal involvement. It may be wiser
to delay a squad check when there is knowledge of a pending receipt of a related or
critical drawing.
Avoid situations where lines drop through platforms. The squad checking effort to
approve such a scheme is complicated, particularly when there are line size changes.
Also, the structural detail drawings must be available to avoid interferences. The
structural details are not obtainable in the early stages of contract work.
Unless there are great cost differences, it is always better to have the Heater Supplier
provide collection headers when there are more than 2 connections. For example, ring
headers for process outlets of vertical heaters are routed through congested areas where it
is difficult for Fluor Daniel to squad check. Collection headers underneath box heaters
may have 20 connections.
The Supplier is required to design the required supports for headers. In counter weighted
systems, this is difficult to control unless the Supplier has total responsibility. There are
contractual and liability implications present. In terms of squad checking, it is important
to qualify all the interface points between the following:

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2580
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 6 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

HEATER SQUAD CHECKING - FIRED EQUIPMENT PIPING

- Furnished pipe and Fluor Daniel pipe.

- Furnished supports designed by the Supplier and those supports supplied by Fluor
Daniel.
- Instrument connections and instruments provided by Fluor Daniel.
Once terminal loads and movements have been transmitted to Supplier, avoid changes
unless the following conditions exist:
- Supplier cannot or will not accept conditions.
- System will fail unless altered and rerouting of lines is not feasible.
- Do not reduce loads or movements if they have been accepted by the Supplier; a
change in design may require use of the prior conditions. The squad checks are
expensive and time consuming, but an important undertaking. It is the method by
which a Supplier's proposal is qualified to be suitable for a particular installation.
The designer is obligated to conduct the squad checking in a detailed, thorough
manner.

REFERENCES

Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2501: Fired Equipment Piping - General Introduction
Practice 670.250.2505: Fired Equipment Piping - General Discussion
Practice 670.250.2510: Fired Equipment Piping - Narrative Specs
Practice 670.250.2511: Fired Equipment Piping - Datasheets
Practice 670.250.2515: Fired Equipment Piping - Interface Program
Practice 670.250.2516: Fired Equipment Piping - Job Book
Practice 670.250.2520: Fired Equipment Piping - Plot Layout
Practice 670.250.2521: Fired Equipment Piping - Plot Location And Arrangement
Practice 670.250.2525: Fired Equipment Piping - Piping Design
Practice 670.250.2526: Fired Equipment Piping - Burner Piping
Practice 670.250.2530: Fired Equipment Piping - Air Preheaters
Practice 670.250.2535: Fired Equipment Piping - Instruments And Controls
Practice 670.250.2540: Fired Equipment Piping - Snuffing Steam
Practice 670.250.2545: Fired Equipment Piping - Soot Blowers
Practice 670.250.2550: Fired Equipment Piping - Steam Generation
Practice 670.250.2555: Fired Equipment Piping - Steam-Air Decoking
Practice 670.250.2560: Fired Equipment Piping - Heater Platforms
Practice 670.250.2561: Fired Equipment - Ladder And Platform Requirements -
Heaters
Practice 670.250.2580: Heater Squad Checking - Fired Equipment Piping

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2580
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 7 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

HEATER SQUAD CHECKING - FIRED EQUIPMENT PIPING

Practice 670.250.2581: Fired Equipment - Fired Equipment Piping

Practice 670.250.2582: Fired Equipment - Burner Piping
Practice 670.250.2590: Fired Equipment Piping - Pipe Stress

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Heater Squad Checking - Squad Checking Examples

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2705
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

INSTRUMENT PIPING - TAGGING FOR PIPING PLANS, ISOMETRICS, AND MODEL

PURPOSE
This practice illustrates which instrument balloons are to be shown on models, isometrics, and
piping plans.

SCOPE
This practice covers the most commonly used drawing instrument symbols for tagging. It also
provides illustrations of this tagging for pressure, flow, temperature, and level instruments,
and steam traps.

APPLICATION
This practice should be used by Piping Engineers when tagging piping plans, isometrics, and
models.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Drawing Instrument Symbols
Attachment 02:
Pressure Instruments
Attachment 03:
Flow Instruments
Attachment 04:
Temperature Instruments
Attachment 05:
Level Instruments and Steam Traps

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2710
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

INSTRUMENTS - METER RUNS - ORIFICES, FLOW NOZZLES, AND VENTURI TUBES

PURPOSE
This practice is used for determining minimum straight pipe runs needed for various meter run
installations.

SCOPE
This practice includes information on meter runs for orifices, flow nozzles, and venturi tubes.

APPLICATION
This practice will be used as a design guide by Piping Designers. Exceptions to its use will be
only with the approval of the Lead Piping Engineer and Lead Control Systems Engineer.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Meter Runs For Orifices
Attachment 02:
Specialty Meters
Attachment 03:
Meter Runs For Orifices, Flow Nozzles, And Venturi Tubes - General Notes
Attachment 04:
Meter Runs For Orifices, Flow Nozzles, And Venturi Tubes - Schedules 1 Through 8
Figure 1. Schedule 1 - For Orifices And Flow Nozzles
Figure 2. Schedule 2 - For Orifices And Flow Nozzles
Figure 3. Schedule 3 - For Orifices And Flow Nozzles
Figure 4. Schedule 4 - For Orifices And Flow Nozzles
Figure 5. Schedule 5 - For Orifices And Flow Nozzles
Figure 6. Schedule 6 - For Orifices And Flow Nozzles
Figure 7. Schedule 7 - Valves
Figure 8. Schedule 8 - For Venturi Tubes
Figure 9. Typical Piping Arrangement With Fittings Or Bends In The Same Plane
Figure 10. Typical Piping Arrangement With Fittings Or Bends Not In The Same Plane
Figure 11. Typical Piping Arrangement At Boiler Outlet

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2710
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

SPECIALTY METERS

Types of Meters Straight Run Requirement

(In Nominal Pipe Diameters)
Upstream Downstream
(Refer to Note 2) (Refer to Note 2)
Magnetic Flow Meter 5 5
Flow Nozzle Refer to Note 1 Refer to Note 1
Corielious Magnetic Flow 5 5
Straight Tube Corielious 10 10
Positive Displacement Meter Refer to Note 1 Refer to Note 1
Turbine Flow Meter Refer to Note 1 Refer to Note 1
Vortex Meter Refer to Note 1 Refer to Note 1
Anubar (Pitot Tube) Refer to Note 1 Refer to Note 1
Venturi Tube Refer to Note 1 Refer to Note 1
Rotameter 3 3
Sonics Meter Refer to Note 1 Refer to Note 1
Insertion Type Refer to Note 1 Refer to Note 1

NOTES:

1. Use same upstream and downstream straight run length as orifice

flanges.

2. Listed dimensions are for layout purposes. Verify upstream and

downstream requirements when the Supplier is selected.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2710
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 03 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

METER RUN FOR ORIFICES, FLOW NOZZLES, AND VENTURI TUBES - GENERAL NOTES

1. Schedules 1 through 8, shown on Attachment 04, sheets 1 through 4, will apply in all cases except that 6 diameters will
normally be used for the downstream run. Upstream runs will be based on a d/D ratio of 0.75. Deviations from these
upstream and downstream runs will require the approval of Control Systems Engineering.

2. Attachment 04, sheets 5, 6, and 7, show typical piping arrangements and schedules that apply.

3. For practical purposes, a "diameter" (as used to measure the length of straight pipe) may be taken as a linear distance
equal to the nominal pipe size in inches.

4. The upstream and downstream dimensions shown are minimum, and will be increased where practical.

5. If possible, the piping layout will avoid the use of straightening vanes. Use of straightening vanes requires the approval
of Control Systems Engineering.

6. The dimensions given on Schedules 1 through 7 are for orifice flanges or fittings having flange taps and for flow nozzles.
When pipe taps (2-1/2 and 8 diameters) are used, the upstream dimension will be increased by 2 diameters and the
downstream dimension by 8 diameters.

7. When piping arrangement is not covered by a schedule, consult with Control Systems Engineering.

8. Meter run schedules 1 through 8 are from ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers). Application - Part II Of
Fluid Meters, 6th Edition, 1971, Interim Supplement 19.5 On Instruments And Apparatus, Page 180.

9. Meter run schedules 1 through 8 show the recommended minimum lengths of pipe preceding orifices, flow nozzles, and
venturi tubes. All control valves, including regulators, should be located on outlet side of primary element.

10. The following chart is applicable to meter run schedules 1 through 8.

0.0 - 0.50 Ratio 0.50 - 0.60 Ratio 0.60 - 0.70 Ratio 0.70 - 0.80 Ratio
Fittings Allowed 1. Tees 1. Tees 1. Gate Valves 1. Gate Valve
on Outlet Side of 2. 45º Ells 2. Gate Valves 2. Y-Fittings 2. Long Radius
Straight Pipe 3. Gate Valves 3. Y-Fittings 3. Separators Bend
4. Y-Fittings 4. Exp Joints (If inlet neck is
5. Exp Joints 5. Separators 1 dia. lg.)
6. Separators (If inlet neck is
1 dia lg.)

11. For meter run Schedules 1 through 8, the absolute minimum downstream run will be 6 diameters if a control valve,
regulator, partially closed gate valve, or check valve is the first downstream fitting.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2790
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

INSTRUMENTS - PIPING LAYOUT REQUIREMENTS MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

PURPOSE
This practice provides piping layout information for a range of situations not covered by other
documents.

SCOPE
This practice covers the following areas:
Butterfly Valve
Rotameter
Ring Joint Orifice Plate Holder

APPLICATION
This practice combines various information not readily found and is utilized by the piping
department to facilitate the layout effort.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Butterfly Valve
Attachment 02:
Rotameter Piping
Attachment 03:
Ring Joint Orifice Plate Holder

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1060
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 1 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines to ensure a consistent and complete supplier document
review. It applies to all projects.

SCOPE
This practice provides procedure details and guidelines in reviewing and handling of supplier
documents.

APPLICATION
This practice should be referred to during the early stages of the project as TDC (Technical
Data Control) is set up and as supplier documents arrive in-house. It should be referenced by
the Piping Design Supervisor and Piping Designers throughout the project in relationship to
squad checking and review of all supplier data and documentation.

RESPONSIBILITY
The Design Supervisor will enforce the utilization of this practice.

INTRODUCTION
The Piping Design Supervisor should review the project schedule to ensure that supplier
documents to be received are scheduled in a logical time sequence to support engineering and
piping design.

PROCEDURE DETAILS

General
Supplier documentation for review may occur in any of the following forms:
Catalogue Cut Sheets
Supplier Preliminary Drawings
Supplier Approval drawings being returned to the Supplier
Certified Drawings

Approval Drawings
Supplier documentation should be received by the Piping Design Supervisor or his designee.
TDC should be instructed as to who will receive the documentation ensuring that all items are
reviewed and processed expeditiously. Return date and signoff sheet should be part of routing
package.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1060
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 2 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW

CATALOGUE CUT
SHEETS
On certain projects, the schedule sometimes dictates that supplier catalogue cut sheets be used
to allow design to proceed. When utilizing catalogue cut sheets for layout, the following
should be remembered:
Catalog cut sheets are usually adequate for "off the shelf" items; i.e. small pumps, filters,
valves, double pipe heat exchangers, air handling units, etc.
Provide adequate clearances for service door swing, air flow requirements, or any other
equipment requirements.
When using cut sheets for layout, assure that adequate space is available to accommodate
growth of the equipment (since this is usually in the early stage of design and sizes and
capacities are still changing).
Provide space for removal of equipment internals.
Estimate nozzle sizes and use preliminary vessel sketches (if available) locating nozzles,
manways, etc. for proper orientation.
The Design Supervisor and Area Lead Designers should be aware of the Equipment Engineer's
responsibility and establish a working relationship to ensure that information is exchanged as
it becomes available.

DOCUMENTATION

Drawing Review
The drawings are to be distributed by the Design Supervisor or his designee, to the applicable
Area Lead Designer for review. All comments are to be marked neatly in red on review prints
or in pencil on sepia prints. The drawing review should include, but not necessarily be limited
to the following:
The overall package should be reviewed in general to verify that all drawings that
comprise the package have been received.
Review for adequacy of dimensioning on drawings, i.e. ensure that all nozzles and
openings are completely dimensioned.
Review the drawings against the P&IDs to verify that all piping/instrument connections
are accounted for.
Review the Bill of Material to ensure that piping nozzles are in accordance with
applicable piping specifications (i.e., material of construction, pressure rating, pipe
schedules, etc.).
Set manway/handhole locations/orientations to suit optimum accessibility.
Orient piping connections to suit piping layouts.
Verify that type of end connections on the nozzles are clearly called out i.e., buttweld,
flanged, etc. (if flanged, type of flange as well as flange orientation should be specified).
Pipe stress review to locate pipe supports/pads.
Ladders, platforms and other attachments shown in proper location.
If the supplier drawings are from a foreign manufacturer, verify that piping connections
meet ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials), ANSI (American National
Standards Institute), or other applicable codes.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1060
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 3 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW

Orient agitators, dip tubes, etc. to allow for pull space around equipment and structural
steel.
Review the equipment for constructibility; i.e., can the equipment be installed after
adjacent equipment has been set and structural steel installed? Sequencing equipment
arrival on site should be coordinated with the equipment group and the Construction
Engineer.
When equipment is mating to other equipment (i.e., thermosyphon reboilers to vessels)
verify that mating flanges between the equipment are identical.
Check that all equipment weights are supplied, maintenance requirements stated, required
lifting lugs, and any special shipping, maintenance, lifting and supporting considerations
are listed.

Drawing Returned To
Supplier
When supplier drawings are returned to the supplier with comments, TDC should distribute
prints of the marked-up drawings to the applicable disciplines. Refer to Attachment 01 for
sample stamp and review codes.
The Design Supervisor, or his designee, should review the marked-up prints to ensure that all
comments have been incorporated. Any discrepancies should be pointed out to the
responsible engineer immediately. Additional comments added by other disciplines should be
reviewed to determine the impact on engineering/design development.

Certified Drawings
The certified supplier drawings should be reviewed to verify that marked-up comments have
been incorporated by the supplier. Any deviation from the marked-up prints should be
forwarded to the responsible engineer.

SUPPLIER FILES
The Piping Design Supervisor, or his designee, will set up discipline files for supplier
documentation where the latest revisions are kept. As revisions are received, the superseded
copies are stamped "superseded" and kept for record.
Refer to Practice 670.250.0790: Filing - Project Discipline Responsibilities.

REFERENCES
For more detailed information and squad checking lists for various types of equipment see:
General Engineering
Practice 670.200.1060: Supplier Drawing And Data Review
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.0790: Filing - Project Discipline Responsibilities
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1061: Supplier Drawing And Data Review - Exchangers

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1060
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 4 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW

Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1062: Supplier Drawing And Data Review - Pumps and Turbines
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1063: Supplier Drawing And Data Review - Reciprocating
Compressors

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Sample Stamp and Review Code

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1061
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 1 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW - EXCHANGERS

PURPOSE
This practice provides a general guide and checklist for squad checking supplier drawings of
various types of exchangers, to ensure all piping discipline needs are met and responsibilities
are fulfilled.

SCOPE
This practice provides:
General squad checking items common to all exchangers.
Specific squad checking items that relate to the following types of exchangers:
- Shell and Tube
- Air Coolers
- Reboiler (Kettle)
- Thermosyphon Reboiler
- Double Pipe
- Plate and Frame
General notes and instructions.

APPLICATION
The primary function of squad checking supplier drawings for exchangers is to ensure all
design criteria are met, data is correctly documented and to convey any required changes to
the supplier. Supplier drawings should show all required information to allow for accurate
piping design and layout. Refer to Practice 670.250.1060: Supplier Drawing And Data
Review, for guidelines in reviewing and handling of supplier drawings.

RESPONSIBILITY
The Design Supervisor and Area Lead Designer shall enforce the utilization of this standard.
The Piping Designer/Checker responsible for squad checking the applicable drawings shall
ensure all supplier data/drawings are carefully reviewed. Caution, squad checking should be
avoided on all unchecked certified drawings submitted for approval.

Common To All
Exchangers
The following general list of squad check items is applicable to the various types of
exchangers.
Nozzle size, rating, and orientation.
Location of nozzles and supports.
All location dimensions.
Miscellaneous connections in each nozzle (if required by equipment specification) and
orientation of each.
Correct equipment number and service.
Nameplate in visible location.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1061
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 2 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW - EXCHANGERS

Lifting lugs or davits required.

Flow sheet check.
Maximum and shop hydrotest pressures.
Equipment weights.
Required maintenance space and lifting or removal requirements.

SHELL AND TUBE

The following are specific squad check items for shell and tube exchangers.
Outside diameter and total length.
Slotted hole in correct support for expansion (verify with stress).
Clearance between outside diameter of bottom shell nozzle flange and face of concrete
foundation.
Type of channel cover and shell cover.
Adequate dimensions for unit totally assembled.
Weight of tube bundle required for maintenance information.
If stacked and only one exchanger is shown on print, request stacking arrangement so that
all nozzle locations will be verified correct.
Stacked exchangers with high temperature differential between shells or between shell
and channel nozzle, shall have stress group check for best nozzle arrangement.
On stacked units check for the correct number, material, and type of bolts, gaskets and
shims furnished.

AIR COOLERS
The following are specific squad check items for forced draft and induced draft air cooler
arrangements.
Centerline dimensions of support columns.
All platforms and structural steel (cross bracing) should be shown.
Headroom below fan motor.
Platform access to fan motor, vibration switches and header box where required.
Expansion of tubes and location of anchor points.
Header box vent and drain (when required).
Show any additional piping loads on air cooler support columns.
Allowable nozzle loads.
Allowable nozzle movements.
Weights of tubes and total unit for correct support design.

REBOILER (KETTLE)
The following are specific squad check items for reboiler exchangers.
Location of level gage, level controller and dimensions between connections.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1061
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 3 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW - EXCHANGERS

Offset dimension between centerlines of shell outside diameter and channel outside
diameter.
See items under shell and tube exchanger squad checklist.

THERMOSYPHON
REBOILER
The following are specific squad check items for thermosyphon reboiler.
Dimensions between nozzles on reboiler (to match with vessel nozzles).
Support requirements.
Clearances for tube pulling or bundle and rodding, if required.

DOUBLE PIPE
The following are specific squad check items for double pipe exchangers.
Verify span of double pipe exchanger to ensure that no additional support is required.
Proper stacking and flow arrangement, verify with specification sheet and flow diagram.
All units are shown on supplier drawings.
Tube pulling area required, and type of maintenance.

PLATE AND FRAME

The following are specific squad check items for plate and frame exchangers.
Required space for plate removals and maintenance.
Nozzle connection type and bolt stud lengths if supplied with exchangers.
Number of required plates and plate support frame length.
All nozzles identification: inlet/outlet and cold/hot side for correct piping connections.
Full dimensions supports and bolt holes.

GENERAL NOTES
The narrative specifications and mechanical equipment datasheets define the exchanger
design; as required verify all design criteria with these documents and the project standards.
General sources of reference material to check against should be as follows:
Piping Layout Drawings
Structural/Civil Drawings
Mechanical Equipment Datasheets
Process Flow Diagrams.
The following sources should be checked for special requirements:
Engineering Conference Notes
Fluor Daniel Narrative, Equipment Specifications
Supplier Equipment Drawing Notes

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1061
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 4 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW - EXCHANGERS

Fluor Daniel Mechanical Equipment Engineer

Supplier Service Manual

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1060: Supplier Drawing And Data Review
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2600: Exchangers - TEMA Nomenclature
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2601: Exchangers - Equipment Location And Piping Layout Shell
And Tube Heat Exchangers
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2602: Exchangers - Forced Draft And Induced Draft Air Cooler
Arrangements
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2603: Exchangers - Double Pipe Exchangers Piping Arrangements

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1062
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 1 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW - PUMPS AND TURBINES

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines and checklists for seller drawing squad checks of various
types of pumps and general purpose turbines.

SCOPE
This practice includes information about the following major topics:
General pump squad check items for various types of pumps and turbines
Specific squad check items for certain types of pumps
Special squad check items for general purpose turbines
General notes

APPLICATION
The primary function of squad checking seller drawings for pumps and turbines is to convey
any required changes to the seller, and to ensure that all design criteria are met and that data
are correctly documented. Seller drawings should show all required information to allow for
accurate piping design and layout. Refer to Practice 670.250.1060: Supplier Drawing And
Data Review for guidelines in reviewing and handling of seller drawings.

RESPONSIBILITY
The design supervisor and area lead designer shall enforce the utilization of this practice. The
piping designer/checker who is responsible for squad checking the applicable drawings shall
ensure all seller data and drawings are carefully reviewed. The department manager shall
maintain and revise this practice as required.

GENERAL PUMP
SQUAD CHECKLIST
The following list of general squad check items is applicable to the various types of pumps
including centrifugal, reciprocating (piston), rotary, vertical in-line, and vertical sump pumps.
Overall dimensions:
Be sure to adequately dimension for space and orientation requirements, including
attached driver and pump baseplate.
External connections:
Be sure that the location for external connection points of piping are clearly sized and
dimensioned.
Drawings:
Review the drawings against the P&IDs (process and instrument diagrams) to verify that
all piping/instrument connections are accounted for.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1062
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 2 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW - PUMPS AND TURBINES

Suction and discharge nozzles:

Check that the correct size, rating, and facing are indicated on the seller drawing. Ensure
that piping nozzles and connections are in accordance with applicable piping
specifications and other project specific requirements (such as type of material, pressure
ratings, pipe schedules, and types of facings). Ensure that nozzles are adequately
dimensioned from shaft centerline and referenced to the pump baseplate.
Check clearance behind nozzle flange to allow for nuts on bolting make-up.
Engineering codes and standards:
If the seller drawings are from an offshore manufacturer, verify that all piping connections
meet ASTM, ANSI, or other applicable codes.
Allowable nozzle loads:
The maximum limitations for allowable loads, forces, and moments by the pump seller
should be clearly indicated on the pump datasheet or drawing.
Auxiliary piping connections:
Check against auxiliary and P&IDs for identifying symbols, size, rating, and facing.
Connection points should be verified for ease of installation. Be sure casing vent and
drain and baseplate drain connections are also indicated.
Maintenance requirements:
Check against piping layout drawing for overhead clearances and required breakout
flanges in piping for removal of pump and driver.
Equipment weights:
Driver and pump weights should be listed to determine handling requirements.
Pump baseplate:
Insure that adequate dimensions are given to enable support foundation size and anchor
bolts to be correctly designed. The relationship between the baseplate and pump should
be fully dimensioned.
Foundation/support requirement:
Check that all pump extremities and auxiliaries are located so that there is no interference
with the designed pump foundation/support.
Driver outline (motor):
Check against piping layout drawings for space and orientation requirements. Be sure the
size and weight is adequately defined to establish clearance for removal and maintenance.

ADDITIONAL SQUAD
CHECK ITEMS
The following specific items apply to certain types of pumps as listed:
Reciprocating (piston) pumps - rod removal:
Location and extent of clearance required for piston pull and rod removal.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1062
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 3 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW - PUMPS AND TURBINES

Rotary pumps - screw removal:

Location and extent of clearance required for screw removal.
Vertical pumps:
Check vertical height of pump to determine overhead clearance for pulling of pump.
Vertical sump pumps:
Check length of pump from mounting surface to extreme underside of pump. This is to
determine the clearance for sump depth and overhead clearance for pump removal.
Determine whether complete sump cover is supplied with pump and whether it is fully
dimensioned to fit the top of the sump as required by civil/structural drawings.
Check the requirements of level control system fittings on side of sump pump.
Extreme out-to-out dimension of pump suction shaft to be checked to determine clearance
to sump walls.

TURBINE SQUAD
CHECKLIST
The following specific checklist applies to squad checking of seller drawings and for general
purpose steam turbine pump drivers.
For commonly checked items such as overall dimensions, maintenance requirements,
removal clearances, and auxiliaries, refer to previous section, General Pump Squad
Checklist.
Inlet and exhaust:
Check size rating and facing of these connections and be sure that they are dimensionally
located and in accordance with applicable piping specifications.
Verify that exhaust connection is high enough above grade to accommodate boot, trap,
and drain requirements.
Trip-throttle valve (seller supplied):
Check for clearances around valve and equipment for operation, maintenance, and
removal.
Loading limitations:
Check limitations to loads, forces, and moments from Fluor Daniel piping, and forward to
the stress group.
Drain and leakoff connections:
Check against piping layout drawing for clearances to foundation support and
accessibility in operation of valves. Check mechanical auxiliary flow diagrams for valve
and piping requirements. Common drain and leakoff connections are as follows:
Steam chest drains
Casing drains
Shaft packing leakoffs
Trip valve or trip and throttle valve above seat drains
Trip valve or trip and throttle valve and governor valve steam leakoffs
GENERAL NOTES

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1062
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 4 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW - PUMPS AND TURBINES

For all seller auxiliary schematic drawings, verify with Fluor Daniel auxiliary flow diagrams
for process requirements. Check that all devices and piping furnished by seller and all devices
and piping required to complete the installation have been so indicated.
General sources of reference material to check against should be as follows:
Piping layout drawings
Structural/civil drawings
Mechanical equipment datasheets
Auxiliary diagrams and P&IDs
Piping Material Specifications
The following sources should be checked for special requirements as they apply to seller
equipment:
Engineering conference notes
Fluor Daniel narrative equipment specifications
Seller equipment drawing notes
Fluor Daniel mechanical equipment engineer
Seller's service manual
Specific project requirements
Squad checking should be avoided on all unchecked certified drawings submitted for
approval.

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1060: Supplier Drawing And Data Review
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2350: Pumps And Turbines - Typical Piping Arrangement For
Centrifugal Pumps
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2352: Pumps And Turbines - Pump Piping (Steam) Turbines And
Reciprocating Pumps
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2353: Pumps And Turbines - Misc Pump Piping - Coolant, Flush
Oil, Vent, And Drain

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1063
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 1 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW - RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS

PURPOSE
This practice provides a general guide for squad checking seller drawings of reciprocating
compressors and associated drawings.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
RESPONSIBILITY
SELLER DRAWING LIST
GENERAL SQUAD CHECKLIST
ADDITIONAL SQUAD CHECK ITEMS
GENERAL NOTES
REFERENCES

APPLICATION
The primary function of squad checking seller drawings for reciprocating compressors is to
convey any required changes to the seller, and to ensure that design criteria are met and that
data are correctly documented. Seller drawings should show all required information to allow
for accurate piping design and layout. Refer to Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.1060:
Supplier Drawing And Data Review for guidelines in reviewing and handling of seller
drawings.

RESPONSIBILITY
Design Supervisor and Area Lead Designer will enforce the utilization of this standard.
Piping Designer/Checker who is responsible for squad checking the applicable drawings will
ensure that seller data and drawings are carefully reviewed.

SELLER DRAWING
LIST
The following is a list of seller drawings that Piping Designer may be required to squad check:
Composite outline drawing of driver and compressor
Driver outline
Jacket water piping schematic
Lube oil schematic
Packing vent and drain schematic
Interstage equipment and piping drawings
Lube oil cooler outline
Oil filter outline
Lube oil pump outline (when not integral part of compressor)
Auxiliary lube oil pump outline

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1063
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 2 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW - RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS

Gage board outline

Vent and drain schematic (for hazardous gases)
Moisture trap outline
Lube oil piping drawing

GENERAL SQUAD
CHECKLIST

Composite Outline Of
Compressor And Driver
Overall Dimensions:
Adequately dimensioned for space and orientation requirements. Be sure that the location
for external connection points of piping are clearly dimensioned. Check totally enclosed
motors for maintenance requirements with Electrical Supervisor.
Piston Pull:
Check piping layout drawing for space requirements.
Centerline of Shaft above Floor:
Check against the piping layout elevation requirements. Check the horizontal offset
between compressor shaft and driver shaft if gear box is required.
Cylinder Valve:
Check cylinder valve orientation and removal requirements plus manual clearance pocket
requirements against suction and discharge bottle orientation and nozzle lengths.
Cylinder Support:
Check cylinder support and distance piece support (if required) against piping layout
elevation and check clearance from bottom bottle to cylinder support.
Dimensions:
Check dimensions from centerline of cylinder to inlet and outlet face connections.
Suction and Discharge Size, Rating, and Facing:
Ensure that piping nozzles are in accordance with applicable piping specifications for
items such as material type, pressure ratings, pipe schedules, and type of facing. If the
seller drawings are from an offshore manufacturer, verify that piping connections meet
ASTM, ANSI, or other applicable codes. Ensure that all nozzles are adequately
dimensioned.
Stud Projections:
The bottom cylinder bottle connection must be long enough for double nuts (stud
removal) for bottle removal.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1063
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 3 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW - RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS

Drawings:
Review the drawings against the P&IDs to verify that piping and instrument connections
are accounted for.
Maintenance Lifts:
Check against piping layout drawing for handling requirements. Verify weight of
heaviest component that might be removed and check facility to be employed. Also,
check piping layout for overhead clearance and required breakout flanges in piping.
Allowable Nozzle Loads:
The maximum limitations for allowable loads, forces, and moments by the seller should
be clearly indicated on the compressor drawing or datasheet.
Foundation Requirement:
Check against compressor structure plan drawing. On seller's first squad check, show
extent of concrete around the unit and the minimum clearance dimension to edge of
concrete for seller fittings, piping, or down connections to auxiliary equipment.
Auxiliary Piping Connections:
Check against auxiliary and P&ID (process and instrument diagram) for identifying
symbols, size, rating, and facing. Connection points should be verified for erection ease.

Driver Outline (Motor)

Overall Dimensions:
Check that all dimensions required for space and orientation are shown. If external piping
connections are required, be sure they are sized and dimensioned correctly. Also, if
driver sound enclosure is required, check overall dimensions and accessibility to driver.
Rotor Removal:
Check for space and handling requirements.
Equipment Weight:
Weights should be listed to determine handling requirements in accordance with the
piping layout drawing.

Driver Outline (Turbine)

Refer to Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.1062: Supplier Drawing and Data Review -
Pumps and Turbines, for seller squad checklists on special purpose steam turbines.

ADDITIONAL SQUAD
CHECK ITEMS
Additional items that must be squad checked but that may or may not appear on the composite
outline drawing are indicated as follows:

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1063
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 4 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW - RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS

Jacket Water Schematic:

Check only that routing of supply and return piping can accommodate seller's
connections.
Lube Oil Schematic:
If piping not furnished by seller, check that routing of supply and return piping can
accommodate seller's connections.
Packing Vent and Drain Schematic:
Check that routing of piping can accommodate seller's connections.
Interstage Equipment and Piping Drawing:
Verify accessibility, removal, and operation requirements. Check with stress for support
requirements, especially on cylinder mounted intercoolers and furnished piping.
Lube Oil Cooler Requirements:
Check bundle pull area only upon evaluation of main suction and discharge piping
routing. If cooler is located below steel platforming, removable floor steel is required.
Check weight of these lifts involved.
Oil Filter Outline:
Check size, rating, facing, and dimensional data for piping connections only if Fluor
Daniel is furnishing the piping.
Lube Oil Pump Outline:
Lube oil pump outline and auxiliary lube oil pump outline (when not integral part of
compressor): For pump squad checklist, refer to Piping Engineering Practice
670.250.1062.
Gage Board:
Check for accessibility and orientation.
Vent and Drain Schematic (For hazardous gases):
Check that routing of piping can accommodate seller's connections.
Moisture Trap Outline:
If trap is to be used in unfurnished piping, check operational requirements with the
mechanical engineer.
Lube Oil Piping:
Check accessibility of in-line items and support requirements.

GENERAL NOTES
For reciprocating compressors, the lube oil system equipment is usually mounted on the
compressor and supplied and piped by the seller.
For all seller schematic drawings, verify with Fluor Daniel auxiliary flow diagrams for process
requirements. Check that all devices and piping furnished by the seller, and devices and
piping required to complete the installation have been so indicated.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1063
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 5 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

SUPPLIER DRAWING AND DATA REVIEW - RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS

Following are general sources of reference material to check:

Piping layout drawings
Structural and Civil drawings
Mechanical equipment datasheets
Auxiliary and process flow diagrams
The following sources should be checked for special requirements as they apply to seller
equipment:
Engineering conference notes
Fluor Daniel narrative equipment specifications
Seller equipment drawing notes
Fluor Daniel mechanical equipment engineer
Seller's service manual
Squad checking should be avoided on all unchecked certified drawings submitted for
approval.

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1060: Supplier Drawing And Data Review
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1062: Supplier Drawing And Data Review - Pumps And Turbines
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2470: Compressor Piping - Reciprocating Compressors - Piping
And Arrangement

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2210
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - RESPONSIBILITIES

PURPOSE
This practice defines the responsibilities of the Piping Designer for layout, design, and support
of all piping systems.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
RESPONSIBILITY
TERMINOLOGY
STRESS DESIGN RESPONSIBILITIES
SUPPORT CRITERIA
STRESS ENGINEER RESPONSIBILITIES
REFERENCES

APPLICATION
This practice applies to all Piping Designers on all Fluor Daniel projects.

RESPONSIBILITY
Assigned Project Piping Engineer, Lead Design Supervisor, and Lead Stress Engineer are
responsible for implementing this practice.

TERMINOLOGY
Layout and Design: The arrangement of all equipment; the routing of the piping that
connects the equipment; and the conceptual definition of hard supports, pre-engineered,
and engineered supports.
Hard Supports: Structural steel or concrete structures provided by the structural
department.
Pre-Engineered Supports: Supports such as base supports, rod hangers, shoes, guides,
and anchors as shown in the detail practices listed in Piping Engineering Practice
670.250.4200: Table Of Contents: Fabrication Details.
Engineered Supports: Supports such as spring hangers, spring can base supports,
snubbers, and constant support spring hangers specially designed by Stress Engineer for a
specific location.

STRESS DESIGN
RESPONSIBILITIES

Overview
Piping Designer will create a sound piping layout and a design that includes the following
items:
Accurate interpretation of the P&ID (Piping And Instrumentation Diagram).

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2210
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - RESPONSIBILITIES

Routing of the line.

Correct mechanical construction of the piping materials and components.
An evaluation of the line's workability regarding stress and flexibility.
Incorporating Stress Engineer's comments and requirements on lines analyzed by stress.
Proper support of the line during operation, maintenance, and hydrotest.
Stress Engineer supports Piping Designer's effort. Stress Engineer verifies that the design
meets applicable criteria; assists in finding solutions to complex problems; helps to optimize
the original layout of equipment and equipment support requirements; and designs engineered
items such as spring hangers and flexible joints.

Policy Statement
Piping Designer is responsible for the layout, design, and support of all piping systems and is
also responsible for the following items, obtained by using the applicable sections of the
Piping technical practices:
Locating supports, guides, anchors, compressor hold downs, and hanger rods.
Providing prespring, cold spring, and clearance required for line expansion and additional
line flexibility.
Transmitting and handling stress sketches in complete compliance with procedures
outlined in Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2220: Stress Design - Sketch Procedure.
Piping Designer is not responsible for the flexibility calculations nor the validity of such
calculations made by the Stress Engineer. Designer is responsible for any calculations or
flexibility analysis that was undertaken and resolved without Stress Supervisor's approval.

Design Guidelines
The following guidelines apply to piping design stress considerations:
Prefer pipe routing, fittings, and loops to provide flexibility. Where space and other
limitations preclude this approach, request assistance from Project Lead Stress Engineer.
Design piping to require a minimum number of anchors and guides.
Keep weight stresses off equipment nozzles using base supports and anchors, or rod
hangers or structural supports.
To obtain flexibility that accommodates expansion at towers and drums, arrange the
equipment locations and nozzle orientations so that the natural run of the piping will
provide sufficient flexibility.
Note!!! For hot piping, do not locate nozzles so that the most direct pipe routing is the
end result.
When computing stresses and allowing for expansion, use the worst case operating
conditions (hot line and cold tower, or vice versa, or both: 1 pump hot, 1 pump cold).
Consider startup conditions when lines and equipment are brought up to operating
conditions from the cold conditions. Consider flexibility for lines that may be steam or
hot gas purged and that are subject to regeneration, decoking, and dryout conditions.
Ensure that outdoor piping in cold climates can contract the required amount.
Investigate expansion, or the lack of it, in closed relief systems and hot blowdown
systems.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2210
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 3 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - RESPONSIBILITIES

Calculate and correctly apply the thermal expansion of the pipe to select the proper shoe
length.
Incorporate rigid supports for exhaust stacks of relief systems venting to the atmosphere.
To avoid differential expansion problems, investigate equipment tube anchors on vertical
and horizontal tube heaters.
Investigate cold piping conditions at bypasses around exchangers.
Make the branch lines more flexible rather than installing expansion loops or expansion
joints in the header.
Investigate spring supporting or Teflon mounting pumps instead of using flexible piping
on hot pump suction lines.
Apply cold spring and prespring to piping for the following reasons:
- Detailed stress analysis requires it.
- It maintains adequate pipe spacing.
Take cold spring into account during analysis, and indicate it on drawings to ensure sound
design.
To maintain adequate pipe spacing, use cold spring to make clearance corrections in pipe
groups or racks, thus preventing excessive spreading between lines. Line size has no
bearing on this. Show cold spring with 50 percent of the total movement at operating
temperature. There is no minimum limit to the amount of cold spring that may be used;
however, consider using less than 1 inch cold spring only where dictated by the design
conditions.
Use extreme care in selecting the maximum temperature used to calculate expansion. The
operating temperature often is not the maximum temperature experienced by the process
lines. For instance, most process lines must be steamed out at higher temperatures than
those encountered during normal operation.
Both Piping Designer and Stress Engineer must investigate using engineered expansion
joints and other flexible connectors to eliminate piping forces on equipment. No
expansion joint, either metal or elastomer bellows, shall be specified or purchased without
the approval of Stress Group Supervisor or Project Lead Stress Engineer.
Guide axial expansion joints on each side and anchor at changes of direction of pipe runs
to take hydrostatic thrust, friction force, velocity thrust, and the mechanical spring rate of
the joint.

SUPPORT CRITERIA
Hard supports and pipe supported by pre-engineered or engineered element are to be designed
in, not added on.
During layout, Designer should plan, visualize, define, and communicate to Stress Engineer
the method of support for all pipe lines.
Talk early with Structural Engineer to establish concepts and schedule requirements.
Continue this communication throughout the project, providing detailed definitions of support
locations, anchor locations, anchor forces, and other data required for support design.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2210
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 4 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - RESPONSIBILITIES

STRESS ENGINEER
RESPONSIBILITIES
Lead Stress Engineer must validate calculations and flexibility analysis provided to Piping
Designer and must further validate items listed in Policy 1 of the Pipe Stress Analyst Design
Guide (refer to Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.1201: Piping Stress Analysis - General
Operating Practices.

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1201: Piping Stress Analysis - General Operating Practices
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1202: Piping Stress Analysis - Limiting Criteria On Equipment
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2220: Stress Design - Sketch Procedure
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.4200: Table Of Contents: Fabrication Details

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2220
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - SKETCH PROCEDURE

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for preparing and submitting piping sketches for stress
analysis and ensures that these sketches are complete and contain the necessary information.
This practice eliminates sketching of lines that can be given approval by other means such as
inspection at model or equipment study, and provides the Piping Supervisor with a method to
verify that the isometric checker has reviewed the Stress Sketch.

SCOPE
This practice provides direction for the interface between Piping Design and Pipe Stress
during the stress sketch development and isometric sign-off phase of the contract.

APPLICATION
This practice will be implemented during the piping layout phase of the contract. The Piping
Design Supervisor and the Pipe Stress Engineer will utilize this practice to ensure that stress
related requirements are properly integrated into the piping design.

ACTIVITIES/
RESPONSIBILITIES
Step-by-step activities and the responsible parties involved in implementing this practice are
outlined in Attachment 01.

TERMINOLOGY
Formal Analysis: A system requiring a manual stress review or a formal computer analysis;
however, the Stress Engineer may require that certain lines be sketched in order to determine
if a formal analysis is required.

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2221: Stress Design - Sketch Information
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2250: Stress Design - Piping Flexibility Log

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Responsibilities And Activity Descriptions

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2220
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

RESPONSIBILITIES AND ACTIVITY DESCRIPTIONS

Sequence Responsibility Activity Description

1 Lead Stress Engineer Review line list using contract specifications and flow diagrams to determine
initially which lines require sketches (formal submittal) and mark the line list under
stress column accordingly.
2 Unit Piping Supervisor Refer to line list and initiate Flexibility Log listing line numbers to be sketched.
Refer to Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2250: Stress Design - Piping
Flexibility Log.
3 Unit Piping Supervisor / Jointly review layouts and model as this work progresses. Prior to drawing sketch,
Stress Engineer verify if a formal analysis is actually required for the lines originally listed in the
line list. Review closely for any problem areas or additional lines which may
require formal analysis. Update line list and Flexibility Log accordingly.
4 Layout Designer Initiate a sketch / DWD for each line listed in the Flexibility Log. The intent is to
provide the Stress Engineer with a complete system showing all lines of a system
that affect the piping flexibility of that system. Complex or large systems may
require more than 1 sketch or the system may be drawn on roll size sheet.
5 Layout Design Sign off and date in spaces provided after insuring all required data has been
provided. Submit sketch to Unit Supervisor for review.
6 Unit Piping Supervisor Review sketch for completeness. Sign off and forward.
7 Unit Piping Supervisor or Order 2 prints of Stress Sketch and place 1 in Stress file for reference until original
Designee (Piping Assistant is returned. Transmit Stress Sketch original and 1 print (work print) to Stress
or Contract Clerk) Engineer. Post date "to" Stress in Flexibility Log. For revisions, erase dates to and
from Stress in Flexibility Log and post new date to Stress for revision.
8 Stress Engineer Inspect line and either approve by inspection, start test calculations or start formal
calculations. If sketch is incomplete or routing is unacceptable, hand carry to Unit
Supervisor to rework. Make recommendations to ensure a prompt solution to the
problem.
9 Stress Engineer Add all Stress comments and notes directly on original in red. If necessary, circle
comments in red so they stand out. Complete Stress approval and stress stamp and
indicate if sketch is approved, not approved, or approved as marked.
10 Stress Engineer Sign off in space provided, run 1 print of sketch for stress file and return original to
Unit Piping Supervisor.
11 Unit Piping Supervisor / Review stress comments with Layout Designer. Transmit loads and other relevant
Layout Designer data to affect disciplines. Forward original for filing. For checker initiated changes
and revisions, review stress comments with checker.
12 Unit Piping Supervisor or Place original in Stress sketch file binder. Remove and destroy print from file.
Piping Assistant / Contract Post date "from" Stress in Flexibility Log.
Clerk
13 Unit Piping Supervisor Continuously monitor stress file to ensure isometric and model include stress
requirements.
14 Assigned Designers Continuously monitor stress file to ensure isometric and model include stress
requirements.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2220
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 2 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

RESPONSIBILITIES AND ACTIVITY DESCRIPTIONS

Sequence Responsibility Activity Description

Checking
15 Piping Checker Review line list and Flexibility Log to determine which sketches pertain to area.
Compare finished isometrics to Stress sketch. Ensure that all stress requirements
are met. Negotiate minor differences with Stress Engineer.
16 Piping Checker For checker initiated changes, consult with the Stress Engineer and determine if a
resubmittal is required and is so, revise the Stress sketch original and sign off in
space provided. Change Stress sketch revision. Erase Unit Supervisor and Stress
Analyst signatures. Forward to Unit Supervisor. Return to Sequence 6. Hold
check prints until Stress Engineer returns Stress Sketch. Incorporate Stress
comments.
17 Piping Checker Checker will enter "Yes" on line for Stress approval, in revision block on isometric,
if Stress sketch is marked "Resubmit Checked Isometric." If Stress sketch is
marked "Approved" or line did not require Stress analysis, draw line through
"Stress."
Isometric Revisions
18 Revision Checker Prior to releasing any revised isometric, review Stress sketch and analyze if
flexibility is affected.

Note!!! If there is any doubt that the change may affect Stress, the checker must
consult with the Stress Engineer and the Piping Supervisor.
19 Revision Checker If flexibility is affected, consult with Stress Engineer and determine if a resubmittal
is required and if so, revise Stress sketch original to agree with revised isometric,
sign off in space provided and change revision, place initials on Stress sketch
original under the appropriate revision space for that line and isometric sheet
number. Erase Unit Piping Supervisor and Stress Analyst signatures on sketch.
Forward to Unit Supervisor. Return to Sequence 6. Hold Check print until Stress
Engineer returns Stress sketch. Incorporate Stress comments.

Note!!! If the issued isometric had been signed off by Stress, the Stress Engineer
will review and approve all changes.
Stress Signatures on Isometrics
20 Unit Piping Supervisor or Note isometric sheets that must be sent to Stress for signature. check Piping
Piping Assistant Isometric Record and checked isometric to determine which isometrics require
Stress approval signature. Hand carry to Stress Engineer. Wait for approval or
leave with Stress Engineer. Receive signed isometrics from Stress Engineer.
21 Stress Engineer (if Design In addition to signoff of isometrics, reviews model before and after Client review to
Model is used on the ensure that all lines approved earlier by inspection only are still acceptable.
Project)
Unit Supervisor Monitoring
22 Stress Engineering Stress Engineer Supervisor must review his work load and take action to meet his
Supervisor schedule.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2220
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 3 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

RESPONSIBILITIES AND ACTIVITY DESCRIPTIONS

Sequence Responsibility Activity Description

23 Unit Piping Supervisor / Periodically consult with Stress Engineer to obtain assistance in resolving flexibility
Layout Designer problems by informal reviews at the model or drawing board to eliminate
unnecessary paper flow. Jointly, decide on the following:
a. The addition of any line or lines for formal submittal.
b. The deletion of any lines or portions of lines which were requested for formal
submittal.
Update line list and Flexibility Log as necessary.
24 Unit Piping Supervisor Periodically review Stress sketch file during checking phase to verify that
isometrics checkers have entered their initials on the Stress sketch, indicating final
isometrics agree with the Stress sketch.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2221
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - SKETCH INFORMATION

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines to outline the information furnished by Piping Design,
Pipe Stress, and Process Engineering to be utilized in the production of Stress Sketches.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
SYSTEM BOUNDARY
TITLE BLOCK DATA
GRAPHIC SECTION
SPRING HANGERS
FLARE ISOMETRICS
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice will be implemented during the Stress Analysis Phase of the contract and will be
utilized when analysis of a piping system is required. Pipe Stress and Process Engineering
will use this practice to convey information to Piping Design for use in the development of
system configuration, process conditions, and pipe supports.

SYSTEM BOUNDARY
A line or system requiring stress analysis will be submitted from anchor or equipment to other
anchors or equipment as an isometric sketch or drawing. The original, coinciding with the
Stress group file copy, will be returned to the responsible Design Supervisor.

TITLE BLOCK DATA

Data affecting the flexibility and support analysis will be filled in on each Stress Sketch. Data
that is not self-explanatory will be determined as outlined below.
Maximum design and operating temperature for applicable conditions such as the
following:
- Startup
- Regeneration
- Hot and cold branch functions (pump with spares, one operating, one shut down;
bypasses; systems with swing elbows; and swing reactor system)
- Shutdown
- Steam out (defined by Process)
- Normal flowing conditions
- Decoking
- Upset

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2221
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - SKETCH INFORMATION

Unusual conditions such as lethal or hazardous commodity flowing in the line or ASME
(American Society of Mechanical Engineers) boiler code requirements. Pipe Stress
Engineering will provide specific instructions regarding system configuration when
jacketed pipe is specified or on pharmaceutical projects where stainless steel pipe with
Tri-Clover connections are specified.

GRAPHIC SECTION
Line work will be single stroke and may be drawn freehand. Weld dots will be indicated to
identify FMU (fitting makeup) only. Dimensions will indicate distance from centerline of
branch or ell to support. Round off dimensions to nearest 6 inches. The following
information will be included on the sketch:
Location of proposed support points and type such as the following:
- Pipe supports
- Trunnions
- Spring hangers
- Pickups
- Hanger rods
- Dummy supports
- Field supports
- Snubbers
Location and orientation of proposed or actual control points such as the following:
- Anchors
- Equipment
- Guides
- Critical clearance
- Directional anchor
- Branch points
- Spring wedges
- Hold downs
Foundation settlement

SPRING HANGERS
The following information should be indicated as an integral part of the Stress Sketch as soon
as stress information has been established. Resubmit revised sketch to Stress when steel
information becomes available.
Location of spring hanger.
Height of the support point in relation to the centerline of the pipe or to the point on the
pipe where the spring hanger is attached.
Type of beam or structure used as supporting point and its orientation.

FLARE ISOMETRICS

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2221
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 3 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - SKETCH INFORMATION

The flare isometric will provide Stress and Process Engineering with adequate information to
analyze the complete system on a unit-by-unit basis. Refer to Attachment 02 for flare
isometric example. Flare isometrics will adhere to the following:
The isometric will be drawn on roll size layout paper.
The header will be indicated as a complete system through the unit to the interconnecting
pipeway main header or blowdown drum.
Two-inch and larger branches will be indicated from the pressure relief valve to the flare
header.
The portion upstream of the pressure relief valve will be submitted with the flare
isometric as a package on the following documents:
- Stress Engineering: Stress sketches
- Process Engineering: Stress sketches or isometrics

REFERENCES
ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2220: Stress Design - Sketch Procedure
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2250: Stress Design - Piping Flexibility Log

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Stress Sketch Example
Attachment 02:
Flare Isometric Example

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2230
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - LAYOUT AIDS FOR ROTATING EQUIPMENT

PURPOSE
This practice is intended as an aid for the Piping Designer in determining the effects of the
piping's thermal expansion or contraction on equipment nozzles.

SCOPE
This practice provides a method, which can be used by the Piping Designer, to determine the
acceptability of pipe routings to rotating equipment. Included in this practice are instructions
on how to determine the following:
The location of the rotating equipment's Anchor.
The allowable loads on the rotating equipment nozzles.
The loads exerted by the piping on the rotating equipment.
Methods for adding flexibility if the actual force exerted exceeds the allowable force.

APPLICATION
During the initial stages of piping layout, the Piping Designer needs to examine the effects that
the thermal expansion or contraction of a piping system would have on rotating equipment to
which the given system is located. Optimum equipment location, nozzle orientations, and pipe
routing can be achieved via the implementation of the techniques outlined in this practice.
The resulting pipe routing is still subject to the review and approval of the review and
approval of the assigned Lead Project Stress Engineer. However, based on the Piping
Designer's correct application of this technical practice, modification to satisfy stress
requirements should be minimized.
Note!!! Refer to Attachments 01 through 04, as indicated below, to determine the location of
equipment Anchors and, therefore, nozzle thermal movements, on various types of
rotating equipment.

Pumps, Normal Case

Refer to Attachment 01, Pumps - Normal Case.

Pumps, Variation Case

Refer to Attachment 02, Pumps - Variation Case.

Turbines, Normal Case

Refer to Attachment 03, Turbines - Normal Case, Figure 1.

Turbines, Common
Variation
Refer to Attachment 03, Turbines - Common Variation, Figure 2.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2230
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - LAYOUT AIDS FOR ROTATING EQUIPMENT

Centrifugal Compressor
Refer to Attachment 04, Centrifugal Compressor.

Allowable Loads
The maximum allowable force on steel equipment nozzle is 200 pounds times the nominal
nozzle size, but must not exceed 2,000 pounds.
Examples:
2-inch, 300 pounds, RF, CS Nozzle, 200 by 2 = 400 pounds
18-inch, 150 pounds, RF, CS Nozzle, 200 by 18 = 3,600 pounds
The latter exceeds the limit; therefore, use 2,000 pounds as a limiting force.
The maximum allowable force on cast iron equipment nozzle is 50 pounds times nominal
nozzle size, but must not exceed 500 pounds.
Examples:
4-inch, 125 pounds, FF, CI Nozzle, 50 by 4 = 200 pounds
12-inch, 250 pounds, FF, CI Nozzle, 50 by 12 = 600 pounds
The latter exceeds the limit; therefore, use 500 pounds.

EXAMPLE
Refer to Attachment 05, How to Determine Pipe Length Required For Flexible Pump Layout.

Allowable Force On
Pump Nozzle
Eight-inch nozzle times 200 lbs / nom. in. = 1,600 pounds maximum force allowed.

Expansion North-South
Direction
The 15'-6" leg is the only run in the North-South direction.
15'-6" times 0.0362 = 0.5611" expansion.

Absorbing Legs
The 2 legs 90 degrees to the 15'-6" leg are the East-West leg (11'-0") plus the vertical leg
(7'-3").
Total available bending leg = 11'-0" plus 7'-3" = 18'-3".

Nomograph Application
Refer to Attachment 06, Nomograph Application - North-South Expansion.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2230
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 3 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - LAYOUT AIDS FOR ROTATING EQUIPMENT

Expansion East-West
Direction
Assuming that 1 pump is hot and 1 cold, the 11'-0" leg is the only run, expanding in the
East-West direction.
11'-0" times 0.362"/14 = 0.3982" expansion

Absorbing Legs
The legs 90 degrees to the East-West run are the 2 vertical legs (6'-8" and 7'-3") and the
North-South leg (15'-6").
Total Available Bending Leg = (6'-8") + (7'-3") + (15'-6") = 29'-5".

Nomograph Application
Refer to Attachment 07, Nomograph Application - East-West Expansion.

Expansion Vertical
Direction
The worst case vertical thermal expansion occurs between the Anchor point at the pump
assumed hot and the support or Anchor on the vertical vessel. The total vertical leg expanding
is:
(1'-4") + (7'-3") + (6'-8") + (2'-9") = 18'-0"
18'-0" times 0.0362 "/' = 0.6515" expansion

Absorbing Legs
The legs 90 degrees to the vertical runs and falling along a direct line from the vessel nozzle
to the nozzle of the pump assumed hot, are the 11'-0" North-South leg and the 15'-6"
East-West leg.
Total Available Bending Leg = (11'-0") + (15'-6") = 26'-6".

Nomograph Application
Refer to Attachment 08, Nomograph Application - Vertical Direction, and Attachment 09,
Nomograph A (For Flexibility Based On Piping Force).

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Pumps - Normal Case
Attachment 02:
Pumps - Variation Case
Attachment 03:
Figure 1. Turbines - Normal Case
Figure 2. Turbines - Common Variation

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2230
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 4 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - LAYOUT AIDS FOR ROTATING EQUIPMENT

Attachment 04:
Centrifugal Compressor
Attachment 05:
Example: How To Determine Pipe Length Required For Flexible Pump Layout
Attachment 06:
Nomograph Application - North-South Expansion
Attachment 07:
Nomograph Application - East-West Expansion
Attachment 08:
Nomograph Application - Vertical Direction
Attachment 09:
Nomograph A (For Flexibility Based On Piping Force)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2230
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 06 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

NOMOGRAPH APPLICATION - NORTH-SOUTH EXPANSION

(Note!!! Refer to circled numbers on Nomograph A - Attachment 09)

Step 1 On the force scale, locate maximum allowed force on pump nozzle. 1,600 pounds (Point 1).

Step 2 On Total Thermal Expansion scale, locate expansion in inches. 0.5611" (Point 2).

Step 3 Draw a line from Point 1 to Point 2. Where this line crosses the Pivot Line , locate Point 3.

Step 4 On Nominal Pipe Diameter scale, locate line size 12" (Point 4). When the schedule of pipe is other than the standard
weight, use Pipe Moment of Inertia scale. This locates Point 5 on the Pipe Length scale.

Step 5 Draw a line from Point 3 on the Pivot Line to Point 4 on the Nominal Pipe Diameter scale. This locates Point 5 on
the Pipe Length scale.

Read 23'-0" on the Pipe Length scale as the minimum required absorbing pipe length.

Step 6 The available bending leg is 18'-3" (Refer to Page 2) is less than 23'-0". Therefore, a minimum of 5'-0" must be
added to the vertical or East-West direction to be within the maximum allowable force on the pump nozzle.

Step 7 Since equipment elevations cannot be easily changed (both Process and Structural Engineering must become
involved), the simplest method for adding the required bending leg is to add East-West bending leg as shown by
dotted line on Attachment 05.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2230
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 07 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

NOMOGRAPH APPLICATION - EAST-WEST EXPANSION

(Note!!! Refer to circled numbers on Nomograph A - Attachment 09)

Step 1 On the force scale, locate maximum allowed force on the pump nozzle - 1,600 pounds (Point 1).

Step 2 On total thermal expansion scale, locate expansion in inches - 0.3982" (Point 6).

Step 3 Draw a line from Point 1 to Point 6. Where this line crosses the pivot line, locate Point 7.

Step 4 On nominal pipe diameter scale, locate line size 12" (Point 4).

Step 5 Draw a line from Point 7 to Point 4. This locates Point 8 on the pipe length scale.

Note!!! The minimum required absorbing pipe length is 20'-0".

Step 6 The available bending leg is 29'-5" which is greater than the required leg of 20'-0". Therefore, no additional
flexibility is required to accommodate the East-West expansion.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2230
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 08 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

NOMOGRAPH APPLICATION - VERTICAL DIRECTION

(Note!!! Refer to circled numbers on Nomograph A - Attachment 09)

Step 1 On the force scale, locate maximum allowed force on the pump nozzle - 1,600 pounds (Point 1).

Step 2 On the total thermal expansion scale, locate expansion in inches - 0.6516" (Point 9).

Step 3 Draw a line from Point 1 to Point 9. Where this line crosses the pivot line, locate Point 10.

Step 4 On a nominal pipe diameter scale, locate line size 12" (Point 4).

Step 5 Draw a line from Point 10, on the pivot line, to Point 4. This locates Point 11 on the pipe length scale.

Note!!! The minimum required absorbing pipe length (bending leg) is 24'-0".

Step 6 The available bending leg is 26'-6" that is greater than the required leg of 24'-0".

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2231
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

LAYOUT AIDS FOR EXCHANGERS AND VESSELS EQUIPMENT

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for Stress Engineers to initiate plot arrangements,
determine thermal expansion, and locate anchors on nonrotating equipment such as
exchangers and vessels. The assigned Project Piping Engineer will be responsible to enforce
the use of this practice.

SCOPE
This practice provides information about the following:
Anchor locations
Stacking arrangements
Information required to determine thermal expansion
Exchangers - shell and tube
Kettle reboilers
Vertical vessels or reactors
Horizontal vessels
Air cooled exchangers
Fired heaters and reboilers
Stress Analysis

APPLICATION
During initial stages of piping layout, this practice will help Stress Engineers review
equipment drawings for items such as stacking arrangement of shell and tube exchangers for
piping flexibility, method of anchor, and anchor location to reduce differential expansion and
minimize thermal stresses. Information required to calculate reasonable thermal expansion is
explained for horizontal and vertical vessels. For air cooled exchangers, a method of
controlling tube expansion and header box movement is discussed.

Exchangers -
Shell And Tube
The following information will be used to locate anchors and origin of thermal expansion:
The stacking and plot arrangement on multiple shells in interconnected service.
Wherever a close coupled arrangement is proposed, it is preferred to see all
interconnecting lines such as shell-to-shell and channel-to-channel, plus bypass lines
wherever operation can be maintained on partial capacity.
Location of anchor point related to piping connection (vertical and horizontal). Wherever
piping parallels horizontal equipment, anchor the end that provides the most
compensating expansion.
Identification of exchanger service; that is, reboiler, condenser or cooler, and
identification of nozzles as shell or channel.
Exchangers with process streams in both channel and shell should hang the shell cover end
anchored. The objective, in most cases, is to utilize exchanger expansion to compensate for
piping expansion. Grade mounted exchangers with buried cooling water to the channel may
have to be anchored on the channel end support.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2231
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

LAYOUT AIDS FOR EXCHANGERS AND VESSELS EQUIPMENT

Stacked exchangers are similar, with expansions accumulating from the anchor point. The
supplier's stacking arrangement should be reviewed by Stress Analyst before outlines are
approved.
The single pass on the shell side of the exchangers will invariably cause leaks if the
connecting flanges are located at opposite ends and the temperature difference across the shell
is appreciable. A much better arrangement is to locate all nozzles at the channel end so the
connecting nozzles are close to each other, and the differential expansion between them is
negligible.
If the exchangers must be arranged with nozzles at opposite ends, or if there are 3 stacked
exchangers, the nozzles at either one or both ends, one set, should be side projections to
provide flexibility for differential expansion.
The same problem will occur with single pass tube exchangers and should be treated
accordingly.

Thermosyphon Reboilers
Thermosyphon reboilers may be supported from the adjacent vessel or from independent
structures from grade. In either case, the method and location of support will be reviewed by
Piping Stress. Location of the supports will be determined on the basis of minimizing
differential movements between the reboiler piping and the vessel. If steam is to be circulated
through the reboiler before startup, or if there is an appreciable difference between
temperature of the reboiler and vessel, the reboiler may require spring support and additional
flexibility in the piping.

Kettle Reboilers
The horizontal reboiler anchor location depends upon its relationship to the vessel. It is
normally anchored at the reboiler support closest to the centerline of the vessel.
The reboiler bottom elevation should be located as close as possible to the vessel tangent line
elevation to reduce footage of piping required to accommodate vertical growth. The reboiler
elevation must also meet process requirements as specified on the Flow Sheet.

Vertical Vessels Or
Reactors
The following information will be used to determine thermal expansion and related criteria:
Point of support, skirt height, and whether fireproofed, insulated, or both.
Shell diameter and nozzle projection/size.
Shell thickness and type of material.
Shell temperatures: Use design temperatures of bottom, intermediate and top outlet
piping. Do not use design temperatures as given on vessel outlines. Refractory lined
vessels must be figured on a skin temperature obtained from the Vessel Engineer.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2231
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 3 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

LAYOUT AIDS FOR EXCHANGERS AND VESSELS EQUIPMENT

Horizontal Vessels
The following information will be used to determine thermal expansion and related criteria:
Location of support points of vessel with respect to nozzles.
Anchor location (the end of the vessel that will provide the most compensating effect for
piping expansion).
Shell diameter and nozzle projection.
Shell thickness and material.
Any fireproofing or insulation.
Design temperature: Do not use design temperature shown on vessel drawing; use design
temperatures shown on the line list for inlet and outlet piping.

Air Cooled Exchangers

The following will be considered when establishing equipment studies:
Controlling Tube Expansion
- Single Pass Air-Cooler
The inlet header box may be directionally fixed and the outlet box free to slide to
allow for tube expansion.
- Double Pass Air-Cooler
The inlet and outlet are at the same end. This end may be directionally fixed.
In some cases, the boxes are left uncontrolled (free floating) if piping flexibility is
adequate.
- Lateral Header Box Movement
- Multiple header boxes connected by a common pipe header are designed to move
laterally within their supporting frame to allow for pipe header expansion.
- To aid header box, movement thrust blocks may be inserted between boxes.
- Clearance within frame and thrust block requirements must be agreed upon with
Supplier.
- The inlet boxes of single pass coolers move in accordance with the inlet pipe header.
- The outlet boxes move in accordance with the outlet pipe header.
- For double pass coolers, the header boxes follow the growth of the inlet pipe header.
The outlet piping must be designed flexible enough to allow for the differential
expansion between inlet and outlet.

Fired Heaters And

Reboilers
The following will be considered whenever establishing equipment studies:
Tube expansion effecting piping at the heater terminals tube support points and type,
length of tubes, and metal temperatures.
Required deflection of the tube terminals at right angles to the centerline of the tubes.
Possible support locations on the equipment structure, as required by line routing.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2231
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 4 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

LAYOUT AIDS FOR EXCHANGERS AND VESSELS EQUIPMENT

Stress Analysis
The maximum allowable stress on steel equipment is 15,000 psi.
Refer to Attachment 01 to determine pipe length required for flexible equipment layout.
Expansion North-South Direction
Exchanger anchored side to the centerline of the vessel is the total North-South
expansion.
(10'-0")x(0.0061)+(15'-0"+5-0")x(0.0023)+(6'-0")x(0.0061) = 0.1436"
Absorbing Legs
The two legs 90 degrees to the North-South expansion are the East-West leg (18'-0") plus
the vertical legs (70'-0" + 4'-0").
Total available = (18'-0") + (70'-0" + 4'-0") = 92'-0"
Nomograph Application
Refer to circled numbers on Nomograph B, Attachment 02.
Step 1 On PIPE STRESS scale, locate maximum allowable stress on steel equipment.
15,000 psi (Point 1)
Step 2 On TOTAL THERMAL EXPANSION scale, locate expansion in inches.
0.1436" (Point 2)
Step 3 Draw a line from Point 1 to Point 2. Where this line crosses the PIVOT LINE,
locate Point 3.
Step 4 On NOMINAL PIPE DIAMETER scale, locate line size 24" (Point 4).
Step 5 Draw a line from Point 3 on the PIVOT LINE to Point 4 on the NOMINAL
PIPE DIAMETER scale. This locates Point 5 on the PIPE LENGTH scale as
the minimum required absorbing pipe length.
Step 6 The available absorbing leg 92'-0" is greater than the minimum required pipe
length 13'-0". So the pipe routing is okay in the North-South direction.
Expansion East-West Direction
The 18'-0" leg is the only run in the East-West direction. (18'-0") x (0.0023) = 0.0414"
expansion such as 0.1".
Follow the procedure described above and the minimum required absorbing pipe length is
10'-0".
Expansion - Vertical Direction
(20'-0")x(0.046)+(30'-0")x(0.027)+(15'-0")x(0.0061)-(70'-0"+4'-0")x(0.0023)
-(6'-0")x(0.0061) = 1.6147" expansion
Following the procedure described above, the minimum required absorbing pipe length is
44'-0".

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2231
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 5 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

LAYOUT AIDS FOR EXCHANGERS AND VESSELS EQUIPMENT

The available absorbing leg is (15'-0") + (18'-0") + (5'-0") = 38'-0". This figure is smaller
than the minimum required pipe length; so, add at least 6'- 0" in the North-South or
East-West direction to be within the maximum allowable stress on the steel equipment.
Use the same procedure and criteria as for pump layout, but check with Stress Analyst for
the amount of expansion that may be taken by the heater tubes.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
How To Determine Pipe Length Required For Flexible Equipment Layout
Attachment 02:
Nomograph "B" (For Flexibility Based On Pipe Stress)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2232
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - LAYOUT AIDS FOR PIPEWAY

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for Stress Engineers in evaluating the location of
Anchors and guides, and determining the size of loops so that unbalanced forces are
limited to 2,000 pounds and stresses in the piping system are limited to 20,000 psi.

SCOPE
This practice provides information regarding stress limitations in piping and force
limitations on Anchors and guides. Expansion loop requirements are based on the total
expansion of piping systems. The size of the loop is calculated based on a stress limiting
criteria of 20,000 psi. Thermal and frictional forces on Anchors and guides are limited to
2,000 pounds (imbalanced) by adjusting the size of the loop and relocating the Anchors
and guides. Bowing of loop at point is also evaluated.

APPLICATION
This practice is to be used by Project Stress Engineers.

GENERAL
During the initial stages of piping layout, Anchors and guides are located and the size of
loops is determined based on a stress limitation of 20,000 psi. Imbalanced Anchor and
guide forces are limited to 2,000 pounds so that no transmittal of load is required to
Structural group. Pipe movement, at point, can be calculated to check interference with
adjacent piping.

Stress Limit
The stress limiting criteria is 20,000 psi maximum allowable stress.

Force Limit
Force limit on Anchors and guides is 2,000 pounds maximum unbalanced force including
friction loads.

F(t) = 2,800# F(f) = 3,500#

F(f) = 2,000# F(f) = 3,000#
X
Anchor

where

F(f) = Thermal force

F(f) = Friction force

Total unbalanced force = (3,500 + 3,000) - (2,800 + 2,000)

= 1,700 pounds

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2232
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - LAYOUT AIDS FOR PIPEWAY

This is within the limiting criteria.

Example:

F(t) = 2,000# F(f) = 1,500#

F(f) = 3,000# F(f) = 500#
X
Anchor

Total unbalanced force = (2,000 + 3,000) - (1,500 + 500) = 3,000 pounds.

This exceeds the limiting criteria of 2,000 pounds unbalanced force.

Note!!! Consult Supervising Stress Engineer for possible alternatives to comply with the
force limitation.

Expansion Loop
Requirements
Generally, if the total expansion in direction on the pipeway is less than 10 inches,
the loop could be avoided by locating an Anchor in the middle of the run.

The total expansion between loop Anchors should not exceed 12 inches.

The expansion at the change of direction should not exceed 5 inches. Refer to
Attachment 02, Points A and B. Consult the Supervising Stress Engineer for
exceptions.

Location Of Loops
And Guides
Example:

500' - 0"
A B
X X
Max Exp 12 Inch Diameter Standard Weight Max Exp
5 Inches 5 Inches

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2232
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 3 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - LAYOUT AIDS FOR PIPEWAY

Pipe material = A53 Gr.B

Design temperature = 500 degrees F
Expansion Coefficient= 0.036"/ft
Commodity = HC (Vapor)
Insulation = None
Coefficient of friction = 0.3 (steel on steel)

Total Expansion In
The East-West
Direction
(500'-0") x (0.0362) = 18.1 inches.

Location Of Loop
Anchors
Anchors should be located in such a way that the expansion going into the loop should not
exceed 12 inches and the total unbalanced forces at the Anchors should be within the
limiting criteria of 2,000 pounds. Locate Anchors at 125'-0" from Points A and B in the
above example.

Expansion Going
Into The Loop
{(500'-0") - 2(125'- 0")} x (0.0362) = 9.05 inches.

Step 1.0
Determine Stress Coefficient K using the following formula:
Maximum allowable stress
K= Expansion going into the loop

20,000
K= 9.05
= 2, 210

Step 2.0
Enter the table, Curve Number For Stress Coefficient K, on the left-hand side of
Attachment 01, and read down to the appropriate wall thickness 0.375 inch and draw an
imaginary horizontal line across the table. At the top of the table, find the appropriate
pipe diameter 12 inches, and draw an imaginary vertical line down the table. Read the
correct curve Number 9 at the intersection of the 2 imaginary lines.

Step 3.0
Enter the curve chart on Attachment 01, at the bottom for K = 2,210. Draw an imaginary
line up to the curve Number 9. At the point of intersection, draw an imaginary horizontal
line to the left and read the appropriate value for H and H = 23'-0" minimum.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2232
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 4 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - LAYOUT AIDS FOR PIPEWAY

Step 4.0
The loop width W and the guide locations for different pipe sizes are shown on
Attachment 01.

Note!!! Consult the Supervising Stress Engineer for exceptions.

Thermal Forces
At Loop Anchors

Step 1.0
Enter the table, Curve Number For Force Coefficient C, on the left-hand side of
Attachment 02, and determine the curve Number 12 using the procedure outlined in the
above Steps 1.0 and 2.0.

Step 2.0
Enter the curve chart on Attachment 02, on the left-hand side at H = 23'-0" and draw an
imaginary horizontal line across the chart until it intersects curves Number 12. Draw an
imaginary line from the intersection down to the value for C and read C = 190.

Step 3.0
Thermal force = F(t) = (Force Coefficient C) x (Expansion going into the loop, inches).

F(t) = (190) x (9.05) = 1,720 pounds.

Location Of Guides
In The North-South
Direction (G-1)

Step 1.0
Determine the Expansion at the change of direction.

(125'-0") x (0.0362) = 4.5 inches

Step 2.0
Using the maximum allowable Stress of 20,000 psi and Nomograph B, determine the
minimum required length = 48'-0".

Thermal Forces
At Anchors
Thermal forces at the Anchors due to guides in the East-West direction near the Points A
and B:

Step 1.0
On the Nominal Pipe Diameter scale, locate line Size 12. When the Schedule of pipe is
other than the standard weight, use Pipe Moment of Inertia scale. Refer to Nomograph A.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2232
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 5 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - LAYOUT AIDS FOR PIPEWAY

Step 2.0
On the Pipe Length scale, locate the available length, 48'-0".

Step 3.0
Draw a line connecting these 2 points to locate a point on the Pivot Line.

Step 4.0
On the Total Thermal Expansion scale, locate expansion in inches (4.5 inches).

Step 5.0
Draw a line connecting the total thermal expansion point and the Pivot Line point to
locate a point on the Force scale. Read 1,400 pounds as the thermal force.

Friction Forces
At The Loop Anchors
Weight of pipe = 49.5 pounds per foot
Weight of commodity = 0.0 pounds per foot
Weight of Insulation = 0.0 pounds per foot
____________________

Total = 49.6 pounds per foot

Friction Force At
Anchor A-1 From
The East Side
F(f) = (Friction Coefficient) x (Total weight per foot) x (Length in feet)

F(f) = (0.3) x (49.6) x (125'-0") = 1,860 pounds.

Friction Force At
Anchor A-1 From
The West Side
250 −0” 23 −0”
F(f) = (0.3) x (49.6) x 2
+ 2
= 2, 030 pounds

Determining
Unbalanced Forces
Refer to Attachment 04.

Reduction Of
Unbalanced Forces
The following steps could be taken to reduce the unbalanced forces within limits:

Locate guide G-1 further down to increase the available length h.

By increasing the length h, the unbalanced forces at Anchor A-1 or A-2 might exceed
the force limitation. In that case, increase the loop length H and recalculate the
forces.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2232
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 6 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - LAYOUT AIDS FOR PIPEWAY

Bowing
Check the bowing at the middle of the loop and at the base of the loop.

Using the loop in the above example, δ L' = 250 x 0.0362 = 9.05 inches where L' =
Distance between Anchors = 250'-0"

L = Distance between guides at the loop = 60'-0"

W = Loop width = 20'-0"

H = Loop height = 23'-0"

W / H = 20/23 = 0.869

L / at = 60/20 = 3

Refer to Attachment 03, Figure 1, at W / H = 0.869 and read up to the curve L / W =

3. Read across to δ b / δ L' = 0.55.

δ b = 0.55 x δ L' = 0.55 x 9.05 = 5 inches (Back of the Loop bows 5 inches).

Refer to Attachment 03, Figure 2, at W / H = 0.869 and read up to the curve L / W =

3. Read across to δ a / δ L' = 0 (intersecting point outside the curve range) δ a = 0 x δ
L' = 0 x 9.05 = 0 Inches (Bottom of Loop bows = 0 inches).

Fifty percent cold spring produces half of this movement in the opposite direction
initially and half in the normal direction in the final position.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Layout Aids For Pipeway: Loop Stress Coefficient

Attachment 02:
Layout Aids For Pipeway: Loop Force Coefficient

Attachment 03:
Curves For Determining The Deflections At Different Points In The Expansion "U" Bend

Attachment 04:
Layout Aids For Pipeway: Determining Unbalanced Forces

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2240
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - SPRING HANGERS AND HANGER RODS

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the Piping Designer or Engineer to estimate the size of
variable spring cans and constant supports; to determine the minimum clearance between the
bottom of structural supporting steel and the top of pipe for variable spring hangers and for
rigid rod hangers; and to determine the length of rod required to limit the amount of lift caused
by horizontal movement.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
LIMITATIONS
SPRING HANGERS AND HANGER RODS
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice is to be used by the Piping Designer or Engineer in determining the appropriate
spring hangers and hanger rods.
Charts containing the approximate size of variable spring cans and constant supports are based
on Grinnell hanger components. Although the dimensions of spring hangers is fairly
consistent among different manufacturers, the dimensions and method of structural attachment
for constant supports varies from one manufacturer to another.

LIMITATIONS
Piping Engineers or Designers working on Power Piping designed to ASME B31.1 must
remember to limit the angle of swing of a hanger rod, measured from the vertical, to 4 degrees.
This requirement is not included in ASME B31.3; however, when the 4 degree rule is
exceeded, the resulting horizontal loads should be evaluated on the structural steel and on the
hanger components.

SPRING HANGERS AND

HANGER RODS

Clearances
Variable spring hangers can be roughly sized by relating the hanger load to the diameter D of
the container and by relating the line movement combined with the hanger load to the length L
of the container. Refer to Attachments 01 and 02.
Constant piping hangers can be roughly sized by relating the line movement combined with
the hanger load to the length L and the diameter D of the container. Refer to Attachments 03
and 04.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2240
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - SPRING HANGERS AND HANGER RODS

Squad Check
Requirements
Piping checklist
Structural/vessel checklist
- Attachments to structural member
- Load carrying capacity of structure or vessel

Lengths
Rod hanger lengths necessary for horizontal line movement. Refer to Attachment 5.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Variable Spring Hanger Sizing Table
Attachment 02:
Variable Spring Hanger Drawing
Attachment 03:
Constant Spring Hanger Sizing Table
Attachment 04:
Constant Spring Hanger Drawing
Attachment 05:
Rod Hanger Lengths

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2240
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

VARIABLE SPRING HANGER SIZING TABLE

Load Range (Pounds) D (Inches) Line Movement Vertically (Inches)

0 to 1/2 9/16 to 1 1-1/6 to 2
Minimum Minimum Minimum
L H L H L H

50 to 125 4 6 30 9 33 16 39
126 to 300 5-9/16 6 30 9 33 17 42
301 to 700 6-5/8 7 33 11 36 20 45
701 to 5,000 8-5/8 10 39 14 42 26 54
5,001 to 10,000 8-5/8 12 45 19 52 34 66
10,001 to 20,000 12-3/4 16 57 24 63 45 84
20,001 to 40,000 12-3/4 22 66 32 75 61 102

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2240
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 03 Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

CONSTANT SPRING HANGER SIZING

Approximate Vertical Line Movement (Inches)

Dimensions
(Inches) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
L D Load Range (Pounds)
108 72 54 43 36 31 27
to to to to to to to
450 300 225 180 150 129 113
17 16 451 301 226 181 151 130 114
to to to to to to to
1,905 1,270 953 762 635 544 476
27 20 1,906 1,271 954 763 636 545 477 423 381
to to to to to to to to to
5,525 3,683 2,763 2,210 1,842 1,579 1,381 1,228 1,105
32 27 3,684 2,764 2,211 1,843 1,580 1,382 1,229 1,106 1,005
to to to to to to to to to
9,667 7,250 5,800 4,833 4,143 3,625 3,222 2,900 2,636
47 33 9,668 7,251 5,801 4,834 4,144 3,636 3,223 2,901 2,637
to to to to to to to to to
24,463 18,348 14,678 12,231 10,484 9,174 8,154 7,339 6,671
68 31 18,349 14,679 12,232 10,485 9,175 8,155 7,340 6,672
to to to to to to to to
36,700 29,360 24,466 20,972 18,350 16,311 14,680 13,344
70 33 36,701 26,361 24,467 20,973 18,351 16,312 14,681 13,345
to to to to to to to to
57,500 46,000 38,332 32,858 28,750 25,555 23,000 20,907
100 45 46,001 38,333 32,859 28,751 25,556 23,001 20,908
to to to to to to to
66,000 87,500 87,500 87,500 87,500 87,500 87,500

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2240
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 03 Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

CONSTANT SPRING HANGER SIZING

Approximate Vertical Line Movement (Inches)

Dimensions
(Inches) 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
L D Load Range (Pounds)

17 16

27 20

32 27 922 851 790

to to to
2,417 2,231 2,071
47 33 2,418 2,232 2,072 1,934 1,813
to to to to to
6,166 5,645 5,242 4,892 4,587
68 31 6,117 5,646 5,243 4,893 4,588
to to to to to
12,233 11,292 10,484 9,786 9,175
70 33 12,234 11,293 10,485 9,787 9,176
to to to to to
19,166 17,692 16,427 15,332 14,375
100 45 19,167 17,693 16,428 15,333 14,376 31,175 29,442 27,894 26,500
to to to to to to to to to
83,330 76,920 71,420 66,660 62,500 58,820 55,550 52,630 50,000

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2250
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - PIPING FLEXIBILITY LOG

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines to provide a uniform system of identifying, tracking, and
noting status of sketches submitted to the Stress Engineer for formal analysis. This practice
includes instructions for the preparation and maintenance of the Piping Flexibility Log.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
DEFINITIONS
PROCEDURE
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
The major stress evaluation work should occur during the equipment and pipeway layout
phase of the piping activities. Based on a joint and continuing review by the Unit Supervisor
and Stress Engineer of the piping layouts and model as they progress through layout, the line
list is marked to indicate the line numbers to be sketched and submitted for formal analysis.
The piping Flexibility Log is the tool used by the Unit Piping Supervisor to record and track
these sketches.

DEFINITIONS
Formal Analysis: A system requiring a manual stress review or formal computer analysis;
however, the Stress Engineer may require that certain lines be sketched in order for the
engineer to determine if a formal analysis is required.

PROCEDURE
The Unit Piping Supervisor is responsible for maintaining the Piping Flexibility Log for stress
analyzed piping within the supervisor's jurisdiction. The Unit Piping Supervisor will delegate
portions of the actual work to the Piping Assistant.
Refer to Attachment 01 for Form: 000.250.F1002: Piping Flexibility Log. Attachment 02 is
a sample Piping Flexibility Log and instructions for completion.

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2221: Stress Design Sketch Information.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2250
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - PIPING FLEXIBILITY LOG

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Form 000.250.F1002: Piping Flexibility Log
Attachment 02:
Sample Piping Flexibility Log And Instructions

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2291
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - REINFORCING PAD REQUIREMENTS

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for estimating the maximum internal pressure at which an
unreinforced fabricated tee (stub-in) may be specified. This practice also provides a quick
means of sizing a reinforcing pad.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
REQUIREMENTS
LIMITATIONS
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice is to be used by personnel involved in stress design and reinforcing pad
requirements.

REQUIREMENTS
Before using this practice for design, check the specific requirements for branch connections
contained in the Piping Engineering Specification 670.250.50002: Development And Design
Models, and Specification 670.250.50003: Piping - Material Specification Line Class.
The allowable stresses listed in Attachment 1 are less than or equal to the basic allowable
stress values given in Table A-1 of ASME B31.3. The allowable stress values listed in B31.3
are applicable for seamless pipe; for longitudinally welded pipe, the allowable stress values
must be multiplied by the appropriate quality factors from Table A-1B of B31.3. (If the
branch connection does not intersect the longitudinal weld, the basic allowable stress may be
used in determining the requirement for pressure reinforcement.)
In order to determine the need for a reinforcing pad due to pressure considerations, first find
the allowable stress for the pipe material at the design temperature in Attachment 01. Find the
row with the header size and wall thickness (or schedule) on the left side of Attachment 02.
Find the column containing the allowable stress (from Attachment 01) and the corrosion
allowance for the pipe on the top of Attachment 02. The intersection of this row and this
column shows the maximum allowable design pressure, in psi, for an unreinforced fabricated
tee. If the actual design pressure is higher than the listed pressure, a reinforcing pad is
required on fabricated tees (stub-ins).

LIMITATIONS
Although specifically developed for piping designed to the requirements of ASME B31.3
(Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping), this document may be used for piping
designed to the requirements of other codes. The individual using this document for design to
other codes should be familiar with the differences in design criteria between B31.3 and the
applicable code. For example, the allowable stress values in B31.3 typically decrease from

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2291
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

STRESS DESIGN - REINFORCING PAD REQUIREMENTS

ambient to 600 degrees F. In B31.1, the allowable stress value at 600 degrees F is typically
the same as at ambient. Also, for a given pressure and allowable stress, B31.1 requires 7
percent more reinforcement area than B31.3.
The requirement for reinforcing pads on lines which are subject to substantial thermal growth
or which are subject to shock loadings such as blowdown lines must be coordinated with Pipe
Stress Engineering.
This practice should not be used in the following situations:
The angle between the header and the branch is not 90 degrees.
The design temperature is higher than the maximum range of Attachment 01.
The allowable stress at temperature is less than the minimum allowable stress tabulated in
Attachment 02.
In the above cases, the need for a reinforcing pad should be based on code calculations. If this
document indicates that a reinforcing pad is required, it is recommended that a standard
reinforcing pad made from the same pipe as the header be specified.

REFERENCES
ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)
Piping Engineering
Specification 670.250.50002: Development And Design Models
Piping Engineering
Specification 670.250.50003: Piping - Material Specification Line Class

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Basic Allowable Stress In Tension
Attachment 02:
Maximum Allowable Pressure

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2291
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

BASIC ALLOWABLE STRESS IN TENSION

Piping Material Temp. 100ºF Temp. 101ºF

and Below to 650ºF

Carbon Steel: ASTM A53 Gr. A 16000 12000

ASTM A53 Gr. B 20000 16000
ASTM A106 Gr. A 16000 12000
ASTM A106 Gr. B 20000 16000
API 5L Gr. A 16000 12000
API 5L Gr. B 20000 16000

Alloy Steel: ASTM A335 P5 20000 16000

ASTM A335 F9 20000 16000
ASTM A335 P11 20000 16000

Stainless Steel: ASTM A312 TP304 20000 16000

ASTM A312 TP304H 20000 16000
ASTM A312 TP309 20000 18800
ASTM A312 TP310 20000 18800
ASTM A312 TP316 20000 16000
ASTM A312 TP316H 20000 16000
ASTM A312 TP317 20000 16000
ASTM A312 TP321 20000 16000
ASTM A312 TP321H 20000 16000
ASTM A312 TP347 20000 18800
ASTM A312 TP347H 20000 18800
ASTM A312 TP348 20000 18800
ASTM A312 TP348H 20000 18800

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2291
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE PRESSURE

Hdr Hdr Header Stress = 20,000 Stress = 18,800 Stress = 16,000 Stress = 12,000
Size Sch Wall Corrosion Allowance Corrosion Allowance Corrosion Allowance Corrosion Allowance
Thickness (in) (in) (in) (in)
(in)
0.000 0.065 0.125 0.000 0.065 0.125 0.000 0.065 0.125 0.000 0.065 0.125
3 10S 0.120 680 259 0 640 243 0 544 207 0 408 155 0
40 0.216 1,369 894 467 1,260 840 439 1,095 715 374 820 535 280
80 0.300 1,969 1,369 1,041 1,850 1,286 977 1,575 1,095 832 1,180 820 624
4 10S 0.120 510 194 0 480 182 0 408 155 0 306 116 0
40 0.237 1,113 763 446 1,000 717 419 890 610 356 665 455 267
80 0.337 1,650 1,244 967 1,551 1,169 909 1,320 995 774 990 745 580
6 10S 0.134 377 168 0 355 158 0 302 134 0 226 100 0
40 0.280 850 619 421 810 581 396 680 495 337 510 370 253
80 0.432 1,394 1,150 947 1,310 1,081 893 1,115 920 760 835 690 570

8 10S 0.148 319 158 11 300 149 10 255 127 8 191 95 6

40 0.322 738 563 414 693 529 389 590 450 331 440 335 248
80 0.500 1,213 1,038 880 1,140 975 827 970 830 704 725 620 528

10 10S 0.165 281 154 37 265 145 35 225 123 30 169 92 22

30 0.307 544 413 296 511 388 278 435 330 236 325 245 177
40 0.365 656 525 407 616 493 383 25 420 326 390 315 244
60 0.500 938 806 638 881 757 599 750 645 510 560 480 383
12 10S 0.180 260 152 53 245 143 50 208 122 42 156 91 32
30 0.330 494 375 282 464 352 265 395 300 225 295 225 169
STD 0.375 563 463 354 529 435 332 450 370 283 335 275 212
40 0.406 569 500 398 535 470 374 455 400 318 341 300 238
XS 0.500 775 663 562 728 623 528 620 530 436 465 395 327
14 10 0.250 325 231 144 305 217 142 260 185 121 195 135 91
STD 0.375 500 407 319 470 382 298 400 325 254 300 240 190
XS 0.500 700 594 506 658 558 475 560 475 404 420 335 303
16 10 0.250 281 200 125 264 188 116 225 160 99 165 120 74
30 0.375 438 350 276 411 329 259 350 280 220 260 210 165
40 0.500 600 506 436 654 475 409 480 405 348 360 300 261
18 10 0.250 250 175 110 235 165 103 200 140 88 150 105 66
STD 0.375 375 306 243 352 287 227 3?? 245 193 225 180 145
XS 0.500 1,969 450 383 499 423 359 4?? 360 305 315 270 229
20 10 0.250 219 156 99 205 146 92 175 125 78 130 90 58
20 0.375 338 275 217 317 258 203 270 220 172 200 165 129
30 0.500 475 400 342 446 376 321 380 320 273 285 240 205
24 10 0.250 188 131 82 176 123 77 150 105 65 110 75 49
20 0.375 281 225 179 264 211 167 225 180 142 165 135 106
XS 0.500 388 325 281 364 305 263 310 260 224 230 195 168

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2190
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

PROCEDURE FOR PREPARATION AND HANDLING OF DATA USED FOR THE PRELIMINARY AND
SECONDARY MATERIAL TAKEOFF

PURPOSE
This practice provides instruction for the preparation and handling of data to be transmitted to
the Material Control Supervisor for the Preliminary and Secondary Piping MTO (Material
Takeoff).

SCOPE
This procedure identifies the responsible parties and describes the sequential activities
involved in the preparation and handling of this data.

APPLICATION
This practice should be used by all Piping Engineering personnel responsible for Preliminary
and Secondary MTO Data transmitted to the Material Control Supervisor.

RESPONSIBILITIES
The following is a list of the responsible parties involved:
Lead Piping Supervisor
Unit Piping Supervisor
Material Control Supervisor
Stress Engineer
Piping Designer
Piping Assistant
Step-by-step activities of the individuals concerned are shown in Attachment 02.
Handling of the Preliminary and Secondary Sketches are essentially the same; however, Steps
4B, 5D, 6, and 7 apply to Preliminary Sketch only, and Steps 4C and 5B apply to the
Secondary Sketch.

Overview
The purpose of the Preliminary MTO is to give the Material Control Group an early
evaluation of all material requirements and an accurate MTO for large diameter, alloy,
stainless, and special type materials.
The Secondary MTO is a continuous type takeoff, comparing the secondary and final
material requirements. Changes should be minor.
Strict conformance to this practice will result in a uniform approach to the handling of the
Preliminary and Secondary Takeoff. This is important to ensure that all material, and
specifically long delivery items, arrives at the jobsite prior to scheduled fabrication of
those Isometrics.
One hundred percent of all the material required for the Preliminary MTO will be
purchased. The appropriate "bump" (as defined by project) will be applied in accordance
with contract procedures.
The Unit Supervisor is responsible to contact the Material Control Supervisor and revise
the sketches/data whenever a major revision, such as changes to alloy piping, large valve

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2190
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

PROCEDURE FOR PREPARATION AND HANDLING OF DATA USED FOR THE PRELIMINARY AND
SECONDARY MATERIAL TAKEOFF

size changes, line size changes, or specification changes are required. This will be done
at any time during the job regardless of shutoff dates for Preliminary or Secondary
Takeoffs.
The Piping Designer is responsible to monitor the Master P&IDs (Piping and
Instrumentation Diagrams), layouts, and other data continuously, and promptly report
changes that affect material to the Unit Supervisor.
This practice, together with any related data, will be reviewed with the Project Piping
Engineer and the Material Control Supervisor to determine if any additional requirements
should be included, and to ensure it is suitable for the contract.

PREREQUISITES
The following data should be available in order to perform a successful MTO:
Plot Plans, AFC Issue.
P&IDs, AFC Issue. ("For Client Approval Issue" may be used for Takeoff.)
Pipe Line List.
Piping Material Specifications, AFC Issue.
Standard Drawings.
Flow Diagram Transpositions for Preliminary Takeoff.
Related Model Piping or Piping Studies for Secondary Takeoff.

DATA TRANSMITTED
TO MATERIAL
CONTROL
SUPERVISOR
The matrix in Attachment 01 identifies the documents to be transmitted to the Material
Control Supervisor by Piping Design in order to perform the Preliminary or Secondary
Takeoff.

DETAILED
PROCEDURES
Refer to Attachment 02, Detailed Procedure of Individuals Involved in the Preparation and
Handling of Data Used for Preliminary and Secondary MTO.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Data Transmitted to Material Control Supervisor By Piping Supervisor
Attachment 02:
Detailed Procedure of Individuals Involved in the Preparation and Handling of Data Used for
Preliminary and Secondary MTO

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2190
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

DATA TRANSMITTED TO MATERIAL CONTROL SUPERVISOR BY PIPING SUPERVISOR

Items Provided
Piping Classification Preliminary
Transpositions, Studies / Piping Sketches Isometrics Fab. and
Plot Plans Pipeway Plans Inst. Details
Inst. Plans Unchecked (4)
Underground Piping (1) X X
SCRD / SW Carbon Steel (3)
1/2" Through 12" BW Carbon (3)
Steel
14" and Larger BW Carbon Steel X
All Heavy Wall (3/4" Wall and X
Greater)
All ASME Piping X
All Alloy X
All Stainless Steel X
All Special Piping (2) X
All Special Piping (2) X
Misc Supts, Guides, Etc. X
Pipeway Lines X (9)
Notes: (Apply Only Where Reference Number is Shown in Matrix)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2190
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 2 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

DATA TRANSMITTED TO MATERIAL CONTROL SUPERVISOR BY PIPING SUPERVISOR

Items Provided
Piping Classification Secondary
Transpositions, Studies / Piping Sketches Isometrics Fab. and
Plot Plans Pipeway Plans Inst. Details
Inst. Plans Unchecked (4)
Underground Piping (1) (5) X
SCRD / SW Carbon Steel (3)
1/2" Through 12" BW Carbon (8) (6)
Steel (8)
14" and Larger BW Carbon Steel (7) (6)
All Heavy Wall (3/4" Wall and (7) (6)
Greater)
All ASME Piping (7) (6)
All Alloy (7) (6)
All Stainless Steel (7) (6)
All Special Piping (2) (7) (6)
All Special Piping (2) X
Misc Supts, Guides, Etc. X
Pipeway Lines X
Notes: (Apply Only Where Reference Number is Shown in Matrix)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2190
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 3 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

DATA TRANSMITTED TO MATERIAL CONTROL SUPERVISOR BY PIPING SUPERVISOR

NOTES
(Apply Only Where Reference Number is Shown)

1 Supplement Underground transpositions, studies and plans additional details of 14" and larger carbon steel, cast iron and
Vitrified Clay Riser, drops and congested areas.

2 Special materials are those which have long delivery dates, are very costly or require special fabrication techniques.
Included are non-metallics and lined piping. The materials Engineer shall provide information for these types in addition
to assisting Material Control and the Piping Supervisor in deciding which to sketch.

3 Requirements will be developed from information shown on P&IDs, plot plans and transpositions applied to a factor
system.

4 Fabrication details must be accompanied by an index listing all details available and estimated number of each item.

5 Underground studies may be used if Piping Plans are not available.

6 Unchecked Isometrics may be used in lieu of Sketches only if they are available. Isometrics shall not be prepared ahead
of schedule solely to meet the needs of the material sketching activities.

7 Preliminary Sketches may be used for Secondary Takeoff if configuration and sheet numbers will match the final
isometric.

8 Field fabricated lines require sketches. Vendor shop fabricated 1/2 inch thru 12 inch carbon steel lines will not require
sketching unless Fluor procures materials for the shop.

9 If available, use Pipeway Installation Plan or studies in place of transpositions.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2190
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 1 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

DETAILED PROCEDURE OF INDIVIDUALS INVOLVED IN THE PREPARATION AND HANDLING OF DATA USED
FOR PRELIMINARY AND SECONDARY MTO

Seq Responsibility Activity Description

1. Lead Supervisor Review job data and ensure data availability.

Request Material Control to provide Document Checklist at the conclusion of

Preliminary and Secondary Takeoff.

2. Unit Supervisor Review the schedule for timing, duration, and manpower availability. Report any
problems to the Lead Piping Engineer via the Lead Piping Supervisor, and review
schedule and final plan with the material Control Supervisor.

Develop applicable drafting room instruction. Assign Designers to prepare MTO

sketches and other items listed in Attachment 01. Transmits data to Material
Control Supervisor as required, in accordance with Attachment 01.

3. Piping Assistant Input Line List data into the Pipe Isometric Record.

4. Piping Designer A. Prepare MTO Sketches in conjunction with Piping Engineering

Practice 670.250.2191: Piping Design Guide.

B. Obtain xerox copy of stress sketch if practical to use as Preliminary MTO

Sketch.

C. Secondary Sketches will be drawn as soon as configurations are established on

the model.

D. Transmit sketches in groups of 5 to the Unit Supervisor. (Do not cause bottle
necking by holding up large quantities of sketches.)

5. Unit Supervisor A. Review first 10 Preliminary and Secondary Sketches from each Designer for
correct application of specification, standards, and instructions. Feed back all
comments to Designers to eliminate repetition of initial errors.

B. Determine if Secondary MTO yellow-off will parallel final yellow-off. If so,

establish Secondary yellow-off master diagrams.

C. Stress review not required - yellow-off the Master Flow Diagrams as sketches
are turned in. review sketches for completeness and forward to the Piping
Assistant. Advance to sequence 8.

D. Stress review required - transmit all Preliminary Sketch originals requiring

stress review as indicated in the line list to the Stress Engineer for evaluation.

6. Stress Engineer Make adequate analysis of Preliminary Sketch by inspection and note on original
any additional materials necessary to satisfy flexibility and allow stiffener ring
requirements (for example, three 14-inch 90-degree ells and 40' - 14" pipe).

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2190
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 2 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

DETAILED PROCEDURE OF INDIVIDUALS INVOLVED IN THE PREPARATION AND HANDLING OF DATA USED
FOR PRELIMINARY AND SECONDARY MTO

Seq Responsibility Activity Description

7. Unit Piping Review sketches for stress comments and yellow-off master P&IDs.
Supervisor
Obtain xerox copy of each Preliminary or Secondary Sketch and give original to the
Piping Assistant. File xerox copy.

8. Piping Assistant Transmit originals to Material Control Supervisor and for Secondary Takeoff;
update Pipe Isometric Record.

9. Material Control Perform takeoff.

Supervisor
Material changes originated by Material Control Group will be marked in Black Ink
on the xerox print in the Piping Design File.

Changes will be transferred to xerox prints on a weekly basis. Before marking,

bring changes to the Unit Supervisor's attention.

Sketch Update

10. Unit Supervisor Monitor P&IDs, returned Stress Sketches, and Model Review Comments for
changes affecting Material Sketches. Inform designers to review changes and revise
material Sketches as required. review model development regularly for possible
material changes.

11. Piping Designer Continuously monitor the P&IDs and other documents for changes that affect the
MTO Sketch or Isometrics.

12. Piping Designer Revisions

Follow instructions in Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2019.

In red, neatly make changes (that affect only the material) on the xerox print Piping
Design File.

Compare file copy of MTO Sketch with Stress Sketches returned from Stress since
last issue to MTO, and incorporate Stress comments that affect material.

Any significant change must be revised immediately as next Rev. and given to Unit
Supervisor. A significant change may be one that affect, butt welded fittings and
flanged or butt welded valves.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2190
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 3 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

DETAILED PROCEDURE OF INDIVIDUALS INVOLVED IN THE PREPARATION AND HANDLING OF DATA USED
FOR PRELIMINARY AND SECONDARY MTO

Seq Responsibility Activity Description

Redraws

Follow instructions in Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2191.

Void Line Numbers

Follow instructions in Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2191.

Once a line number is used and voided, it will not be used again. Never reuse that
line number throughout duration of contract.

Transmit revised and redrawn sketches or Isometrics to Unit Supervisor.

13. Unit Supervisor Revisions, Sheet Number Changes, and Redraws

Review all revisions. Yellow-off P&IDs as necessary.

Notify Material Control Supervisor when last sketch has been submitted for each
(Preliminary and Secondary) Takeoff.

Transmit all revised and redrawn sketches to Piping Assistant.

14. Piping Assistant Receive redrawn sketches and xerox prints (with red marks) from Unit Supervisor.

Obtain 1 xerox print of sketches.

File new xerox copy in Piping Design File.

Update Pipe Isometric Record (for secondary takeoff only.)

Forward sketches to Material Control Supervisor.

15. Material Control Update Material Takeoff.

Supervisor
If material changes are necessary, handle in accordance with Sequence 9.

16. Piping Assistant Handle subsequent revisions in accordance with Sequence 14.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2190
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 4 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

DETAILED PROCEDURE OF INDIVIDUALS INVOLVED IN THE PREPARATION AND HANDLING OF DATA USED
FOR PRELIMINARY AND SECONDARY MTO

Seq Responsibility Activity Description

17. Unit Supervisor Update Master Flow Diagrams.

At cutoff of Preliminary and Secondary Takeoff, have Piping Assistant order 2

prints of each Master P&ID from the roller board.

One print of each Master P&ID will go on the roller board for temporary master;
send the other to the Material Control Supervisor.

Send Master P&IDs (brownline mylar) from roller board to Control Systems Design
Group for update. Prints on roller board will be master until new brownlines are
made.

18. Material Control Issue Document Checklist to Piping Assistant via Lead Supervisor.
Supervisor

19. Piping Assistant Verify that all line numbers, sheet numbers, and revision numbers of sketches input
in Documents Checklist by material Control agree with the Pipe Isometric Record.
Report Deviations to Unit Supervisor.

20. Piping Designer Preparation of Final Isometric for Check

Show only as much of the Piping configuration on an Isometric sheet as was shown
on the MTO sketch sheet.

Before drawing Isometric, compare latest revision of Material Sketch in Piping

Design File with configuration on model and piping plan to ensure that Isometric
original reflects the same material and sheet number.

Decision: If materials or sheet number changes are not affected, forward

Isometric original (Rev. 0) to Piping Assistant in accordance with
contract procedures.

If material or sheet numbers are minor, revise file copy Secondary

Sketch (xerox print) and update to next revision (S2, S4, ....).
Forward marked-up xerox print to the Piping Assistant.

If material affected and changes are major, advise Supervisor.

Mark file copy of sketch "void" and change to next revision (S2,
S3, ....). Show following revision (S3, S4, ....) on Isometric
original.

Forward marked xerox prints or voided xerox prints and Isometric

originals to Piping Assistant

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2190
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 5 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

DETAILED PROCEDURE OF INDIVIDUALS INVOLVED IN THE PREPARATION AND HANDLING OF DATA USED
FOR PRELIMINARY AND SECONDARY MTO

Seq Responsibility Activity Description

21. Piping Assistant Obtain 2 blueline prints of all Isometric originals showing revision numbers (S3, S4,
....). File 1 print in Drawing Area checkprint package. Forward other blueline print
along with any voided and revised material Sketches to the Material Control
Supervisor.

For Isometric originals showing revision 0, obtain checkprint and file in Drawing
Area checkprint package. Check off under column 18.

Update Piping Isometric Record for Isometric drawn and revised sketches.

22. Material Control Update Secondary Takeoff. Advise Unit Supervisor of any material changes
Supervisor initiated by material Control that may affect callouts or dimensions on the Isometric.

23. Piping Checker After checking, compare checked Isometric with Secondary MTO Sketch.
Immediately advise Material Control Supervisor of any significant change.

24. Material Control Update Secondary Takeoff.

Supervisor

25. Lead Piping Monitor document checklist to ensure that it is in agreement with Piping Isometric
Supervisor Record.

Close out and dispose of Material Sketch file in accordance with contract
procedures.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2191
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

MATERIAL SKETCHING - MATERIAL SKETCHING INSTRUCTIONS

PURPOSE
The purpose of this practice is to provide instructions to produce sketches containing the
proper data in a consistent format to enable Piping Material Control to perform a material
takeoff for the purchase of materials.

SCOPE
This practice is arranged according to the following major sections:
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
PRELIMINARY MTO SKETCHES
SECONDARY MTO SKETCHES
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice applies to any project in any operations center where early piping material
identification is critical or advantageous to the success of the construction effort.

GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS
Use in conjunction with the procedure for preparation and handling of data used for
material sketches, Practice 670.250.2190: Material Sketching - Procedure For
Preliminary And Secondary Material Takeoff.
Sketches shall be drawn on Piping sketch form E-643.
Sketches will be given to Unit Supervisor in groups of 5 or less to avoid causing a
bottleneck during yellow-off.
Sketches may be drawn freehand or using a straightedge.

PRELIMINARY MTO
SKETCHES
Sketches may be drawn from origin to terminus or broken into as many sheets as required
for clarity.
Stress Sketches may be substituted as preliminary sketches with Unit Supervisor approval.

SECONDARY MTO
SKETCHES
The Secondary Takeoff is a continuous type takeoff, comparing the secondary and final
material requirements. This comparison can be achieved only by maintaining material
segregation by line and sheet number. Therefore, the sketch sheet number for a given
configuration must match the final isometric sheet number for that same configuration.
When this becomes impractical, sketches shall be revised to reflect materials relocated
from one sheet to another.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2191
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

MATERIAL SKETCHING - MATERIAL SKETCHING INSTRUCTIONS

Review preliminary sketches to determine if sketch can be reused.

If changes are minimum, reuse preliminary sketch. Change "P" revision to "S1."
If preliminary sketch cannot be reused, draw new sketch for secondary take-off.
For new secondary sketches, the sheet number breakdown shall be as follows:
To ensure that isometrics will not require braking up into additional sheets for final issue,
individual sketch and isometric sheets shall not cover more than one Piping Plan Area
(except pipeway portions). Sheets shall be broken up at natural fabrication break points,
not to match lines. See Attachment 2, Figure 1.
Sketches may require 2 or more sheets if 2 or more of the following conditions exist on a line.
Control valve manifolds
Rotameters
Steam traps or continuous drainers
Complex configurations such as pump suction expansion loops
Special support details

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2190: Material Sketching - Procedure For Preliminary And
Secondary Material Takeoff

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Notes
Attachment 02:
Figure 1. Sample Line Sketch
Figure 2. Sample Line Sketch
Attachment 03:
Sample Line Sketch
Attachment 04:
Sample Line Sketch
Attachment 05:
Sample Line Sketch

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2191
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

NOTES

Numbers shown here refer to the corresponding number shown in hexagon symbols on Attachments 02, 03, 04 and 05.

1. Indicate Area/Unit designation.

2. Indicate design and operating temperature.

3. Indicate Field Fabrication and/or Shop Fabrication next to title block.

4. Indicate flow diagram number and section in which line appears in the lower left hand corner.

5. North arrow orientation shall be to the upper right or left. Continuing sketch sheets shall have same north arrow
orientation if practical.

6. Indicate selected wall thicknesses on sketches. Material Engineering will note the selected wall thicknesses on the
flow diagrams.

7. Do not dimension fitting makeup segments.

8. Round off dimension to the nearest foot for all welded lines. Enclose dimensions in parentheses.

9. Do not indicate weld dots or screwed/socketweld symbols unless there is a chance of misinterpretation (i.e., butt
weld valves and flanged valves in the same line class, and fitting makeup).

10. Call out branch sizes, even if dotted.

11. Show reducers and swages. Call out only if eccentric or for clarification.

12. Locate insulation and heat tracing breaks.

13. Indicate all items per flow diagram including bleed valves, vents, drains, spectacle blinds, and orifice flanges.

14. Call out equipment mating flanges and other items only if different from the Material Specifications.

15. Instrument numbers are not required. Indicate the type of instruments in balloons with their size adjacent.

16. Indicate the rating of control valve only if out of spec.

17. Indicate suction strainers.

18. Note any alloy vacuum stiffener ring requirements on field fabricated portions.

19. Locate Field and Shop fabrication break points.

20. Indicate "holds" by encircling and labeling on sketch. "HOLD" shall be indicated in blue pencil on Master Flow
Diagram for reference.

21. Revisions: The first revision number used on the sketches for the Preliminary Material Takeoff shall be "P1". The
first Secondary revision number shall be "S1". Subsequent revisions shall be revisions shall be P2, etc., or S2, etc.,
as required.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2191
Publication Date 22Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

NOTES

22. Sheet Number Revisions: When a sheet number must be changed, update Xerox print in Piping Design File to next
revision, crossing out previous sheet number (do not erase) and mark new sheet number in red. When additional
sheets must be prepared for existing sketches, the next sheet number shall be assigned.

23. Voiding Line Numbers: Mark "VOID LINE NUMBER" on sketch (Xerox print in file). Indicate next revision
number in red. Also void out line number in the line list.

24. REVISIONS SHALL NOT BE MADE BY ERASING AND REDRAWING ONCE SUBMITTED TO THE
MATERIAL CONTROL SUPERVISOR.

Preliminary and Secondary revisions (changes) made to existing line configurations, shall be made by drawing a
wavy line through the portion of the existing line configuration that changed. The new line configuration will be
drawn next to the voided line configuration in red. The entire revision shall be circled and marked with a revision
symbol (see Method #1). When there is no room to draw the new line configuration next to the voided line
configuration, draw it in any blank space on the same sketch sheet (see Method #2).

25. Revisions Causing Redraw:

Mark the Piping Design File Xerox print in red with the following note: "VOID P2, REDRAWN ON NEXT
REVISIONS."

The new sketch shall contain the following note "REDRAWN ON (enter next revision.)"

Example: If sketch being revised was revision "P1", the revision number used to void the sketch would be
"P2" and the revisions number for the redrawn sketch would be "P3". (For the Secondary Takeoff,
the revisions would be S2 and S3 respectively.)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2120
Publication Date 18Mar96
Page 1 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

MODEL PIPING - PIPING DESIGN INSTRUCTIONS FOR DESIGN MODELS

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the preparation and completion of piping models.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
SCALE AND ACCURACY
LEGEND
DESIGN MODEL DATA
MODEL BOARDS
STRUCTURES, FOUNDATIONS, SUPPORTS, AND PIPEWAYS
MODEL PIPING
VALVES
FITTINGS
MISCELLANEOUS AND SPECIALTY ITEMS
ELECTRICAL / CONTROL SYSTEMS
SUPPORTS
SPECIAL FEATURE IDENTIFICATION
PERSONNEL PROTECTION
FIRE PROTECTION
TAGGING
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice is to be used by all personnel involved in the creation of model piping. Work
this practice directly with Piping Engineering Specification 670.250.50002: Development
And Design Models.

SCALE AND
ACCURACY
Models are typically built in a range of scales from 1:48 (1/4" = 1'- 0") to 1:12 (1" = 1'- 0").
For our purposes, however, the most commonly used scale is 1:32 (3/8" = 1'- 0"). The
accuracy of the model can be held to plus or minus 1/16". The decision to use other scales
will be based on the specific needs of the project.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2120
Publication Date 18Mar96
Page 2 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

MODEL PIPING - PIPING DESIGN INSTRUCTIONS FOR DESIGN MODELS

LEGEND
A model board legend will be attached to one of the model boards and will identify, by
example, such items as:
Piping service color code
Types of valves
Types of instruments
Piping specialties
Safety showers
Fire hose reels
Fire extinguishers

DESIGN MODEL DATA

The following data is transmitted by the Unit Piping Supervisor to the Model Shop as rapidly
as the information is developed or becomes available:
Contract model specification and practice (Piping Engineering Specification
670.250.50002 and Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2120).
Model board index drawing (refer to Attachment 01).
Equipment LCP (Location Control Plan).
Equipment outlines and dimensional data.
Building drawings (specify block or cut-away form).
Structures, foundations, and pipe support drawings or sketches.
Electrical equipment dimensional data and electrical conduit rack size and location.
Instrument control panels.
Overhead instrument rack size and location.
Underground piping layouts or plans showing fire monitor locations.
Other information as required
Vessel orientation layouts are transmitted to the Model Shop as soon as possible. The Model
Shop will fabricate the vessel and install nozzles, and other components as required.

Equipment Outlines
It is the Piping Supervisor's responsibility to compile equipment dimensional data from
Mechanical Engineering and forward this information to the Model Shop. As outlines are
received from Suppliers, the Unit Supervisor is to review the outlines and forward them to the
Model Shop as necessary. The Model Shop will fabricate equipment in a simplified form, tag,
and attach to model board, as required.

MODEL BOARDS
The Piping Supervisor initiates the model board index on a reproducible of the plot plan to
outline the perimeter of the model boards.
Whenever possible, try breaking the model boards along column centerlines to eliminate the
need for ghost supports. The area match lines and the edges of the boards should correspond

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2120
Publication Date 18Mar96
Page 3 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

MODEL PIPING - PIPING DESIGN INSTRUCTIONS FOR DESIGN MODELS

or should be reasonably close. For the model board to clear standard door openings, the
maximum size of model board should not exceed 2'- 6" by 5'- 0". When overall height of
model including bases does not exceed 2'- 6", the width may be increased.
When possible, fired heaters should be put on separate model bases along with their related
equipment and pipeway to facilitate the model piping and review.

STRUCTURES,
FOUNDATIONS,
SUPPORTS, AND
PIPEWAYS
A design sketch or layout approved by Structural Engineering can be used for transmitting
pipeway, structure, and miscellaneous pipe support information to the Model Shop.
Foundation sizes for aboveground are not required for exchangers, vertical vessels, and
pumps.

MODEL PIPING
Using P&IDs (Piping And Instrumentation Diagrams), drafting room instructions, piping
layouts, plot plan, and equipment studies, the designers will install the piping on the models.
The designer is responsible for workmanship, completeness, and conformance to contract
practices, specifications, and procedures. As an aid to accomplish this, the designer will
yellow off copies of the P&IDs as each line is installed and tagged. This work should be
audited by the Piping Supervisor on a regular basis.
The pipe is represented by plastic tubing of the appropriate diameter and color. Pipe colors
are to be as specified in Piping Engineering Specification 670.250.50002.
Screwed / socketweld and 1-1/2 inches and smaller butt weld will be installed as specified in
Piping Engineering Specification 670.250.50002.
Adhesive buttons are available through the Model Shop for all piping tags. Tag the model as
specified in Piping Engineering Specification 670.250.50002.

VALVES
Valves are installed on the model as described in Piping Engineering Specification
670.250.50002.
Valves will be permanently fixed in place only after final review and immediately prior to
shipment.
Refer to Attachment 02 for illustrations.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2120
Publication Date 18Mar96
Page 4 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

MODEL PIPING - PIPING DESIGN INSTRUCTIONS FOR DESIGN MODELS

FITTINGS
Commercially available components are installed when applicable in accordance with Piping
Engineering Specification 670.250.50002.
The Model Shop will fabricate piping, valves, or specialty items when there are no
commercially available components.
Refer to Attachment 03 for illustration.

MISCELLANEOUS AND
SPECIALTY ITEMS
Miscellaneous and specialty items will be installed in accordance with Piping Engineering
Specification 670.250.50002.
Gray colored, commercially available components are installed when applicable.
Adhesive buttons are available through the Model Shop for all piping tags.
Refer to Attachment 04 for illustration.

ELECTRICAL /
CONTROL SYSTEMS
Electrical / Control Systems items will be installed in accordance with Piping Engineering
Specification 670.250.50002.
Refer to Attachment 05 for illustration.

SUPPORTS
The method of support for piping installed on the model is representative, indicating as near as
possible the actual requirements.
Ghost supports are installed to stabilize the pipe on the model.
Pipe guide clips are installed to stabilize the pipe coming down a vessel. Locate model
supports and guides as close as possible to the actual location.
Refer to Attachment 06 for illustration.

SPECIAL FEATURE
IDENTIFICATION
Refer to Attachment 07 for illustrations.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2120
Publication Date 18Mar96
Page 5 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

MODEL PIPING - PIPING DESIGN INSTRUCTIONS FOR DESIGN MODELS

PERSONNEL
PROTECTION
Personnel protection equipment is installed in outline forms.
Refer to Attachment 09.

FIRE PROTECTION
Fire protection equipment is installed in block forms fabricated to scale. Furnish Model Shop
with size and quantity information.
Refer to Attachment 08.

TAGGING
Tags will be added to the model to provide information that is not readily visible as described
in Piping Engineering Specification 670.250.50002.
Tags will be hand lettered with "Pilot Ultra Fine" permanent black ink pens. Ballpoint,
fountain, or other type marking pens are not recommended.
Tags are to be applied to clean surfaces only.
Tags will be commercially available whenever possible.

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Specification 670.250.50002: Development And Design Models

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Sample Model Board Index
Attachment 02:
Valves
Attachment 03:
Fittings And Flanges
Attachment 04:
Miscellaneous And Specialty Items
Attachment 05:
Instruments
Attachment 06:
Supports
Attachment 07:
Special Feature Identification

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2120
Publication Date 18Mar96
Page 6 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

MODEL PIPING - PIPING DESIGN INSTRUCTIONS FOR DESIGN MODELS

Attachment 08:
Fire Protection Equipment
Attachment 09:
Personnel Protection

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2121
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROJECT PLANNING AND PLOT DEVELOPMENT MODEL

PURPOSE
This practice defines the requirements and guidelines for the preparation of project planning
models and plot development.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
RESPONSIBILITY
PROJECT PLANNING MODEL
PLOT DEVELOPMENT MODEL

APPLICATION
This practice will be applied selectively on projects where the use of this type of model
renders appropriate value as determined by Piping Engineering and Project Management.

RESPONSIBILITY
The assigned Project Piping Engineer will be responsible for the application of this practice.

PROJECT PLANNING
MODEL
The Project Planning Model is an overall site model developed to give a graphic
representation of the plant. The model components can be rearranged with minimal effort to
depict various schemes, to incorporate comments from the client, and to expedite approvals on
projects.
The following information is transmitted by Project Piping Engineer to the model shop as
rapidly as the information is developed:
Project model specification
Plot board sizes.
Unit sizes.
Topographical drawing (if required).
Control house and substation sizes.
Building sizes.
Interconnecting pipeways and sizes.
Other information as required.
Units are indicated and painted the appropriate color. Pipeways are indicated by
approximately colored plastic strips.
Roads are indicated by black tape outlines.
You may take pictures as a record of various arrangements.
When the model is no longer needed, return it to the model shop.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2121
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROJECT PLANNING AND PLOT DEVELOPMENT MODEL

PLOT DEVELOPMENT
MODEL
The Plot Development Model is a 3 dimensional tool used to establish the most functional
equipment arrangement with consideration for economics, operation, maintenance, and safety.
The following information is transmitted by Project Piping Engineer to the model shop as
rapidly as the information is developed:
Project model specification.
Plot board sizes.
Vessel and equipment sketches with dimensions and elevations necessary for fabrication
and installation.
Structural information with dimensions necessary for fabrication of buildings and pipe
racks.
Electrical equipment, control house, instrument control panel, and analyzer house
dimensional data and location.
Other information as required.
As equipment is fabricated, the model shop will attach item number labels and will paint the
equipment the appropriate color. Use double-faced tape to mount the equipment. You may
take pictures as a record of various arrangements. When the model is no longer needed, return
it to the model shop.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2122
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 1 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

MODEL PIPING - INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL PREPARATION AND REVIEW

PURPOSE
This practice defines the responsible disciplines and their activities in order to ensure an
orderly completion of models that may be required on a Fluor Daniel project.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
GENERAL
MODEL PREPARATION PLANNING CONFERENCE
PREPARATION OF PROJECT PLANNING AND PLOT DEVELOPMENT MODELS
PROJECT PLANNING AND PLOT DEVELOPMENT MODEL REVIEW AND
APPROVAL
DESIGN MODEL PREPARATION
MODEL PIPING
FLUOR DANIEL FINAL REVIEW
CLIENT MODEL REVIEW

APPLICATION
All engineering disciplines and project management will review this practice during the early
planning stages of a project and revised it if necessary to conform with contractual
requirements of the project. When used on a project, this practice will be used to monitor,
control, and sequence the activities to their completion.

GENERAL
This practice describes the steps to be followed for developing the project planning model, the
plot development model, and the design model; this practice also indicates the parties
responsible for each model. This practice begins with the establishment of model criteria from
initial development through the review and approval of each type of model.
This practice applies to the preparation of the various models that may be required on a
project. The project planning model is used for overall site/unit location and is normally built
at a scale of 1 inch = 20 feet or smaller. The plot development model is used to establish
equipment locations and elevations and is normally built at a scale of 1/4 of an inch = 1 foot.
The design model is used for the actual design of a plant and is usually built at a scale of 3/8
of an inch = 1 foot to 3/4 of an inch = 1 foot. These models may be used in any combination
for any project.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2122
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 2 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

MODEL PIPING - INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL PREPARATION AND REVIEW

MODEL PREPARATION
PLANNING
CONFERENCE
During the early stages of a project, PPE (Project Piping Engineer) will call a conference with
Engineering Coordinator, Project Lead Piping Design Supervisor, and Project Manager to
review and discuss the following data:
Contractual requirements and definitions of the types of models required and level of
detail.
Definitions of areas requiring models.
Model specifications, practices, and procedures.
Review of plan to utilize integrated engineering.
Establishment of the status of equipment information to be used.
Establishment of client review activities.
Model photography schedule.

PREPARATION OF
PROJECT PLANNING
AND PLOT
DEVELOPMENT
MODELS
Each engineering discipline and construction are responsible to provide Project Piping
Engineering with the necessary information and data to complete the model.
Project Electrical Engineer will establish substation sizes and locations, indicate electrical
right-of-way or easement requirements, and provide sketches or layouts as necessary.
Project Structural Engineer will establish building sizes, provide topographical maps as
required, indicate civil requirements, and provide preliminary design sketches for structures,
pipeways, and equipment supports.
Project Control Systems Engineer will establish locations and sizes of analyzer and control
houses, overhead instrument racks, and will also provide sketches and layouts as necessary.
Project Vessel Engineer will establish unit tank and vessel sizes.
Project Process Engineer will provide block type flow diagrams for unit tie-ins and design
criteria for approximate unit sizes.
Project Engineer will provide plant site information and client requirements.
Project Mechanical Engineer will provide preliminary equipment sizes.
Construction Representative will provide the type and size of mobile equipment to be used at
the jobsite.
Project Piping Lead Design Supervisor will establish sizes and locations of units and
interconnecting pipeways. Lead Piping Design Supervisor will accumulate design data,
review and develop overall plot arrangement and model board sizes, and then transmit this
information to the model shop.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2122
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 3 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

MODEL PIPING - INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL PREPARATION AND REVIEW

Model Shop will fabricate and provide plot boards, equipment structures, and components
required for completion, revisions, or repairs.
After the model shop work has been completed, Project Piping, Area/Unit Piping Design
Supervisor will review the model for completeness and notify Project Piping Engineer that the
model is ready for project review.

PROJECT PLANNING
AND PLOT
DEVELOPMENT
MODEL REVIEW AND
APPROVAL
Project Piping Engineer will call a conference for Fluor Daniel review, arrange for review
facilities, and notify participants, who will include:
Construction Representative
Control Systems Engineer
Electrical Engineer
Engineering Coordinator
Fire Protection Engineer
Lead Piping Design Supervisor
Process Engineer
Project Manager
Structural Engineer
The model will then be reviewed with consideration to the following criteria:
Proper location of tankage, buildings, control houses, substations and other offsite
equipment in relationship to the process units, project, and code requirements.
Operation and maintenance.
Construction and erection requirements.
Overall review for fire protection.
Project Piping Engineer will have the model corrected in accordance with the model
conference notes and notify Project Manager when the model is ready for client review.
Project Manager will review the model with the client and obtain comments and approval.
Project Piping Engineer will have the model corrected in accordance with the conference
notes and will prepare overall plot plan.

DESIGN MODEL
PREPARATION
Project Piping Engineer is responsible for ensuring the performance of the following:
Initiate model board schedule and coordinate model construction with Model Shop
Supervisor.
Ensure that input from other design disciplines is received.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2122
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 4 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

MODEL PIPING - INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL PREPARATION AND REVIEW

Develop a model board index for each scheduling area and release to model shop.
Review vessel and equipment outlines for component fabrication and release to model
shop as received.
Develop the equipment location control plan and release to the model shop.
Coordinate with control systems and electrical to provide for the installation of electrical
and instrument model components.

Component Development
Unit Piping Design Supervisor, with input from Vessel Design Supervisor, will prepare
assigned vessel orientations, review, and then submit to the model shop. Unit Piping Design
Supervisor will provide equipment locations, required piping layout data, and all pipe support
data required for structural design, and will transmit to the structural engineer.
Project Structural Engineer will provide Unit Piping Design Supervisor with the following
information:
Design sketches for structures and equipment support suitable for model fabrication.
Pipe support configurations and member sizes.
Sketches and typical pipe support drawings.
Project Mechanical/Electrical/Control Systems Engineer and Vessels Design Supervisor will
transmit dimensional information for equipment to Unit Piping Design Supervisor.
Unit Piping Design Supervisor will accumulate and review for completeness of detail all
vendor drawings, equipment information, and structural information, and will transmit to
Model Shop Supervisor as received. Unit Piping Design Supervisor will monitor, schedule,
and report to Project Piping Engineer obstacles affecting manhour budget or schedule.
Area Project Engineer will be responsible for expediting missing dimensional information for
equipment to be transmitted to Unit Piping Design Supervisor.

Component Fabrication
Model Shop will perform these activities:
Fabricate and hold model boards in accordance with the model board index and the
piping design schedule.
Fabricate equipment, structures, pipe supports, equipment foundations, instruments, and
electrical racks.
Install components in the model and release model to Unit Piping Design Supervisor.
Unit Piping Design Supervisor will review the model with Project Piping Engineer for
accuracy and completeness.

Component Assembly
Review
Project Piping Engineer will then schedule a component assembly review, arrange for review
facilities, and notify participants, who will consist of the following:
Area Project Engineer
Control Systems Engineer
Lead Piping Design Supervisor

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2122
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 5 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

MODEL PIPING - INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL PREPARATION AND REVIEW

Process Engineer
Unit Piping Design Supervisor
Vessel Engineer
Structural Engineer
Construction Representative
Electrical Design Supervisor
Electrical Engineer
Engineering Coordinator
Fire Protection Engineer
Project Mechanical Engineer
Structural Design Supervisor
The model will be reviewed with consideration to the following criteria:
Conformance to project specifications, practices, and flow diagrams
Operation and maintenance
Consistency
Economics
Fire protection and safety
At the completion of the review, Unit Piping Design Supervisor will correct the model in
accordance with the conference notes; Area Project Engineer will schedule a client review.

MODEL PIPING
The Unit Piping Design Supervisor will supervise the performance of the following:
Install piping on the model complete with valves, inline instruments, and identification
tags in accordance with contract specifications and established procedures.
Review model piping as work progresses for compliance with job standards,
specifications, instructions, and industry design practices.
Review drain funnel locations with the underground specialist.
Coordinate with Lead Electrical Design Supervisor and Lead Control Systems Design
Supervisor to schedule the installation of their respective systems and design features.
Stress Engineer and Process Engineer will continually evaluate piping configurations and
inform Unit Piping Design Supervisor immediately of any changes or potential problem areas.
Control Systems Design Supervisor and Project Control Systems Engineer will perform these
activities:
Install instrumentation in accordance with contract specifications and established
procedures.
Review locations of inline instruments and instrument connections and notify Unit Piping
Design Supervisor of any required changes.
Review instrument installations with Project Control Systems Engineer and make
corrections as necessary.
Review instrument rack routing.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2122
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 6 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

MODEL PIPING - INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL PREPARATION AND REVIEW

Electrical Design Supervisor and Project Electrical Engineer will review locations and
accessibility of electrical equipment, motor control center switchgear, pushbutton stations, and
routing of conduit and cable racks. At the completion of this review, Electrical Design
Supervisor will notify Unit Piping Design Supervisor that the model is ready for final review.

FLUOR DANIEL FINAL

REVIEW
Project Piping Engineer will schedule the Fluor Daniel final review, arrange for facilities,
gather necessary reference materials and notify participants, who will consist of the following:
Area Project Engineer
Construction Representative
Control Systems Engineer and Supervisor
Engineering Coordinator
Piping Staff Representative
Process Engineer
Project Manager
Project Mechanical Engineer
Structural Engineer and Design Supervisor
Unit Layout Designer (for taking notes)
Unit Piping Supervisor
Vessel Engineer
The objectives of the final review are the following:
Review model to ensure that operations, maintenance, construction, and erection are in
concurrence with project requirements.
Perform a line-by-line flow diagram check of the model.
Check for completeness with special attention to the routing of alloy and large diameter
piping.
Check location of control valve stations and instruments in relation to their function.
Review piping for maintenance and general plant design.
Review startup, shutdown, and operating conditions.
Check for consistency.
Unit Piping Design Supervisor will correct the model in accordance with the conference notes,
and Project Piping Engineer will notify Project Manager that the model is ready for client
review.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2122
Publication Date 22Oct95
Page 7 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

MODEL PIPING - INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL PREPARATION AND REVIEW

CLIENT MODEL
REVIEW
Project Manager is responsible to perform these activities:
Provide the client with the latest approved flow diagrams, contract specifications and
procedures, supplies, and facility for the model review.
Review and approve client comments and issue model conference notes.
At the conclusion of the client model review, Unit Piping Design Supervisor will correct the
model in accordance with the model conference notes.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1037
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 1 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING

PURPOSE
This practice provides sources of information, general instructions, and suggested checking
procedures for manual, FACET, CALMA and Intergraph projects.

APPLICATION
The checking of drawings is one of the more important functions in the Piping Department, if
not the most important. Not only does the exactness of our dimensions shown on the drawings
rest in the hands of the checker, but so does the overall appearance of the finished plant.
When checking a drawing in detail, a checker has the opportunity to watch for good operating
conditions, proper clearance between equipment, and general plant consistency, all of which
we wish to maintain.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
SOURCES OF INFORMATION
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
CHECKING PROCEDURES
CHECKING PROCEDURE CALMA AND INTERGRAPH 3D DRAWINGS

SOURCES OF
INFORMATION
The checker needs the following items to accomplish the checking function. Should you have
any problem obtaining this information, see your Design Supervisor for assistance.
Preliminary job information
Piping specifications
Piping Plot Plan and/or Drawing Index
Piping Drawing Progress Report
Piping model (plastic or electronic) - when applicable
Line list
Mechanical and Utility Flow Diagrams
Piping design instructions
Fluor Daniel Piping Design Guide
Purchased or estimated piping material line bills or isometrics (material sketches)
Appropriate Fluor Daniel and Client standards and specification
Contract piping practices
Location Control Plan
Insulation specifications
Equipment list
Structural steel, concrete, electrical and vessel drawings, or model files

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1037
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 2 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING

Piping flexibility studies/stress sketches

Specification sheets and certified outline prints of the following:
- Instruments
- Equipment
- [Out of] Specification and Engineered Item List/Dimensional Data Book
Adjacent piping drawings including underground drawings

GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS
Design Supervisor assigns checker the area to check.
The checker will show all additions and changes in sufficient detail for the draftsman's
complete understanding. Avoid verbal instructions.
If reasons for errors are not clearly apparent, consult the designer in charge of the area
before making changes.
Immediately notify Design Supervisor of any changes in piping, material, or equipment
that may affect other departments.
The piping checker is not to redesign because of personal preference or opinion.
Obviously any changes of this type lead to expensive drafting costs and material
discrepancies. If any material discrepancies are found, they must be called to the
attention of Design Supervisor immediately.
After drawings have been checked, return the check prints to the Design Supervisor for
review and assignment of designer for backcheck and corrections.
After the corrections have been made, the originals and check prints will be returned to
the checker for signature. Before signing the drawings, be sure to check the master flow
diagrams for any new revisions pertaining to the drawings; then sign the originals and
return them to the design supervisor. Return the check prints to Design Supervisor for
filing.
The checker is responsible to keep the marks on his personal (desk copy) flow diagrams
up to date with the master flow diagrams.
The checker must inform Design Supervisor and mark all reference drawings for any
changes made that will affect work already completed or in progress. This reference
material will usually consist of (but not be limited to) other design sections work, adjacent
piping areas, specifications, and vendor drawings. Design Supervisor is responsible for
communicating these changes to proper parties through the proper procedural channels.

CHECKING
PROCEDURES
The order in which the following items are listed is a suggested step-by-step procedure for
checking piping drawings to avoid unnecessary repetition of reference, possibility of omission,
and wasted motion. This procedure is not meant to be a hard and fast rule that must be
followed, but as a guide to assist our checkers in establishing a checking pattern.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1037
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 3 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING

Title Block Manual And

FACET Drawings
Note!!! Reference Material - Piping Design instructions, Fluor Daniel Piping Design Guide,
and Drawing Progress Report.
Proper title.
Name of plant and location.
Name of designer, supervisor, and, after corrections have been made, the checker.
Project Piping Engineer, project engineer and client (if required by job procedure).
Date (date the drawing is released for issue).
Scale, if full drawing is same scale; if not, then the words "As Noted" should show in this
block.
Drawing number as taken from Drawing Progress Report or Drawing Index.
Reference drawing block, (such as Upper/Lower Plans, Underground)

Orientation Of Drawing
Note!!! Reference Material - Plot Plan and Piping Drawing Index.
North arrow.
Coordinates of match lines.
Reference to adjacent drawings.

Equipment Location
Note!!! Reference Material - Location Control Plan, Foundation Location Drawing,
Structural Stick File, Vessel and Electrical Reference Drawings, and Equipment
Folders.
Coordinates of building columns, foundations, and pipe supports.
Outlines of equipment, structures, foundations.
Coordinates of vessels.
Equipment Chart: Vessel nozzle orientation, elevations, projection size and rating.
Ladders, platforms, walkways.
Roads, paved areas, trenches.
Proper numbers for all equipment and structures.
Electrical substations, starter racks.
Anchor location of horizontal vessels and exchangers.

Equipment Configuration
Check
Equipment size per CDO (certified dimensional outline).
Nozzle size and rating per CDO.
Nozzle locations per CDO.
Locations of supports and guides per CDO. or Ladder and Platform drawings.
Any other pertinent details that affect the quality of the interference check (such as
stiffener rings, insulation, and access/removal envelopes).
Note "Hold" for all equipment not having certified outlines.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1037
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 4 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING

Space Requirements
Note!!! Reference Material - Preliminary Job Information, Equipment, Vessel and Structural
Reference Drawings.
Erection space.
Operating space.
Tube bundle pulling or maintenance space.
Manway clearance.
Adequate operating space on platforms around instruments.
Equipment removal space.
Future installation requirements.

Flow Diagrams And

Line List
Note!!! Reference Material - Mechanical and Utility Flow Diagrams, Line List, Piping
Specifications.
Line sizes, and direction of flow from source to destination.
Valves, fittings, and equipment in each line according to specification.
Proper line designation according to line list and flow diagrams.
Checker should mark the master line list for any difference between it and the master flow
diagram.
Flow arrows on piping.
Insulation as indicated on line list and flow diagrams.
Steam tracing as indicated on line list and flow diagrams.

Piping (Check For Scale

As Work Progresses)
Note!!! Reference Material - Preliminary Job Information, Piping Reference Drawings,
Piping Design Guide, Piping Design Instructions, Stress Sketches, Material Sketches,
Piping Specifications, and Piping Standards.
Spacing and clearance requirements of lines in pipeways.
Future space requirements in pipeways in accordance with the contract criteria.
Continuation and spacing of lines on adjacent drawings.
Clearances between pipe and equipment on structures. (Check for fireproofing.)
Connections and flange rotations at equipment.
Clearances around valves and equipment for operation, maintenance, and removal.
Accessibility of valves and operating equipment.
Proper location of traps, separators, vents, and drains.
Instrument connections. (Check with Instrument Engineer for proper locations.)
Proper location and orientation of orifice flanges, and proper amount of run up and down
steam.
Connections for future equipment or piping installation.
Pipe shoes on insulated lines.
Expansion or contraction of lines. Indicate amount of cold spring or prespring.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1037
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 5 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING

Location and designation of anchors, guides, hangers, and brackets. For these items, be
sure to review stress sketches from Stress Group.
Underground connections.

Dimensions
Sufficient dimensioning to draw Isometrics of the pipe lines without scaling and without
reference to any other source other than piping drawings.
Dimensioning to be in accordance with Practice 000.250.9810.

Notes And Caption

All notes and captions must be legible and with abbreviations according to Practice
000.000.9910.
Lettering should be all of the same size, and upper case according to Practice
670.250.2050.

Review Of General
Piping Arrangement
Correct spelling.
Check line to see that it agrees completely with the master flow diagrams and contains all
valves, instruments, control stations, and connections.
If control valve is operated by a liquid level controller, it should, if possible, be located in
view of the gage glass showing the liquid level.
Vents should be provided at the high points of all lines, except those in air service.
Drains should be provided at low points on all lines.
On ring joint piping, check for enough flanges or offsets so that it can be installed.
Check for location of underground connections and drain funnels.
Use flat faced steel flanges against 125# flat faced cast iron equipment. gaskets will be
full face type.
Provide thermal relief valves between block valves on liquid lines directly exposed to
sun.
Check for proper support of small bore piping.
Check structural drawings for miscellaneous steel not normally shown on model or plan
drawing (for example, bracing, or gussets).

CHECKING
PROCEDURE, CALMA
AND INTERGRAPH 3D
DRAWINGS

Partition Audit
Note!!! The Partition Audit involves the following:
Review of the Equipment Status Record to determine that it is complete and current
according to the latest equipment outline (aboveground partitions only).

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1037
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 6 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING

Review of the Pipeline Status Record for items on hold (aboveground partitions only).
Ideally, no items should be incomplete at this time, or the partition is not ready to be
audited.
Verification that IFC conflicts are resolved. Auditor must confirm that there are no
unacceptable conflicts and that the envelope file date is just before the audit.
Verification that material has been updated to the latest reference database. Designers
will indicate when they have run Verify Reconstruct and Reconstruct Component on the
Pipeline Status Record. The auditor will confirm that no database changes have occurred
since those dates.
Review the Partition Control Book to determine that all interface points have been
documented.
Using a plant view plot as a record, check 5 instances of each of the following on the
workstation (aboveground partition only):
Line spacing (insulation, thermal expansion).
Pipe spans.
Bottom of pipe or trunnion versus TOS.
Access, maintenance, removal clearances.
The designer and the piping supervisor will discuss the result of the audit to determine
whether any additional checking is required. An Audit Status Sheet should be completed by
the auditor and will help in tracking the various auditing tasks.

Orientation Of Drawings
Note!!! Reference Material - Plot Plan and Piping Drawing Index.
North arrow.
Coordinates of match lines.
References to adjacent drawings.

Design Review
Note!!! The PDS designer will generate and annotate the piping drawings in accordance with
the contract requirements.
The partition layout designer's name will be placed in the "Designed By" blank. The partition
designer's and the auditor's initials (if the partition was audited) will be placed in the "Checked
By" blank. The partition designer or the auditor will also review the final drawing for the
following:
The computer model view used in the drawing (levels/classes displayed, extent of
clipping match Drawing Index).
Reference computer models added and displayed.
Proper text (equipment numbers and coordinates, pipe support coordinates, pipe
elevations, all lines labeled).
Drawing symbols and text (reduced print scale, north arrow, a title block, HPFS,
reference to individual piping isometrics for additional details).
Matchline coordinates and reference to adjacent drawings.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1037
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 7 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING

Audit Confidence
Note!!! This procedure is intended to replace the full detail "Check" done in the past and our
confidence in the system is based on the following:
Interference check done before issue of drawings.
Checked database prior to 3D modeling. All PDS designers access the same database for
each individual project.
Checked equipment (location and piping connections).
Material cross-check between reference database and partition file.
Proven reduced field rework on PDS projects with this audit procedure implemented.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1038
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING: PIPING PLAN CORRECTIONS

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for making corrections to Piping Engineering drawings. It
applies to all projects and work assignments.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major topics:
RESPONSIBILITY
OVERVIEW
GENERAL CORRECTION GUIDELINES
REFERENCES

APPLICATION
Drawings must be checked, updated, and corrected before they can be issued for construction.
This practice serves as a reminder for the experienced employee, and aids the new employee
in the following ways:
It acquaints new employees with actual job conditions and serves as a useful transitional
tool from class to job.
It provides additional training and job experience because it helps minimize the demands
on the new designers until they gain more experience and confidence.
It shows where errors often occur, and brings the new designers' experience level up more
quickly.
It frees up more experienced designers to work on more difficult tasks.

RESPONSIBILITY
The Design Supervisor for each discipline is responsible for proper use of this practice. The
Department Manager is responsible for keeping design supervisors informed of changes and
additions to this practice.

OVERVIEW
Because changes and errors can and will occur, corrections are a vital part of all engineering
drawings. Cooperation and communication is essential between checker, designer, and
corrector during the checking and correction process.
If an individual does not have the original drawing, the supervisor will indicate where the
originals are kept and how to obtain them. When given a correcting assignment, the employee
should handle originals carefully, and never crease or fold the original. Each original
represents thousands of dollars of effort.
Before any corrections are made, look over the check print carefully. There may be some
critical notes in black lead pencil explaining how to make certain corrections. If in doubt, ask
the checker.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1038
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING: PIPING PLAN CORRECTIONS

GENERAL
CORRECTION
GUIDELINES
Checker marks will be corrected on the original as follows:
Do not touch items on the original that are marked correct on the check print. However,
if corrected items need to be moved in order to make the change required, circle those
items or areas in orange on the check print. This procedure will warn the checker to
verify that the items are still correct.
Delete areas on the original that are marked for deletion on the check print.
Add areas or items on the check print that are marked to be added to the original or
drawings.
All changes on piping plan drawings should be to correct scale. If maintaining the correct
scale creates a significant amount of additional work, consider drawing items out of scale.
This approach will require approval of the supervisor in addition to identifying out of
scale items with a wavy line below the applicable dimension.
After the correction has been made on the original, circle all items on the check print in
black lead pencil. This will make it easier to see what items are left to do.
Conform to linework already on the original. Make all lettering neat and legible. Plan
ahead when making corrections so that the changes are presented in a clear, organized
manner. Tiny lettering, poor linework, and disorganized work are not acceptable.
If a drawing can be clarified by redrawing or by erasing large areas marked correct, go to
the supervisor first to determine if the idea is warranted. Never erase correct areas to
"clean up" a drawing without approval from the supervisor.
After the corrections have been made, be sure to initial each check print in black lead
pencil and return them to the supervisor.
Corrections to PDS Model Files must be made by a properly assigned PDS Designer. The
reasons for making corrections to PDS Files are to obtain computer generated design check
reports on such things as interferences and incompatible specifications, or to generate hard
copy markups by another designer during the normal checking process.

REFERENCES
General Engineering
Practice 670.200.1037: Drawing Checking
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1037: Drawing Checking
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1039: Drawing Checking - Piping Isometrics

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1039
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 1 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING: PIPING ISOMETRICS

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for checking all manual and computer generated isometric
piping drawings. It applies to all projects and work assignments.

SCOPE
This practice provides:
General instructions to checker
Prerequisite data
Sequence of checking
Attachments

APPLICATION
The primary function of isometric piping drawings is to convey the exacting details that are
necessary to construct and install a portion of piping. If not properly prepared, the drawing
will not convey the information necessary to transform design ideas into a finished product.
All drawings are a form of a written communication and should be developed to transmit
thoughts, ideas, and technical information as clearly and concisely as possible. Accuracy is
the most important aspect of the isometric.

RESPONSIBILITY
The Design Supervisor will enforce the utilization of this standard. The Department Manager
will maintain and revise this practice as required.

GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS TO
THE CHECKER
Piping isometrics should be checked simultaneously with the model and the piping plan
drawings. All resources used during checking of piping plan drawings should also be used for
the checking of the piping isometrics. There are, however, some additional details and
considerations that pertain to the piping isometrics only. These are listed and discussed in
THE SEQUENCE OF CHECKING section of this practice.
In general, butt-welded, shop, or field fabricated isometrics shall be fully detailed and
dimensioned so that a vendor shop or site shop can fabricate all required spool pieces.
In general, screwed or socketwelded isometrics should be dimensioned so that the field may
cut and prefabricate as much as possible before installation.
When using the coordinate and elevation method, show key elevations with only limited
dimensions as required for material takeoff.
Dimensions that must be maintained, show thus: 6'-7" (without plus or minus).

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1039
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 2 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING: PIPING ISOMETRICS

Dimensions that may vary slightly without affecting the clearance, show thus: 12'-4" ±.
Dimension to the nearest inch.
The isometrics released for checking should be completed to the best of the isometric drafter's
ability as related to the information availability and instructions. Anything omitted or
incorrect that is remembered by the isometric drafter should be called to the attention of the
checker. If not already discovered, it can be incorporated on the check print.
When assigning work to be checked, the Design Supervisor will specifically indicate
isometrics to be checked. No drafting will be performed within the specifically assigned areas
while checking is in progress.
Each print to be used as a check print should be identified with a rubber stamp identifying it as
a check print. The information required on the stamp will vary from office to office but
should include the checker's name and the date, and the corrector's name and the date. The
checker is to fill in his/her name and the date when isometric checking actually starts.
The checker must make sure that the latest available information is being used. If any
suppliers' prints are not certified, a "hold" or a note to "field verify" should be placed on the
drawing as determined by Project Piping Engineer's instructions.
Isometrics will be checked only against information that has already been checked such as
certified supplier prints and areas of a model that have been reviewed. If, during a check, it is
discovered that more information is needed or a design change is necessary, the checker will
attach a note of explanation to the check print and hold until information is received. When
checking has been completed, the check prints will be forwarded to designers for correction.
The checker will ensure that all out-of-spec items and engineered items are identified as listed
on the project engineered item list.
The checker will indicate all additions, deletions, and changes. Major changes will be
returned for redesign and resubmitted upon completion to the checker. The colors used for
checking will be in accordance with General Engineering Practice 670.200.1050: Drawing
Practices.
The checker should not return work to be redesigned unless it is determined that a majority of
the design is unacceptable.
The checker will consult with the Design Supervisor if the reasons for the errors are not
clearly apparent. All markings will be clear and concise for the corrector's complete
understanding. Avoid using verbal instructions.
Upon completion of an assignment, the checker should review the check prints with the
Design Supervisor and the isometric/drafter before having the necessary corrections made to
the drawings.
Upon completion of the corrections and backchecking by the isometric drafter, the checker
will review the drawings with the check prints and documents for the current changes prior to
signing the drawings as checked. The signed drawing will be returned to the Design
Supervisor and the check prints will be placed on file.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1039
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 3 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING: PIPING ISOMETRICS

Color Code System

The following color code is used throughout Fluor Daniel for checking and correcting
drawings:
Red Means To Add
This is used by the checker when there is something to be added such as notes and
changes in dims. When a corrector sees this, he/she is required to transfer these marks on
the original drawings. If the marks cannot be understood, go to the checker for
clarification. Never make a change or correction without fully understanding the
checker's intention.
Blue Means To Delete
This is used during the check by the checker to indicate that an item such as notes and
symbols is to be removed. When a corrector sees this on a drawing, he/she is required to
erase what is marked in blue pencil.
In addition, checkers sometimes write special instructions to the corrector in black pencil.
Yellow Means Correct: Do Not Change
Yellow is used by the checker during all phases of checking. When a corrector sees this,
it indicates that the item is correct and should not be removed from the drawing. If
yellowed off notes, dimensions, and other similar features must be moved for clarity of
presentation, use care that they are rewritten correctly and circle the note in orange.
Green Supersedes Red
Green marks placed over red marks on a drawing indicate that one designer is making
changes in red which is being verified in green by another designer (backchecking).
When this situation occurs, the corrector is to transfer these marks to the drawing. Green
supersedes all other colors.
Note!!! Sometimes, the corrector is required to backcheck the drawing as well as correct it.
If the correcting assignment includes backchecking, the changes are to be verified by
the corrector and all incorrect changes are to be resolved with the checker.
Black Pencil Means Note From Checker
Items in pencil are used as notes to corrector by the checker. The corrector should read
the notes and follow the checker's instructions.

PREREQUISITE DATA
As a minimum, the Design Supervisor will make the following information available to the
checker (all items to be approved for design):
Any special instructional documents, job notes, or other information that has been passed
on (either verbally or in writing) in project meetings or by other means.
P&IDs
Pipe line list
Applicable piping specifications
Equipment lists
Drawing Progress/Status Reports (all departments)
Vendor drawings

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1039
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 4 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING: PIPING ISOMETRICS

Equipment layout drawings

Applicable drawings from other disciplines
Note!!! The design supervisor must immediately inform the checker when he learns about
changes or possible changes in the area being checked.

SEQUENCE OF
CHECKING
Check the title block data.

Fabrication And
Installation Data
Shop or field fab
Internal cleaning requirements
Post weld heat treatment required
ASME boiler code requirements
Seal welding required
Shoes, guide and anchor requirements
Check for any other special requirements

Scheduling Data (If

Required)
Number of erection welds
Sequence of erection
Difficulty factor

Line List Data

Line commodity
Liquid or vapor
Conditions
Insulation requirements
Tracing requirements
Stress review requirements

Identification Data
Piece mark number (shop fab only)
Reference drawings
Drafter's name/date drawn
Project number/area/unit/change order
Line number and class/sheet number/revision number

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1039
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 5 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING: PIPING ISOMETRICS

North Arrow
North arrow orientation will be to the upper right preferably. Upper left is an alternate, if
required.
All isometrics will have the same north arrow orientation.

Configuration
Check general configuration.
Check general configuration and routing of the line to see that it is in agreement with the
P&IDs piping drawings and the model, and that it contains all the major items such as
control stations, bypasses, and laterals before proceeding with a detailed check.
Check the break out flange and union locations for the operation, maintenance, and
turnaround requirements.
Check the line list and P&ID for proper origin and terminus showing the correct
equipment number, nozzle orientation, and elevation when tying into the equipment.
On lines leaving area, check for match line, location, elevation, and coordinates. This
should agree with the piping plans and the continuation sheets. Check for the
continuation sheet number. Check for the same north arrow orientation.
Make a detailed check of each piping isometric configuration.
Each of the following items should be checked in detail to see that the piping isometric agrees
with the piping drawings, model and flow diagrams:
Exact configuration
Line sizes and changes in size
Direction of flow
Location of branches, connections, and other similar items
Fittings, flanges, valves, instruments, and other similar items
Ensure that all items appearing on the flow diagram, model, and piping drawings are
accounted for, and that they are shown correctly, using the proper symbols.

Callouts
Check for callouts.
Special items, or items that are not in accordance with the piping specifications, are to be
called out and labeled such as the following:
Off-specification valves, flanges, pipes, or fittings
Flanges 26 inches and larger must have the following information:
- Flange OD
- Bore
- Bolt circle
- Bolt hole diameter
- Number of bolt holes
- Flange thickness
(The above listed items are not required for A.P.I. flange.)
All specialty items by SP number or IC number

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1039
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 6 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING: PIPING ISOMETRICS

Dummy legs, field supports, anchors

Instrument connections and such items that are normally detailed on standard drawings
Car seal open or closed valves
Bolt through or cap screws requirements
Coated or wrapped pipe at dikes, under roads, and at other similar locations
Callout items that require information in addition to the standard symbol for interpretation, or
that will benefit the fabricator such as the following:
Reducers, swages, short radius ells, reducing flanges, 45 degree ells, and other such
fittings.
Chain operators, specification blinds, rod and spring hangers, and other such
miscellaneous items included with the piping.
Reinforcing pads or saddles, clips, brackets, lugs, and other similar items welded to the
piping.
Limits of shop and field fabrication, safety insulation, and ASME boiler code
requirements, if any.
Callout items that are normally indicated in accordance with the standard Fluor Daniel
practice such as the following:
Equipment nozzle flange size, rating, facing, and identification number
Control valve flanges
Orifice flange sizes, ratings, and fab detail number
Cold spring or prespring
Pump suction strainers
Field weld locations
Valve handwheel orientation and rotation of bolt holes, if required
Flow direction on check valves
Piece mark numbers

Supports
Check for support.
Ensure that the line is adequately supported and that miscellaneous field supports, rod and
spring hangers, brackets, lugs, and pickup supports are properly shown.
Note!!! Supports not given a pipe support number or detailed by the structural group must be
called out and detailed on the isometric.
Provide special supporting for hydrotesting or erection.
Check need for insulation lugs.

Insulation
Check all instrument connections for the following:
Identification number
Location
Size, rating, facing, or connection type
Accessibility

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1039
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 7 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING: PIPING ISOMETRICS

Clearance
Orifice tap orientation
Orientation of control valve actuators

Flow Sheets
Check items that are not always shown in piping plans, models and flow sheets, such as the
following:
The hydrostatic test vents and drains. (Be sure to follow the line into the adjoining areas
to verify the high or low points and to see if the vent or drain has been taken care of on
the continuation isometric.)
The elevation and orientation of the control valve bypass and the bypass valves.
The steam traps at the low points on the steam lines.
The minimum distance between welds.

Dimensional
Make a complete, detailed, and dimensional check in accordance with the Fluor Daniel
dimensioning practice, paying particular attention to the following items:
The main dimension lines should run from the face of flanges to the centerline of the pipe
(ells or tees) and include valves, and changes in direction, and should be in a continuous
string.
The secondary dimensions should be used for laterals, miscellaneous connections,
instruments, vents, drains, and other similar features. These items should be dimensioned
separately and from 1 direction only (not in the main dimensions string).
Dimensions on the piping isometric drawing will be to the contact face of flanges (except
ring joint flanges will be to the extreme face of flange) and to the centerline of pipes,
branches, and other similar features. Dimensions will be in inches up to 1'-0"; in feet and
inches 1'-0" and over. Dimensions will be to the nearest 1/16 of an inch.
Offsets will be full dimensioned, that is, all sides and angles.
When calculating the eccentric reducer offset dimensions, use the outside diameter of
both ends.

Gaskets
At the valves, flanges, orifice flanges, specification blinds, strainers, and other similar
features, ensure that the location of the gaskets are shown in the proper location.
At the valves, orifices, flanges, and specification blinds, gaskets should be included
within the valve, orifice, or specification blinds dimensions.
At equipment nozzles, gaskets should be shown on the equipment side and the outside of
the regular dimension string.

Miscellaneous
Check for cold spring or prespring.
Check for adequate meter run lengths.
Check for anchor and support locations.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1039
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 8 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING CHECKING: PIPING ISOMETRICS

Check proper configuration, dimensioning, and angles on boxed-in offset angles.

Check to ensure that a minimum of 1 North/South coordinate, 1 East/West coordinate, and 1
elevation is given on each isometric.
Make a final review of each isometric against flow diagram, model, and piping drawing, and
look over entire isometric in general for accuracy and completeness.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2080
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 1 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING ISOMETRICS - PIPING ISOMETRICS DRAWING INSTRUCTIONS

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for instruction and samples of a typical Fluor Daniel
piping isometric including title block information.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
RESPONSIBILITY
GENERAL NOTES
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice applies to all projects in Fluor Daniel Operations Centers. Flexibility is allowed
based on project's needs, the approval of the Project Piping Engineer, and the Operations
Center Manager.

RESPONSIBILITY
The responsibility for ensuring compliance with this practice rests with the assigned Project
Piping Engineer, Lead Piping Design Supervisor, and Area Supervisors.

GENERAL NOTES
The purpose of the piping isometric instructions and the sample isometrics are:
To define Fluor Daniel minimum requirements pertaining to piping isometrics.
To present the general format for piping isometrics.
The term piping isometric is used to describe an 11 inch by 17 inch 3D drawing of a line or
part of a line, complete with all information required for fabrication and installation. Refer to
Attachment 14 for a copy of the Standard Piping Isometric Border.
Isometrics are used for various activities during the course of a job such as material takeoff,
stress analysis, and insulation subcontract administration. Therefore, the isometric drawing
must also include adequate data to satisfy the needs of these activities without becoming
unreadable.
All items pictured on the piping isometric will be clearly identified and located through
symbols, dimensions, or notes. For isometric symbols, refer to Practice 670.250.9818:
Symbols For Piping Drawings And Isometrics - Fittings And Flanges.
A piping isometric consists of 3 parts:
Engineering Data Block consisting of 4 major sections:
- Fabrication and Installation Data - Listing special information related to the
fabrication and installation requirements of the line.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2080
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 2 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING ISOMETRICS - PIPING ISOMETRICS DRAWING INSTRUCTIONS

- Line List Data - Listing the commodity, service conditions, insulation, and tracing
requirements.
- Identification Data - Listing information required to identify the piping isometric and
the source documents.
- Revision Blocks - Indicate the type of revision and the required approvals.
Geographic Section (or face) showing what is to be fabricated.
B/M (Bill of Material) listing all materials required to fabricate and install the line is
prepared by the Piping Material Control Group and may be attached to the isometric or
issued as a separate document.

REFERENCES
ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.0720: Project Requirements Checklist - Piping Engineering
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2081: Piping Isometrics - Manual Components Drawing
Instructions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2190: Material Sketching - Procedure For Preliminary And
Secondary Material Takeoff
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2191: Material Sketching - Material Sketching Instructions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2291: Stress Design - Reinforcing Pad Requirements
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.9818: Symbols For Piping Drawings And Isometrics - Fittings And
Flanges
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.9820: Dimensional Chart - Spectacle Blinds
Piping Engineering
Specification 670.250.50003: Piping - Material Specification Line Class
Piping Engineering
Specification 670.250.50025: Shop Fabrication And Handling - Process And Utility Piping
Piping Engineering
Specification 670.250.50026: Field Fabrication And Installation - Process And Utility
Piping
Piping Engineering
Specification 670.250.50028: Internal Cleaning Of Piping Systems
Piping Engineering
Specification 670.250.50201: Piping Support Elements

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2080
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 3 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING ISOMETRICS - PIPING ISOMETRICS DRAWING INSTRUCTIONS

Piping Engineering
Specification 670.250.50300: Heat Tracing For Piping, Equipment, And Instruments
Piping Engineering
Specification 670.250.85013: Welding - Stainless Steel Hygienic Tubing
Piping Engineering
Specification 670.285.85002: Welding - Pipe, Shop / Field Fabrication

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Key To Miscellaneous Isometric Examples
Attachment 02:
Sample Isometric Title Blocks
Attachment 03:
Miscellaneous Isometric Examples - 2.9.3
Attachment 04:
Miscellaneous Isometric Examples - 4.4 to 4.6
Attachment 05:
Miscellaneous Isometric Examples - 4.6 to 4.9
Attachment 06:
Miscellaneous Isometric Examples - 4.10 to 4.12
Attachment 07:
Miscellaneous Isometric Examples - 5.8 to 5.11
Attachment 08:
Miscellaneous Isometric Examples - 5.14 to 5.19
Attachment 09:
Miscellaneous Isometric Examples - 5.21 to 5.22
Attachment 10:
Miscellaneous Isometric Examples - 5.23 to 5.25
Attachment 11:
Miscellaneous Isometric Examples - 5.25
Attachment 12:
Miscellaneous Isometric Examples - 8.2.1 to 8.2.2
Attachment 13:
Example of Line Weight and Required Grid Lines
Attachment 14:
Form 000.250.F7103: Standard Piping Isometric Border+

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2080
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

KEY TO MISCELLANEOUS ISOMETRIC EXAMPLES

1.0 Numbered notes on this attachment refer to specific sections of the sample Isometric Title Block (Attachment 02)
and example of miscellaneous Isometric Symbols (Attachments 03 through 12).

2.0 General

2.1 Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.0720: Project Requirements Checklist - Piping Engineering, will
define which lines require piping isometrics and the dimensioning method employed such as dimension
method or coordinate and elevation method. The Designer should refer to the appropriate sample piping
isometrics.

2.2 The sample isometrics included in this section illustrate methods of dimensioning and various types of
callouts.

2.3 Basis for determining number of sheets required per line:

2.3.1 Clarity; do not overcrowd. Sample isometrics in this section show the maximum that should be on
1 sheet.

2.3.2 For manual and facet ISOs (Isometrics), review secondary material sketch before drawing
isometric. Refer to Piping Engineering Practices 670.250.2190: Material Sketching - Procedure
For Preliminary And Secondary Material Takeoff and 670.250.2191: Material Sketching -
Material Sketching Instructions.

2.3.3 Configuration and sheet number also will agree with secondary material sketch (P-Sketch).
Differences should be called to the attention of the Piping Design Supervisor.

2.4 Piping isometrics are not drawn to scale. However, there should be some semblance of proportion between
the various runs of pipe. A run 4 feet long should be shown longer than a run 2 feet long. Fittings and
valves also should be in a reasonable proportion within themselves, although these items are very often
shown on the large side for clarity. Refer to Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2081: Piping Isometrics -
Manual Components Drawing Instructions, Page 1, for fitting, flange and valve proportion samples.

2.5 North arrow orientation may be to the upper right or upper left depending on Best Presentation. Continuing
piping isometric sheets will have same north arrow orientation. Once determined, north arrow should stay
that way for entire project.

2.6 Lettering will be caps, minimum 3/16 of an inch high for manual ISOs or 3/32 of an inch high for electronic
ISOs.

2.7 Line types and weights on ISOs are to be indicated as shown on the sample ISOs.

2.8 Isometric symbols will be in accordance with Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.9818: Symbols For
Piping Drawings And Isometrics - Fittings And Flanges.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2080
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 2 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

KEY TO MISCELLANEOUS ISOMETRIC EXAMPLES

2.9 Shop Fabrication

2.9.1 The term Shop Fabrication refers to a line or any portion of that line that is fabricated in a shop
outside the perimeter of the jobsite.

2.9.2 Refer to individual contract Project Requirements Checklist for shop / field fabrication categories.

2.9.3 Small flanges in the field fab category that are butt welded to swages and short stubs (plus or
minus 12 inches) will be included in the shop fabrication such as at control valves and pumps.
Refer to Attachment 03.

2.9.4 All field fabricated portions will be noted by a shop / field break. Field attached and field
assembled items such as drains, vents, and field supports, will not show shop / field break. Project
Piping Engineer to ensure this is understood by Shop Fabricator and Construction.

2.10 Field Fabrication

2.10.1 The term Field Fabrication refers to a line or any portion of that line (butt weld, screwed, or socket
weld) that is to be fabricated at the jobsite.

2.10.2 Refer to individual Checklist for shop / field fabrication categories.

3.0 Engineering Data (Refer to Attachment 02 for Sample Engineering Data Block)

3.1 Enter Piping Engineering Specification 670.250.50025: Shop Fabrication And Handling - Process And
Utility Piping. If the line is to be shop fabricated in total or in part, enter "X" in "Yes" column for "Shop
Fab;" otherwise, make entry in "No" column.

3.2 Enter Piping Engineering Specification 670.250.50026: Field Fabrication And Installation - Process And
Utility Piping. If the line is to be totally field fabricated, partially field fabricated, or all shop, enter "X" in
"Yes" column for "Field Fab."

3.3 Enter Piping Engineering Specification 670.250.50028: Internal Cleaning Of Piping Systems. When
internal cleaning of pipe is called for on the flow diagram or line list, enter "X" in "Yes" column for
"Internal Cleaning Required." Otherwise, make entry in "No" column.

3.4 Enter Piping Engineering Specification 670.285.85002: Welding - Pipe, Shop / Field Fabrication. Enter
"X" in "Yes" column for Post Weld Heat Treatment when called for on the summary for welding
requirements included with Specification 670.250.85013: Welding - Stainless Steel Hygienic Tubing.
Otherwise, make entry in "No" column.

3.5 When ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) Code requirements for the line are called for on
the flow diagram, enter "X" in "Yes" column for "ASME Boiler Code Piping." Otherwise, make entry in
"No" column. All ASME code piping requires special control procedures, special documentation, and
special checking and handling in the field.

3.6 Where seal welding is required for threaded connections, enter "X" in "Yes" column for Seal Weld Screwed
Joints. Otherwise, make entry in "No" column. Refer to the Piping Engineering Specification
670.250.50003: Piping - Material Specification Line Class.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2080
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 3 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

KEY TO MISCELLANEOUS ISOMETRIC EXAMPLES

3.7 In the box labeled "Shoes, Guides, Cradles," enter quantity and drawing number of items required for
installation which are not graphically presented or noted on face of isometric. If none required, enter
"None." Entries include all items listed in Piping Engineering Specification 670.250.50201: Piping
Support Elements.

3.8 Not used.

Line List Data

3.9 The Line Commodity will be as shown on the line list. Also, put an "X" in the appropriate box for either
liquid or vapor as shown on the line list. When mixed commodity (vapor and liquid), put an "X" in each
box.

3.10 The Design / Operating Pressures and Temperatures will be entered exactly as shown on the line list.

3.11 Enter an "X" in the appropriate box for Insulation requirements as noted on the flow diagram. If the total
ISO requires IH (heat conservation), IS (safety), IC (cold), or IA (acoustic insulation), enter an "X" in the
appropriate box. If the ISO does not require insulation, enter an "X" in the "None" column. If the ISO is
partially insulated and partially uninsulated, enter an "X" in "As Noted" box.

3.12 Tracing - When the flow diagram indicates tracing is required, enter "X" in "Yes" column for trace. Enter
number and size of tracers required as called for in Piping Engineering Specification 670.250.50300: Heat
Tracing For Piping, Equipment, And Instruments, and enter "X" in the box for "Heat Transfer Cement
Requirements." When the flow diagram calls for ET (electric trace), enter "X" in "Yes" column for
"Electric Trace." When the flow diagram calls for ETT (electric trace), enter "X" for both "Electric Trace"
and "Heat Transfer Cement Required." When no tracing is required, make all entries in "No" column.

Identification Data

3.13 On ISOs containing shop fabrication, enter designation for color code band to be painted on each piece
mark. This color, in accordance with the contract area color code specification, designates the unit or area
in which the line is to be installed.

3.14 Enter line number prefix designation as shown in the line list. This may be the area or the unit number.
Also, enter the full line number and line class.

3.15 The piece or mark number will not be entered in this area but will be shown or designated on the face of the
ISO for each piece. Refer to Section 5.12.

3.16 Enter the Reference Plan Drawing number for the piping plan on which this ISO is shown.

3.17 Enter the flow diagram number and section showing the line.

3.18 Designer is to enter first initial, last name, and date the ISO was drawn. 3.19. Enter the Project Number.
Use all digits in accordance with the project criteria. For scheduling and cost control purposes, also enter
the Area number and the Unit number.

3.20 The "Line Number" block will have the full line number as shown in the line list. This normally includes
the unit prefix, the line number, and the line class; for example, 11-102A. The Designer drawing the ISO

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2080
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 4 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

KEY TO MISCELLANEOUS ISOMETRIC EXAMPLES

also will add the appropriate Sheet Number to each ISO as drawn. Add the total number of sheets only to
the last sheet. If there is only 1 sheet, enter a "1 of 1." If there are 5 sheets, enter "5 of 5" on the last sheet.
Sheets 1 through 4 will not have an entry in the second space. The "Rev." box is used to indicate the
current revision status of the isometric. For issue AFC (Approved For Construction), the drawings will be
issued Revision 1, and use numeric revision changes.

Revision Blocks

3.21 Revision 1, AFC.

3.21.1 Enter AFC.

3.21.2 Designer is to enter initials and date ISO is generated.

3.21.3 Checker is to enter initials.

3.21.4 The unit supervisor will initial on approval line after flow diagram yellow-off.

3.21.5 Initial by material control.

3.21.6 If line has been reviewed by stress and the stress sketch is marked "Resubmit Checked Spool,"
checker will enter "Yes" on line for stress approval. Isometric will be sent to Stress Engineer who
will remove "Yes" and enter their initials. If stress sketch is marked "Approved" or line did not
require stress analysis, draw line through "Stress."

3.22 Subsequent revisions of AFC ISOs. The Designer making the change will fill in revision number, enter
initials in "By" space, and the date change was made. The method of showing a dimensional change on
face of ISO will be to cloud change and add delta. Checker is to enter initials in "Checked" space. The
initials for "Stress," "Material," and "Approval" will be completed for each revised ISO as noted in 3.21.

4.0 Graphic Section - Dimensions

Performance Standard
It will be the responsibility of the Project Piping Engineer to ensure that adequate data required to produce ISO
dimensions is readily accessible to the Designer prior to the start of ISO preparation.
It will be the responsibility of the Designer to produce ISOs which are dimensionally correct.

4.1 Refer to individual Project Requirements Checklist for method of dimensioning to be used on a particular
contract.

4.2 Refer to the sample ISOs in this section for examples of the dimensioning method specified on the contract
Project Requirements Checklist.

4.3 Except for ring joint flanges, dimensions are centerline of pipe to centerline of pipe or centerline of pipe to
contact face of flange. Ring joint flanges are dimensioned to the extreme face of flange and not to the
contact surface of groove.

4.4 Air cooler header piping with 3 or more nozzles to be dimensioned as indicated on Attachment 04.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2080
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 5 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

KEY TO MISCELLANEOUS ISOMETRIC EXAMPLES

4.5 Valves, or any items requiring extra long bolts such as bolt through control valves, will be noted as "Bolt
Thru" with a face-to-face dimension given (include gaskets). Refer to Attachment 04.

4.6 Dimensions locating lateral connections on headers are to be the intersection of centerlines. Refer to
Attachment 04.

4.7 When calculating eccentric reducer offset dimensions, use the outside diameter of both ends.

4.8 Cold spring or Prespring

4.8.1 Indicate cold spring or prespring by placing "Fab" before the dimension and the amount of cold
spring or prespring deducted or added under the dimension.

4.8.2 Cold spring or prespring will be as indicated on the piping plan drawing. Refer to Attachment 05.

4.9 Offset dimensions: The following rules apply to all piping ISOs. Refer to Attachment 05.

4.9.1 Offset in single planes: (horizontal or vertical.) Give true length, 2 sides, and angle.

4.9.2 Offset in 2 planes: Give true length, 2 horizontal dimensions and 1 vertical dimension, and a
horizontal and vertical angle.

4.10 Taper boring requirements will be noted at field welds on the ISO, if internal surface alignment of piping
components to be jointed by butt welding exceeds 1/16 of an inch, unless otherwise specified by Project
Design Criteria. Refer to Attachment 06.

4.11 Insulation break points will be located. Refer to Project Design Criteria for limitations.

4.12 Tie-ins will be noted by indicating tie-in number, existing line number and drawing reference number.
Dimension as indicated on Attachment 06.

5.0 Graphic Section - Notes and Callouts

5.1 The equipment number and the nozzle identification letter or number will be shown.

5.2 The size, rating, and facing of flanges of equipment will be given.

5.3 A minimum of 1 elevation and 1 coordinate in each direction will be given on each ISO.

5.4 All dotted line continuations shown on an ISO will be referenced to a line number, a sheet number, or a
drawing number. If the continuation is located on a different portion of the same sheet, reference will be
indicated from point "A" to point "A", from point "B" to point "B", and so on.

5.5 Items having recognizable symbols and are included in the material specification for the line class do not
require callouts or clarifying notes. Exceptions to this practice include size notations of line reductions
using fitting, flanges, valves, and branches.

5.6 Item Code and Specialty Item Numbers appearing on the flow diagram will be shown on the ISO.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2080
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 6 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

KEY TO MISCELLANEOUS ISOMETRIC EXAMPLES

5.7 Out-of-spec flange callout will include rating, facing, and nonstandard flange thicknesses only when
different from the line class of the ISO.

5.8 Flanges 26 inches and larger must have the following information: flange OD, bore, bolt circle, bolt hole
diameter, number of bolt holes, flange thickness, and catalog reference. Refer to Attachment 07.

5.9 When jack screws are required for spectacle blinds, the jack screw orientation will be noted; for example,
jack screws on E-W centerline. Refer to spectacle blind standard drawings, Piping Engineering Practice
670.250.9820: Dimensional Chart - Spectacle Blinds, and Attachment 07.

5.10 Reducing slip-on flanges are to be listed by the 2 nominal pipe sizes; for example, 6 inch by 2 inch. Use
only when flow is into equipment. Refer to Attachment 07.

5.11 In-line furnished items will be noted as "Furn'd" or "Bolts and Gaskets Furn'd." Refer to Attachment 07.

5.12 Mark numbers for shop fabricated spools. Mark numbers will be established for all shop pieces prior to
final MTO (Material Takeoff) and issue. Identical configurations on the same ISO will not have the same
mark number. Where possible, number pieces in the direction of flow. Pieces will be designated by sheet
number and letter; for example, 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B, 2C. Field fabricated pieces do not require mark
numbers.

5.13 FW (Field Welds) on shop ISOs will be located to allow spool pieces to fit within the shipping and handling
requirements as defined on Project normally 8 feet by 8 feet by 40 feet.

5.13.1 Field welds also will be located to facilitate installation such as through a building wall, platform,
or within a structure or pipeway.

5.13.2 Locate field welds above platforms and away from pipe supports to facilitate welding.

5.13.3 Where a choice exists between a field weld in the horizontal or vertical run, the horizontal location
is preferred.

5.13.4 Field fitup type field welds should be provided for any piping arrangement that may require field
alteration for fitup; for example, multiple equipment connections where branches are too short to
allow correction without cutting. Fitup type field welds will only be used with Project Piping
Engineer's approval.

5.14 Reinforcing pad thickness and size will be indicated where required. Refer to Attachment 08 and Piping
Engineering Practice 670.250.2291: Stress Design - Reinforcing Pad Requirements.

5.15 Bends will be shown with round corners and note radius of bend in diameters in accordance with Piping
Material Specifications, or note radius dimension. Refer to Attachment 08.

5.16 Orient handwheels on flanged and butt welded valves. Handwheel orientations will only be shown for
screwed or socket welded control manifold valves and when operation or clearance is a consideration.

5.17 When valve handwheel or equipment flange orientation causes bolt holes to rotate off its normal
north-south, east-west, horizontal or vertical axis, bolt holes will be noted to straddle the required
centerline.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2080
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 7 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

KEY TO MISCELLANEOUS ISOMETRIC EXAMPLES

5.18 Chain operated valves will be indicated on ISO with the distance above grade or platform indicated. Refer
to Attachment 08.

5.19 Handwheel extension stems will be shown on ISO with length of extension stem indicated. Refer to
Attachment 08.

5.20 The extent of mechanical or chemical cleaning of a piping system (when indicated on a P&ID) will be
indicated on ISO.

5.21 Selected wall thickness or schedule. When total line or a specific line size requires a selected wall
thickness, it will be indicated on the B/M (Bill of Material). If only a portion of the same line size requires
a selected wall thickness or schedule, it will be shown on the face of the ISO. Refer to Attachment 09.

5.22 Instrument location, orientation, and identification will be shown. Minimum instrument identification
balloon size will be 1/2 of an inch diameter. Refer to Attachment 10.

5.23 Heater Tube Slot Detail will be shown on ISO with the heater piping dimensionally located from the heater
tube slot centerlines in the installed position. Refer to Attachment 10.

5.24 Indicate building walls and platforms on the ISO.

5.25 Cap screws will be noted on ISO as "Cap Screws Reqd" or "Cap Screws Furn'd." If cap screws are
required, show size on ISO. Refer to Attachment 10. Length may be determined by referring to
Attachment 11.

5.26 PMI (Positive Material Identification)

Place PMI stamp at lower right hand corner of ISO.

5.27 Category M Stamp

Place Category M stamp at lower right hand corner of ISO.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2080
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 8 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

KEY TO MISCELLANEOUS ISOMETRIC EXAMPLES

6.0 Piping Fabrication and Installation Details

6.1 Piping Fabrication and Installation Details are drawings of items which are either Supplier or field
fabricated and installed by the field from a standard detail drawing.

6.2 Individual job instructions will define which fabrication and installation details will be used on your
contract.

6.3 Fabrication and Installation Details include, but are not limited to the following items:

6.3.1 Miscellaneous supports, anchors, guide, and shoes

6.3.2 Level controllers

6.3.3 Level glasses

6.3.4 Level switches

6.3.5 Orifice taps

6.3.6 Sample connections

6.3.7 Steam traps

6.3.8 Utility stations

7.0 Piping Fabrication and Installation Packages

7.1 Refers to Fabrication and Installation packages. Square will be 1/2 of an inch. Examples are steam traps
assemblies and utility stations.

7.2 Fabrication and Installation packages will not be used on alloy, ASME, category "x", 900#, and higher
rating ISOs. Orifice taps and level controllers will be detailed on ISO.

8.0 ASME ISO Instructions

8.1 ISO Identification

Place ASME Stamp at lower right corner of ISO.

8.2 Weld Identification

The ASME Engineer is responsible for a Field Welding Procedure that is attached to the isometric for all
welds made in-place. Therefore, all welds that are or might be made in-place must be identified on the ISO.

General Rule: All in-place welds will be identified with a field weld number typical for welds of the same
size and type. Welds will be designed by ISO sheet number and letter such as 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2080
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 9 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

KEY TO MISCELLANEOUS ISOMETRIC EXAMPLES

Welds that require identification on ISOs are as indicated below. Refer to Attachment 12.

8.2.1 Shop Fabricated ISO

a. Field butt welds

b. Field socket welds
c. Field nonpressure attachment welds
d. Seal welds

8.2.2 Field Fabricated ISO

a. All butt welds

b. All stub ins
c. All socket welds
d. All cplg, sol, wol, attachments to butt weld pipe
e. All nonpressure attachment welds
f. Seal welds

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1601
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 1 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING PRACTICES

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the design of heat tracing systems.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
GENERAL
WINTERIZATION
TEMPERATURE ZONES
HEAT CONSERVATION
INSTRUMENTATION WINTERIZATION AND HEAT CONSERVATION
STEAM TRACING
IDENTIFICATION
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice is to be used by personnel involved in the design of heat tracing systems.

GENERAL
This practice covers the protection of piping, vessels, equipment, and instrumentation against
the effects of low temperatures that would cause congealing or freezing of contents, interfere
with the normal operation of equipment or piping systems, or damage equipment or piping
systems. Heat tracing to protect against low ambient temperatures is accomplished by means
of winterization. Heat tracing to retain or maintain a specific temperature is accomplished by
means of heat conservation.
Should a conflict arise between this specification and the process flow diagrams, the process
flow diagrams will govern.

WINTERIZATION
The term winterization applies to measures taken to protect equipment from damage, and to
prevent either interruption or failure of plant operations due to low ambient temperatures.
Winterization procedures, design, and equipment must provide protection during the months
when extreme low temperature conditions exist.
Winterization of underground piping systems subject to freezing will consist of maintaining a
burial depth equal to or greater than the frost line.
Winterization is not required for equipment or piping systems located inside of heated
buildings.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1601
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 2 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING PRACTICES

Methods Of
Winterization

Circulation
Winterization by circulation is provided where a sufficient power source is available to keep
the fluid circulating.

Draining
Utility water and utility air lines in intermittent service will be winterized by draining.

Steam Tracing
Winterization by steam tracing is preferred if winterizing by circulation or draining is
impractical.

Glycol Water Tracing

Winterization by circulation of hot glycol water is an alternative to steam tracing whenever
sufficient quantities of glycol are available.

Electric Tracing
Winterization by electric tracing is utilized when precise temperature control is required or
where other tracing methods are impractical.

TEMPERATURE ZONES
The low January average temperature is used to define the zone number and the low ambient
design temperature, which then determines the degree of winterization protection required.
For areas outside the United States, the daily average low temperature of the coldest month
will be used to determine the low ambient design temperature.

Zone I: Low January

Average 30 Degrees F Or
Higher
No winterizing is required for water service except where a sustained temperature below 30
degrees F is recorded numerous times for 24 hours or longer.
Other fields and services will be governed by heat conservation practices.
Compressors, blowers, and other mechanical equipment are specified for operation at the low
ambient design temperatures.
Instrumentation will be protected as indicated in the section entitled Instrumentation
Winterization And Heat Conservation.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1601
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 3 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING PRACTICES

Zone II: Low January

Average 29 Degrees F To
0 Degrees F
Winterization is required for water and aqueous solutions. Trace to maintain temperatures of
approximately 75 degrees F.
Fluids with pour points at or above the low ambient design temperature should be traced to
maintain a temperature approximately 100 degrees F above their pour points.
Pumps preferably are winterized with the companion piping. Compressors, blowers, and other
mechanical equipment are specified for operation at low ambient design temperatures.
Storage tanks and vessels will have winterization type drains.
Water draw-off sections of vessels and bottoms of air or gas receivers where water can collect
will be heat traced by winterization.
Instrumentation shall be protected as indicated under the Instrumentation Winterization And
Heat Conservation section.

Zone III: Low January

Average Below
0 Degrees F
Winterization is required for water and aqueous solutions. Trace to maintain temperatures of
approximately 75 degrees F.
Fluids with pour points at or above the low ambient design temperature should be traced to
maintain a temperature approximately 100 degrees F above their pour points.
Special consideration should be given to the following systems:
Buried lines due to depth of frost line
Air intakes to boilers and other heating equipment
Cooling towers and air coolers
Pumps preferably are winterized with companion piping. Compressors, blowers, and other
mechanical equipment are specified for operation at low ambient design temperatures.
Storage tanks will have winterization type drains.
Water draw-off sections of vessels and bottoms of air or gas receivers where water can collect
will be winterized.
Instrumentation will be protected as indicated under Instrumentation Winterization And Heat
Conservation sections.

HEAT CONSERVATION
The term heat conservation applies to measures taken to retain heat for the process, to
maintain temperatures critical to process control, and to recover heat for economic reasons.
Heat conservation of process piping, equipment, and instruments is required whenever the
pour point of the fluid is above the normal operating temperature or when it would be
desirable to maintain certain fluid temperatures.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1601
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 4 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING PRACTICES

Methods Of Heat
Conservation

Insulation
Wherever practical, insulation will be used for heat conservation.

Steam Tracing
Steam tracing is the preferred method of heat conservation for heavy fluids where insulation
alone is inadequate.

Glycol Water Tracing

Hot glycol water tracing is an alternative to steam tracing whenever sufficient quantities of
glycol are available.

Electric Tracing
Electric tracing is utilized when precise temperature control is required or where steam tracing
is not practical. To keep fluids in condition to flow, the thermostat setting for electric tracing
will be determined according to fluid properties.

Tracing With Heat

Transfer Cement
Heat transfer cement may be utilized when a process line requires a high heat input and
common methods of heat tracing are inadequate.

Steam Jacketed Piping

Steam jacketing is utilized in specific cases where steam tracing with heat transfer cement is
inadequate.

INSTRUMENTATION
WINTERIZATION AND
HEAT CONSERVATION
Instrumentation winterization and heat conservation will be accomplished using the same zone
numbers as indicated under the winterization section.
Where practical, instruments will be installed in heated buildings to simplify protection
requirements and to facilitate maintenance.
Heat tracing and heated housings will be installed in such a manner that maintenance and
removal of the instrument can be accomplished easily.
Instruments, instrument lines, and level glasses that are heat traced and contain liquids that
boil at tracing medium temperature are separated from the tracers with spacers to prevent
overheating.
Protection is required on gas or air service in all zones where condensate may render
instruments inaccurate or inoperative.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1601
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 5 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING PRACTICES

In Zones II and III, protection is required on liquid service where moisture is likely to enter
lead lines and instruments.
It is acceptable to use 1 tracer to heat trace more than 1 instrument item within a system. (For
example, for a steam flow meter, the tracer may run first to the condensate pots, then down the
lead lines, and then to the heater in the meter house.)

Zone I
Seals will be used for lead lines and instruments that contain water, or where condensate may
occur.
If seals are impractical, drip pots or drip legs will be used.
Lead lines and instruments containing fluids, as indicated in Zone I previously, will be traced.

Zone II
Lead lines and instruments containing fluids, as indicated in Zone II previously, will be
protected by seals, tracing, or heated housings.

Zone III
Lead lines and instruments containing fluids, as indicated in Zone III previously, will be
protected by tracing or heated housings.
Seals will be a nonfreezing solution compatible with the process fluids, and with piping and
instrument materials. A 60 percent ethylene glycol and water solution will be used for most
hydrocarbon process fluids. Refer to API RP-550 for other sealing fluids.
Those parts of seal pots that are in contact with the process fluids are protected for the zone in
which they are installed.
In areas where steam or electricity is not readily available for heat tracing, consideration will
be given to the use of instruments equipped with a mechanical diaphragm type seal at the
process connection, in lieu of heat tracing.
Instruments with dry gas or dry air purging do not require protection for the lead lines.
Winterizing requirements for electronic transmitters will have special considerations and will
be determined as contract standards are developed.
Bulb type temperature instruments will be specified with fill material that does not require
winterizing for the particular zone in which they are to be installed.
Differential pressure instruments having factory-filled bellows or diaphragm assemblies will
be specified with a fill material that does not require winterizing for the particular zone in
which they are to be installed. Care will be taken not to overheat diaphragms above their
design temperatures.
Sample systems for analyzers that require a liquid stream will be protected in the same manner
as the pipe line from which the sample is obtained for the zone in which they are installed.
Caution will be used to ensure that the sample is not damaged by overheating or vaporizing.
Gas samples to analyzers that contain condensables will be provided with heat tracing to
prevent condensation.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1601
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 6 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING PRACTICES

Heated housings may be required for the analyzer and sample conditioning system. Each
analyzer installation will be investigated for winterization requirements.
External float or displacer type level instruments and level glasses will be protected, as
indicated under the appropriate zone, or installed in heated housings.
Protective provisions for differential type level instruments will conform to those described
for differential type flow and pressure instruments.
Control valves will not be traced with the associated process piping, except that valves will be
stem traced on gas or vapor services with high pressure drops, where hydrates may be formed,
or where freezing or congealing may occur.
When control valves used, as direct connected regulators, require winterization, the pressure
control line and valve diaphragm chamber containing the process fluid will be heat traced and
insulated. Except Zones I and II, when the diaphragm chamber is sealed, the pressure control
lines will be heat traced and insulated from the point of seal to the process line connection.
Local mounted recorders for Zone I will be provided with weatherproof instrument cases with
rain shields. For Zones II and III, they will be housed for protection from rain and snow. For
heating requirements, refer to the Instrumentation Winterization And Heat Conservation
section.

STEAM TRACING
Steam tracing minimum pressure requirements will be as follows:

Zone I
Minimum tracer steam pressure is 15 psig; maximum allowed is 150 psig. At minimum
pressure, condensate will be routed to the plant sewer system. If condensate is collected, the
minimum usable pressure is 25 psig.

Zone II
Minimum tracer steam pressure is 25 psig; maximum allowed is 150 psig.

Zone III
Minimum tracer steam pressure is 60 psig; maximum allowed is 200 psig.
Steam tracing tubing materials will be in accordance with line Class Y for piping and
equipment and line Class ZX for instrumentation.
Tracers will be OD tubing. Soft annealed copper tubing will be used where temperature of the
product line or tracing steam does not exceed 400 degrees F. Above this temperature dead
soft annealed, hydraulic quality, low carbon seamless steel tubing will be used.
For stainless steel lines, the tracer material will be low carbon steel. Stainless steel instrument
leads will be traced with copper tubing.
For aluminum pipe lines, the tracer material will be stainless steel.
When calculating the outside diameter of the insulation, the pipe size must be increased by 1
size to allow for the tracers.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1601
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 7 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING PRACTICES

For conditions where the tracer could overheat lines containing acid, caustic, amine, phenolic
water, or any other chemicals insulation, spacer blocks will be installed between the tracer and
the process line.
Each tracer will have its own trap. Tracer traps will discharge to an open sewer or to grade. If
condensate must be collected, minimum usable steam pressure is 25 psig.
Compression type fittings will be installed outside of the insulation's OD socket type fittings
may be installed inside of the insulation.
Steam tracers will be pressure tested before the insulation is applied. Under emergency
conditions, the insulation may be applied prior to the tracers; however, the fittings will be left
exposed until the testing is complete.
The required tracer size and length, for piping and equipment, is determined by piping heat
loss and tracer steam pressure found in Attachment 01, Heat Loss Chart.
The minimum tracer size is 3/8 of an inch OD tubing; the maximum size is 1 inch OD tubing.
For economy, where the Heat Loss Chart indicates the requirements for multiple tracers, a
single tracer with heat transfer cement should be considered.
When using heat transfer cement, tracers of 3/8 of an inch and 1/2 of an inch are
recommended. If more tracer area is required, multiple tracers of 3/8 of an inch and 1/2 of an
inch will be used.
Piping systems that are to be traced for heat conservation or for winterization will be so noted
on the process flow diagrams. It will be further noted whether this will be accomplished by
electric tracing, stem tracing, or steam tracing with heat tracing cement.
All valves, flanges, and fittings will be included in the tracing requirements unless otherwise
indicated in the specific job specifications.

IDENTIFICATION
Steam tracing identification will be accomplished by providing metal tags with the line
number of the traced line or the number of the traced instrument. Place 1 tag at each header or
subheader block valve and 1 at each steam trap manifold. If more than 1 circuit is required,
assign a hyphen and a number (for example, - 01), after the line or instrument number.
Electric tracing identification will consist of each heater cable assembly being factory-shipped
with a permanent, noncorrosive, metal tag securely attached to the junction box end of the
cold section. The metal tag will state the heater number, type, hot section length, voltage, and
amperes. The tag must remain on the header for permanent identification. The field will
install caution signs, at 25 foot intervals, along electric traced lines, and on all electric traced
instruments.

REFERENCES
Pabco Manual: 19-46.
Piping Engineering
Specification 670.250.86110: Hot Insulation

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1601
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 8 of 8

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING PRACTICES

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Heat Loss Chart

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1610
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 1 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING - ISOMETRIC AND PLAN INSTRUCTIONS

PURPOSE
This practice establishes general guidelines and specific instructions for developing heat
tracing plans and ISO (isometric) drawings based on the piping plans and ISOs previously
issued for construction.

SCOPE
This practice includes information about the following major topics:
Overview
Layout Instructions
Plan Instructions
ISO Instructions
The procedures detail each activity, and the sequence in which they should be performed to
successfully complete the heat tracing system design.

APPLICATION
This Practice applies to any Fluor Daniel project where there is a requirement for heat tracing
for process fluid protection or winterization.

PROCEDURES
Attachment 01 provides an overview of the procedures for establishing an overall heat tracing
plan by listing each activity and the sequence in which it should be performed. Attachments
01, 02, and 03 provide the basics for use on a typical project. Project specific issues should be
considered and modifications made as required.

GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS
When color coding the heat tracing systems, take care to differentiate between systems (such
as water, steam, glycol, oil, and dow-therm).
If at all possible, tracer runs should start at a high point and terminate at a low point.
For tracer sizes, maximum runs and total depths of pockets, and header sizes, refer to Piping
Engineering Practice 670.250.1651: Heat Tracing - Runs, Loops, Anchors, And Insulation
Blocks.
Do not route tracers through more than 1 unit. Tracers must stop at the battery limits block
valve. The unit beyond the block valve must provide tracing beyond this point.
With the exception of local pressure gages and local close-coupled pressure instruments,
instruments requiring tracing will have their own supply sources independent from the piping
tracing.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1610
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 2 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING - ISOMETRIC AND PLAN INSTRUCTIONS

Pre-insulated tubing installations are preferred for the tracer run from the supply manifold
block valve to the line or instrument tracer, and from the line or instrument tracer to the return
manifold. Check with Piping Material Engineering.
Confer with the Piping Material Engineer or Control Systems Engineer, depending on contract
responsibility, for the specific size and type of steam trap to be used when steam is the heat
medium.
Show welded or socketwelded piping to and from the supply and return manifolds to their
respective headers on the piping plans.
Show the actual location of supply and return manifolds on the piping plans. Indicate each
manifold with a box representing the size of piping, valve handwheels, traps, and other
features; label each with the manifold number. Refer to Attachment 02 for manifold
numbering procedure.
Remove clouds (for example, field fab and revisions) from the ISO reproducible prior to
routing tracers.
Avoid obscuring or removing pipe sizes or dimensions on the reproducible when routing
tracers.
Represent tracers with a thick line, drawn freehand, yet neat and orderly.
Add the tracer on the tracing ISO. Indicate the approximate lengths in feet. Represent both
the supply and return tracer runs.
Add the following note to tracer ISOs with supply / return run tubing: "Routing shown is the
preferred method of installation. Field to determine most practical and economical routing
and supporting methods."
Reference the supply manifold and return manifold numbers at the appropriate tracer origin
and terminus, respectively.
Back-cloud heat tracing supply / return run tracer, references, and callouts that apply to heat
tracing only. Take care to avoid confusion with revision clouds.
Liquid level instruments will be fully shown and detailed in the same manner as the line.
Additional instruments will reference the detail number indicated in Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1651.
Draw ISOs for supply and return manifolds and piping to and from their main headers using
the same procedures and guidelines that apply for the piping isometrics for the contract.
ISOs for supply and return manifolds also will indicate the location and orientation for
manifold and tracer identification tags.
Also indicate the appropriate manifold title and number in the lower right corner of the
graphics section.

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1038: Drawing Checking: Piping Plan Corrections

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1610
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 3 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING - ISOMETRIC AND PLAN INSTRUCTIONS

Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1039: Drawing Checking: Piping Isometrics
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1601: Heat Tracing Practices
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1630: Heat Tracing - Sample Title Block Instructions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1635: Heat Tracing - Sample Isometric - Single Tracer
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1636: Heat Tracing - Sample Isometric - Dual Tracer
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1640: Heat Tracing - Sample Isometric - Steam Supply Manifold
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1641: Heat Tracing - Sample Isometric - Condensate Return
Manifold
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1651: Heat Tracing - Runs, Loops, Anchors, and Insulation Blocks

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Procedures For Defining And Documenting Tracing System Requirements
Attachment 02:
Tracer Numbering System
Attachment 03:
Tracer Manifold Numbering System

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1610
Publication Date 20Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

PROCEDURES FOR DEFINING AND DOCUMENTING TRACING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Sequence Responsibility Activity

1 Design Supervisor Obtain a copy of each piping plan or a detailed layout

to form the Heat Tracing Control Plan.

2 Piping Designer Using a copy of the master flow diagram and line list,
color code lines, equipment, and instruments that
require heat tracing. Represent each kind of tracing
(single, dual or heat transfer cement) by a different
color.

3 After identifying lines, equipment, and instruments

that require tracing, route tubing runs on the Heat
Tracing Control Plan.

4 Locate supply and return manifolds based on the start

and termination points of the tubing runs.

5 Review manifold locations and assign line and tag

numbers to each manifold. Update master flow
diagrams to show supply lines and manifolds and
return lines and manifolds.

6 Assemble the following documents:

One set of AFC (Approved For Construction)

piping plans
Reproducibles of drawings requiring steam tracing
(plans, ISO, details
Other data pertaining to specific job requirements
and specifications

7 Using the Heat Tracing Control Plan as a guide, route

tubing runs on the reproducible of the ISO. Indicate
start and termination points on the copy of the piping
plans.

Prepare tracing control index listing:

Manifold number
Valve number
Tracer number
ISO / Line number

8 Route supply / return run tubing, on the piping plans,

from the supply and return manifold to the start and
termination points.

9 Review with Control Systems the design for

instrument requirements and locations.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1610
Publication Date 20Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

PROCEDURES FOR DEFINING AND DOCUMENTING TRACING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Sequence Responsibility Activity

10 Add tubing to the ISOs (according to Piping

Engineering Practices 670.250.1635 and
670.250.1636).

11 Draw supply / return manifold ISOs (according to

Piping Engineering Practices 670.250.1640 and
670.250.1641).

12 Assemble completed package and return to design

supervisor. Also return data utilized in preparing the
documents.

13 Design Supervisor Review drawings for completeness and compliance

with contract specifications. Obtain copies of ISOs,
piping plan prints, and color coded P&IDs (Piping
And Instrumentation Diagrams). Assign to a checker.

14 Piping Checker Review ISOs and piping plans for compliance with
Fluor Daniel practices, contract specifications, master
flow diagrams, line lists, and drafting room
instructions. Return to designer for corrections.

After corrections are complete, review, sign off, and

submit completed package to Design Supervisor.

15 Design Supervisor Review package and color off the master flow
diagrams to ensure that traced lines have been
completed. Submit ISOs for issue.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1610
Publication Date 20Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

TRACER NUMBERING SYSTEM

The tracer numbering will be the ISO (Isometric) (Line Number) with the prefix HT added to the existing number.

Example: Existing ISO number:

10-1001 AAIC Sheet 1 of 3

Modification for heat tracing:

HT10-1001 AAIC Sheet 1 of 3

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1610
Publication Date 20Oct95
Attachment 03 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

TRACER MANIFOLD NUMBERING SYSTEM

SM:

Supply Manifold SM - XX - XXX

WBS* Number SM - XX - XXX

(Area / Unit / etc.)

Sequence Number SM - XX - XXX

within WBS* Number

RM:

Return Manifold RM - XX - XXX

WBS* Number RM - XX - XXX

(Area / Unit / etc.)

Sequence Number RM - XX - XXX

within WBS* Number

* WBS (Work Breakdown Structure)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1630
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING - SAMPLE TITLE BLOCK INSTRUCTIONS

PURPOSE
This practice establishes specific guidelines for the development and preparation of the title
block and engineering data block areas of the typical Heat Tracing Isometric.

SCOPE
This practice includes detailed instructions for the preparation of the following areas of each
Heat Tracing Isometric:
Fabrication List Data
Line List Data
Identification Data
Revision Blocks

APPLICATION
This practice applies to any Fluor Daniel project where there is a requirement for heat tracing
for process fluid protection and/or winterization.

PROCEDURES
Attachment 01 provides a typical isometric title block for a Heat Tracing Isometric with
references to the following general instructions.

GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS
When reviewing Attachment 01, refer to the following instructions for properly completing the
Heat Tracing Isometric title block.
Fabrication and Installation Data
- Steam Tracing Isometrics are FIELD fabricated. If line is marked "YES" for shop
fab on sepia, change to "NO."
- Change other entries to "NO" that are marked "YES." None of these apply to heat
tracing.
- Entries under "shoes, guides, cradles" are to be deleted and "NONE" added.
Line List Data
- Change line commodity to the applicable steam used for heat tracing and mark
"VAPOR" under the vapor/liquid section.
- Change the design/operating pressures and temperatures to those of the applicable
tracing steam medium.
- Leave the insulation and tracing sections as they are.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1630
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING - SAMPLE TITLE BLOCK INSTRUCTIONS

Identification Data
- Delete entries under piece mark numbers.
- The reference flow diagram indicated will be where the stream manifold, from which
the tracer originates, is located.
- Under "drawn" and "date drawn," change to those applicable to the Heat Tracing
Isometric.
- Add the prefix "HT" to the line number and change the line class to that of the heat
tracing medium.
- Sheet number will remain the same as the original isometric.
Revision Blocks
- Remove initials, dates, and other entries from revision blocks.
- Change the isometric revision number to "1."

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1601: Heat Tracing Practices
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1610: Heat Tracing - Isometric and Plan Instructions

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Sample Heat Tracing Isometric Title Block

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1635
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING - SAMPLE ISOMETRIC - SINGLE TRACER

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the development and preparation of the isometric
drawing required for the fabrication and installation of a single tracer heat tracing system.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
PROCEDURES
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice applies to any Fluor Daniel project where there is a requirement for heat racing
for process fluid protection and winterization.

PROCEDURES
Attachment 01 provides a typical isometric of a single tracer steam tracing isometric with
references to the following general instructions.

GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS
When reviewing Attachment 01, refer to the following instructions for properly completing the
single tracer steam tracing isometric:
1.1 Steam trace tubing will be represented by a thick heavy line, following the
outline of the line being traced.
1.2 Avoid obscuring any pipe sizes and dimensions when routing the tubing on the
sepia.
1.3 Add the routing of the preinsulated tubing required for the steam supply and
return on the tracing isometric. Show the lengths required in parenthesis, in feet.
1.4 The following note will be added to all steam tracing isometrics with
preinsulated tubing:
"Routing shown is the preferred method of installation. Field to
determine the most practical and economical method of routing and
supporting of tubing."
1.5 Reference the steam supply manifold and the condensate return manifold at the
appropriate preinsulated tubing origin and terminus.
1.6 Remove any existing clouds that may appear on the sepia isometric. Cloud
preinsulated tubing routing and added callouts, notes, and references which
apply to steam tracing only.
1.7 Make references to appropriate steam tracing details.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1635
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING - SAMPLE ISOMETRIC - SINGLE TRACER

1.8 Make references to detail numbers for the instrument tracing. The exceptions
are liquid level instruments which are fully shown on the tracing isometric.

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1601: Heat Tracing Practices
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1610: Heat Tracing - Isometric And Plan Instructions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1630: Heat Tracing - Sample Title Block Instructions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.4300: Table Of Contents - Steam Tracing Details

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Heat Tracing - Single Tracer Sample Isometric

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1636
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING - SAMPLE ISOMETRIC - DUAL TRACER

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the development and preparation of the isometric
drawing required for the fabrication and installation of a dual tracer heat tracing system.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
PROCEDURES
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice applies to any Fluor Daniel project where there is a requirement for heat tracing
for process fluid protection and winterization.

PROCEDURES
Attachment 01 provides a typical isometric of a dual tracer steam tracing isometric with
references to the following general instructions.

GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS
When reviewing Attachment 01, refer to the following instructions for properly completing the
dual tracer steam tracing isometric:
1.1 Steam trace tubing will be represented by a thick heavy line, following the
outline of the line being traced.
1.2 Avoid obscuring any pipe sizes and dimensions when routing the tubing on a
sepia.
1.3 Add the routing of the preinsulated tubing required for the steam supply and
return on the tracing isometric. Show the lengths required in parenthesis, in feet.
1.4 The following note will be added to all steam tracing isometrics with
preinsulated tubing:
"Routing shown is the preferred method of installation. Field to
determine the most practical and economical method of routing and
supporting of tubing."
1.5 Reference the steam supply manifold and the condensate return manifold at the
appropriate preinsulated tubing origin and terminus.
1.6 Remove any existing clouds that may appear on the sepia isometric. Cloud all
preinsulated tubing routing and all added callouts, notes, and references which
apply to steam tracing only.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1636
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING - SAMPLE ISOMETRIC - DUAL TRACER

1.7 Make reference to the appropriate steam tracing details making note of the
number of assemblies required.
1.8 Make reference only to instrument details found on detail drawings. The
exceptions are liquid level instruments which are fully shown on the tracing
isometric.
1.9 Show only one steam tracer in its entirety. The remaining tracer will be shown
broken to prevent cluttering the isometric.
1.10 In the Scheduling Data block, add the following note:
" Two Tracer Assemblies Required."

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1601: Heat Tracing Practices
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1610: Heat Tracing - Isometric And Plan Instructions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1630: Heat Tracing - Sample Title Block Instructions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.4300: Table Of Contents - Steam Tracing Details

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Heat Tracing - Dual Tracer Sample Isometric

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1640
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING - SAMPLE ISOMETRIC - STEAM SUPPLY MANIFOLD

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the development and preparation of the isometric
drawing required for the fabrication and installation of the heat tracing steam supply manifold.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
PROCEDURES
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice applies to any Fluor Daniel project where there is a requirement for heat tracing
for process fluid protection and winterization.

PROCEDURES
Attachment 01 provides a typical isometric of the heat tracing steam supply manifold with
references to the following general instructions.

GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS
When reviewing Attachment 01, refer to the following instructions for properly completing the
heat tracing steam supply manifold isometric:
1.1 Refer to Piping Engineering Practices 670.250.2087 and 670.250.2088 for
guides to isometric presentation.
1.2 Refer to Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.4300 for tracer identification,
manifold application, and manifold and tracer tagging.
1.3 All manifold and tracer tags will be shown in their correct orientation.
1.4 Call out the appropriate manifold title and number in the lower right corner of
the graphics section of the isometric.
1.5 Provide at least one spare valved tap for future tracing requirements.
1.6 Leave at least 12 inches after last branch connection on header for additional
future requirements.

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1610: Heat Tracing - Isometric And Plan Instructions

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1640
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING - SAMPLE ISOMETRIC - STEAM SUPPLY MANIFOLD

Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2087: Piping Isometrics - Sample Fabrication, Nonpost Heat
Treated Butt Weld Coordinate And Elevation Method
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2088: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Field Fabrication,
Nonpost Heat Treated Butt Weld Coordinate And Elevation
Method

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Heat Tracing - Steam Supply Manifold Sample Isometric

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1641
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING - SAMPLE ISOMETRIC - CONDENSATE RETURN MANIFOLD

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the development and preparation of the isometric
drawing required for the fabrication and installation of the heat tracing condensate return
manifold.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
PROCEDURES
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice applies to any Fluor Daniel project where there is a requirement for heat tracing
for process fluid protection and winterization.

PROCEDURES
Attachment 01 provides a typical isometric of the heat tracing condensate return manifold with
references to the following general instructions.

GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS
When reviewing Attachment 01, refer to the following instructions for properly completing the
heat tracing condensate return manifold isometric:
1.1 Refer to Piping Engineering Practices 670.250.2087 and 670.250.2088 for
guides to isometric presentation.
1.2 Refer to Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.4300 for tracer identification,
manifold application, and manifold and tracer tagging.
1.3 All manifold and tracer tags will be shown in their correct orientation.
1.4 Call out the appropriate manifold title and number in the lower right corner of
the graphics section of the isometric.
1.5 Provide at least one spare valved tap for future tracing requirements.
1.6 Leave at least 12 inches after last branch connection on header for additional
future requirements.

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.1610: Heat Tracing - Isometric And Plan Instructions

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1641
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

HEAT TRACING - SAMPLE ISOMETRIC - CONDENSATE RETURN MANIFOLD

Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2087: Piping Isometrics - Sample Fabrication, Nonpost Heat
Treated Butt Weld Coordinate And Elevation Method
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2088: Piping Isometrics - Sample Isometric - Field Fabrication,
Nonpost Heat Treated Butt Weld Coordinate And Elevation
Method

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Heat Tracing - Condensate Return Manifold Sample Isometric

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 1055
Publication Date 20Oct95
Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

DRAWING PRACTICE: SIMPLIFIED METHOD OF DRAWING ELLIPTICAL AND DISHED VESSEL HEADS

PURPOSE
This practice defines a simplified method for manually drawing elliptical heads on equipment.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
ELLIPTICAL HEAD
STANDARD FLANGED AND DISHED HEAD
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice should be used to manually draw vessel heads.

ELLIPTICAL HEAD
Refer to Attachment 01.

STANDARD FLANGED
AND DISHED HEAD
Refer to Attachment 02.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Elliptical Head
Attachment 02:
Standard Flanged And Dished Head

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2050
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 1 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - ABOVEGROUND PIPING PLAN INSTRUCTIONS

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the development of aboveground piping plan drawings.
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2051: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Simple
Nondimensioned Method, through Practice 670.250.2055: Piping Plan - Sample
Aboveground - Fully Detailed / Dimension Method, describes piping plan production with
varying levels of detail. This practice should be used directly with those practices. When
PDS (Plant Design System) is used, refer to PDS Piping Applications Guide.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
RESPONSIBILITY
GENERAL
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice should be used during the proposal stage or early on in a project to select the
appropriate level of drawing detail required.

RESPONSIBILITY
It is the responsibility of the Lead Piping Engineer (with the concurrence of both Project
Management and Discipline Management) to apply this practice.

GENERAL
The presentation and level of detail for piping plans and sections will vary based on the
project needs. Refer to Attachment 01, Piping Plan Level Of Detail Options List. Piping
Engineering Practice 670.250.0720: Project Requirements Checklist - Piping Engineering,
defines the drawing method to be used on the project.

Drawing Sizes And Title

Blocks
Unless dictated otherwise by Client requirements, piping plans will be on Fluor Daniel
standard title block frames. Refer to General Engineering Practice 670.200.1050: Drawing
Practices.

Drawing Scales
Piping plans will normally be drawn or plotted at 3/8 of an inch = 1'- 0" scale. Smaller or
larger scales may be used when deemed appropriate by the Design Supervisor.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2050
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 2 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - ABOVEGROUND PIPING PLAN INSTRUCTIONS

Match Lines
Match lines with coordinates and adjacent drawing references will be shown.

North Arrow
Plan drawings will have a north arrow placed in the upper right corner and pointing as
follows:
First choice: Up
Second choice: Left
Third choice:Right

Line Work
Attachment 02, Line Work, will be followed for either manual or electronic applications.

Symbols
For Fluor Daniel piping symbols, refer to Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.9817:
Symbols For Piping Plan Drawings - Valve And Fitting, and Piping Engineering Practice
670.250.9818: Symbols For Piping Isometrics - Fittings And Flanges.

Piping
Single-line piping will be used throughout.
Note!!! Exception: Use double-line piping only where necessary to show critical clearances.
Cold spring and prespring will be shown on Piping plans. Refer to Attachment 03,
Cold Spring And Prespring.

Fittings
Weld dot symbols will be shown.
Screwed and socketweld fitting symbols will be shown.
Swages and reducers will be shown, but not called out unless they are eccentric (for example,
TF and BF).

Field Route Method

A 1/4 of an inch octagon with the letter F may be used to denote field routed lines. Field
Construction will route and support these lines as required. In-line items such as valves and
instruments will be located by Construction in accordance with the flow diagrams, piping
specifications, and drafting room instruction. These portions will be indicated with minimum
detail and terminated either at equipment or with the field route symbol on each end.

Lettering
Letters and numbers should be distinct, opaque, uniform, and properly spaced for legible
reproduction.
Upper case letters will be used for lettering on drawings.
Letters and numbers will have a natural slant to the right. (CAD drawings will be vertical.)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2050
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 3 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - ABOVEGROUND PIPING PLAN INSTRUCTIONS

The minimum height for lettering will be 1/8 of an inch. (CAD drawings may be 3/32 of an
inch.)
Words are to be clearly separated by a space equal to the height of the lettering.
The minimum vertical spacing between lines will normally be 1/8 of an inch.
Lettering should not be underlined, except when special emphasis is required.
Note!!! Exception: When revisions are made, the original style of lettering should be
maintained.

REFERENCES
PDS Piping Applications Guide
General Engineering
Practice 670.200.1050: Drawing Practices
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.0720: Project Requirements Checklist - Piping Engineering
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2051: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Simple
Nondimensioned Method
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2052: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Simple Detail /
Dimension Method
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2053: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Full Dimension
Method
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2054: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Fully Detailed With
Full Dimensions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2055: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Fully Detailed /
Dimension Method
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2070: Piping Plans - Drawing Area Chart For Metric And English
Systems
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.9817: Symbols For Piping Plan Drawings - Valve And Fitting
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.9818: Symbols For Piping Isometrics - Fittings And Flanges

ATTACHMENTS

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2050
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 4 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - ABOVEGROUND PIPING PLAN INSTRUCTIONS

Attachment 01:
Piping Plan Level Of Detail Options List
Attachment 02:
Line Work
Attachment 03:
Cold Spring And Prespring

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2050
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLAN LEVEL OF DETAIL OPTIONS LIST

Level Description Equipment Piping Shown Dimensions Application Authority

Presentation On Plan
5 670.250.2055 Minimum outline Lines to be Equipment and Any EPC project OP Center
to show location, shown piping located with no isometrics Management Sector,
Fully detailed clearance, and regardless of by coordinate and Client approval
with full correct size. or dimension
dimensions appearance.
and sections Nozzles shown are
listed on nozzle
charts.
4 670.250.2054 Minimum outline Butt weld Equipment and EPC Project Base Case
to show location, piping 2" and piping located Medium to heavy
Fully detailed clearance, and larger. Critical by coordinate shop fab
with full correct piping or dimension. Has 100 percent
dimensions. appearance. regardless of ISOs
Nozzles shown are size.* Packages (hold)
listed on nozzle
charts. Refer to Note 1
3 670.250.2053 Minimum outline Butt weld Equipment and E&P Project OP Center
to show location piping 2" and piping located Has reduced Management, Sector,
Reduced clearance, and larger. Critical by coordinate isometric scope and Client approval
detail with correct piping or dimension. Packages (hold)
full appearance. regardless of
dimensions. Nozzles shown are size.*
listed on nozzle
charts. Refer to Note 2
2 670.250.2052 Graphically Butt weld Key equipment E w / CM only OP Center
correct based on piping 2" and located. "p" by "Subj" Management, Sector,
Simple detail cut sheets. larger. Critical Non B.31.3 and Client approval
method. piping Rack spacing Industrial
regardless of defined. No ISOs
size.*
1 670.250.2051 Graphic Butt weld No Type "A" front end OP Center
representation piping 2" and equipment package job Management, Sector,
Minimum symbolic of larger. locations "E" only job, light and Client approval
Detail typical equipment. No piping industrial
method. dimensions No ISOs
. Non B.31.3

* Critical Piping: ASME Code Piping, Category "M" Piping (ANSI B31.3) alloy and special material, pressure classes
greater than 900# and piping requiring holddowns.

Note 1. For lines not shown on plans (such as utility stations), isometrics will be produced from standard details.

Note 2. Home office will produce isometrics for lines shown on plans only. Construction will provide isometrics for the
balance based on typical details and standards.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2051
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 1 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - MINIMUM DETAIL

PURPOSE
This practice is to be used as an alternate to the Fluor Daniel base case. (Refer to Practice
670.250.2054: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Fully Detailed With Full Dimensions).
This practice establishes guidelines for the presentation of Piping Plan Drawings that would
be considered applicable to a reduced Fluor Daniel Project scope; for example, Architectural
And Engineering "conceptual." Work this practice directly with Piping Engineering Practice
670.250.2050, Piping Plans - Aboveground Piping Plan Instructions.
When PDS (Plan Design System) is used, refer to the PDS Piping Application Manual.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
PIPING GENERAL NOTES
PIPING DRAWINGS
COORDINATES, DIMENSIONS, AND ELEVATION
EQUIPMENT AND PLOT ITEMS
INSTRUMENTS AND ELECTRICAL
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
The Lead Piping Engineer and Lead Piping Design Supervisor are responsible for the proper
execution of this practice.
This practice is to be used as an alternate to the Fluor Daniel base case. Alternative levels of
detail will be based on project needs (refer to Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2050).

PIPING GENERAL
NOTES
This practice illustrates information that is shown on a minimum detail Aboveground Piping
Plan. The Aboveground Piping Plan, together with the plastic model (if used), will have all
the minimum information required to present the overall routing of piping in the following
categories:
All butt weld piping 2 inches and larger
All sizes of alloy and special materials
Carbon steel screwed or socket weld piping 2 inches and smaller, and 1-1/2 inches and smaller
butt weld piping will not be shown except when it ties into a piece of equipment or a control
valve manifold. Show (but do not locate) a section of piping at the equipment or manifold;
then use the "Field Route" symbol (refer to Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2050).
All piping, regardless of size, will be shown when located in pipeways, in sleeperways, and
when resting on common or special structural supports.
PIPING DRAWINGS

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2051
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 2 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - MINIMUM DETAIL

Piping connections to equipment will be shown with minimum detail. Utility station piping
will not be indicated.
Piping will be shown, but not located, at controls or critical points such as control valves,
meter runs, or mixing tees.
The drawing of sections and details will require the approval of the Unit Piping Supervisor.
Detached or upper piping plans will be used as required to avoid congestion.

Line Identification
Line numbers and flow arrows will be shown throughout the drawing to adequately identify all
lines.
Vessel trim numbers will be shown on drawing.

COORDINATES,
DIMENSIONS, AND
ELEVATIONS

Coordinates
Indicate coordinates on the graphic section of the plan for major structures only.
This work is conceptual; therefore, a minimum number of coordinates will be shown.

Dimensions
All dimensions 1 foot and above will be in feet and inches. Dimensions less than 1 foot will
be in inches.
Dimension lines are to be grouped in a string, if possible.
This work is conceptual; therefore, a minimum number of dimensions will be shown.

Miscellaneous Callouts
Callouts for angular offsets will be given only if offsets are other than 90 or 45 degrees.
Do not use shading to highlight or emphasize portions of the drawing.

Elevations
Show HPFS (High Point of Finished Surface) elevation on grade plans only.
Elevations will be given for major groups of pipe routing only. Use of BOP (Bottom of Pipe)
or centerline elevations will be interchangeable, and choice will be based on the easiest to
determine.
This work is conceptual; therefore, a minimum number of elevation callouts will be shown.

EQUIPMENT AND PLOT

ITEMS

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2051
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 3 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - MINIMUM DETAIL

Show minimum outline of all equipment or items that take up plot space. Outline should be
sufficient to indicate location, clearances, and provide a correct representation of the
equipment's appearance (refer to Attachment 01). Identify equipment by indicating its
corresponding tag number.

Nozzle Tables
Equipment nozzle charts are not to be used.

Field Supports
Indicate field supports as described in the following practices:
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2150: Supports - Base Supports, Base Springs,
Base Anchors, Angle Base Supports, And Concrete Pads
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2151: Supports - Field Supports
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2152: Supports - Cradles, Dummy Supports,
Trunnions, Shear Lugs, Riser Clamps, And U-Bolts
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2153: Supports - Shoes, Load Pads, Slide Plates,
Stiffener Plates, Anchors, Directional Anchors, And Guides - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2154: Supports - Hanger Rods - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2155: Supports - Base Supports, Cradles, Anchors,
And Holddowns - Low Temperature
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2156: Supports - Holddowns And Adjustable
Spring Wedges - Pulsating Piping

Drain Funnels, Catch

Basin, And Manholes
Drain funnels, catch basins, and manholes are not to be shown except where pertinent to
aboveground piping.

Nonstandard Items
Nonstandard items must be called out on piping plans. Do not include item codes and
specialty items that are covered by the P&IDs (Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams). Some
examples of nonstandard items are the following:
Short radius elbows
Reducing elbows
Slip-on reducing flange
Chain operated valves and valve handle extensions
Hanger springs

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2051
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 4 of 4

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - MINIMUM DETAIL

INSTRUMENTS AND
ELECTRICAL
The instructions on Attachment 02 are to be used as minimum requirements. Additional
information may be required in some cases for clarification.

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2050: Piping Plans - Aboveground Piping Plan Instructions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2054: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Fully Detailed With
Full Dimensions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2150: Supports - Base Supports, Base Springs, Base Anchors, Angle
Base Supports, And Concrete Pads
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2151: Supports - Field Supports
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2152: Supports - Cradles, Dummy Supports, Trunnions, Shear
Lugs, Riser Clamps, And U-Bolts
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2153: Supports - Shoes, Load Pads, Slide Plates, Stiffener Plates,
Anchors, Directional Anchors, And Guides - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2154: Supports - Hanger Rods - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2155: Supports - Base Supports, Cradles, Anchors, And Holddowns
- Low Temperature
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2156: Supports - Holddowns And Adjustable Spring Wedges -
Pulsating Piping

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Equipment And Plot Items Presentation Matrix
Attachment 02:
Instrument And Electrical Item Presentation Matrix
Attachment 03:
Sample Aboveground Piping Plan (Minimum Detail)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2051
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

EQUIPMENT AND PLOT ITEMS PRESENTATION MATRIX

Show Minimum Show Outline Remarks

Outline To Scale When Required
For Clearance
Pipe Supports X
Structures X Show only the portion of
steel or concrete that is
required to establish
clearances.
Foundations X Show minimum outline of
aboveground portion if
required for clearance.
Ladders And X Show outline of ladder and
Platforms cage with single line.
Utility Stations X Show outline only.
Steam Traps X Show outline only.
Emergency X Call out ES# ___.
Showers Show minimum outline on
plan.
Eye Wash X Call out EW# ___.
Stations Show minimum outline on
plan.
Buildings X
Roads X
Pumps X
Vessels X
Heaters X
Compressors X
Exchangers X
Air Coolers X

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2051
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

INSTRUMENTS AND ELECTRICAL ITEM PRESENTATION MATRIX

Indicate Indicate Remarks

Instrument To
Balloon Scale
(Refer to
Note 1.)
Temperature X
(TI, TW)
Pressure X
(PI, PT)
Flow X Indicate clearance required for
(FI, FE, FG) transmitter.
Level Instrument X
(LC, LG)
Level Bridle
Control Valve X
(FC, CV, LC)
Safety Valves X 1-1/2 inches and smaller thermal
(PSV, TSV) relief valves will not be shown
unless part of a closed system.
(Refer to Note 1.)
Instrument And X Show portion for space required
Electrical Rack and clearance.
Major Electrical X Shown for clearances only.
And Instrument
Equipment
Note 1: Arrows from instrument balloons will indicate the orientation of
instruments that are indicated by balloon only.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2052
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 1 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - SIMPLE DETAIL / DIMENSION METHOD

PURPOSE
This practice is to be used as an alternate to the Fluor Daniel base case. (Refer to Piping
Engineering Practice 670.250.2054: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Fully Detailed
With Full Dimensions). This practice establishes guidelines for the presentation of Piping
Plan Drawings that would be considered applicable to a reduced Fluor Daniel Project scope;
for example, Engineering and Construction Management only. Work this practice directly
with Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2050, Piping Plans - Aboveground Piping Plan
Instructions.
When PDS (Plan Design System) is used, refer to the PDS Piping Application Manual.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
PIPING GENERAL NOTES
PIPING DRAWINGS
COORDINATES, DIMENSIONS, AND ELEVATION
EQUIPMENT AND PLOT ITEMS
INSTRUMENTS AND ELECTRICAL
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
The Lead Piping Engineer and Lead Piping Design Supervisor are responsible for the proper
execution of this practice.
This practice is to be used as an alternate to the Fluor Daniel base case. Alternative levels of
detail, both increased or decreased, will be based on project needs (refer to Piping
Engineering Practice 670.250.2050).

PIPING GENERAL
NOTES
This practice illustrates information that is shown on a simple detail Aboveground Piping
Plan. The Aboveground Piping Plan, together with the plastic model (if used), will be
complete with all the minimum information required for the routing of piping in the following
categories:
All butt weld piping 2 inches and larger
All sizes of the following:
- ASME code piping
- Category "M" piping {refer to ANSI (American National Standards Institute)
B31.3.}
- Alloy and special materials
- Pressure classes greater than 900 number
- Piping requiring "holddowns"

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2052
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 2 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - SIMPLE DETAIL / DIMENSION METHOD

Carbon steel screwed or socket weld piping 2 inches and smaller, and 1-1/2 inches and smaller
butt weld piping will not be shown except when it ties into a piece of equipment or a control
valve manifold. Show (but do not locate) a section of piping at the equipment or manifold;
then use the "Field Route" symbol (refer to Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2050).
All piping, regardless of size, will be shown when located in pipeways, in sleeperways, and
when resting on common or special structural supports.

PIPING DRAWINGS
Piping connections to equipment will be shown with minimum detail. Utility station
piping will not be indicated.
Piping will be shown, but not located, at controls points such as control valves, meter
runs, or mixing tees.
The drawing of sections and details will require the approval of the Unit Piping
Supervisor.
Detached or upper piping plans will be used as required to avoid congestion.

Line Identification
Line numbers and flow arrows will be shown throughout the drawing to adequately
identify all lines.
Vessel trim numbers will be shown on drawing.

COORDINATES,
DIMENSIONS, AND
ELEVATIONS

Coordinates
Indicate coordinates on the graphic section of the plan for major equipment, pipe supports,
and structures only.

Dimensions
All dimensions 1 foot and above will be in feet and inches. Dimensions less than 1 foot
will be in inches.
Dimension lines are to be grouped in a string, if possible.
Omit face-to-face dimensioning of valves and other piping components. Fitting makeup
will not be dimensioned.
The use of 1/16 of an inch dimensions will be avoided when locating piping or
equipment. Usage will be limited to fitting makeup, calculated dimensions, furnished
equipment, or similar situations.
A minimum number of dimensions will be shown. Dimensions shown on lower plans will
not be repeated on upper plans. Dimensions shown on individual area plans will not be
repeated on adjoining plans unless the lack of that dimension will cause excessive
checking time.
Generally, piping will be dimensioned from coordinates on equipment, pipe supports, or
structures.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2052
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 3 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - SIMPLE DETAIL / DIMENSION METHOD

Dimensions are not required for inline items (gate valves).

Miscellaneous Callouts
Callouts for angular offsets will be given only if offsets are other than 90 or 45 degrees.
Do not use shading to highlight or emphasize portions of the drawing.

Elevations
Show HPFS (High Point of Finished Surface) elevation on grade plans only.
Elevations will be given for lines that cannot be located by reference to either equipment
or pipeway. Use of BOP (Bottom of Pipe) or centerline elevations will be
interchangeable, and choice will be based on the easiest to determine.
Do not show elevations for horizontal runs established by vertical fitting makeup.
Elevation callouts are not required for inline items in vertical runs.

EQUIPMENT AND PLOT

ITEMS
Show minimum outline of all equipment or items that take up plot space. Outline should be
sufficient to indicate location, clearances, and provide a correct representation of the
equipment's appearance (refer to Attachment 01). Identify equipment by indicating its
corresponding tag number.

Nozzle Tables
Equipment nozzle charts are not to be used.

Field Supports
Indicate field supports as described in the following practices:
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2150: Supports - Base Supports, Base Springs,
Base Anchors, Angle Base Supports, And Concrete Pads
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2151: Supports - Field Supports
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2152: Supports - Cradles, Dummy Supports,
Trunnions, Shear Lugs, Riser Clamps, And U-Bolts
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2153: Supports - Shoes, Load Pads, Slide Plates,
Stiffener Plates, Anchors, Directional Anchors, And Guides - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2154: Supports - Hanger Rods - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2155: Supports - Base Supports, Cradles, Anchors,
And Holddowns - Low Temperature
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2156: Supports - Holddowns And Adjustable
Spring Wedges - Pulsating Piping

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2052
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 4 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - SIMPLE DETAIL / DIMENSION METHOD

Drain Funnels, Catch

Basin, And Manholes
Drain funnels, catch basins, and are manholes not to be shown except where pertinent to
aboveground piping.

Nonstandard Items
Nonstandard items must be called out on piping plans. Do not include item codes and
specialty items that are covered by the P&IDs (Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams). Some
examples of nonstandard items are the following:
Short radius elbows
Reducing elbows
Slip-on reducing flange
Chain operated valves and valve handle extensions
Hanger springs

INSTRUMENTS AND
ELECTRICAL
The instructions on Attachment 02 are to be used as minimum requirements. Additional
information may be required in some cases for clarification.

REFERENCES
ANSI (American National Standards Institute) B31.3
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.0720: Project Requirements Checklist - Piping Engineering
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2050: Piping Plans - Aboveground Piping Plan Instructions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2054: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Fully Detailed With
Full Dimensions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2150: Supports - Supports, Base Supports, Base Springs, Base
Anchors, Angle Base Supports, And Concrete Pads
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2151: Supports - Field Supports
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2152: Supports - Cradles, Dummy Supports, Trunnions, Shear
Lugs, Riser Clamps, And U-Bolts
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2153: Supports - Shoes, Load Pads, Slide Plates, Stiffener Plates,
Anchors, Directional Anchors, And Guides - Metallic Piping

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2052
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 5 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - SIMPLE DETAIL / DIMENSION METHOD

Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2154: Supports - Hanger Rods - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2155: Supports - Base Supports, Cradles, Anchors, And Holddowns
- Low Temperature
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2156: Supports - Holddowns And Adjustable Spring Wedges -
Pulsating Piping

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Equipment And Plot Items Presentation Matrix
Attachment 02:
Instrument And Electrical Item Presentation Matrix
Attachment 03:
Sample Aboveground Piping Plan

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2052
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

EQUIPMENT AND PLOT ITEMS PRESENTATION MATRIX

Show Minimum Show Outline Remarks

Outline To Scale When Required
For Clearance
Pipe Supports X Show centerline coordinates of
column and callout TOP of
steel elevations and pipe
support number.
Structures X Show only the portion of steel
or concrete that is required to
establish clearances.
Foundations X Show minimum outline of
aboveground portion if
required for clearance.
Ladders And X 1. Show minimum indication
Platforms of checker plate or grating
and callout TOP of
platform EL.
(PLATF.#2 EL. 131'-0").

2. Show outline of ladder

and cage with single line.
Utility Stations X Show outline only.
Steam Traps X Show outline only.
Emergency X Call out ES# ___.
Showers Show minimum outline on
plan.
Eye Wash X Call out EW# ___.
Stations Show minimum outline on
plan.
Buildings X
Roads X
Pumps X
Vessels X Internals will not be shown
unless they are part of the
piping. Show anchor end of
horizontal vessels.
Heaters X
Compressors X
Exchangers X Show anchor end of
exchangers.
Air Coolers X

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2052
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

INSTRUMENT AND ELECTRICAL ITEM PRESENTATION MATRIX

Indicate Indicate Remarks

Instrument To
Balloon Scale
(Refer to
Note 1.)
Temperature X X
(TI, TW)
Pressure X X
(PI, PT)
Flow X X Indicate clearance required for
(FI, FE, FG) transmitter.
Level Instrument X X
(LC, LG)
Level Bridle X
Control Valve X X
(FC, CV, LC)
Safety Valves X X 1-1/2 inches and smaller thermal
(PSV, TSV) relief valves will not be shown
unless part of a closed system.
(Refer to Note 1.)
Instrument And X Show portion for space required
Electrical Rack and clearance.
Major Electrical X Shown for clearances only.
And Instrument
Equipment
Note 1: Arrows from instrument balloons will indicate the orientation of
instruments that are indicated by balloon only.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2053
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 1 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - FULL DIMENSION METHOD

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the presentation of Piping Plan Drawings that would
be considered applicable to a reduced scope Fluor Daniel Project; for example, Engineering
and Procurement only. This practice is to be used as an alternate to the Fluor Daniel base case
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2054: Piping Plans - Sample Aboveground - Full Detail
With Full Dimensions. This practice is to be used with Piping Engineering Practice
670.250.2050: Piping Plans - Aboveground Piping Plan Instructions. When PDS (Plant
Design System) is used, refer to the PDS Piping Application Manual.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
PIPING GENERAL NOTES
PIPING DRAWINGS
COORDINATES, DIMENSIONS, AND ELEVATIONS
EQUIPMENT AND PLOT ITEMS
INSTRUMENTS AND ELECTRICAL
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
The Lead Piping Engineer and Lead Piping Design Supervisor are responsible for the proper
execution of this practice.
This practice is to be used as an alternate to the Fluor Daniel base case. Increased or
decreased alternative levels of detail will be based on project needs. Refer to Piping
Engineering Practice 670.250.2050.

PIPING GENERAL
NOTES
This practice illustrates information that is shown on a reduced detail Aboveground Piping
Plan. The Aboveground Piping Plan, together with the plastic model (if used), will be
complete with all information required to produce isometrics for fabrication and installation in
the following categories:
All butt weld piping 2 inches and larger
All sizes of the following:
- ASME code piping
- Category "M" piping {Refer to ANSI B31.3. (American National Standards
Institute)}
- Alloy and special materials
- Pressure classes greater than 900 number
- Piping requiring holddowns

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2053
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 2 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - FULL DIMENSION METHOD

Carbon steel screwed or socket weld piping 2 inches and smaller, and 1-1/2 inches and smaller
butt weld piping will not be shown except when it ties into a piece of equipment or a control
valve manifold. Show a section of piping at the equipment or manifold; then, use the "Field
Route" symbol (refer to Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2050). Regardless of size, all
piping will be shown when located in pipeways, sleeperways, resting on common or special
structural supports, or in critical areas such as heaters, compressors, and multilevel structures.
Instrumentation (level glasses and level controllers) will also be shown.

PIPING DRAWINGS
Piping plans with equipment nozzle charts will be provided. Areas that may require additional
detail include, but are not limited to, the following:
Compressors
Multilevel structure
Heaters
The drawing of sections and details will require the approval of the Unit Piping Supervisor.
Detached or upper piping plans will be used as required to avoid congestion.

Line Identification
Line numbers and flow arrows will be shown throughout the drawing to adequately identify
every line.
Vessel trim numbers will be shown on drawing.

COORDINATES,
DIMENSIONS, AND
ELEVATIONS

Coordinates
Indicate coordinates on the graphic section of the plan for equipment, pipe supports, and
structures.
Indicate coordinate at anchored end of equipment and show an "X".

Dimensions
All dimensions 1 foot and above will be in feet and inches. Dimensions less than 1 foot will
be in inches.
Dimension lines are to be grouped in a string, if possible.
Omit face-to-face dimensioning of valves and other piping components. Fitting makeup will
not be dimensioned.
The use of 1/16 of an inch dimensions will be avoided when locating piping or equipment.
Usage will be limited to fitting makeup, calculated dimensions, furnished equipment, or
similar situations.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2053
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 3 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - FULL DIMENSION METHOD

A minimum number of dimensions will be shown. Dimensions shown on lower plans will not
be repeated on upper plans. Dimensions shown on individual area plans will not be repeated
on adjoining plans unless the lack of that dimension will cause excessive checking time.
Generally, piping will be dimensioned from coordinates on equipment, pipe supports, or
structures.

Miscellaneous Callouts
Callouts for angular offsets will be given only if offsets are other than 90 or 45 degrees.
Do not use shading to highlight or emphasize portions of the drawing.

Elevations
Show HPFS (High Point of Finished Surface) elevation on grade plans only.
Elevations will be given for lines that cannot be located by reference to either equipment or
pipeway. Use of BOP (Bottom of Pipe) or centerline elevations will be interchangeable and
choice will be based on the easiest to determine.
Do not show elevations for horizontal runs established by vertical fitting makeup.
Elevation callouts are required for inline items in vertical runs. Exceptions will be instruments
as noted on Attachment 02 and items located by fitting makeup.

EQUIPMENT AND PLOT

ITEMS
Show minimum outline of all equipment or items that take up plot space. Outline should be
sufficient to indicate location, clearances, and provide a correct representation of the
equipment's appearance (refer to Attachment 01). Identify equipment by indicating its
corresponding tag number.

Nozzle Tables
Tabulate all nozzles that require piping or instrumentation.
Show nozzle designation or description.
Show size and rating or type such as 8-inch 150 #RF, 3/4 of an inch SW CPLG.
Elevations will be shown for nozzles that require piping or instrumentation. Elevations will
not be given for screwed or socket weld connections on top or bottom of equipment where it
would result in a threaded end or plan end elevations.
Orientation will be given in degrees, clockwise from North (North = 0 degrees).
Nozzles on vertical equipment that require piping will have projection shown.
Coordinates will be shown for all tabulated nozzles except those located radially on vertical
equipment that will show projection and orientation. Piping attached to vertical equipment
will have the first drop or rise located by coordinates on the equipment nozzle table.
Field Supports

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2053
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 4 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - FULL DIMENSION METHOD

Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2150: Supports - Base Supports, Base Springs,

Base Anchors, Angle Base Supports, And Concrete Pads
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2151: Supports - Field Supports
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2152: Supports - Cradles, Dummy Supports,
Trunnions, Shear Lugs, Riser Clamps, And U-Bolts
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2153: Supports - Shoes, Load Pads, Slide Plates,
Stiffener Plates, Anchors, Directional Anchors, And Guides- Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2154: Supports - Hanger Rods - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2155: Supports - Base Supports, Cradles, Anchors,
And Holddowns - Low Temperature
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2156: Supports - Holddowns And Adjustable
Spring Wedges - Pulsating Piping

Drain Funnels, Catch

Basins, And Manholes
Drain funnels, catch basins, and manholes are not to be shown except where pertinent to
aboveground piping.

Nonstandard Items
Nonstandard items must be called out on piping plans. Do not include item codes and
specialty items that are covered by the P&IDs (Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams).
Examples include the following:
Short radius elbows
Reducing elbows
Slip-on reducing flange
Chain operated valves and valve handle extensions
Hanger springs
Item code numbers not covered by the P&IDs

INSTRUMENTS AND
ELECTRICAL
The instructions on Attachment 02 are to be used as minimum requirements. Additional
information may be required in some cases for clarification.

REFERENCES
ANSI (American National Standards Institute)
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.0720: Project Requirements Checklist - Piping Engineering
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2050: Piping Plans - Aboveground Piping Plan Instructions

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2053
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 5 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - FULL DIMENSION METHOD

Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2150: Supports - Base Supports, Base Springs, Base Anchors, Angle
Base Supports, And Concrete Pads
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2151: Supports - Field Supports
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2152: Supports - Cradles, Dummy Supports, Trunnions, Shear
Lugs, Riser Clamps, And U-Bolts
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2153: Supports - Shoes, Load Pads, Slide Plates, Stiffener Plates,
Anchors, Directional Anchors, And Guides - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2154: Supports - Hanger Rods - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2155: Supports - Base Supports, Cradles, Anchors, And Holddowns
- Low Temperature
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2156: Supports - Holddowns And Adjustable Spring Wedges -
Pulsating Piping

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Equipment And Plot Items Presentation Matrix
Attachment 02:
Instrument And Electrical Item Presentation Matrix
Attachment 03:
Sample Aboveground Piping Plan

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2053
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

EQUIPMENT AND PLOT ITEMS PRESENTATION MATRIX

Show Minimum Show Outline Remarks

Outline To Scale When Required
For Clearance
Pipe Supports X Show centerline coordinates of
column and call out top of steel
elevations and pipe support number.
Structures X Show only the portion of steel or
concrete that is required to establish
clearances.
Foundations X Show outline of aboveground portion.
Ladders And X 1. Show minimum indication of
Platforms checker plate or grating and
callout TOP of platform EL.
(PLATF.#2 EL. 131'-0").

2. Show outline of ladder and cage

with single line.
Utility Stations X Field Route.
Steam Traps X Field Route.
Emergency X Call out ES# ___.
Showers Show minimum outline on plan.
Eye Wash X Call out EW# ___.
Stations Show minimum outline on plan.
Buildings X
Roads X
Pumps X
Vessels X Internals will not be shown unless
they are part of the piping. Show
anchor end of horizontal vessels.
Heaters X
Compressors X
Exchangers X Show anchor end of exchangers.
Air Coolers X

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2053
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

INSTRUMENT AND ELECTRICAL ITEM PRESENTATION MATRIX

Indicate Indicate Locate By Remarks

Instrument To Dimension
Balloon Scale Coordinate
(Refer to Or Elevation
Note 1.)
Temperature X X
(TI, TW)
Pressure X X
(PI, PT)
Flow X X X Indicate clearance required for
(FI, FE, FG) transmitter.
Level Instrument X X X
(LC, LG)
Level Bridle X X
Control Valve X X X
(FC, CV, LC)
Safety Valves X X Thermal relief valves 1-1/2 inches
(PSV, TSV) and smaller will not be shown
unless part of a closed system.
(Refer to Note 1.)
Instrument And X Show portion for space required
Electrical Rack and clearance.
Major Electrical X Shown for clearances only.
And Instrument
Equipment
Note 1: Arrows from instrument balloons will indicate the orientation of instruments that are
indicated by balloon only.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2054
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 1 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - FULLY DETAILED WITH FULL DIMENSIONS

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the presentation of Piping Plan Drawings that would
be considered applicable to a full Engineering, Procurement, and Construction Fluor Daniel
project. Use this practice in conjunction with Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2050:
Piping Plans - Aboveground Piping Plan Instructions. When PDS (Plant Design System) is
used, refer to the PDS Piping Application Manual.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
RESPONSIBILITY
PIPING GENERAL NOTES
PIPING DRAWINGS
COORDINATES, DIMENSIONS, AND ELEVATIONS
EQUIPMENT AND PLOT ITEMS
INSTRUMENTS AND ELECTRICAL
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
This practice is to be used as a base case for a full Piping Engineering effort. Alternative
levels of detail, both increased or decreased, will be based on project needs. Refer to Piping
Engineering Practice 670.250.2050.

RESPONSIBILITY
The Lead Piping Engineer and Lead Piping Design Supervisor are responsible for the proper
execution of this practice.

PIPING GENERAL
NOTES
This practice illustrates the information that is shown on a detailed and fully dimensioned
Fluor Daniel Aboveground Piping Plan. Additional notes, data, and details may be required in
accordance with project criteria. The Aboveground Piping Plan, together with the plastic
model (if used), will contain the information required to produce Isometrics for fabrication
and installation. All piping, regardless of size, will be shown on the plan drawings.

Alternate
Carbon steel screwed or socket weld utility piping, 2 inches and smaller, may be omitted from
plans except when it ties into a piece of equipment or a control valve manifold, or when piping
is located in pipeways, sleeperways, resting on common or special supports, or in critical areas
such as heaters, compressors, and multilevel structures. Instrumentation (level glasses and
level controllers) will also be shown. Piping will be shown on isometrics. When omitting

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2054
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 2 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - FULLY DETAILED WITH FULL DIMENSIONS

utility pipe on plans, show a section of piping at the equipment or manifold; then, use the Field
Route symbol. (Refer to Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2050.)

PIPING DRAWINGS
Full piping plans with equipment nozzle charts will be provided. Areas that may require
additional detail include, but are not limited to, the following:
Compressors
Multilevel structure
Heaters
The drawing of sections and details will require the approval of the Unit Piping Supervisor.
Detached or upper piping plans will be used as required to avoid congestion.

Line Identification
Line numbers and flow arrows will be shown throughout the drawing to identify lines
adequately.
Vessel trim numbers will be shown on drawing.

COORDINATES,
DIMENSIONS, AND
ELEVATIONS

Coordinates
Indicate coordinates on the graphic section of the plan for equipment, pipe supports, and
structures.
Indicate coordinate at anchored end of equipment and show an "X".

Dimensions
Dimensions 1 foot and above will be in feet and inches. Dimensions less than 1 foot will be in
inches.
Dimension lines are to be grouped in a string, if possible.
Omit face-to-face dimensioning of valves and other piping components. Fitting makeup will
not be dimensioned.
The use of 1/16 of an inch dimensions will be avoided when locating piping or equipment.
Usage will be limited to fitting makeup, calculated dimensions, furnished equipment, or
similar situations.
A minimum number of dimensions will be shown. Dimensions shown on lower plans will not
be repeated on upper plans. Dimensions shown on individual area plans will not be repeated
on adjoining plans unless the lack of that dimension will cause excessive checking time.
Generally, piping will be dimensioned from coordinates on equipment, pipe supports, or
structures.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2054
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 3 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - FULLY DETAILED WITH FULL DIMENSIONS

Miscellaneous Callouts
Callouts for angular offsets will be given only if offsets are other than 90 or 45 degrees.
Do not use shading to highlight or emphasize portions of the drawing.

Elevations
Show HPFS (High Point of Finished Surface) elevation on grade plans only.
Elevations will be given for lines that cannot be located by reference to either equipment or
pipeway. Use of BOP (Bottom of Pipe) or centerline elevations will be interchangeable and
choice will be based on the easiest to determine.
Do not show elevations for horizontal runs established by vertical fitting makeup.
Elevation callouts are required for in-line items in vertical runs. Exceptions will be
instruments, as noted on Attachment 01, Instrument And Electrical Item Presentation Matrix,
and items located by fitting makeup.

EQUIPMENT AND PLOT

ITEMS
Show minimum outline of equipment or items that take up plot space. Outline should be
sufficient to indicate location, clearances, and provide a correct representation of the
equipment's appearance. Refer to Attachment 02, Equipment And Plot Items Presentation
Matrix. Identify equipment by indicating its corresponding tag number.

Nozzle Tables
Tabulate nozzles that require piping or instrumentation.
Show nozzle designation or description.
Show size and rating or type such as 8 inches - 150 #RF, 3/4 of an inch SW CPLG.
Elevations will be shown for nozzles that require piping or instrumentation. Elevations will
not be given for screwed or socket weld connections on top or bottom of equipment where it
would result in a threaded end or plan end elevations.
Orientation will be given in degrees, clockwise from North (North = 0 degrees).
Nozzles on vertical equipment that require piping will have projection shown.
Coordinates will be shown for tabulated nozzles; those located radially on vertical equipment
will show projection and orientation. Piping attached to vertical equipment will have the first
drop or rise located by coordinates on the equipment nozzle table.

Field Supports
Indicate field supports as described in the following practices:
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2150: Supports - Field Supports, Base Springs,
Base Anchors, Angle Base Supports, And Concrete Pads
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2151: Supports - Field Supports

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2054
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 4 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - FULLY DETAILED WITH FULL DIMENSIONS

Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2152: Supports - Cradles, Dummy Supports,

Trunnions, Shear Lugs, Riser Clamps, And U-Bolts
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2153: Supports - Shoes, Load Pads, Slide Plates,
Stiffener Plates, Anchors, Directional Anchors, And Guides - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2154: Supports - Hanger Rods - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2155: Supports - Base Supports, Cradles, Anchors,
And Holddowns - Low Temperature
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2156: Supports - Holddowns And Adjustable
Spring Wedges - Pulsating Piping

Drain Funnels, Catch

Basin, And Manholes
Drain funnels, catch basin, and manholes are not to be shown except where pertinent to
aboveground piping.

Nonstandard Items
Nonstandard items must be called out on piping plans. Do not include item codes and
specialty items that are covered by P&IDs (Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams). Examples
include the following:
Short radius elbows
Reducing elbows
Slip-on reducing flange
Chain operated valves and valve handle extensions
Hanger springs
Item code numbers (that are not covered by P&IDs)

INSTRUMENTS AND
ELECTRICAL
The instructions in Attachment 01 are to be used as minimum requirements. Additional
information may be required in some cases for clarification.

REFERENCES
PDS Piping Application Manual
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.0720: Project Requirements Checklist - Piping Engineering
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2050: Piping Plans - Aboveground Piping Plan Instructions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2150: Supports - Field Supports, Base Springs, Base Anchors,
Angle Base Supports, And Concrete Pads

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2054
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 5 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - FULLY DETAILED WITH FULL DIMENSIONS

Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2151: Supports - Field Supports
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2152: Supports - Cradles, Dummy Supports, Trunnions, Shear
Lugs, Riser Clamps, And U-Bolts
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2153: Supports - Shoes, Load Pads, Slide Plates, Stiffener Plates,
Anchors, Directional Anchors, And Guides - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2154: Supports - Hanger Rods - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2155: Supports - Base Supports, Cradles, Anchors, And Holddowns
- Low Temperatures
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2156: Supports - Holddowns And Adjustable Spring Wedges -
Pulsating Piping

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Instrument And Electrical Item Presentation Matrix
Attachment 02:
Equipment And Plot Items Presentation Matrix
Attachment 03:
Sample Nozzle Block Chart
Attachment 04:
Sample Aboveground Piping Plan (Detailed With Full Dimensions)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2054
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

INSTRUMENT AND ELECTRICAL ITEM PRESENTATION MATRIX

Indicate Indicate To Locate By Remarks

Instrument Scale Dimension
Balloon (Refer Coordinate Or
to Note 1.) Elevation
Temperature X X X
(TI, TW)
Pressure X X
(PI, PT) X
Flow X X X Indicate clearance required for
(FI, FE, FG) transmitter.
Level Instrument X X X
(LC, LG)
Level Bridle X X
Control Valve X X X
(FC, CV, LC)
Safety Valves X X X Valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller will
(PSV, TSV) not be detailed unless part of a closed
system. Refer to Note 1, below.
Instrument And X Show portion for space required and
Electrical Rack clearance.
Major Electrical X Show portion for space required and
And Instrument clearance.
Equipment
Note 1. Arrows from instrument balloons will indicate the orientation of instruments that are indicated by
balloon only.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2054
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

EQUIPMENT AND PLOT ITEMS PRESENTATION MATRIX

Show Minimum Show Outline When Required Remarks

Outline To Scale For Clearance
Pipe Supports X Show centerline coordinates of column
and callout top of steel elevations and
pipe support number.
Structures X Show only the portion of steel or
concrete that is required to establish
clearances.
Foundations X Show outline of aboveground portion.
Ladders And 1. Snow minimum indication of
Platforms checker plat or grating and callout
top of platform EL.
(PLATF.#2 EL. 131' - 0").
2. Show outline of ladder and cage
with single line.
Utility Stations X Show detail on Isometric.
Steam Traps X Show detail on Isometric.
Emergency Showers X Callout ES# _____. Show detail on
Isometric.
Eye Wash Stations X Callout ES# _____. Show detail on
Isometric.
Buildings X
Roads X
Pumps X
Vessels X Internals will not be shown unless they
are part of the piping. Show anchor end
of horizontal vessels.
Heaters X
Compressors X
Exchangers X Show anchor end of exchangers.
Air Coolers X

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2055
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 1 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - FULLY DETAILED / DIMENSION METHOD

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the presentation of Piping Plan Drawings that would
be considered applicable to a full Engineering, Procurement, and Construction Fluor Daniel
Project where ISOs (Isometrics) are not being produced. Use this practice in conjunction with
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2050: Piping Plans - Aboveground Piping Plan
Instructions. When PDS (Plant Design System) is used, refer to the PDS Piping Application
Manual.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
PIPING GENERAL NOTES
PIPING DRAWINGS
COORDINATES, DIMENSIONS, AND ELEVATION
EQUIPMENT AND PLOT ITEMS
INSTRUMENTS AND ELECTRICAL
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
The Lead Piping Engineer and Lead Piping Design Supervisor are responsible for the proper
execution of this practice.
This practice is to be used as an alternate to the Fluor Daniel base case. Alternative levels of
detail will be based on project needs. Refer to Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2050.

PIPING GENERAL
NOTES
This practice illustrates the information that is shown on a detailed, fully dimensioned Fluor
Daniel Aboveground Piping Plan with sections. Additional notes, data, and details may be
required in accordance with project criteria. The Aboveground Piping Plan and required
sections will contain all of the information required for fabrication and installation. All
piping, regardless of size, will be shown on the drawing. (Refer to Attachment 01).

PIPING DRAWINGS
Full piping plans with equipment nozzle charts will be provided. (Refer to Attachment 02).
Detached or upper piping plans will be used as required to avoid congestion.

Line Identification
Line numbers and flow arrows will be shown throughout the drawing to identify all lines
adequately.
Vessel trim numbers will be shown on drawing.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2055
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 2 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - FULLY DETAILED / DIMENSION METHOD

COORDINATES,
DIMENSIONS, AND
ELEVATIONS

Coordinates
Indicate coordinates on the graphic section of the plan for equipment, pipe supports, and
structures.
Indicate coordinate at anchored end of equipment and show an "X."

Dimensions
Dimensions 1 foot and above will be in feet and inches. Dimensions less than 1 foot will be in
inches.
Dimension lines are to be grouped in a string, if possible.
Omit face-to-face dimensioning of valves and other piping components. Fitting makeup will
not be dimensioned.
The use of 1/16 of an inch dimensions will be avoided when locating piping or equipment.
Usage will be limited to fitting makeup, calculated dimensions, furnished equipment, or
similar situations.
A minimum number of dimensions will be shown. Dimensions shown on lower plans will not
be repeated on upper plans. Dimensions shown on sections will not be repeated on plans.
Dimensions shown on individual area plans will not be repeated on adjoining plans unless lack
of that dimension will cause excessive checking time.
Generally, piping will be dimensioned from coordinates on equipment, pipe supports, or
structures.

Miscellaneous Callouts
Callouts for angular offsets will be given only if offsets are other than 90 or 45 degrees.
Do not use shading to highlight or emphasize portions of the drawing.

Elevations
Show HPFS (High Point of Finished Surface) elevation on grade plans only.
Elevations will be given for lines that cannot be located by reference to either equipment or
pipeway. Use of BOP (Bottom of Pipe) or centerline elevations will be interchangeable and
choice will be based on the easiest to determine.
Do not show elevations for horizontal runs established by vertical fitting makeup.
Elevation callouts are required for inline items in vertical runs. Exceptions will be items
located by fitting makeup.

EQUIPMENT AND PLOT

ITEMS

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2055
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 3 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - FULLY DETAILED / DIMENSION METHOD

Show minimum outline of equipment or items that take up plot space. Outline should be
sufficient to indicate location, clearances, and provide a correct representation of the
equipment's appearance. Refer to Attachment 03. Identify equipment by indicating its
corresponding tag number.

Nozzle Tables
Tabulate nozzles that require piping or instrumentation.
Show nozzle designation or description.
Show size and rating or type such as 8-inch, 150 #RF, 3/4 of an inch SW (Socket Weld)
CPLG (Coupling).
Elevations will be shown for nozzles that require piping or instrumentation. Elevations will
not be given for screwed or SW connections on top or bottom of equipment where it would
result in a threaded end or plan end elevations.
Orientation will be given in degrees, clockwise from North (North = 0 degrees).
Nozzles on vertical equipment that require piping will have projection shown.
Coordinates will be shown for tabulated nozzles; those located radially on vertical equipment
that will show projection and orientation. Piping attached to vertical equipment will have the
first drop or rise located by coordinates on the equipment nozzle table.

Field Supports
Indicate field supports as described in the following practices:
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2150: Supports - Base Supports, Base Springs,
Base Anchors, Angle Base Supports, And Concrete Pads
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2151: Supports - Field Supports
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2152: Supports - Cradles, Dummy Supports,
Trunnions, Shear Lugs, Riser Clamps, And U-Bolts
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2153: Supports - Shoes, Load Pads, Slide Plates,
Stiffener Plates, Anchors, Directional Anchors, And Guides - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2154: Supports - Hanger Rods - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2155: Supports - Base Supports, Cradles, Anchors,
And Holddowns - Low Temperature
Piping Engineering Practice 670.250.2156: Supports - Holddowns And Adjustable
Spring Wedges - Pulsating Piping

Drain Funnels, Catch

Basins, And Manholes
Drain funnels, catch basins, and manholes are not to be shown except where pertinent to
aboveground piping.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2055
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 4 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - FULLY DETAILED / DIMENSION METHOD

Nonstandard Items
Nonstandard items must be called out on piping plans. Do not include item codes and
specialty items that are covered by the P&IDs (Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams). Some
examples of nonstandard items are the following:
Short radius elbows
Reducing elbows
Slip-on reducing flange
Chain operated valves and valve handle extensions
Hanger springs

INSTRUMENTS AND
ELECTRICAL
The instructions on Attachment 04 are to be used as minimum requirements. Additional
information may be required in some cases for clarification.

REFERENCES
PDS (Plant Design System) Piping Application Manual
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.0720: Project Requirements Checklist - Piping Engineering
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2050: Piping Plans - Aboveground Piping Plan Instructions
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2150: Supports - Base Supports, Base Supports, Base Springs, Base
Anchors, Angle Base Supports, And Concrete Pads
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2151: Supports - Field Supports
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2152: Supports - Cradles, Dummy Supports, Trunnions, Shear
Lugs, Riser Clamps, And U-Bolts
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2153: Supports - Shoes, Load Pads, Slide Plates, Stiffener Plates,
Anchors, Directional Anchors, And Guides - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2154: Supports - Hanger Rods - Metallic Piping
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2155: Supports - Base Supports, Cradles, Anchors, And Holddowns
- Low Temperature
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.2156: Supports - Holddowns And Adjustable Spring Wedges -
Pulsating Piping

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2055
Publication Date 21Oct95
Page 5 of 5

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING PLANS - SAMPLE ABOVEGROUND - FULLY DETAILED / DIMENSION METHOD

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Sample Aboveground Piping Plan (Fully Detailed With Full Dimensions And Sections)
Attachment 02:
Sample Nozzle Block Chart
Attachment 03:
Equipment And Plot Items Presentation Matrix
Attachment 04:
Instrument And Electrical Item Presentation Matrix

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2055
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 03 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

EQUIPMENT AND PLOT ITEMS PRESENTATION MATRIX

Show Minimum Show Outline Remarks

Outline To When Required
Scale For Clearance
Pipe Supports X Show centerline coordinates of
column and callout top of steel
elevations and pipe support number.
Structures X Show only the portion of steel or
concrete that is required to establish
clearances.
Foundations X Show minimum outline of
aboveground portion if required for
clearance.
Ladders And X 1. Show minimum indication of
Platforms checker plate or grating and
callout top of platform EL.
(PLATF.#2 EL. 131' - 0").
2. Show outline of ladder and
cage with single line.
Utility Stations X Show full piping detail.
Steam Traps X Show full piping detail.
Emergency X Callout ES# _____. Show detail.
Showers
Eye Wash X Callout EW# _____. Show detail.
Stations
Buildings X
Roads X
Pumps X
Vessels X Internals will not be shown unless
they are part of the piping. Show
anchor end of horizontal vessels.
Heaters X
Compressors X
Exchangers X Show anchor end of exchangers.
Air Coolers X

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 2055
Publication Date 21Oct95
Attachment 04 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

INSTRUMENT AND ELECTRICAL ITEM PRESENTATION MATRIX

Indicate Indicate To Locate By Remarks

Instrument Scale Dimension
Balloon Coordinate
(Refer to Or Elevation
Note 1.)
Temperature X X X
(TI, TW)
Pressure X X X
(PI, PT)
Flow X X X Indicate clearance required for
(FI, FE, FG) transmitter.
Level X X X
Instrument
(LC, LG)
Level Bridle X X X
Control Valve X X X
(FC, CV, LC)
Safety Valves X X X
(PSV, TSV)

Instrument X Show portion for space required and

And Electrical clearance.
Rack
Major X Show portion for space required and
Electrical And clearance.
Instrument
Equipment
Note 1: Arrows from instrument balloons will indicate the orientation of instruments that are
indicated by balloon only.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 4200
Publication Date 27Jan98
Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLE OF CONTENTS: FABRICATION DETAILS

Document Assembly
Number Number Description
670.250.4200 --- Table Of Contents: Fabrication Details
670.250.4262 5BSH1-*-** Base Supports - Hygienic
670.250.4263 5BSH2-*-** Base Supports - Hygienic
670.250.4264 5BSH3-*-** Base Supports - Hygienic
670.250.4265 5CLH1-*-** Clamp - Hygienic
670.250.4266 5CLH2-*-** Clamp - Hygienic
670.250.4267 5CLH3-*-** Clamp - Hygienic
670.250.4268 5FSH1-* Field Support - Hygienic
670.250.4269 5FSH2-* Field Support - Hygienic
670.250.4270 5FSH3-* Field Support - Hygienic
670.250.4271 5FSH4-* Field Support - Hygienic
670.250.4272 5HRH1-*-** Hanger Rods - Hygienic
670.250.4273 5HRH2-*-** Hanger Rods - Hygienic
670.250.4274 5HRH3-*-** Hanger Rods - Hygienic
670.250.4275 5TSH Toggle Support - Hygienic

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9809
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

DIMENSIONAL CHART - NOMINAL WALL THICKNESS FOR PIPE

NOM CARBON AND ALLOY STEELS

PIPE ANSI STANDARD B36.10
SIZE O.D. (ALL DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN INCHES)
SCH SCH SCH STD. SCH SCH XS SCH SCH SCH SCH SCH XX
10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
1/8 0.405 0.068 0.068 0.095 0.095
1/4 0.540 0.088 0.088 0.119 0.119
3/8 0.675 0.091 0.091 0.126 0.126
1/2 0.840 0.109 0.109 0.147 0.147 0.188 0.294
3/4 1.050 0.113 0.113 0.154 0.154 0.219 0.308
1 1.315 0.133 0.133 0.179 0.179 0.250 0.358
1-1/4 1.660 0.140 0.140 0.191 0.191 0.250 0.382
1-1/2 1.900 0.145 0.145 0.200 0.200 0.281 0.400
2 2.375 0.154 0.154 0.218 0.218 0.344 0.436
2-1/2 2.875 0.203 0.203 0.276 0.276 0.375 0.552
3 3.5 0.216 0.216 0.300 0.300 0.438 0.600
3-1/2 4.0 0.226 0.226 0.318 0.318
4 4.5 0.237 0.237 0.337 0.337 0.438 0.531 0.674
5 5.563 0.258 0.258 0.375 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750
6 6.625 0.280 0.280 0.432 0.432 0.562 0.719 0.864
8 8.625 0.250 0.277 0.322 0.322 0.406 0.500 0.500 0.594 0.719 0.812 0.906 0.875
10 10.8 0.250 0.307 0.365 0.365 0.500 0.500 0.594 0.719 0.844 1.000 1.125 1.000
12 12.8 0.250 0.330 0.375 0.406 0.562 0.500 0.688 0.844 1.000 1.125 1.312 1.000
14 14.0 0.250 0.312 0.375 0.375 0.438 0.594 0.500 0.750 0.938 1.094 1.250 1.406
16 16.0 0.250 0.312 0.375 0.375 0.500 0.656 0.500 0.844 1.031 1.219 1.438 1.594
18 18.0 0.250 0.312 0.438 0.375 0.562 0.750 0.500 0.938 1.156 1.375 1.562 1.781
20 20.0 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.375 0.594 0.812 0.500 1.031 1.281 1.500 1.750 1.969
22 22.0 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.375 0.875 0.500 1.125 1.375 1.625 1.875 2.125
24 24.0 0.250 0.375 0.562 0.375 0.688 0.969 0.500 1.219 1.531 0.812 2.062 2.344
26 26.0 0.312 0.500 0.375 0.500
28 28.0 0.312 0.500 0.625 0.375 0.500
30 30.0 0.312 0.500 0.625 0.375 0.500
32 32.0 0.312 0.500 0.625 0.375 0.688 0.500
34 34.0 0.312 0.500 0.625 0.375 0.688 0.500
36 36.0 0.312 0.500 0.625 0.375 0.750 0.500

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9809
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

DIMENSIONAL CHART - NOMINAL WALL THICKNESS FOR PIPE

NOM STAINLESS STEELS

PIPE ANSI STANDARD B36.19
SIZE O.D. (ALL DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN INCHES)
SCH SCH SCH SCH
5S 10S 40S 80S
1/8 0.405 0.049 0.068 0.095
1/4 0.540 0.065 0.088 0.119
3/8 0.675 0.065 0.091 0.126
1/2 0.840 0.065 0.083 0.109 0.147
3/4 1.050 0.065 0.083 0.113 0.154
1 1.315 0.065 0.109 0.133 0.179
1-1/4 1.660 0.065 0.109 0.140 0.191
1-1/2 1.900 0.065 0.109 0.145 0.200
2 2.375 0.065 0.109 0.154 0.218
2-1/2 2.875 0.083 0.120 0.203 0.276
3 3.5 0.083 0.120 0.216 0.300
3-1/2 4.0 0.083 0.120 0.226 0.318
4 4.5 0.083 0.120 0.237 0.337
5 5.563 0.109 0.134 0.258 0.375
6 6.625 0.109 0.134 0.280 0.432
8 8.625 0.109 0.148 0.322 0.500
10 10.8 0.134 0.165 0.365 0.500
12 12.8 0.156 0.180 0.375 0.500
14 14.0 0.156 0.188
16 16.0 0.165 0.188
18 18.0 0.165 0.188
20 20.0 0.188 0.218
22 22.0 0.188 0.218
24 24.0 0.218 0.250
26 26.0
28 28.0
30 30.0 0.250 0.312
32 32.0
34 34.0
36 36.0

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9820
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 1 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

SPECTACLE BLINDS

PURPOSE
This resource provides basic dimensions and design data for selection and specification of
blanks, also known as line blinds, spectacle blinds, paddle, and spacer blinds.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
GENERAL
DESIGN NOTES
DESIGN BASIS
SELECTION CHART
FABRICATION NOTES
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
Use this document as a guide to determine thicknesses and other dimensions for design layout.
The dimensional charts may also be used as a requisition attachment for ordering blanks.

GENERAL
This resource covers spectacle blinds, paddle blinds, and paddle spacers that are designed to
be inserted between a pair of line flanges, including flanges that are part of a valve or a piece
of equipment. It does not include blanks that are permanently mounted in a quick-change
device such as a Hamer blind or equivalent.
This resource is for use only on projects where API (American Petroleum Institute) standards
are not used, and for sizes and ratings outside the coverage of API Standard 590. Wherever
API 590 is applicable, it will supersede this resource.

DESIGN NOTES
Blanks will be provided where indicated on the flow diagrams.
Blanks will be accessible from grade, platform, or permanent ladder.
When weight of a blank exceeds 100 pounds, lifting and handling facilities will be provided,
either mobile or in place. Mobile handling means crane or cherry picker type equipment.
Grade access and reach capabilities require some type of structure, capable of taking the load,
above the blank, and with provisions for attaching a hoisting device.
When the piping is too stiff to allow easy removal of blinds, consideration will be given to the
use of flange jacking devices or the installation of jack screws.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9820
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 2 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

SPECTACLE BLINDS

DESIGN BASIS
Blanks shown in this resource are designed to fit ASME/ANSI (American Society of
Mechanical Engineers/ American National Standards Institute) B16.5 flanges. Thicknesses
are calculated in accordance with Equation 15 in ASME B31.3, Paragraph 304.5.3 and
Equation 7 in ASME B31.3, Paragraph 104.5.3. Design pressure is maximum flange rating.
A single corrosion allowance (applied to one side only) of 0.05 inch is included for carbon
steel blanks. No corrosion allowance is provided for stainless steel.

SELECTION CHART
Use the charts in Attachments 1 through 7 to determine the appropriate choice of spectacle
blind or paddle blind and spacer. When size and rating indicate that paddles and spacers are
required, both will be provided.
Carbon steel and stainless steel blanks designed for raised face flanges may be bolted to either
raised face or flat face steel or stainless steel flanges. They may not be bolted to iron or
plastic flanges, including pipe flanges, flanges on valves or flanges on equipment. Blanks
required in these situations will either be located adjacent to a pair of steel flanges or a special
design including a full face with bolt holes will be provided.

FABRICATION NOTES
Dimensional tolerances will be as follows:
"T" -- +0.030 inch, -0.000 inch
All others --- ñ0.063 inch
Gasket contact surface will be in accordance with ASME/ANSI B16.5 Paragraph 6.3.4.
Special finishes are not required.
Ring-joint groove dimensions and tolerances will be in accordance with ASME/ANSI B16.5
Table 5.
Gasket seating surfaces of nongalvanized carbon steel blanks will have a solvent removable or
peelable rust-preventive coating for shipment.
Material for carbon steel blanks will be ASTM-A516 grade 70 plate. Dimensions "T" is
applicable for this grade only. Material for stainless steel blanks will be ASTM A-240, grade
304. Grade 316 may also be used. Dimension "T" is applicable for grades 304 or 316, and
will be recalculated if low-carbon grades or other grades with lower allowable strengths are
used.

REFERENCES
ANSI B16.5
API Standard 590
ASME B31.3
ASTM-A516

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9820
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 3 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

SPECTACLE BLINDS

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Symbols And Thickness Tables
Attachment 02:
Spectacle Blinds: 150#, 300#, 600#, 900# Raised Face - 150# Flat Face
Attachment 03:
Spectacle Blinds: 300#, 600#, and 900# Ring Joint
Attachment 04:
Paddle Blinds: 150#, 300#, 600#, 900# Raised Face - 150# Flat Face
Attachment 05:
Paddle Spacer: 150#, 300#, 600#, 900# Raised Face - 150# Flat Face
Attachment 06:
Paddle Spacer: 300#, 600#, 900# Ring Joint
Attachment 07:
Paddle Spacer: 300#, 600#, 900# Ring Joint

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLE OF WEIGHTS - PIPING COMPONENTS

PURPOSE
This practice provides data necessary to calculate piping weights for carbon steel components
and conversion factors for other materials.

SCOPE
This practice includes information about the following major topics:
Carbon steel piping component weights
Insulation weights
Noncarbon steel weight factors

APPLICATION
The data provided may be used for normal piping layout, design, and checking functions.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Tables Of Piping Materials, By Size In Pounds, For Carbon Steel Components
Table 1. 1" Pipe (1.313" OD)
Table 2. 1- 1/2" Pipe (1.900" OD)
Table 3. 2" Pipe (2.375 OD)
Table 4. 3" Pipe (3.500" OD)
Table 5. 4" Pipe (4.500" OD)
Table 6. 6" Pipe (6.625" OD)
Table 7. 8" Pipe (8.625" OD)
Table 8. 10" Pipe (10.75" OD)
Table 9. 12" Pipe (12.75" OD)
Table 10. 14" Pipe (14.00" OD)
Table 11. 16" Pipe (16.00" OD)
Table 12. 18" Pipe (18.00" OD)
Table 13. 20" Pipe (20.00" OD)
Table 14. 24" Pipe (24.00" OD)
Attachment 02:
Various Piping Insulation Material Weights
Attachment 03:
Relative Weight Factors For Other Piping Materials

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 14

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLES OF PIPING MATERIALS, BY SIZE IN POUNDS, FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS

Table 1. 1" Pipe (1.313" OD)

Unit of Measure: Pounds Material: Carbon Steel

PIPE SCHEDULE 40 80 160
NUMBER
Wall design STD XS XXS
Thickness - inches 0.133 0.179 0.250 0.358
Pipe - pounds/foot 1.680 2.170 2.840 3.660
Water - pounds/foot 0.370 0.310 0.230 0.120
WELDING 90 LR ELL 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.7
FITTINGS 90 SR ELL 0.2
45 ELL 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5
Tee 0.8 0.9 1.1 1.3
Lateral 1.7 2.5
Reducer 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5
Cap 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.4
FLANGES RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
Screwed or SO 2.5 4.0 5.0 5.0 12.0 1.20 15.0
Weldneck 3.0 5.0 7.0 7.0 12.0 12.0 16.0
Lap joint 2.5 4.0 5.0 5.0 12.0 12.0 15.0
Blind 2.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 12.0 12.0 15.0
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
FITTINGS 90 LR ELL 8
90 SR ELL 6 15 28
45 ELL 5 14 26
Tee 11 20 39
BUTT WELD RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 31 31 65
Globe/angle
Check 20 25 80
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 31 80
Globe/angle 35 84
Check

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 2 of 14

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLES OF PIPING MATERIALS, BY SIZE IN POUNDS, FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS

Table 2. 1-1/2" Pipe (1.900" OD)

Unit of Measure: Pounds Material: Carbon Steel

PIPE SCHEDULE 40 80 160
NUMBER
Wall design STD XS XXS
Thickness - inches 0.145 0.200 0.281 0.400
Pipe - pounds/foot 2.720 3.630 4.860 6.410
Water - pounds/foot 0.880 0.770 0.610 0.410
WELDING 90 LR ELL 0.9 1.2 1.5 2.0
FITTINGS 90 SR ELL 0.6 0.8
45 ELL 0.5 0.7 0.8 1.0
Tee 2.0 2.4 3.0 3.7
Lateral 3.3 5.4
Reducer 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.3
Cap 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.8
FLANGES RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
Screwed or SO 3.5 8.0 9.0 9.0 19.0 19.0 31.0
Weldneck 4.0 9.0 12.0 12.0 19.0 19.0 34.0
Lap joint 3.5 8.0 9.0 9.0 19.0 19.0 31.0
Blind 3.5 9.0 10.0 10.0 19.0 19.0 31.0
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
FITTINGS 90 LR ELL 13 24
90 SR ELL 12 23 26 46
45 ELL 11 21 23 39
Tee 20 30 37 70
BUTT WELD RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 42 105
Globe/angle
Check 29 55 70 125
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 45 68 90 70 125
Globe/angle 30 60 76 170
Check 30 35 40 110

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 3 of 14

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLES OF PIPING MATERIALS, BY SIZE IN POUNDS, FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS

Table 3. 2" Pipe (2.375" OD)

Unit of Measure: Pounds Material: Carbon Steel

PIPE SCHEDULE 40 80 160
NUMBER
Wall design STD XS XXS
Thickness - inches 0.154 0.218 0.343 0.436
Pipe - pounds/foot 3.650 5.020 7.440 9.030
Water - pounds/foot 1.460 1.280 0.970 0.770
WELDING 90 LR ELL 1.5 2.1 3.0 4.0
FITTINGS 90 SR ELL 1.0 1.4
45 ELL 0.9 1.1 1.6 2.0
Tee 4.2 4.1 5.0 5.9
Lateral 5.0 7.8
Reducer 0.9 1.3 1.9 2.3
Cap 0.6 0.7 1.2 1.2
FLANGES RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
Screwed or SO 6.0 9.0 11.0 11.0 32.0 32.0 49.0
Weldneck 7.0 11.0 14.0 14.0 32.0 32.0 53.0
Lap joint 6.0 9.0 12.0 12.0 32.0 32.0 48.0
Blind 5.0 10. 0 12.0 12.0 32.0 32.0 50.0
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
FITTINGS 90 LR ELL 22 31
90 SR ELL 19 29 35 83
45 ELL 16 24 33 73
Tee 27 41 52 129
BUTT WELD RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 64 65 86 216 216
Globe/angle 44 75 78 97 230
Check 35 60 86 173 190
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 68 75 115 110 256 256
Globe/angle 53 79 90 115 215 235
Check 45 62 100 230 300

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 4 of 14

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLES OF PIPING MATERIALS, BY SIZE IN POUNDS, FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS

Table 4. 3" Pipe (3.500" OD)

Unit of Measure: Pounds Material: Carbon Steel

PIPE SCHEDULE 40 80 160
NUMBER
Wall design STD XS XXS
Thickness - inches 0.216 0.300 0.438 0.600
Pipe - pounds/foot 7.580 10.250 14.320 18.580
Water - pounds/foot 3.200 2.860 2.350 1.800
WELDING 90 LR ELL 4.7 6.3 8.8 11.4
FITTINGS 90 SR ELL 3.3 4.2
45 ELL 2.5 3.3 4.5 5.7
Tee 8.4 10.0 13.8 16.8
Lateral 13.0 19.0
Reducer 2.2 3.0 4.2 5.4
Cap 1.4 1.9 3.5 3.9
FLANGES RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
Screwed or SO 9 17 20 20 37 61 102
Weldneck 12 19 27 27 38 61 113
Lap joint 9 17 19 19 36 60 99
Blind 10 20 24 24 38 61 105
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
FITTINGS 90 LR ELL 40 63
90 SR ELL 32 53 67 98 150
45 ELL 28 46 60 93 135
Tee 52 81 102 151 238
BUTT WELD RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 117 124 147 300 425
Globe/angle 75 130 166 330 500
Check 60 95 155 186 307
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 128 145 194 188 314 460
Globe/angle 80 139 160 191 403 495
Check 65 120 152 245 440

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 5 of 14

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLES OF PIPING MATERIALS, BY SIZE IN POUNDS, FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS

Table 5. 4" (4.500" OD)

Unit of Measure: Pounds Material: Carbon Steel

PIPE SCHEDULE 40 80 160
NUMBER
Wall design STD XS XXS
Thickness - inches 0.237 0.337 0.531 0.674
Pipe - pounds/foot 10.790 14.980 22.510 27.540
Water - pounds/foot 5.510 4.980 4.02 3.38
WELDING 90 LR ELL 8.9 12.4 18.6 22.7
FITTINGS 90 SR ELL 6.7 8.3
45 ELL 4.5 6.2 9.3 11.4
Tee 13.5 18.6 34.3 34.2
Lateral 21.0 33.0
Reducer 3.6 5.0 7.5 9.2
Cap 2.5 3.5 6.5 7.0
FLANGES RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
Screwed or SO 15 26 32 43 66 90 158
Weldneck 17 29 41 48 64 90 177
Lap joint 15 26 31 42 64 92 153
Blind 19 31 39 47 67 90 164
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
FITTINGS 90 LR ELL 72 98
90 SR ELL 59 85 99 128 185 254
45 ELL 51 78 82 119 170 214
Tee 86 121 153 187 262 386
BUTT WELD RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 127 170 220 278 396 552
Globe/angle 122 180 240 280 410 800
Check 80 170 220 250 270 460
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 140 215 270 355 472 735
Globe/angle 140 220 233 320 625 800
Check 100 185 200 280 397 780

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 6 of 14

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLES OF PIPING MATERIALS, BY SIZE IN POUNDS, FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS

Table 6. 6" Pipe (6.625" OD)

Unit of Measure: Pounds Material: Carbon Steel

PIPE SCHEDULE 40 80 160
NUMBER
Wall design STD XS XXS
Thickness - inches 0.280 0.432 0.718 0.864
Pipe - pounds/foot 18.970 28.570 45.300 53.200
Water - pounds/foot 12.510 11.290 9.200 8.200
WELDING 90 LR ELL 23.5 35.3 56.0 66.0
FITTINGS 90 SR ELL 16.6 22.9
45 ELL 11.8 17.7 28.0 33.0
Tee 36.3 42.5 85.0 85.0
Lateral 42.0 79.0
Reducer 8.7 13.1 20.8 24.4
Cap 6.4 9.5 17.5 18.7
FLANGES RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
Screwed or SO 22 45 54 95 128 202 396
Weldneck 27 48 67 96 130 202 451
Lap joint 22 45 52 93 125 208 387
Blind 29 56 71 101 133 197 418
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
FITTINGS 90 LR ELL 126 182
90 SR ELL 90 147 184 275 375 566
45 ELL 82 132 149 240 320 476
Tee 149 217 279 400 565 839
BUTT WELD RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 219 360 460 640 892 1438
Globe/angle 243 375 730 656 770 1800
Check 165 280 310 486 500 790
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 240 420 530 726 900 1595
Globe/angle 250 390 750 782 920 1960
Check 200 330 395 550 1128 1630

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 7 of 14

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLES OF PIPING MATERIALS, BY SIZE IN POUNDS, FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS

Table 7. 8" Pipe (8.625" OD)

Unit of Measure: Pounds Material: Carbon Steel

PIPE SCHEDULE 40 80 160
NUMBER
Wall design STD XS XXS
Thickness - inches 0.322 0.500 0.906 0.875
Pipe - pounds/foot 28.550 43.400 74.700 72.400
Water - pounds/foot 21.690 19.800 15.800 16.100
WELDING 90 LR ELL 47 71 123 120
FITTINGS 90 SR ELL 34.5 50.2
45 ELL 24 36 61 60
Tee 61 78 152 152
Lateral 76 140
Reducer 14 22 37 36
Cap 11 17 32 31
FLANGES RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
Screwed or SO 33 67 82 135 207 319 601
Weldneck 42 76 104 137 222 334 692
Lap joint 33 67 79 132 223 347 587
Blind 48 90 115 159 232 363 649
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
FITTINGS 90 LR ELL 202 283
90 SR ELL 157 238 310 435 639 995
45 ELL 127 203 215 360 507 870
Tee 230 337 445 610 978 1465
BUTT WELD RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 340 590 830 1080 1420 2500
Globe/angle 397 750 900 1125 1160 2860
Check 350 510 580 788 117 1320
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 400 700 940 1220 1612 2810
Globe/angle 475 850 1150 1300 1450 3345
Check 390 620 680 910 1430 2100

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 8 of 14

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLES OF PIPING MATERIALS, BY SIZE IN POUNDS, FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS

Table 8. 10" Pipe (10.75" OD)

Unit of Measure: Pounds Material: Carbon Steel

PIPE SCHEDULE 40 80 160
NUMBER
Wall design STD XS
Thickness - inches 0.365 0.500 1.125
Pipe - pounds/foot 40.500 54.700 115.70
Water - pounds/foot 34.100 32.300 24.600
WELDING 90 LR ELL 84 112 238
FITTINGS 90 SR ELL 62.2 75
45 ELL 42.4 56 119
Tee 104 132 280
Lateral 124 202
Reducer 24 32 67
Cap 20 27 59
FLANGES RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
Screwed or SO 51 100 117 213 293 528 1148
Weldneck 60 110 152 225 316 546 1291
Lap joint 51 110 138 231 325 577 1120
Blind 78 146 181 267 338 599 1248
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
FITTINGS 90 LR ELL 290 438
90 SR ELL 240 343 462 747 995
45 ELL 185 288 332 572 732
Tee 353 527 578 1007 1417
BUTT WELD RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 553 910 1250 1610 2225 3890
Globe/angle 573 1140
Check 460 660 820 1160 1725
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 630 1050 1530 1880 2470 4910
Globe/angle 670 1290 1070 2500 4160
Check 520 783 900 1440 2170 2280

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 9 of 14

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLES OF PIPING MATERIALS, BY SIZE IN POUNDS, FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS

Table 9. 12" Pipe (12.75" OD)

Unit of Measure: Pounds Material: Carbon Steel

PIPE SCHEDULE 160
NUMBER
Wall design STD XS
Thickness - inches 0.375 0.500 1.312
Pipe - pounds/foot 49.600 65.400 160.30
Water - pounds/foot 49.000 47.000 34.900
WELDING 90 LR ELL 123 162 397
FITTINGS 90 SR ELL 82 108
45 ELL 62 81 199
Tee 162 187 429
Lateral 180 273
Reducer 33.4 44 107
Cap 30 38.1 95
FLANGES RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
Screwed or SO 72 140 164 261 388 820 1611
Weldneck 88 163 212 272 434 843 1919
Lap joint 72 164 187 286 433 902 1573
Blind 118 209 261 341 475 928 1775
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
FITTINGS 90 LR ELL 485 624 1598
90 SR ELL 345 509 669 815 1474
45 ELL 282 414 469 705 1124
Tee 513 754 943 1361 1928
BUTT WELD RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 730 1220 1800 2240 3208 5260
Globe/angle 1310 1700
Check 560 1060 1150 1570 2625
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 830 1490 2000 2630 3800 7150
Globe/angle 1431 1900
Check 775 1300 1250 1970 3162 3370

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 10 of 14

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLES OF PIPING MATERIALS, BY SIZE IN POUNDS, FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS

Table 10. 14" Pipe (14.00" OD)

Unit of Measure: Pounds Material: Carbon Steel

PIPE SCHEDULE 30 160
NUMBER
Wall design STD XS
Thickness - inches 0.375 0.500 1.406
Pipe - pounds/foot 54.600 72.100 189.10
Water - pounds/foot 59.700 57.500 42.600
WELDING 90 LR ELL 158 208 546
FITTINGS 90 SR ELL 108 139
45 ELL 80 104 273
Tee 226 280
Lateral 218 340
Reducer 63 83
Cap 35.3 45.9
FLANGES RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
Screwed or SO 96 195 235 318 460 1016
Weldneck 130 217 277 406 642 1241
Lap joint 119 220 254 349 477 1076
Blind 142 267 354 437 574
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
FITTINGS 90 LR ELL 622 772
90 SR ELL 497 632 664 918 1549
45 ELL 377 587 638 883 1246
Tee 683 968 1131 1652 2318
BUTT WELD RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 990 1960 2210 3000 4350 8280
Globe/angle 1360
Check 1095 1529 2251
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 1150 2170 2410 3455 5850 9660
Globe/angle 1525
Check 1213 1764 2640

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 11 of 14

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLES OF PIPING MATERIALS, BY SIZE IN POUNDS, FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS

Table 11. 16" (16.00" OD)

Unit of Measure: Pounds Material: Carbon Steel

PIPE SCHEDULE 30 40 160
NUMBER
Wall design STD XS
Thickness - inches 0.375 0.500 1.593
Pipe - pounds/foot 62.600 82.800 245.10
Water - pounds/foot 79.100 76.500 55.900
WELDING 90 LR ELL 208 273 809
FITTINGS 90 SR ELL 138 182
45 ELL 104 137 405
Tee 250 369
Lateral 275 433
Reducer 77 102
Cap 45 58
FLANGES RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
Screwed or SO 108 262 310 442 559 1297
Weldneck 142 288 351 577 785 1597
Lap joint 143 282 337 476 588 1372
Blind 185 349 455 603 719
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
FITTINGS 90 LR ELL 781 1058
90 SR ELL 656 958 1014 1402 1886
45 ELL 481 708 839 1212 1586
Tee 961 1404 1671 2128 3054
BUTT WELD RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 1460 2550 3100 4030 6000
Globe/angle
Check
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 1580 2800 3500 4375 6500 7875
Globe/angle 1450
Check 1225

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 12 of 14

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLES OF PIPING MATERIALS, BY SIZE IN POUNDS, FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS

Table 12. 18" Pipe (18.00")

Unit of Measure: Pounds Material: Carbon Steel

PIPE SCHEDULE
NUMBER
Wall design STD XS
Thickness - inches 0.375 0.500
Pipe - pounds/foot 70.600 93.500
Water - pounds/foot 101.20 98.400
WELDING 90 LR ELL 263 347
FITTINGS 90 SR ELL 176 231
45 ELL 132 174
Tee 333 425
Lateral 326 526
Reducer 94 123
Cap 57 75
FLANGES RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
Screwed or SO 140 331 380 573 797 1694
Weldneck 160 355 430 652 1074 2069
Lap joint 166 355 415 566 820 1769
Blind 229 440 572 762 1030
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
FITTINGS 90 LR ELL 941 1426
90 SR ELL 711 1126 1340 1793 2817
45 ELL 521 901 1040 1543 2252
Tee 1010 1602 1909 2690 4327
BUTT WELD RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 1730 3300 6760
Globe/angle
Check
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 1898 3319 6020 6675
Globe/angle
Check

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 13 of 14

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLES OF PIPING MATERIALS, BY SIZE IN POUNDS, FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS

Table 13. 20" Pipe (20.00" OD)

Unit of Measure: Pounds Material: Carbon Steel

PIPE SCHEDULE 20 30
NUMBER
Wall design STD XS
Thickness - inches 375 500
Pipe - pounds/foot 78.600 104.10
Water - pounds/foot 126.00 122.80
WELDING 90 LR ELL 323 438
FITTINGS 90 SR ELL 238 286
45 ELL 162 228
Tee 504 583
Lateral 396 628
Reducer 142 186
Cap 71 94
FLANGES RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
Screwed or SO 181 378 468 733 972 2114
Weldneck 196 431 535 811 1344 2614
Lap joint 211 428 510 725 1048 2189
Blind 298 545 711 976 1287
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
FITTINGS 90 LR ELL 1352 1705
90 SR ELL 922 1375 1680 2314 3610
45 ELL 652 1105 1330 1917 2848
Tee 1378 1908 2370 3463 5520
BUTT WELD RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 2200 4350 8950
Globe/angle
Check
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 2228 4278 5700 7015
Globe/angle
Check

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 14 of 14

FLUOR DANIEL

TABLES OF PIPING MATERIALS, BY SIZE IN POUNDS, FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS

Table 14. 24" Pipe (24.00" OD)

Unit of Measure: Pounds Material: Carbon Steel

PIPE SCHEDULE 20
NUMBER
Wall design STD XS
Thickness - inches 0.375 0.500
Pipe - pounds/foot 94.600 125.50
Water - pounds/foot 183.80 180.10
WELDING 90 LR ELL 500 622
FITTINGS 90 SR ELL 313 415
45 ELL 252 311
Tee 765 934
Lateral 544 882
Reducer 167 220
Cap 102 139
FLANGES RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
Screwed or SO 245 577 676 1056 1823 3378
Weldneck 295 632 777 1157 2450 4153
Lap joint 295 617 752 1046 2002 3478
Blind 446 841 1073 1355 2442
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500
FITTINGS 90 LR ELL 1821 2874
90 SR ELL 1671 2174 2474 3506 6155
45 ELL 1121 1634 1974 2831 5124
Tee 2276 3161 3811 5184 9387
BUTT WELD RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 3350 6700 10500
Globe/angle
Check
FLANGED RATING TYPE PSI 150 300 400 600 900 1500
VALVES Gate 3350 7529 6995 9360
Globe/angle
Check

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

VARIOUS PIPING INSULATION MATERIAL WEIGHTS

Weight Of Insulation For The Pipe

I = Insulation density in pounds per cubic foot

T = Insulation thickness in inches
D = Outside diameter of pipe in inches

Weight of insulation = 0.02181T (D + T) = pounds per foot

Values For I
Calcium silicate 11
85 percent magnesium 11
Thermobestos 11.53
KALO 21
Diatomaceous earth 21
High temperature 24
Super - X 25
Polyurethane 2.3
Amosite asbestos 16
Foamglas 9
Cellular glass 9
Mineral wool 8
Perlite

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 03 Page 1 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

RELATIVE WEIGHT FACTORS FOR OTHER PIPING MATERIALS

Weight Of Piping Components, Pipe Weight, And Water In Pipe

Refer to Attachment 01, Tables 1 through 14 for carbon steel pipe components.
Relative weight factors for other pipe materials.

Note!!! Value weights are approximate. When possible, obtain weights from the manufacturer.

All flanged fitting. Flanged valve and flange weights include the proportional weight of bolts
or studs to make up all joints.

Code Basic Material Conversion Factor

AL ALUMINUM 0.35000
AN ASB CEM NON-PRESS 0.20400
AP ASB CEM PRESSURE 0.23400
A2 ALLOY 20 1.02110
BR BRASS (COPPER AND ZINC) 1.12000
BZ BRONZE 1.12000
CC CONCRETE STEEL CYL 0.00000
CD CAST IRON SOIL 0.91000
CE CAST IRON PRESSURE 0.89800
CN CONCRETE NON-REINFORCED 0.29300
CP CONCRETE PRESTRESS 0.32900
CR CONCRETE REINFORCED 0.31200
CU COPPER 1.14000
C1 CARBON STEEL 1.00000
C2 CARBON STEEL LO-TEMP 1.00000
DU DUCTILE IRON 1.00000
GL GLASS 0.31800
HA HASTELLOY 1.18000
HS HIGH SILICON IRON 1.00000
KA 1 1/4 CHROME 0.99600
KB 1 3/4 CHROME 0.99600
KC 2 1/4 CHROME 0.99600
KT 12 CHROME 0.99600
KY KYNAR 0.22400
K1 1 CHROME 0.99600
K2 2 CHROME 0.99600
K3 3 CHROME 0.99600
K5 5 CHROME 0.99600

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 03 Page 2 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

RELATIVE WEIGHT FACTORS FOR OTHER PIPING MATERIALS

Code Basic Material Conversion Factor

K7 7 CHROME 0.99600
K9 9 CHROME 0.99600
MA MALLEABLE IRON 1.00000
ML MONEL 1.12000
MR RTRP, FRP 0.21600
MY CARBON 1/2 MOLY 0.99600
NL INCONEL 1.08100
NY INCOLOY 1.02100
N2 NICKLE 200 1.13000
PB POLYBUTYLENE 0.11600
PE POLYETHYLENE 0.12000
PR POLYPROPYLENE 0.13200
PV PVC 0.17600
SA 347 STAINLESS STEEL 1.02100
SB 410 STAINLESS STEEL 0.99600
SC 416 STAINLESS STEEL 0.99600
SH 304H STAINLESS STEEL 1.02100
S1 303 STAINLESS STEEL 1.02100
S2 304 STAINLESS STEEL 1.02100
S3 304L STAINLESS STEEL 1.02100
S4 309 STAINLESS STEEL 1.02100
S5 310 STAINLESS STEEL 1.02100
S6 316 STAINLESS STEEL 1.02100
S7 316L STAINLESS STEEL 1.02100
S8 317 STAINLESS STEEL 1.02100
S9 321 STAINLESS STEEL 1.02100
TM TITANIUM 0.57400

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 03 Page 3 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

RELATIVE WEIGHT FACTORS FOR OTHER PIPING MATERIALS

Code Basic Material Conversion Factor

TN 12 NICKEL 0.99600
VC VITRIFIED CLAY 0.28000
WR WROUGHT IRON 1.00000
YY YOLOY (ASTM A333 GR9) 0.99600
ZE 0.00000
3N 3 1/2 NICKEL 0.99600
5N 5 NICKEL 0.99600
9N 9 NICKEL 0.99600
99.0 CR-CU-NI 1.14000
001 ASTM-A53 GR.A SMLS 1.00000
002 API-5L GR.A SMLS 1.00000
003 ASTM-A53 GR.B SMLS 1.00000
004 API-5L GR.B SMLS 1.00000
005 ASTM-A106 GR.B SMLS 1.00000
006 ASTM-A106 GR.C SMLS 1.00000
007 ASTM-A333 GR.6 SMLS 1.00000
008 ASTM-A53 GR.A ERW 1.00000
009 API-5L GR.A EFW 1.00000
010 API-5LS GR.A (SPIRAL WELDED) EFW 1.00000
011 ASTM-A53 GR.B ERW 1.00000
012 ASTM-A135 GR.B ERW 1.00000
013 API-5L GR.B ERW 1.00000
014 API-5LS GR.B (SPIRAL WELD) ERW 1.00000
015 ASTM-A139 GR.B EFW 1.00000
016 ASTM-A155 GR.C CL.2 (ASTM-A285 GR.A PL) EFW 1.00000
017 ASTM-A155 GR.C50 CL.2 (ASTM-A285 GR.B PL) EFW 1.00000
018 ASTM-A155 GR.C55 CL.2 (ASTM-A285 GR.C PL) EFW 1.00000
019 ASTM-A155 GR.KC55 CL.2 (ASTM-A515 GR.55 PL) EFW 1.00000
020 ASTM-A155 GR.KCF55 CL.2 (ASTM-A516 GR.55 PL) EFW 1.00000
021 ASTM-A155 GR.KC70 CL.2 (ASTM-A515 CR.70 PL) EFW 1.00000
022 ASTM-A155 GR.C45 CL.3 (ASTM-A285 GR.A PL) EFW 1.00000
023 ASTM-A155 GR.C50 CL.3 (ASTM-A285 GR.B PL) EFW 1.00000
024 ASTM-A155 GR.C55 CL.3 (ASTM-A285 GR.C PL) EFW 1.00000
025 ASTM-A155 GR.KC55 CL.3 (ASTM-A515 GR.55 PL) EFW 1.00000

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 03 Page 4 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

RELATIVE WEIGHT FACTORS FOR OTHER PIPING MATERIALS

Code Basic Material Conversion Factor

026 ASTM-A155 GR.KCF55 CL.3 (ASTM-A516 GR.55 PL) EFW 1.00000
027 ASTM-A155 GR.KC60 CL.3 (ASTM-A515 GR.60 PL) EFW 1.00000
028 ASTM-A155 GR.KC70 CL.3 (ASTM-A515 GR.70 PL) EFW 1.00000
029 ASTM-A155 GR.C45 CL.1 (ASTM-A285 GR.A PL) EFW 1.00000
030 ASTM-A155 GR.C50 CL.1 (ASTM-A285 GR.B PL) EFW 1.00000
031 ASTM-A155 GR.C55 CL.1 (ASTM-A285 GR.C PL) EFW 1.00000
032 ASTM-A155 GR.KC55 CL.1 (ASTM-A515 GR.55 PL) EFW 1.00000
033 ASTM-A155 GR.KC55 CL.1 (ASTM-A516 GR.55 PL) EFW 1.00000
034 ASTM-A155 GR.KC70 CL.1 (ASTM-A515 GR.70 PL) EFW 1.00000
035 ASTM-A155 GR.KCF70 CL.1 (ASTM-A516 GR.70 PL) EFW 1.00000
036 ASTM-A335 GR.P1 SMLS 0.99600
037 ASTM-A335 GR.P2 SMLS 0.99600
038 ASTM-A335 GR.P5 SMLS 0.99600
039 ASTM-A335 GR.P5B SMLS 0.99600
040 ASTM-A335 GR.P5C SMLS 0.99600
041 ASTM-A335 GR.P7 SMLS 1.02100
042 ASTM-A335 GP.P9 SMLS 0.99600
043 ASTM-A335 GP.P11 SMLS 0.99600
044 ASTM-A335 GP.P22 SMLS 0.99600
045 ASTM-A155 GR.CM65 CL.2 (ASTM-A204 GR.A PL) EFW 1.00000
046 ASTM-A155 GR.1-1/4CR.CL.2 (ASTM-A387 GR.11 PL) EFW 0.99600
047 ASTM-A155 GR.2-1/4 CR.CL.2 (ASTM-A387 GR.22 PL) EFW 0.99600
048 ASTM-A155 GR.5 CR. CL.2 (ASTM-A387 GR.5 PL) EFW 0.99600
049 ASTM-A155 GR.CM65 CL.3 (ASTM-A204 GR.A PL) EFW 1.00000
050 ASTM-A155 GR.1-1/4 CR.CL.3 (ASTM-A387 GR.11 PL) EFW 0.99600
051 ASTM-A155 GR.2-1/4 CR.3 CL.3 (ASTM-A387 GR.22 PL) EFW 0.99600
052 ASTM-A155 GR.5 CR. CL.3 (ASTM-A387 GR.5 PL) EFW 0.99600
053 ASTM-A155 GR.CM65 CL.1 (ASTM-A204 GR.A PL) EFW 1.00000
054 ASTM-A155 GR.CM70 CL.1 (ASTM-A204 GR.B PL) EFW 1.00000
055 ASTM-A155 GR.CM75 CL.1 (ASTM-A204 GR.C PL) EFW 1.00000
056 ASTM-A155 GR.1-1/4 CR. CL.1 (ASTM-A387 GR.11 PL) EFW 0.99600
057 ASTM-A155 GR.2-1/4 CR. CL.1 (ASTM-A387 GR.22 PL) EFW 0.99600
058 ASTM-A155 GR.5 CR. CL.1 (ASTM-A387 GR.5 PL) EFW 1.00000
059 0.00000

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 03 Page 5 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

RELATIVE WEIGHT FACTORS FOR OTHER PIPING MATERIALS

Code Basic Material Conversion Factor

060 ASTM-A312 GR.TP304 SMLS 1.02100
061 ASTM-A312 GR.TP304H SMLS 1.02100
062 ASTM-A376 GR.TP304 SMLS 1.02100
063 ASTM-A376 GR.TP304H SMLS 1.02100
064 ASTM-AS58 GR.TP304 CL.1, 3 & 4(ASTM-A240 TP304PL) EFW 1.02100
065 ASTM-A312 GR.TP304L SMLS 1.02100
066 ASTM-A312 GR.TP316 SMLS 1.02100
067 ASTM-A312 GR.316H SMLS 1.02100
068 ASTM-A376 GR.TP316 SMLS 1.02100
069 ASTM-A376 GR.316H SMLS 1.02100
070 ASTM-A358 GR.TP316 CL.1, 3 & 4(ASTM-A240 TP316 PL) EFW 1.02100
071 ASTM-A312 GR.TP316L SMLS 1.02100
072 ASTM-A312 GR.TP321 SMLS 1.02100
073 ASTM-A376 GR.321 SMLS 1.02100
074 ASTM-A358 GR.TP321 CL.1, 3 & 4(ASTM-A240 TP321 PL) EFW 1.02100
075 ASTM-A312 GR.TP347 SMLS 1.02100
076 ASTM-A376 GR.TP347 SMLS 1.02100
077 ASTM-A358 GR.TP347 CL.1, 3 & 4(ASTM-A240 TP347 PL) EFW 1.02100
079 ASTM-A312 GR.TP304 EFW 1.02100
080 ASTM-A312 GR.TP304H EFW 1.02100
081 ASTM-A358 GR.TP304 CL.2 (ASTM-A240 GR.TP304 PL) EFW 1.02100
082 ASTM-A409 GR.TP304 EFW 1.02100
083 ASTM-A312 GR.TP304L EFW 1.02100
084 ASTM-A312 GR.TP316 EFW 1.02100
085 ASTM-A312 GR.TP316H EFW 1.02100
086 ASTM-A358 GR.TP316 CL.2 (ASTM-A204 GR.TP316 PL) EFW 1.02100
087 ASTM-A409 GR.TP316 EFW 1.02100
088 ASTM-A312 GR.TP316L EFW 1.02100
089 ASTM-A312 GR.TP321 EFW 1.02100
090 ASTM-A358 GR.TP321 CL.2 (ASTM-A240 GR.TP321 PL) EFW 1.02100
091 ASTM-A409 GR.TP321 EFW 1.02100
092 ASTM-A312 GR.TP347 EFW 1.02100
093 ASTM-A358 GR.TP347 CL.2 (ASTM-A240 GR.TP347 PL) EFW 1.02100
094 ASTM-A409 GR.TP347 EFW 1.02100

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 03 Page 6 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

RELATIVE WEIGHT FACTORS FOR OTHER PIPING MATERIALS

Code Basic Material Conversion Factor

095 ASTM-A358 GR.TP304 CL.5 (ASTM-A240 GR.TP304 PL) EFW 1.02100
096 ASTM-A358 GR.TP316 CL.5 (ASTM-A240 GR.TP316 PL) EFW 1.02100
097 ASTM-A358 GR.TP321 CL.5 (ASTM-A240 GR.TP321 PL) EFW 1.02100
098 ASTM-A358 GR.TP347 CL.5 (ASTM-A240 GR.TP347 PL) EFW 1.02100
100 ASTM-B241 GR.3003-H112 (AS WELDED CONDITION) SMLS 0.34500
103 ASTM-B241 GR.6061-T6 (WITH WELDED STRESS) SMLS 0.34500
104 ASTM-A333 GR.1 SMLS 1.00000
105 API-5LX GR.X42 SMLS 1.00000
106 API-5LX GR.X46 SMLS 1.00000
107 API-5LX GR.X52 SMLS 1.00000
108 API-5L GR.B ERW 1.00000
109 ASTM-A333 GR.6 ERW 1.00000
110 API-5LX GR.X42 EFW 1.00000
111 API-5LX GR.X46 EFW 1.00000
112 API-5LX GR.X52 EFW 1.00000
113 ASTM-A155 GR.KC60 CL.A (ASTM-A515 GR.60 PL) EFW 1.00000
114 ASTM-A155 GR.KC65 CL.1 (ASTM-A515 GR.65 PL) EFW 1.00000
115 ASTM-A155 GR.KCF60 CL.1 (ASTM-A516 GR.60 PL) EFW 1.00000
116 ASTM-A333 GR.3 SMLS 1.00000
117 ASTM-A312 GR.TP309 SMLS 1.02100
118 ASTM-A312 GR.TP347H SMLS 1.02100
119 ASTM-A312 GR.309 EFW 1.02100
121 ASTM-A155 GR.KC60 CL.2 (ASTM-A155 GR.60 PL) EFW 1.00000
129 ASTM-B241 GR.1060-0 SMLS 0.34500
200 ASME-SA53 GR.B SMLS 1.00000
201 ASME-SA106 GR.B SMLS 1.00000
202 ASME-SA53 GR.B ERW 1.00000
203 ASME-SA335 GR.P11 1.00000
204 ASME-SA312 GR.304 SMLS 1.02100
205 ASME-SA312 GR.316 SMLS 1.00000
300 ASTM-A671 GR.CC60 CL.32(ASTM-A516 GR.60 PL) EFW 1.02100
301 ASTM-A312 GR.TP304 EFW 1.02100
302 ASTM-A312 GR.TP304L EFW 1.02100
303 ASTM-A312 GR.TP316 EFW 1.02100

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9821
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 03 Page 7 of 7

FLUOR DANIEL

RELATIVE WEIGHT FACTORS FOR OTHER PIPING MATERIALS

Code Basic Material Conversion Factor

304 ASTM-A312 GR.TP316L EFW 1.02100
305 ASTM-A312 GR.TP321 EFW 1.02100
306 ASTM-A358 GR.TP304L CL.1, 3 & 4(ASTM-240 TP304PL) EFW 1.02100
309 ASTM-A358 GR.TP304L CL.2(ASTM-A240 GR.TP304 PL) EFW 1.02100
310 ASTM-A358 GR.TP316L CL.2(ASTM-A240 GR.TP316LPL) EFW 1.02100
311 ASTM-A671 GR.CF66 CL.32(ASTM-A203 GR.D PL) EFW 0.99600
312 ASTM-A671 GR.CC65 CL.22(ASTM-A516 GR.65 PL) EFW 1.00000
719 SABS GR.719-B ERW & 0.34500
EFW

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9822
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

PROPERTIES OF PIPE

PURPOSE
This practice provides lists defining the properties of pipe for use in design and engineering
calculations.

SCOPE
This practice includes information about the following major topics:
Properties of Pipe by Size and Schedule
Linear Expansion of Metals
Modulus of Elasticity of Nonferrous Material

APPLICATION
These tables should be used for reference to specific factors to be used in design and
engineering work.

REFERENCES
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.9821: Table Of Weights / Piping Components
Piping Engineering
Practice 670.250.9823: Coefficient Of Expansion Tables

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Properties of Pipe
Attachment 02:
Modulus of Elasticity for Ferrous Material
Attachment 03:
Modulus of Elasticity of Nonferrous Material

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9822
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

PROPERTIES OF PIPE

Description Dimension
D Outside Diameter Of Pipe Inches
Sch Pipe Schedule Non Dimension
t Wall Thickness Inches
d Inside Diameter Of Pipe Inches
5
d Fifth power of "d" Inches To The Fifth Power
Ao D Π/12 Outside Pipe Surface Sq Ft / Ft Length
Ai d Π/12 Inside Pipe Surface Sq Ft / Ft Length
Am (d2 − d2 )Π/4 Metal Area Sq Inches
2
Af d 2Π/4 Flow Area Sq Inches
w 3.4Am Weight Of Pipe Lbs / Ft (Carbon Steel)
Ww 0.433 Af Weight Of Water In Pipe Lbs / Ft
1/2 2 2
Rg (I/A) = (D + d ) ½ / 4 Radius Of Gyrations Inches
2 4 4
I AmRg = 0.0491 (D - d ) Moment Of Inertia Inches To The Fourth Power
4 4
Z 2I/D = 0.0982(d - d )/D Section Modulus Inches Cubed

D Sch t d d5 Ao Ai Am Af w Ww Rg I Z
1/8 10S 0.049 0.307 0.00273 0.106 0.080 0.055 0.074 0.186 0.032 0.1271 0.0009 0.0043
D=0.045 40 STD 40S 0.068 0.269 0.00141 0.106 0.070 0.072 0.057 0.245 0.025 0.1215 0.0011 0.0052
80 XS 80S 0.095 0.215 0.00046 0.106 0.056 0.092 0.036 0.314 0.016 0.1146 0.0012 0.0060
1/4 10S 0.065 0.410 0.01159 0.141 0.107 0.097 0.132 0.330 0.057 0.1694 0.0028 0.0103
D=0.540 40 STD 40S 0.088 0.364 0.00639 0.141 0.095 0.125 0.104 0.425 0.045 0.1628 0.0033 0.0123
80 XS 80S 0.119 0.302 0.00251 0.141 0.079 0.157 0.0072 0.535 0.031 0.1547 0.0038 0.0140
3/8 10S 0.065 0.545 0.04808 0.177 0.143 0.124 0.233 0.423 0.101 0.2169 0.0059 0.0174
D=0.675 40 STD 40S 0.091 0.493 0.02912 0.177 0.129 0.167 0.191 0.568 0.083 0.2090 0.0073 0.0216
80 XS 80S 0.126 0.423 0.01354 0.177 0.111 0.217 0.140 0.739 0.061 0.1991 0.0086 0.0255
10S 0.083 0.674 0.13909 0.220 1.176 0.197 0.357 0.671 0.154 0.269 0.0143 0.0341
1/2 40 STD 40S 0.109 0.622 0.09310 0.220 0.163 0.250 0.304 0.851 0.132 0.261 0.0171 0.0407
D=0.840 80 XS 80S 0.147 0.546 0.04852 0.220 0.143 0.320 0.234 1.088 0.101 0.250 0.0201 0.0478
160 0.188 0.466 0.02198 0.220 0.122 0.384 0.171 1.304 0.074 0.240 0.0221 0.0527
XXS 0.294 0.252 0.00102 0.220 0.066 0.504 0.050 1.715 0.022 0.219 0.0243 0.0577
5S 0.065 0.920 0.6591 0.275 0.241 0.201 0.664 0.683 0.288 0.349 0.0245 0.0467
10S 0.083 0.884 0.5398 0.275 0.231 0.252 0.614 0.857 0.266 0.343 0.0297 0.0566
3/4 40 STD 40S 0.113 0.824 0.3799 0.275 0.216 0.333 0.533 1.131 0.231 0.334 0.0370 0.0706
D=1.050 80 XS 80S 0.154 0.742 0.2249 0.275 0.194 0.434 0.432 1.474 0.187 0.321 0.0448 0.0853
160 0.219 0.614 0.0873 0.275 0.161 0.570 0.296 1.937 0.128 0.304 0.0527 0.1004
XXS 0.308 0.434 0.0154 0.275 0.114 0.718 0.148 2.441 0.064 0.284 0.0579 0.1104

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9822
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 2 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

PROPERTIES OF PIPE

D Sch t d d5 Ao Ai Am Af w Ww Rg I Z
5S 0.065 1.185 2.337 0.344 0.310 0.255 1.103 0.867 0.478 0.443 0.0500 0.7600
10S 0.109 1.097 1.589 0.344 0.287 0.413 0.945 1.404 0.409 0.428 0.0757 0.1151
1 40 STD 40S 0.133 1.049 1.270 0.344 0.275 0.494 0.864 1.679 0.374 0.420 0.0874 0.1329
D=1.315 80 XS 80S 0.179 0.957 0.803 0.344 0.250 0.639 0.719 2.172 0.311 0.407 0.1056 0.1606
160 0.250 0.815 0.360 0.344 0.213 0.836 0.522 2.844 0.226 0.387 0.1252 0.1903
XXS 0.358 0.599 0.077 0.344 0.157 1.076 0.282 3.659 0.122 0.361 0.1405 0.2137
5S 0.065 1.530 8.384 0.435 0.410 0.326 1.839 1.108 0.796 0.564 0.1037 0.1253
10S 0.109 1.442 6.235 0.434 0.378 0.531 1.633 1.805 0.707 0.550 0.1605 0.1934
1-1/4 40 STD 40S 0.140 1.380 5.005 0.434 0.361 0.668 1.496 2.273 0.648 0.540 0.1948 0.2346
D=1.660 80 XS 80S 0.191 1.278 3.409 0.434 0.334 0.881 1.283 2.997 0.555 0.524 0.2418 0.2914
160 0.250 1.160 2.100 0.434 0.304 1.107 1.057 3.765 0.458 0.506 0.2839 0.3421
XXS 0.382 0.896 0.577 0.434 0.234 1.534 0.630 5.215 0.273 0.472 0.3412 0.411
5S 0.065 1.770 17.37 0.497 0.463 0.375 2.461 1.275 1.066 0.649 0.158 0.166
10S 0.109 1.682 13.46 0.497 0.440 0.613 2.222 2.085 0.962 0.634 0.247 0.260
1-1/2 40 STD 40S 0.145 1.610 10.82 0.497 0.421 0.799 2.036 2.718 0.882 0.623 0.310 0.326
D=1.900 80 XS 80S 0.200 1.500 7.59 0.497 0.393 1.068 1.767 3.632 0.765 0.605 0.391 0.412
160 0.281 1.337 4.27 0.497 0.350 1.431 1.404 4.866 0.608 0.581 0.483 0.508
XXS 0.400 1.100 1.61 0.497 0.288 1.885 0.950 6.409 0.411 0.549 0.568 0.598
5S 0.065 2.245 57.03 0.622 0.588 0.472 3.958 1.605 1.714 0.817 0.315 0.265
10S 0.109 2.157 46.69 0.622 0.565 0.776 3.654 2.638 1.582 0.802 0.499 0.420
40 STD 40S 0.154 2.067 37.73 0.622 0.541 1.074 3.356 3.653 1.453 0.787 0.666 0.561
2 0.167 2.041 35.42 0.622 0.534 1.158 3.272 3.938 1.417 0.783 0.710 0.598
D=2.375 0.188 2.000 32.00 0.622 0.524 1.288 3.142 4.381 1.360 0.776 0.777 0.654
80 XS 80S 0.218 1.939 27.41 0.622 0.508 1.477 2.953 5.022 1.278 0.766 0.868 0.731
160 0.344 1.689 13.74 0.622 0.442 2.190 2.240 7.445 0.970 0.728 1.163 0.979
XXS 0.436 1.503 7.67 0.622 0.393 2.656 1.774 9.030 0.768 0.703 1.312 1.104
5S 0.083 2.709 145.9 0.753 0.709 0.728 5.76 2.475 2.496 0.988 0.711 0.495
10S 0.120 2.635 127.0 0.753 0.690 1.039 5.45 3.531 2.361 0.975 0.988 0.687
2-1/2 40 STD 40S 0.203 2.469 91.8 0.753 0.646 1.704 4.79 5.794 2.073 0.947 1.530 1.064
D=2.875 80 XS 80S 0.276 2.323 67.6 0.753 0.608 2.254 4.24 7.662 1.835 0.924 1.925 1.339
160 0.375 2.125 43.3 0.753 0.556 2.945 3.55 10.01 1.536 0.894 2.353 1.637
XXS 0.552 1.771 17.4 0.753 0.464 4.028 2.46 13.70 1.067 0.844 2.872 1.998
5S 0.083 3.334 411.9 0.916 0.873 0.891 8.73 3.03 3.780 1.208 1.300 0.743
10S 0.120 3.260 368.2 0.916 0.853 1.274 8.35 4.33 3.610 1.196 1.822 1.041
3 40 STD 40S 0.216 3.068 271.8 0.916 0.803 2.228 7.39 7.58 3.200 1.164 3.018 1.724
D=3.500 80 XS 80S 0.300 2.900 205.0 0.916 0.759 3.016 6.60 10.25 2.860 1.136 3.900 2.226
160 0.438 2.624 124.0 0.916 0.687 4.213 5.41 14.33 2.340 1.094 5.040 2.879
XXS 0.600 2.300 64.0 0.916 0.602 5.466 4.15 18.58 1.800 1.047 5.990 3.425
5S 0.083 3.834 828.0 1.047 1.004 1.021 11.55 3.47 5.000 1.385 1.960 0.979
3-1/2 10S 0.120 3.760 752.0 1.047 0.984 1.463 11.10 4.97 4.810 1.372 2.760 1.378
D=4.000 40 STD 40S 0.226 3.548 562.0 1.047 0.929 2.680 9.89 9.11 4.280 1.337 4.790 2.394
80 XS 80S 0.318 3.364 431.0 1.047 0.881 3.678 8.89 12.51 3.850 1.307 6.280 3.141

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9822
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 3 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

PROPERTIES OF PIPE

D Sch t d d5 Ao Ai Am Af w Ww Rg I Z
5S 0.083 4.334 1529.0 1.178 1.135 1.151 14.75 3.91 6.390 1.562 2.810 1.248
10S 0.120 4.260 1403.0 1.178 1.115 1.651 14.25 5.61 6.170 1.549 3.960 1.762
40 STD 40S 0.237 4.026 1058.0 1.178 1.054 3.170 12.73 10.79 5.510 1.510 7.230 3.220
Special 0.312 3.876 875.0 1.178 1.015 4.100 11.80 13.96 5.110 1.485 9.050 4.020
4 80 XS 80S 0.337 3.826 820.0 1.178 1.002 4.410 11.50 14.99 4.980 1.477 9.610 4.270
D=4.500 Special 0.375 3.750 742.0 1.178 0.982 4.860 11.04 16.52 4.780 1.404 10.420 4.630
120 0.438 3.624 625.0 1.178 0.949 5.590 10.31 19.00 4.470 1.444 11.660 5.180
Special 0.500 3.500 525.0 1.178 0.916 6.280 9.62 21.36 4.170 1.425 12.770 5.670
160 0.531 3.438 480.0 1.178 0.900 6.620 9.28 22.51 4.020 1.416 13.270 5.900
XXS 0.674 3.152 311.0 1.178 0.825 8.100 7.80 27.54 3.380 1.374 15.290 6.790
5S 0.109 5.345 4363.0 1.456 1.399 1.880 22.43 6.38 9.710 1.928 6.970 2.510
10S 0.134 5.295 4162.0 1.456 1.386 2.290 22.02 7.77 9.530 1.920 8.430 3.030
40 STD 40S 0.258 5.047 3275.0 1.456 1.321 4.300 20.01 14.62 8.660 1.878 15.170 5.450
5 80 XS 80S 0.375 4.813 2583.0 1.456 1.260 6.110 18.19 20.78 7.880 1.839 30.680 7.430
D=5.563 Special 0.438 4.688 2264.0 1.456 1.227 7.040 17.26 23.95 7.470 1.819 23.310 8.380
120 0.500 4.563 1978.0 1.456 1.194 7.950 16.35 27.04 7.060 1.799 25.740 9.250
160 0.625 4.313 1492.0 1.456 1.129 9.700 14.61 32.97 6.330 1.760 30.030 10.800
XXS 0.750 4.063 1107.0 1.456 1.064 11.34 12.97 38.55 5.610 1.722 33.640 12.100

D Sch t d d5/103 Ao Ai Am Af w Ww Rg I Z
5S 0.109 6.407 10.80 1.734 1.677 2.23 32.2 7.58 13.95 2.304 11.84 3.58
10S 01.34 6.357 10.38 1.734 1.664 2.73 31.7 9.29 13.74 2.295 14.40 4.35
Special 0.250 6.125 8.62 1.734 1.604 5.01 29.5 17.02 12.75 2.256 25.50 7.69
6 40 STD 40S 0.280 6.065 8.21 1.734 1.588 5.58 28.9 18.98 12.51 2.246 28.10 8.50
D=6.625 80 XS 80S 0.432 5.761 6.35 1.734 1.508 8.40 26.1 28.58 11.29 2.195 40.50 12.23
120 0.562 5.501 5.04 1.734 1.440 10.70 23.8 36.40 10.29 2.153 49.60 14.98
160 0.719 5.189 3.76 1.734 1.358 13.32 21.1 45.30 9.16 2.104 59.00 17.81
XXS 0.864 4.897 2.82 1.734 1.282 15.64 18.8 53.17 8.16 2.060 66.30 20.03

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9822
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 4 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

PROPERTIES OF PIPE

D Sch t d d5/103 Ao Ai Am Af w Ww Rg I Z
5S 0.109 8.407 42.00 2.258 2.201 2.92 55.5 9.91 24.04 3.010 26.40 6.13
10S 0.148 8.329 40.10 2.258 2.180 3.94 54.5 13.40 23.59 3.000 35.40 8.21
20 0.250 8.125 35.40 2.258 2.127 6.58 51.8 22.37 22.45 2.960 57.70 13.39
30 0.277 8.071 34.20 2.258 2.113 7.26 51.2 24.70 22.15 2.950 63.40 14.69
40 STD 40S 0.322 7.981 32.40 2.258 2.089 8.40 50.0 28.56 21.68 2.940 72.50 16.81
8 Special 0.375 7.875 30.30 2.258 2.062 9.72 48.7 33.00 21.10 2.920 82.90 19.22
D=8.625 60 0.406 7.813 29.10 2.258 2.045 10.48 47.9 35.60 20.80 2.910 88.80 20.58
80 XS 80S 0.500 7.625 25.80 2.258 1.996 12.76 45.7 43.40 19.80 2.880 105.70 24.52
100 0.594 7.439 22.80 2.258 1.948 14.96 43.5 50.90 18.80 2.850 121.40 28.14
120 0.719 7.189 19.20 2.258 1.882 17.84 40.6 60.60 17.60 2.810 140.60 32.60
140 0.812 7.001 16.80 2.258 1.883 19.93 38.5 67.80 16.70 2.780 153.70 35.63
XXS 0.875 6.875 15.40 2.258 1.800 21.30 37.1 72.40 16.10 2.760 162.00 37.57
160 0.906 6.813 14.70 2.258 1.784 21.97 36.5 74.70 15.80 2.750 165.90 38.48
5S 0.134 10.482 127.00 2.810 2.740 4.47 86.3 15.20 37.40 3.750 63.00 11.72
10S 0.165 10.420 123.00 2.810 2.730 5.49 85.3 18.70 36.90 3.740 76.90 14.30
20 0.250 10.250 113.00 2.810 2.680 8.25 82.5 28.00 35.70 3.710 113.70 21.16
30 0.307 10.136 107.00 2.810 2.650 10.07 80.7 34.20 34.90 3.690 137.50 25.57
10 40 STD 40S 0.365 10.020 101.00 2.810 2.620 11.91 78.9 40.50 34.10 3.670 160.80 29.91
D=10.75 60 XS 80S 0.500 9.750 88.10 2.810 2.550 16.10 74.7 54.70 32.30 3.630 212.00 39.40
80 0.594 9.654 80.00 2.810 2.500 18.92 71.8 64.30 31.10 3.600 244.80 45.50
100 0.719 9.314 70.10 2.810 2.440 22.63 68.1 76.90 29.50 3.560 286.20 53.20
Special 0.750 9.250 67.70 2.810 2.420 23.56 67.2 80.10 29.10 3.550 296.30 55.10
120 0.843 9.064 61.20 2.810 2.370 26.24 64.5 89.20 27.90 3.520 324.30 60.30
140 XXS 1.000 8.750 51.30 2.810 2.290 30.63 60.1 104.1 26.00 3.470 367.90 68.40
160 1.125 8.500 44.40 2.810 2.230 34.02 56.7 115.7 24.60 3.430 399.40 74.30
5S 0.156 12.438 298.00 3.340 3.260 3.17 121.5 21.0 52.60 4.450 122.40 19.20
10S 0.180 12.390 292.00 3.340 3.240 7.11 120.6 24.2 52.20 4.440 140.50 22.00
20 0.250 12.250 276.00 3.340 3.210 9.82 117.9 33.4 51.10 4.420 191.90 301.0
30 0.330 12.090 258.00 3.340 3.170 12.88 114.8 43.8 49.70 4.390 248.50 39.00
STD 40S 0.375 12.000 249.00 3.340 3.140 14.58 113.1 49.6 49.00 4.380 279.00 43.80
12 40 0.406 11.938 242.00 3.340 3.130 15.74 111.9 53.5 48.50 4.370 300.00 47.10
D=14.00 XS 80S 0.500 11.750 224.00 3.340 3.080 19.24 108.4 65.4 47.00 4.330 362.00 56.70
60 0.562 11.626 212.00 3.340 3.040 21.52 106.2 73.2 46.00 4.310 401.00 62.80
Special 0.625 11.500 201.00 3.340 3.010 23.81 103.9 80.9 45.00 4.290 439.00 68.80
80 0.687 11.376 191.00 3.340 2.980 26.04 101.6 88.5 44.00 4.270 475.00 74.50
100 0.843 11.064 166.00 3.340 2.900 31.53 96.1 107.2 41.60 4.220 562.00 88.10
120 XXS 1.000 10.750 144.00 3.340 2.810 36.91 90.8 125.5 39.30 4.170 642.00 100.70
140 1.125 10.500 128.00 3.340 2.750 41.09 86.6 139.7 37.50 4.130 701.00 109.90
160 1.312 10.126 106.00 3.340 2.650 47.14 80.5 160.3 34.90 4.070 781.00 122.60

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9822
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 5 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

PROPERTIES OF PIPE

D Sch t d d5/103 Ao Ai Am Af w Ww Rg I Z
5S 0.156 13.688 481 3.67 3.58 6.78 147.2 23.1 63.7 4.90 163 23.2
10S 0.188 13.624 469 3.67 3.57 8.16 145.8 27.7 63.1 4.88 195 27.8
10 0.250 13.500 448 3.67 3.53 10.80 143.1 36.7 62.0 4.86 255 36.5
20 0.312 13.375 428 3.67 3.50 13.44 140.5 45.7 60.8 4.84 315 45.0
30 STD 0.375 13.250 408 3.67 3.47 16.05 137.9 54.6 59.7 4.82 373 53.3
14 40 0.438 13.125 389 3.67 3.44 18.66 135.3 63.4 58.6 4.80 429 61.4
D=14.00 XS 0.500 13.000 371 3.67 3.40 21.21 132.7 72.1 57.5 4.78 484 69.1
60 0.594 12.814 345 3.67 3.35 24.98 129.0 84.9 55.8 4.74 562 80.3
Special 0.625 12.750 337 3.67 3.34 26.26 127.7 89.3 55.3 4.73 589 84.1
80 0.750 12.500 305 3.67 3.27 31.22 122.7 106.1 53.1 4.69 687 98.2
100 0.938 12.125 262 3.67 3.17 38.47 115.5 130.8 50.0 4.63 825 117.9
120 1.094 11.814 230 3.67 3.09 44.32 109.6 150.7 47.5 4.58 930 132.8
140 1.250 11.500 201 3.67 3.01 50.07 103.9 170.2 45.0 4.53 1027 146.8
160 1.406 11.188 175 3.67 2.93 55.63 98.3 189.1 42.6 4.48 1117 159.6
5S 0.165 15.670 945 4.19 4.10 8.21 192.9 27.9 83.5 5.60 257 32.2
10S 0.188 15.624 931 4.19 4.09 9.34 191.7 31.8 83.0 5.59 292 36.5
10 0.250 15.500 895 4.19 4.06 12.37 188.7 42.1 81.7 5.57 384 48.0
20 0.312 15.375 859 4.19 4.02 15.40 185.7 52.4 80.4 5.55 474 59.3
30 STD 0.375 15.250 825 4.19 3.99 18.41 182.7 63.6 79.1 5.53 562 70.3
40 XS 0.500 15.000 759 4.19 3.93 24.35 176.7 38.8 76.5 5.48 732 91.5
16 60 0.656 14.688 684 4.19 3.85 31.62 169.4 107.5 73.4 5.43 833 116.6
D=16.00 Special 0.750 14.500 641 4.19 3.80 35.90 165.1 127.5 71.5 5.40 1047 130.9
80 0.844 14.314 601 4.19 3.75 40.14 160.9 136.5 69.7 5.37 1157 144.6
100 1.031 13.938 526 4.19 3.65 48.48 152.6 164.8 66.1 5.29 1365 170.6
120 1.219 13.564 459 4.19 3.55 56.56 144.5 192.3 62.6 5.23 1556 194.5
140 1.438 13.124 389 4.19 3.44 65.79 135.3 223.7 58.6 5.17 1761 220.1
160 1.594 12.814 345 4.19 3.35 72.10 129.0 245.1 55.8 5.12 1984 236.7
5S 0.165 17.670 1723 4.71 4.63 9.24 245.2 31.4 106.2 6.31 368 40.9
10S 0.188 17.624 1700 4.71 4.61 10.52 243.9 35.8 105.6 6.30 417 46.4
10 0.250 17.500 1641 4.71 4.58 13.94 240.5 47.4 104.1 6.28 549 61.0
20 0.312 17.375 1584 4.71 4.55 17.36 237.1 59.0 102.7 6.25 679 75.5
ST 0.375 17.250 1527 4.71 4.52 20.76 233.7 70.6 101.2 6.23 807 89.6
30 0.438 17.124 1472 4.71 4.48 24.17 230.3 82.2 99.7 6.21 932 103.6
18 XS 0.500 17.000 1420 4.71 4.45 27.49 227.0 93.5 98.3 6.19 1053 117.0
D=18.00 40 0.562 16.876 1369 4.71 4.42 30.79 223.7 104.7 96.9 6.17 1171 130.2
Special 0.625 16.750 1318 4.71 4.39 34.12 220.4 116.0 95.4 6.15 1289 143.3
60 0.750 16.500 1223 4.71 4.32 40.64 213.8 138.2 92.6 6.10 1515 168.3
80 0.938 16.126 1090 4.71 4.22 50.23 204.2 170.8 88.4 6.04 1834 203.8
100 1.156 15.688 950 4.71 4.11 61.17 193.3 208.0 83.7 5.97 2180 242.2
120 1.375 15.250 825 4.71 3.99 71.81 182.7 244.2 79.1 5.90 2498 277.6
140 1.562 14.876 728 4.71 3.89 80.66 173.8 274.3 75.3 5.84 2750 305.5
160 1.781 14.433 627 4.71 3.78 90.75 163.7 308.5 70.9 5.77 3020 335.6

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9822
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 6 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

PROPERTIES OF PIPE

D Sch t d d5/103 Ao Ai Am Af w Ww Rg I Z
5S 0.188 19.624 2910 5.24 5.14 11.70 302.5 39.8 131.0 7.00 574 57.4
10S 0.218 19.564 2870 5.24 5.12 13.55 300.6 46.1 130.2 6.99 663 66.3
10 0.250 19.500 2820 5.24 5.11 15.51 298.6 52.7 129.3 6.98 757 75.7
20 STD 0.375 19.250 2640 5.24 5.04 23.12 291.0 78.6 126.0 6.94 1114 111.4
30 XS 0.500 19.000 2480 5.24 4.97 30.60 283.5 104.1 122.8 6.90 1457 145.7
20 40 0.594 18.814 2360 5.24 4.93 36.20 278.0 122.9 120.4 6.86 1704 170.4
D=20.00 Special 0.625 18.750 2320 5.24 4.91 38.00 276.1 129.3 119.6 6.85 1787 178.7
60 0.812 18.376 2100 5.24 4.81 48.90 265.2 166.4 114.8 6.79 2257 225.7
Special 0.875 18.250 2020 5.24 4.78 52.60 261.6 178.7 113.3 6.77 2409 240.9
80 1.031 17.938 1860 5.24 4.70 61.40 252.7 208.9 109.4 6.72 2772 277.2
100 1.281 17.438 1610 5.24 4.57 75.30 238.8 256.1 103.4 6.63 3316 331.6
120 1.500 17.000 1420 5.24 4.45 87.20 227.0 296.4 98.3 6.56 3755 375.5
140 1.750 16.500 1220 5.24 4.32 100.3 213.8 341.1 92.6 6.48 4217 421.7
160 1.969 16.064 1070 5.24 4.21 111.5 202.7 379.1 87.8 6.41 4586 458.6

D Sch t d d5/106 Ao Ai Am Af w Ww Rg I Z
10 0.250 21.500 4.59 5.76 5.63 17.1 363 58.1 157.2 7.69 1010 91.8
10 0.312 21.376 4.46 5.76 5.60 21.5 359 72.3 155.6 7.67 1250 113.7
20 ST 0.375 21.250 4.33 5.76 5.56 25.5 355 86.6 153.6 7.65 1490 135.4
22 30 XS 0.500 21.000 4.08 5.76 5.50 33.8 346 114.8 150.0 7.60 1953 177.5
D=22.00 Special 0.625 20.750 3.85 5.76 5.43 42.0 338 142.7 146.4 7.56 2400 218.2
Special 0.750 20.500 3.62 5.76 5.37 50.1 330 170.2 142.9 7.52 2830 257.3
60 0.875 20.500 3.41 5.76 5.30 58.1 322 197.4 139.5 7.48 3246 295.1
Special 1.000 20.000 3.20 5.76 5.24 66.0 314 224.3 136.0 7.43 3646 331.5

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9822
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 7 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

PROPERTIES OF PIPE

D Sch t d d5/106 Ao Ai Am Af w Ww Rg I Z
5S 0.218 23.564 7.26 6.28 6.17 16.3 436 55.4 188.8 8.41 1152 96.0
10 10S 0.250 23.500 7.17 6.28 6.15 18.7 434 63.4 187.8 8.40 1316 109.6
Special 0.312 23.376 6.98 6.28 6.12 23.2 429 78.9 185.8 8.38 1629 135.8
20 STD 0.375 23.250 6.79 6.28 6.09 27.8 425 94.6 183.8 8.35 1943 161.9
Special 0.438 23.125 6.61 6.28 6.05 32.4 420 110.1 181.9 8.33 2249 187.4
XS 0.500 23.000 6.44 6.28 6.02 36.9 415 125.5 179.9 8.31 2250 212.5
30 0.562 22.876 6.26 6.28 5.99 41.4 411 140.7 178.0 8.29 2840 237.0
24 Special 0.625 22.750 6.09 6.28 5.96 45.9 406 156.0 176.0 8.27 3140 261.0
D=24.00 40 0.688 22.626 5.93 6.28 5.92 50.3 402 171.1 174.1 8.25 3420 285.0
Special 0.750 22.500 5.77 6.28 5.89 54.8 398 186.3 172.2 8.22 3710 309.0
60 0.969 22.064 5.23 6.28 5.78 70.0 382 238.1 165.6 8.15 4653 388.0
Special 1.031 21.938 5.08 6.28 5.74 74.4 378 252.9 163.7 8.13 4920 410.0
80 1.219 21.564 4.66 6.28 5.65 87.2 365 296.4 158.1 8.07 5670 473.0
100 1.531 20.938 4.02 6.28 5.48 108.1 344 367.4 149.1 7.96 6852 571.0
120 1.812 20.376 3.51 6.28 5.33 126.3 326 429.4 141.2 7.87 7824 652.0
140 2.062 19.876 3.50 6.28 5.20 142.1 310 483.2 134.3 7.79 8630 719.0
160 2.344 19.314 2.69 6.28 5.06 159.4 293 542.0 126.9 7.70 9455 788.0
10 0.312 25.376 10.52 6.81 6.64 25.2 506 85.7 219.0 9.08 2078 160.0
STD 0.375 25.250 10.26 6.81 6.61 30.2 501 102.6 216.8 9.06 2479 191.0
Special 0.438 25.124 10.01 6.81 6.56 35.2 496 119.6 214.7 9.04 2874 221.0
20 XS 0.500 25.000 9.77 6.81 6.54 40.1 491 136.2 212.5 9.02 3257 250.0
Special 0.562 24.876 9.53 6.81 6.51 44.9 486 152.7 210.4 9.00 3639 280.0
26 Special 0.625 24.750 9.29 6.81 6.48 49.8 481 169.4 208.3 8.97 4014 309.0
D=26.00 Special 0.656 24.688 9.17 6.81 6.46 52.2 479 177.6 207.3 8.96 4198 323.0
Special 0.750 24.500 8.83 6.81 6.41 59.5 471 202.3 204.1 8.93 4747 365.0
Special 0.812 24.376 8.61 6.81 6.38 64.3 467 218.5 202.1 8.91 5102 393.0
Special 0.875 24.250 8.39 6.81 6.35 69.1 462 234.8 200.0 8.89 5458 420.0
Special 0.938 24.124 8.17 6.81 6.32 73.9 457 251.2 197.9 8.87 5808 447.0
Special 1.000 24.000 7.96 6.81 6.28 78.5 452 267.0 195.9 8.85 6147 473.0
10 0.312 27.376 15.38 7.33 7.17 27.1 589 92.3 254.9 9.79 2602 186.0
ST 0.375 27.250 15.03 7.33 7.13 32.5 583 110.7 252.5 9.77 3106 222.0
Special 0.438 27.124 14.68 7.33 7.10 37.9 578 128.9 250.2 9.75 3603 257.0
20 XS 0.500 27.000 14.35 7.33 7.07 43.2 573 146.9 247.9 9.72 4086 292.0
28 Special 0.562 26.876 14.02 7.33 7.04 48.4 567 164.7 245.6 9.70 4562 326.0
D=28.00 30 0.625 26.750 13.70 7.33 7.00 53.8 562 182.8 243.3 9.68 5039 360.0
Special 0.656 26.688 13.54 7.33 6.99 56.4 559 191.6 242.2 9.67 5271 377.0
Special 0.750 26.500 13.07 7.33 6.94 64.2 552 218.3 238.8 9.64 5966 426.0
Special 0.812 26.376 12.77 7.33 6.91 69.4 546 235.8 236.6 9.62 6416 458.0
Special 0.875 26.250 12.46 7.33 6.87 74.6 541 253.5 234.3 9.60 6867 490.0
Special 0.938 26.124 12.17 7.33 6.84 79.7 536 271.1 232.1 9.57 7311 522.0
Special 1.000 26.000 11.88 7.33 6.81 84.8 531 288.4 229.9 9.55 7742 553.0

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9822
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 8 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

PROPERTIES OF PIPE

D Sch t d d5/106 Ao Ai Am Af w Ww Rg I Z
5S 0.250 29.500 22.3 7.85 7.72 23.4 683 79.4 296.0 10.52 2586 172
10 10S 0.312 29.376 21.9 7.85 7.69 29.1 678 98.9 293.5 10.50 3210 214
ST 0.375 29.250 21.4 7.85 7.66 34.9 672 118.7 291.0 10.48 3833 255
Special 0.438 29.125 21.0 7.85 7.62 40.6 666 138.0 288.4 10.45 4434 296
20 XS 0.500 29.000 20.5 7.85 7.59 46.3 661 157.6 286.0 10.43 5040 336
30 Special 0.562 28.875 20.1 7.85 7.56 52.0 665 176.8 283.6 10.41 5635 376
30 0.625 28.750 19.6 7.85 7.53 57.7 649 196.1 281.1 10.39 6230 415
Special 0.656 28.688 19.4 7.85 7.51 60.5 646 205.6 279.9 10.38 6514 434
Special 0.750 28.500 18.8 7.85 7.46 68.9 638 234.3 276.2 10.34 7377 492
Special 0.812 28.376 18.4 7.85 7.43 74.5 632 253.2 273.8 10.32 7937 529
Special 0.875 28.250 18.0 7.85 7.40 80.1 627 272.2 271.4 10.30 8499 567
Special 0.938 28.124 17.6 7.85 7.36 85.6 621 291.2 269.0 10.28 9053 604
Special 1.000 28.000 17.2 7.85 7.33 91.1 616 309.8 266.6 10.26 9591 639
10 0.312 31.376 30.4 8.38 8.21 31.1 773 105.6 334.8 11.20 3900 244
STD 0.375 31.250 29.8 8.38 8.18 37.3 767 126.7 332.1 11.18 4660 291
Special 0.438 31.124 29.2 8.38 8.15 43.4 761 147.7 329.4 11.16 5410 338
20 XS 0.500 31.000 28.6 8.38 8.12 49.5 755 168.2 326.8 11.14 6140 384
Special 0.562 30.876 28.1 8.38 8.08 55.5 749 188.7 324.2 11.12 6861 429
32 30 0.625 30.750 27.5 8.38 8.05 61.6 743 209.5 321.6 11.10 7585 474
D=32.00 40 0.688 30.624 26.9 8.38 8.02 67.6 737 230.1 318.9 11.07 8300 518
Special 0.750 30.500 26.4 8.38 7.98 73.6 731 250.3 316.4 11.05 8995 562
Special 0.812 31.376 25.9 8.38 7.95 79.6 725 270.5 313.8 11.03 9682 605
Special 0.875 30.250 25.3 8.38 7.92 85.6 719 290.9 311.2 11.01 10371 648
Special 0.938 30.124 24.8 8.38 7.89 91.5 713 311.2 308.6 10.99 11052 691
Special 1.000 30.000 24.3 8.38 7.85 97.4 707 331.1 306.1 10.97 11714 732
10 0.312 33.376 41.4 8.90 8.74 33.0 875 112.3 378.8 11.91 4686 276
STD 0.375 33.250 40.6 8.90 8.70 39.6 868 134.7 376.0 11.89 5599 329
Special 0.438 33.124 39.9 8.90 8.67 46.2 862 157.0 373.1 11.87 6505 383
20 XS 0.500 33.000 39.1 8.90 8.64 52.6 855 178.9 370.3 11.85 7383 434
Special 0.562 32.876 38.4 8.90 8.61 59.0 849 200.7 367.6 11.82 8256 486
34 30 0.625 32.750 37.7 8.90 8.57 65.5 842 222.8 364.8 11.80 9130 537
D=34.00 40 0.656 32.624 37.0 8.90 8.54 72.0 836 244.8 361.9 11.78 9994 587
Special 0.750 32.500 36.3 8.90 8.51 78.3 830 266.4 359.2 11.76 10835 637
Special 0.812 32.376 35.6 8.90 8.48 84.7 823 287.9 356.5 11.74 11666 686
Special 0.875 32.250 34.9 8.90 8.44 91.1 817 309.6 353.7 11.72 12501 735
Special 0.938 32.124 34.2 8.90 8.41 97.4 810 331.3 350.9 11.69 13326 784
Special 1.000 32.000 33.6 8.90 8.38 103.7 804 352.5 348.2 11.67 14129 831

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9822
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 9 of 9

FLUOR DANIEL

PROPERTIES OF PIPE

D Sch t d d5/106 Ao Ai Am Af w Ww Rg I Z
10 0.312 35.376 55.4 9.42 9.26 35.0 983 118.9 425.6 12.62 5571 310
ST 0.375 35.250 54.4 9.42 9.23 42.0 976 142.7 422.6 12.60 6659 370
Special 0.438 35.124 53.5 9.42 9.20 48.9 969 166.4 419.6 12.57 7739 430
20 XS 0.500 35.000 52.5 9.42 9.16 55.8 962 189.6 416.6 12.55 8786 488
36 Special 0.562 34.876 51.6 9.42 9.13 62.6 955 212.7 413.6 12.53 9827 546
D=36.00 30 0.625 34.750 50.7 9.42 9.10 69.5 948 236.2 410.7 12.51 10871 604
40 0.750 34.500 48.9 9.42 9.03 83.1 935 282.4 404.8 12.46 12909 717
Special 0.812 34.376 48.0 9.42 9.00 89.8 928 305.2 401.9 12.44 13906 772
Special 0.875 34.250 47.1 9.42 8.97 96.6 921 328.9 398.9 12.42 14904 828
Special 0.938 34.124 46.3 9.42 8.93 103.3 915 351.3 396.0 12.40 15893 883
Special 1.000 32.000 45.4 9.42 8.90 110.0 908 373.9 393.1 12.38 16855 936
Special 0.312 41.376 121.3 11.0 10.83 40.9 1345 138.9 582.2 14.74 8879 423
STD 0.375 41.250 119.4 11.0 10.80 49.0 1336 166.7 578.7 14.72 10621 506
Special 0.438 41.124 117.6 11.0 10.77 57.2 1328 194.4 575.1 14.67 12353 588
XS 0.500 41.000 115.9 11.0 10.73 65.2 1320 221.6 571.7 14.67 14037 668
42 Special 0.562 40.876 114.1 11.0 10.70 73.2 1312 248.7 568.2 14.65 15710 748
D=42.00 Special 0.625 40.750 112.4 11.0 10.67 81.2 1304 276.2 564.7 14.64 17393 828
Special 0.750 40.500 109.0 11.0 10.60 97.2 1288 330.5 557.8 14.59 20685 985
Special 0.812 40.376 107.3 11.0 10.57 105.1 1280 357.2 554.4 14.56 22295 1062
Special 0.875 40.250 105.6 11.0 10.54 113.0 1272 384.4 550.9 14.54 23916 1139
Special 0.938 40.124 104.0 11.0 10.50 121.0 1264 411.4 547.5 14.52 25522 1215
Special 1.000 40.000 102.4 11.0 10.47 128.8 1257 437.9 544.1 14.50 27088 1290

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9822
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

MODULUS OF ELASTICITY FOR FERROUS MATERIAL

E = Modulus Of Elasticity - ksi (multiply tabulated values by 103), For Temp Degrees F
Material
Temperature - Degrees F
-325 -200 -100 70 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500
Carbon steels
with carbon
content 0.30% 31.4 30.8 30.2 29.5 28.8 28.3 27.7 27.3 26.7 25.5 24.2 22.4 20.4 18.0
or less
Carbon steels
with carbon
content above 31.2 30.6 30.0 29.3 28.6 28.1 27.5 27.1 26.5 25.3 24.0 22.2 20.2 17.9 15.4
0.30%
Carbon-Molly
steels. Low
chrome steels 32.6 32.8 31.4 30.6 29.8 29.4 28.8 28.3 27.7 27.1 26.3 25.6 24.6 23.7 22.5 21.1 19.4
(2-1/4 Cr thru
3 Cr)
Intermediate
chrome steels (5 32.9 32.3 31.7 30.9 30.1 29.7 29.0 28.6 28.0 27.3 26.1 24.7 22.7 20.4 18.2 15.5 12.7
Cr thru -9 Cr)
Austenitic steels
(TP304, 310, 30.3 29.7 29.0 28.3 27.6 27.0 26.5 25.8 25.3 24.8 24.1 23.5 22.8 22.1 21.2 20.2 19.2 18.1
316, 321, 347)
Straight
Chromium steels
(12 Cr, 17 Cr, 31.2 30.7 30.1 29.2 28.5 27.9 27.3 26.7 26.1 25.6 24.7 22.2 21.5 19.1 16.6
27 Cr)
Gray Cast Iron 13.4 13.2 12.9 12.6 12.2 11.7 11.0 10.2

Note!!!
These data are for information only. Verify suitability of materials for intended service at temperatures shown with
Metallurgist or Piping Material Engineer.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9822
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 03 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

MODULUS OF ELASTICITY FOR NONFERROUS MATERIAL

E = Modulus Of Elasticity - ksi (multiply tabulated values by 103), For Temp Degrees F
Material
Temperature - Degrees F
-325 -200 -100 70 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500
Monel 400 27.8 27.3 26.8 26.0 25.4 25.0 24.7 24.3 24.1 23.7 23.1 22.6 22.1 21.7 21.2
Copper - Nickel 23.3 22.9 22.7 22.0 21.5 21.1 20.7 20.2 19.6 18.8
(70 Cu - 30 Ni)
Aluminum Alloys 11.1 10.8 10.5 10.0 9.60 9.20
(6061 & 6063)
Copper 16.9 16.6 16.5 16.0 15.6 15.4 15.0 14.7 14.2 13.7
(99.8% Cu)
Leaded Tin
Bronze (88 Cu - 14.8 14.6 14.4 14.0 13.7 13.4 13.2 12.9 12.5 12.0
6 Sn-1.5 Pb 4.5
Zn)
36% Nickel Steel 19.2 19.5 20.0 20.8 21.5 22.0 22.5 22.6 22.6
(Invar) 36 Ni

Note!!!
These data are for information only. Verify suitability of materials for intended service at temperatures shown with
Metallurgist or Piping Material Engineer.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9823
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

COEFFICIENT OF EXPANSION TABLES

PURPOSE
This practice provides data for the linear expansion of metals. This material is for information
only; the metals listed in Attachment 01 are not always suitable for the temperatures shown.

SCOPE
This practice covers linear expansion in the following metals:
Carbon steel, carbon-moly
5 and 9 chrome-moly
Austenitic stainless steel
12, 17, and 27 chrome
25 chrome/20 nickel
Monel 67
3-1/2 nickel
Aluminum
Grey cast iron
Bronze
Brass
70 Cu / 30 Ni
Ni-Fe-Cr

APPLICATION
This practice should be used as a guide in layout only.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Linear Thermal Expansion Of Metals

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9823
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

LINEAR THERMAL EXPANSION OF METALS

(Base Temp. = 70°F) Linear Thermal Expansion of Metals (Inches / 100 Feet)
Material
Temp. Carbon Steel 5 Cr Mo Austenitic 12 Cr 25 Cr Monel 67 3-1/2
Degree F Carbon-Moly Through Stainless 17 Cr 20 Ni Ni 30 Cu Nickel
Low-Chrome 9 Cr Mo Steels 27 Cr
(Through 3 Cr Mo) 18 Cr 8 Ni
-325 -2.37 -2.22 -3.85 -2.04 -2.62 -2.24
-300 -2.24 -2.10 -3.63 -1.92 -2.50 -2.17
-275 -2.11 -1.98 -3.41 -1.80 -2.38 -2.07
-250 -1.98 -1.86 -3.19 -1.68 -2.26 -1.96
-225 -1.85 -1.74 -2.96 -1.57 -2.14 -1.86
-200 -1.71 -1.62 -2.73 -1.46 -2.02 -1.76
-175 -1.58 -1.50 -2.50 -1.35 -1.90 -1.62
-150 -1.45 -1.37 -2.27 -1.24 -1.79 -1.48
-125 -1.30 -1.23 -2.01 -1.11 -1.59 -1.33
-100 -1.15 -1.08 -1.75 -0.98 -1.38 -1.17
-75 -1.00 -0.94 -1.50 -1.18 -1.01
-50 -0.84 -0.79 -1.24 -0.98 -0.84
-25 -0.68 -0.63 -0.98 -0.77 -0.67
0 -0.49 -0.46 -0.72 -0.57 -0.50
25 -0.32 -0.30 -0.46 -0.37 -0.32
50 -0.14 -0.13 -0.21 -0.20 -0.15
70 0 0 0 0 0
100 0.23 0.22 0.34 0.28 0.23
125 0.42 0.40 0.62 0.52 0.42
150 0.61 0.58 0.90 0.75 0.61
175 0.80 0.76 1.18 0.99 0.81
200 0.99 0.94 1.46 1.22 1.01
225 1.21 1.13 1.75 1.46 1.21
250 1.40 1.33 2.03 1.71 1.42
275 1.61 1.52 2.32 1.96 1.63

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9823
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 2 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

LINEAR THERMAL EXPANSION OF METALS

(Base Temp. = 70°F) Linear Thermal Expansion of Metals (Inches / 100 Feet)
Material
Temp. Carbon Steel 5 Cr Mo Austenitic 12 Cr 25 Cr Monel 67 3-1/2
Degree F Carbon-Moly Through Stainless 17 Cr 20 Ni Ni 30 Cu Nickel
Low-Chrome 9 Cr Mo Steels 27 Cr
(Through 3 Cr Mo) 18 Cr 8 Ni
300 1.82 1.71 2.61 2.21 1.84
325 2.04 1.90 2.90 2.44 2.05
350 2.26 2.10 3.20 2.68 2.26
375 2.48 2.30 3.50 2.91 2.47
400 2.70 2.50 3.80 3.25 2.69
425 2.93 2.72 4.10 3.52 2.91
450 3.16 2.93 4.41 3.79 3.13
475 3.39 3.14 4.71 4.06 3.35
500 3.62 3.35 5.01 4.33 3.58
525 3.86 3.58 5.31 4.61 3.81
550 4.11 3.80 5.62 4.90 4.04
575 4.35 4.02 5.93 5.18 4.27
600 4.60 4.24 6.24 5.46 4.50
625 4.86 4.47 6.55 5.75 4.74
650 5.11 4.69 6.87 6.05 4.98
675 5.37 4.92 7.18 6.34 5.22
700 5.63 5.14 7.50 6.64 5.46
725 5.90 5.38 7.82 6.94 5.70
750 6.16 5.62 8.05 7.25 5.94
775 6.43 5.86 8.47 7.55 6.18
800 6.70 6.10 8.80 7.85 6.43
825 6.97 6.34 9.13 8.16 6.68
850 7.25 6.59 9.46 8.48 6.93
875 7.53 6.83 9.79 8.80 7.18
900 7.81 7.07 10.12 9.12 7.43
925 8.08 7.31 10.46 9.44 7.68
950 8.35 7.56 10.80 9.77 7.93
975 8.62 7.81 11.14 10.09 8.17
1000 8.89 8.06 11.48 10.42 8.41
1025 9.17 8.30 11.82 10.75

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9823
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 3 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

LINEAR THERMAL EXPANSION OF METALS

(Base Temp. = 70°F) Linear Thermal Expansion of Metals (Inches / 100 Feet)
Material
Temp. Carbon Steel 5 Cr Mo Austenitic 12 Cr 25 Cr Monel 67 3-1/2
Degree F Carbon-Moly Through Stainless 17 Cr 20 Ni Ni 30 Cu Nickel
Low-Chrome 9 Cr Mo Steels 27 Cr
(Through 3 Cr Mo) 18 Cr 8 Ni
1050 9.46 8.55 12.16 11.09
1075 9.75 8.80 12.50 11.43
1100 10.04 9.05 12.84 11.77
1125 10.31 9.28 13.18 12.11
1150 10.57 9.52 13.52 12.47
1175 10.83 9.76 13.86 12.81
1200 11.10 10.00 14.20 13.15
1225 11.38 10.26 14.54 13.50
1250 11.66 10.53 14.88 13.86
1275 11.94 10.79 15.22 14.22
1300 12.22 11.06 15.56 14.58
1325 12.50 11.30 15.90 14.94
1350 12.78 11.55 16.24 15.30
1375 13.06 11.80 16.58 15.66
1400 13.34 12.05 16.92 16.02
1425 17.30
1450 17.69
1475 18.08
1500 18.47

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9823
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 4 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

LINEAR THERMAL EXPANSION OF METALS

(Base Temp. = 70°F) Linear Thermal Expansion of Metals

(Inches / 100 Feet)
Material
Temp. Aluminum Gray Bronze Brass 70 Cr Ni-Fe-Cr
Degree F Cast 30 Ni
Iron
-325 -4.68 -3.98 -3.88 -3.15
-300 -4.46 -3.74 -3.64 2.87
-275 -4.21 -3.50 -3.40 -2.70
-250 -3.97 -3.26 -3.16 2.53
-225 -3.71 -3.02 -2.93 -2.36
-200 -3.44 -2.78 -2.70 -2.19
-175 -3.16 -2.54 -2.47 2.12
-150 -2.88 -2.31 -2.24 -1.95
-125 -2.57 -2.06 -2.00 -1.74
-100 -2.27 -1.81 -1.76 -1.53
-75 -1.97 -1.56 -1.52 -1.33
-50 -1.67 -1.32 -1.29 -1.13
-25 -1.32 -1.25 -1.02 -0.89
0 -0.97 -0.77 -0.75 -0.66
25 -0.63 -0.49 -0.48 -0.42
50 -0.28 -0.22 -0.21 -0.19
70 0 0 0 0 0 0
100 0.46 0.21 0.36 0.35 0.31 0.28
125 0.85 0.38 0.66 0.64 0.56 0.52
150 1.23 0.55 0.96 0.94 0.82 0.76
175 1.62 0.73 1.26 1.23 1.07 0.99
200 2.00 0.90 1.56 1.52 1.33 1.23
225 2.41 1.08 1.86 1.83 1.59 1.49
250 2.83 1.27 2.17 2.14 1.86 1.76
275 3.24 1.45 2.48 2.45 2.13 2.03
300 3.67 1.64 2.79 2.76 2.40 2.30
325 4.09 1.83 3.11 3.08 2.68 2.59
350 4.52 2.03 3.42 3.41 2.96 2.88
375 4.95 2.22 3.74 3.73 3.24 3.18
400 5.39 2.42 4.05 4.05 3.52 3.48

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9823
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 5 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

LINEAR THERMAL EXPANSION OF METALS

(Base Temp. = 70°F) Linear Thermal Expansion of Metals

(Inches / 100 Feet)
Material
Temp. Aluminum Gray Bronze Brass 70 Cr Ni-Fe-Cr
Degree F Cast 30 Ni
Iron
425 5.83 2.62 4.37 4.38 3.76
450 6.28 2.83 4.69 4.72 4.04
475 6.72 3.03 5.01 5.06 4.31
500 7.17 3.24 5.33 5.40 4.59
525 7.63 3.46 5.65 5.75 4.87
550 8.10 3.67 5.98 6.10 5.16
575 8.56 3.89 6.31 6.45 5.44
600 9.03 4.11 6.64 6.80 5.72
625 4.34 6.96 7.16 6.01
650 4.57 7.29 7.53 6.30
675 4.80 7.62 7.89 6.58
700 5.03 7.95 8.26 6.88
725 5.26 8.28 8.64 7.17
750 5.50 8.62 9.02 7.47
775 5.74 8.96 9.40 7.76
800 5.98 9.30 9.78 8.06
825 6.22 9.64 10.17 8.35
850 6.47 9.99 10.57 8.66
875 6.72 10.33 10.96 8.95
900 6.97 10.68 11.35 9.26
925 7.23 11.02 11.75 9.56
950 7.50 11.37 12.16 9.87
975 7.76 11.71 12.57 10.18
1000 8.02 12.05 12.98 10.49
1025 12.40 13.39 10.80
1050 12.76 13.81 11.11
1075 13.11 14.23 11.42
1100 13.47 14.65 11.74
1125 12.05
1150 12.38

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9823
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 6 of 6

FLUOR DANIEL

LINEAR THERMAL EXPANSION OF METALS

(Base Temp. = 70°F) Linear Thermal Expansion of Metals

(Inches / 100 Feet)
Material
Temp. Aluminum Gray Bronze Brass 70 Cr Ni-Fe-Cr
Degree F Cast 30 Ni
Iron
1175 12.69
1200 13.02
1225 13.36
1250 13.71
1275 14.04
1300 14.39
1325 14.74
1350 15.10
1375 15.44
1400 15.80
1425 16.16
1450 16.53
1475 16.88
1500 17.25

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9830
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA - FLANGE FACE

PURPOSE
This practice establishes guidelines for the provision of data necessary to determine
permissible damage to flange face sealing surfaces, while still maintaining optimum flange /
gasket joint sealing ability.

SCOPE
The practice includes information about the following major topics:
Type of damage anomalies, size, and frequency.
Sealing surface width as a function of flange pressure class and size.
Detail of flange face showing sealing surface width.

APPLICATION
This practice is to be used by Fluor Daniel Piping Materials personnel as an attachment to
project specifications involving items having flanges. This practice is also to be used by
inspection for determining unacceptable flange face sealing surface damage.

GENERAL
This practice covers flanges designed to ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)
B16.5 for class 150 through class 2500, and for sizes 1/2 of an inch through 24 inches. The
sealing surface width and gasket nominal diameter dimensions are based on spiral-wound
gasket dimensions made in accordance with ASME B16.20. These dimensions will also apply
to flanges whose intended gasket is a nonmetallic flat ring gasket made in accordance with
ASME B16.21.

REFERENCES
ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)
B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
B16.20 Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges - Ring Joint, Spiral-Wound, and Jacketed
B16.21 Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Type Of Damage, Size, And Frequency
Attachment 02:
Sealing Surface Width For Flange ASME Pressure Class 150 Through 600

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9830
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA - FLANGE FACE

Attachment 03:
Sealing Surface Width For Flange ASME Pressure Class 900 Through 2500
Attachment 04:
Detail Of Flange Face Showing Sealing Surface Width

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9830
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

TYPE OF DAMAGE, SIZE , AND FREQUENCY

Type of Damage Anomalies Size Frequency

Lineal: Scratches, scuffs, abrasions, Depth: Will not exceed depth of Using the distance between 2
cuts, and gouges. serration. adjacent bolt holes, a maximum of
2 anomalies are permitted within
PL: (Projected Length) this distance measured anywhere
(Refer to Attachment 04) along the periphery of the sealing
The PL of individual anomalies surface width. The maximum
will not exceed 33 percent of the number of anomalies for flanges 2
sealing surface width shown in inches and smaller will not exceed
Attachment 02 and 03. 4; for pipe sizes 3 inches and
larger, the nominal pipe size plus 2
Pitting, punch marks. Diameter: Maximum 3/32 of an nominal sizes (for example,
inch. 10-inch pipe size allows 12
anomalies).
Arc strikes, drags or sand blasting. ALL Not permitted within the sealing
surface width.
Weld spatter or other protrusions ALL Not permitted within the serration
above serrations. width.
General rusting or scaling due to Will not reduce the serration height Not applicable.
atmospheric pressure. by more than 25 percent.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9830
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

SEALING SURFACE WIDTH FOR FLANGE ASME PRESSURE CLASS 150 THROUGH 600

Sealing Surface Width

Nominal Gasket (inches)
Size Nominal ASME Pressure Class
Diameter
150 and 300 400 600
1/2" 1-1/4" 0.190 * 0.190
3/4" 1-9/16" 0.220 * 0.220
1" 1-7/8" 0.255 * 0.255
1-1/4" 2-3/8" 0.190 * 0.190
1-1/2" 2-3/4" 0.250 * 0.250
2" 3-3/8" 0.255 * 0.255
2-1/2" 3-7/8" 0.255 * 0.255
3" 4-3/4" 0.315 * 0.315
4" 5-7/8" 0.380 0.505 0.505
5" 7" 0.375 0.535 0.535
6" 8-1/4" 0.470 0.625 0.625
8" 10-3/8" 0.535 0.690 0.690
10" 12-1/2" 0.535 0.785 0.785
12" 14-3/4" 0.625 0.875 0.875
14" 16" 0.625 0.815 0.815
16" 18-1/4" 0.750 0.940 0.940
18" 20-3/4" 0.970 1.065 1.065
20" 22-3/4" 0.970 1.065 1.065
24" 27" 1.065 1.065 1.065

* There are no Class 400 flanges from 1/2-inch through 3-inch; use
Class 600.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9830
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 03 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

SEALING SURFACE WIDTH FOR FLANGE ASME PRESSURE CLASS 900 THROUGH 2500

Sealing Surface Width

Nominal Gasket (inches)
Size Nominal ASME Pressure Class
Diameter
900 1500 2500
1/2" 1-1/4" * .0190 0.190
3/4" 1-9/16" * 0.220 0.220
1" 1-7/8" * 0.255 0.255
1-1/4" 2-3/8" * 0.350 0.350
1-1/2" 2-3/4" * 0.375 0.375
2" 3-3/8" * 0.475 0.475
2-1/2" 3-7/8" * 0.505 0.505
3" 4-3/4" 0.440 0.500 0.500
4" 5-7/8" 0.505 0.565 0.565
5" 7" 0.535 0.625 0.625
6" 8-1/4" 0.625 0.690 0.690
8" 10-1/8" 0.630 0.755 0.755
10" 12-1/4" 0.625 0.815 0.750
12" 14-1/2" 0.815 0.815 0.940
14" 15-3/4" 0.815 0.690 **
16" 18 0.815 0.940 **
18" 20-1/2" 1.065 1.065 **
20" 22-1/2" 0.940 1.065 **
24" 26-3/4" 0.940 1.190 **

* There are no Class 900 flanges from 1/2-inch through 2-1/2-inch;

use Class 600.

** There are no Class 2500 flanges from 14-inch through 24-inch

pipe.

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9835
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

APPLICATION OF PIPE FABRICATION TOLERANCES

PURPOSE
The purpose of this practice is to define to a Fabricator, what is expected and what will be
used by Inspectors for "go - no-go".

LINEAR
TOLERANCES
The tolerances on linear dimensions (intermediate or overall) apply to face to face, face to
end, and end to end measurements of fabricated straight pipe and headers; center to end or
center to face of nozzles or other attachments; or center to face of bends; as illustrated in
Attachment 01, Figure 1. These tolerances are not accumulative.
Linear tolerances on "A" are:
Sizes 10" and under plus or minus 1/8" (3.0 mm)
Sizes 12" through 24" plus or minus 3/16" (5.0 mm)
Sizes over 24" through 36" plus or minus 1/4" (6.0 mm)
Sizes over 36" are subject to tolerances of plus/minus 1/4" (6.0 mm), increasing by plus or
minus 1/16" (2.0 mm) for each 12" in diameter over 36".
Due to the cumulative effects of tolerances on fittings or flanges, when joined without
intervening pipe segments, deviations in excess of those specified above may occur.

ANGULARITY
AND ROTATION
TOLERANCES
Angularity tolerance across the face of flanges, weld end preparation and on rotation of
flanges are as stated in Attachment 01, Figure 1.

BENDS
Bends will be provided with a total angularity tolerance of plus or minus 0.5 degrees as
determined by the intersection of the tangent centerlines measured by appropriate equipment.
When the fabricator is required to provide bends cut to a specified center-to-end dimension it
will be to the tolerances specified above and in Attachment 01, Figure 1.
If intermediate portions of the bend profile are essential, their tolerances will be a matter of
agreement between the purchaser and the fabricator.

Ovality
The ovality of a pipe bend will not exceed the ovality required by the governing code. If there
is no governing code, the difference between the maximum and minimum diameters will not
exceed 8 percent of the average measured outside diameter of the straight portion of the pipe
unless by mutual agreement between the purchaser and the fabricator. Where operating
conditions require less ovality, it may be necessary to use larger radii, heavier pipe walls or a
specific bending method that will provide a closer control of ovality.
Buckling

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9835
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

APPLICATION OF PIPE FABRICATION TOLERANCES

Since there are occasions when buckles cannot be avoided, the following restrictions should
apply:
All wave shapes will blend into the pipe surface in a gradual manner.
The maximum vertical height of any wave, measured from the average height of two
adjoining crests to the valley, will not exceed 3 percent of the nominal pipe size. (Refer
to Attachment 01, Figure 2, Note 1.)
The minimum ratio of the distance between crests as compared to the height between
crests and the included valley should be 12 to 1. (Refer to Attachment 01, Figure 2, Note
2.)
Buckles which exceed the above tolerances will be subjected to corrective action to bring
them within tolerance.
If operating conditions require tighter tolerances on buckles, it may be necessary to use
larger radii, heavier pipe walls or a specific bending process.

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
Figure 1. Application of Pipe Fabrication Tolerances
Figure 2. Application of Pipe Wall Buckling Tolerances

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9853
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

PRESSURE CONVERSION TABLE - PSI TO BARS

PSI BARS PSI BARS PSI BARS PSI BARS PSI BARS
1 0.1 110 7.6 525 36.2 1550 106.9 3100 213.7
2 0.1 120 8.3 550 37.9 1600 110.3 3200 220.6
3 0.2 130 9.0 575 39.6 1650 113.8 3300 227.5
4 0.3 140 9.7 600 41.4 1700 117.2 3400 234.4
5 0.4 150 10.3 625 43.1 1750 120.7 3500 241.3
6 0.4 160 11.0 650 44.8 1800 124.1 3600 248.2
7 0.5 170 11.7 675 46.5 1850 127.6 3700 255.1
8 0.6 180 12.4 700 48.3 1900 131.0 3800 262.0
9 0.6 190 13.1 725 50.0 1950 134.5 3900 268.9
10 0.7 200 13.8 750 51.7 2000 137.9 4000 275.8
11 0.8 210 14.5 775 53.4 2050 141.3 4100 282.7
12 0.8 220 15.2 800 55.2 2100 144.8 4200 289.6
13 0.9 230 15.9 825 56.9 2150 148.2 4300 296.5
14 1.0 240 16.6 850 58.6 2200 151.7 4400 303.4
ATM 1.0 250 17.2 875 60.3 2250 155.1 4500 310.3
15 1.0 260 17.9 900 62.1 2300 158.6 4600 317.2
20 1.4 270 18.6 925 63.8 2350 162.0 4700 324.1
25 1.7 280 19.3 950 65.5 2400 165.5 4800 331.0
30 2.1 290 20.0 975 67.2 2450 168.9 4900 337.8
35 2.5 300 20.7 1000 69.0 2500 172.4 5000 344.7
40 2.8 320 22.1 1050 73.4 2550 175.8 5100 351.6
45 3.1 340 23.4 1100 75.8 2600 179.3 5200 358.5
50 3.5 360 24.8 1150 79.3 2650 182.7 5300 365.4
55 3.8 380 26.2 1200 82.7 2700 186.2 5400 372.3
60 4.1 400 27.6 1250 86.2 2750 189.6 5500 379.2
65 4.5 420 29.0 1300 89.6 2800 193.1 5600 386.1
70 4.8 440 30.3 1350 93.1 2850 196.5 5700 393.0
75 5.2 460 31.7 1400 96.5 2900 200.0 5800 399.9
80 5.5 480 33.1 1450 100.0 2950 203.4 5900 406.8
85 5.9 500 34.5 1500 103.4 3000 206.8 6000 413.7
90 6.2
95 6.6
100 6.9

NOTE: PSI = 14.5 x BARS

BARS = 0.069 x PSI

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING CODES AND STANDARDS

PURPOSE
This practice delineates specific Piping Engineering related codes and standards that are
customarily used on drawings and in engineering text.

SCOPE
This practice includes the following major sections:
REFERENCES
ATTACHMENTS

APPLICATION
Specific code and standard identification will be used where applicable to avoid repeating text
that is more appropriately covered in a reference document.

REFERENCES
General Corporate
Practice 000.000.9910: Abbreviations: Terms And Phrases
General Corporate
Practice 000.000.9911: Abbreviations: Societies, Codes, Standards, And Agencies
General Corporate
Practice 000.000.9912: Abbreviations - Units Of Measure And Related Scales

ATTACHMENTS
Attachment 01:
ANSI (American National Standards Institute) Standards
Attachment 02:
API (American Petroleum Institute) Standards
Attachment 03:
ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) Codes and Standards
Attachment 04:
AWWA (American Water Works Association) Standards
Attachment 05:
CI (Chlorine Institute) Standards
Attachment 06:
CGA (Compressed Gas Association) Standards
Attachment 07:
FMRC (Factory Mutual Research Corporation) Standards
Attachment 08:
Fed Spec (Federal Specifications) Standards

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

PIPING CODES AND STANDARDS

Attachment 09:
MSS (Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry) Standards
Attachment 10:
NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) Standards
Attachment 11:
NBS (National Bureau of Standards) Standards (HOLD)
Attachment 12:
NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) Standards (HOLD)
Attachment 13:
PFI (Pipe Fabrication Institute) Standards (HOLD)
Attachment 14:
SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers) Standards (HOLD)
Attachment 15:
UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) Standards

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 1 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

ANSI STANDARDS (AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE)

Standard No. Title

A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

A21.1 Thickness Design of Cast Iron Pipe

A21.4 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water

A21.10 Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3 Inches through 48 Inches for Water and Other Liquids

A21.11 Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

A21.14 Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3 Inches through 24 Inches for Gas

A21.15 Flanged Cast-Iron and Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges

A21.50 Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe

A21.51 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids

A21.52 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Gas

B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form)

B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose

B1.20.3 Dryseal Pipe Threads (Inch)

B1.20.7 Hose Coupling Screw Threads

B16.1 Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800

B16.3 Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300

B16.4 Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250

B16.5 Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings

B16.10 Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions for Ferrous Valves

B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded

B16.12 Cast-Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings

B16.14 Ferrous Pipe Plugs, Bushings, and Locknuts with Pipe Threads

B16.15 Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250

Standard No. Title

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 2 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

ANSI STANDARDS (AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE)

B16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings

B16.20 Ring-Joint Gaskets and Grooves for Steel Pipe Flanges

B16.21 Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges

B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

B16.23 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV

B16.24 Bronze Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150 and 300

B16.25 Buttwelding Ends

B16.26 Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes

B16.28 Wrought Steel Buttwelding Short Radius Elbows and Returns

B16.29 Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV

B16.32 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Fittings for Solvent Drainage Systems

B16.33 Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in Gas Piping Systems up to 125 PSIG

B16.34 Valves - Flanged, Threaded and Welding End

B16.36 Orifice Flanges

B16.38 Large Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves in Gas Distribution Systems, 125 PSIG (8.6 bar, gage)

B16.39 Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions (Class 150, 250, and 300)

B16.40 Manually Operated Thermoplastic Gas Shut-Offs and Valves in Gas Distribution Systems

B16.42 Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150 and 300

B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws - Inch Series

B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts, Inch Series

B18.22.1 Plain Washers

B36.10M Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe

B36.19M Stainless Steel Pipe

B46.1 Surface Texture

Standard No. Title

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 01 Page 3 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

ANSI STANDARDS (AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE)

B70.1 Refrigeration Flare Type Fittings

B181.1 Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections

Z223.1 Installation of Gas Piping and Gas Equipment on Industrial Premises and Certain Other Premises

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

API STANDARDS (AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE)

Standard No. Title

5L Line Pipe

5LE Polyethylene Line Pipe

5LP Thermoplastic Line Pipe (PVC and CPVC)

5LR Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Line Pipe (RTRP)

5L2 Internal Coating of Line Pipe for Gas Transmission Services

5L4 Care and Use of Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Line Pipe (RTRP)

5T1 Bulletin on Imperfection Terminology

6A Wellhead Equipment

6D Pipeline Valves, End Closures, Connectors and Swivels

6FA Fire Test for Valves

594 Wafer-Type Check Valves

595 Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged Ends

598 Valve Inspection and Test

599 Steel and Ductile Iron Plug Valves, Flanged or Buttwelding Ends

600 Steel Gate Valves, Flanged and Buttwelding Ends

601 Metallic Gaskets for Piping; Double-Jacketed Corrugated and Spiral-Wound

602 Compact Carbon Steel Gate Valves

603 Class 150, Corrosion Resistant Gate Valves

604 Ductile Iron Gate Valves; Flanged Ends

605 Large Diameter Carbon Steel Flanges (Nominal Pipe Size 26 through 60; Classes 75, 150, 300, 400, 600,
and 900)

606 Compact Carbon Steel Gate Valves (Extended Body)

607 Fire Test for Soft-Seated Quarter-Turn Valves

609 Butterfly Valves, Lug Type and Wafer Type

Standard No. Title

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 02 Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

API STANDARDS (AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE)

941 Steels for Hydrogen Service at Elevated Temperatures and Pressures in Petroleum Refineries and
Petrochemical Plants

942 Recommended Practice for Welded, Plain Carbon Steel Refinery Equipment for Environmental Cracking
Service

944 Survey of Materials Experience and Corrosion Problems in Sour Water Strippers

945 Study of the Effects of High Temperature, High Pressure Hydrogen on Low-Alloy Steels

1102 Recommended Practice for Liquid Petroleum Pipelines Crossing Railroads and Highways

1104 Standard for Welding Pipelines and Related Facilities

RP10E Recommended Practice for Application of Cement Lining to Steel Tubular Goods, Handling, Installation
and Joining

RP550 Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control Systems

RP1110 Recommended Practice for the Pressure Testing of Liquid Petroleum Pipelines

RP1111 Recommended Practice for Design, Construction, Operation and Maintenance of Offshore Hydrocarbon
Pipelines

RP2001 Recommended Practice for Fire Protection in Refineries

2210 Flame Arrestors for Vents of Tanks Storing Petroleum Products

2508 Design and Construction of Ethane and Ethylene Installations at Marine and Pipeline Terminals, natural
Gas Processing Plants, Refineries, Petrochemical Plants and Tank Farms

2510 Design and Construction of LP-Gas Installation at Marine and Pipeline Terminals, Natural Gas Processing
Plants, Refineries and Tank Farms

---- Guide for Inspection of Refinery Equipment, Chapter XI, Pipe Valves and Fittings

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 03 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

ASME CODES AND STANDARDS (AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS)

Section Title

I Power Boilers

II Material Specifications
Part A - Ferrous Materials
Part B - Nonferrous Materials
Part C - Welding Rods, Electrodes and Filler Metals

III Subsection NCA - General Requirements for Division 1 and Division 2

Division 1
Subsection NB - Class 1 Components
Subsection NC - Class 2 Components
Subsection ND - Class 3 Components
Subsection NE - Class MC Components
Subsection NF - Component Supports
Subsection NG - Core Support Structures Appendices

Division 2 - Code for Concrete Reactor Vessels and Containments

IV Heating Boilers

V Nondestructive Examination

VIII Pressure Vessels

Division 1
Division 2 - Alternative Rules

IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications

X Fiberglass - Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels

---- Code Cases - Boilers and Pressure Vessels

---- Interpretations

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 04 Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

AWWA STANDARDS (AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION)

Standard No. Title

C101 Thickness Design of Cast Iron Pipe

C104 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water

C106 Gray-Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds, for Water or Other Liquids

C110 Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3 inches through 48 inches for Water and Other Liquids

C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

C115 Flanged Cast-Iron and Ductile-Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges

C150 Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe

C151 Ductile-Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast, in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids

C200 Steel Water Pipe 6 Inches and Larger

C203 Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot-Applied

C205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe - 4 Inches and Larger - Shop Applied

C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe

C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Water Works Service - Sizes 4 Inches through 144 Inches

C208 Dimensions for Steel Water Pipe Fittings

C300 Reinforced Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel Cylinder Type, for Water and Other Liquids

C301 Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel Cylinder Type, for Water and Other Liquids

C302 Reinforced Concrete Pressure Pipe, Non-Cylinder Type, for Water and Other Liquids C400
Asbestos-Cement Distribution Pipe, 4 Inches through 16 Inches, for Water and Other Liquids

C401 Asbestos-Cement Distribution Pipe, 4 Inches through 16 Inches, for Water and Other Liquids

C402 Asbestos-Cement Transmission Pipe, 18 Inches through 42 Inches, for Water and Other Liquids

C403 Asbestos-Cement Transmission and Feeder Main Pipe Sizes 18 Inches through 42 Inches

C500 Gate Valves, 3 Inches through 48 Inches, for Water and Sewage Systems

C501 Cast Iron Sluice Gates

C502 Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants

Standard No. Title

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 04 Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

AWWA STANDARDS (AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION)

C503 Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants

C504 Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves

C506 Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double Check Valve Types

C507 Ball Valves, Shaft (or Trunnion) Mounted, 6 Inches through 48 Inches, for Water Pressures up to 300 psi

C508 Swing Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 Inches through 24 Inches, NPS

C509 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves, 3 Inches through 12 Inches, NPS for Water Systems

C550 Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants

C600 Installation of Ductile Cast-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances

C602 Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines - 4 Inches and Larger - in Place

C603 Installation of Asbestos-Cement Pressure Pipe

C606 Grooved and Shouldered Type Joints

C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 Inches through 12 Inches, for Water

C901 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe, Tubing and Fittings, 1/2 Inch through 3 Inches, for Water

C902 Polybutylene (PB) Pressure Pipe, Tubing and Fittings, 1/2 Inch through 3 Inches, for Water

C950 Glass - Fiber - Reinforced Thermosetting - Resin Pressure Pipe

D100 Steel Tanks, Standpipes, Reservoirs, and Elevated Tanks for Water Storage

M9 Concrete Pressure Pipe

M11 Steel Pipe - Design and Installation Manual

M14 Backflow Prevention and Cross-Connection Control

M23 PVC Pipe

R805 Water Hammer Allowances in Pipe Design - Committee Report

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 05 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

CI STANDARDS (CHLORINE INSTITUTE)

Standard No. Title

Piping Systems for Dry Chlorine

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 06 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

CGA STANDARDS (COMPRESSED GAS ASSOCIATION)

Standard No. Title

G4.4 Industrial Practices for Gaseous Oxygen Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 07 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

FMRC STANDARDS (FACTORY MUTUAL RESEARCH CORPORATION)

Standard No. Title

---- Factory Mutual Approval Guide Covering the Following:

Pipe Couplings
Hose Couplings
Pipe Fittings
Fire Hose
Gas Hose
Hydrants
Pipe Joints
Fire Hose Nozzles
Monitor Nozzles
Spray Nozzles
Pipe
Water Strainers
Valves

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 08 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

FED SPEC STANDARDS (FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS)

Standard No. Title

---- Federal Specifications Covering the Following Topics:

Fasteners
Gaskets
Packing
Hose and Hose Couplings
Ferrous and Nonferrous Metals
Pipe
Tube
Fittings
Flanges
Valves

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 09 Page 1 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

MSS STANDARDS (MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS

INDUSTRY)

Standard No. Title

SP-6 Standard Finishes for Contact Faces of Pipe Flanges and Connecting-End Flanges of Valves and Fittings

SP-9 Spot Facing for Bronze, Iron and Steel Flanges

SP-25 Standard Marking Systems for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions

SP-42 Class 150 Corrosion Resistant Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves with Flanged and Butt Weld Ends

SP-43 Wrought Stainless Steel Butt Welding Fittings

SP-44 Steel Pipe Line Flanges

SP-45 Bypass and Drain Connection Standard

SP-51 Class 150 LW Corrosion Resistant Cast Flanges and Flanged Fittings

SP-53 Quality Standard for Steel Castings and Forgings for Valves, Flanges and Fittings and Other Piping
Components - Magnetic Particle Method

SP-54 Quality Standard for Steel Castings for Valves, Flanges, Fittings and Other Piping Components -
Radiographic Examination Method

SP-55 Quality Standard for Steel Castings for Valves, Flanges, Fittings and Other Piping Components - Visual
Method

SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture

SP-60 Connecting Flange Joint Between Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves

SP-61 Hydrostatic Testing of Steel Valves

SP-65 High Pressure Chemical Industry Flanges and Threaded Stubs for Use with Lens Gaskets

SP-67 Butterfly Valves

SP-68 High Pressure - Offset Seat Butterfly Valves

SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application

SP-70 Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

SP-71 Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

SP-72 Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General Service

SP-73 Silver Brazing Joints for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy and Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
Standard No. Title

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 09 Page 2 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

MSS STANDARDS (MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS

INDUSTRY)

SP-75 Specification for High Test Wrought Welding Fittings

SP-77 Guide Lines for Pipe Support Contractual Relationships

SP-78 Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends

SP-79 Socket-Welding Reducer Inserts

SP-80 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves

SP-81 Stainless Steel, Bonnetless, Flanged, Knife Gate Valves

SP-82 Valve Pressure Testing Methods

SP-83 Carbon Steel Pipe Unions, Socket-Welding and Threaded

SP-84 Steel Valves - Socket-Welding and Threaded Ends

SP-85 Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends

SP-86 Guidelines for Metric Data in Standards for Valves, Flanges and Fittings

SP-88 Diaphragm Type Valves

SP-89 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices

SP-90 Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports

SP-91 Guidelines for Manual Operation of Valves

SP-92 MSS Valve User Guide

SP-93 Quality Standard for Steel Castings and Forgings for Valves, Flanges, Fittings and Other Piping
Components - Liquid Penetrant Examination Method

SP-94 Quality Standard for Ferritic and Martensitic Steel Castings for Valves, Flanges, Fittings and Other Piping
Components -Ultrasonic Examination Method

SP-95 Swage(d) Nipples and Bull Plugs

SP-96 Guidelines on Terminology for Valves and Fittings

SP-97 Forged Carbon Steel Branch Outlet Fittings - Socket Welding, Threaded and Buttwelding Ends

SP-98 Protective Epoxy Coatings for the Interior of Valves and Hydrants

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 09 Page 3 of 3

FLUOR DANIEL

MSS STANDARDS (MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS

INDUSTRY)

Standard No. Title

SP-101 Part-Turn Valve Actuator Attachment - Flange and Driving Component Dimensions and Performance
Characteristics

SP-102 Multi-Turn Valve Actuator Attachment - Flange and Driving Component Dimensions and Performance
Characteristics

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 10 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

NACE STANDARDS (NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF CORROSION ENGINEERS)

Standard No. Title

MR-01-69 Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems

MR-01-75 Sulfide Stress Cracking Resistant Metallic Material for Oil Field Equipment

RP-01-70 Protection of Austenitic Stainless Steels in Refineries against Stress Corrosion Cracking by Use of
Neutralizing Solutions During Shut Down

RP-01-75 Control of Internal Corrosion in Steel Pipelines and Piping Systems

RP-04-72 Methods and Controls to Prevent In-Service Cracking of Carbon Steel Welds in P-1 Materials in Corrosive
Petroleum Refining Environments

1G157 Hydrogen Absorption, Embrittlement and Fracture of Steel

5A151 Materials of Construction for Handling Sulfuric Acid

5B155 High Temperature Corrosion Data

8A158 High Temperature Hydrogen Sulfide Corrosion of Stainless Steel

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 11 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

NBS STANDARDS (NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS)

(To be provided at a later date)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 12 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

NFPA STANDARDS (NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION)

(To be provided at a later date)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 13 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

PFI STANDARDS (PIPE FABRICATION INSTITUTE)

Standard No. Title

ES1 Internal Machining and Solid Machined Backing Rings for Circumferential Butt Welds (Reaffirmed 1989)

ES2 Method of Dimensioning Piping Assemblies (Revised 1987) (Reaffirmed 1990)

ES3 Fabricating Tolerances (Reaffirmed 1990)

ES4 Hydrostatic Testing of Fabricated Piping (Revised 1985) (Reaffirmed 1988)

ES5 Cleaning of Fabricated Piping (Revised 1987) (Reaffirmed 1990)

ES7 Minimum Length and Spacing for Welded Nozzles (Reaffirmed 1988)

ES11 Permanent Marking on Piping Materials (Reaffirmed 1990)

ES16 Access Holes and Plugs for Radiographic Inspection of Pipe Welds (Revised 1985) (Reaffirmed 1988)

ES20 Wall Thickness Measurement by Ultrasonic Examination (Revised 1985) (Reaffirmed 1988)

ES21 Internal Machining and Fit-Up of GTAW Root Pass Circumferential Butt Welds (Reaffirmed 1989)

ES22 Recommended Practice for Color Coding of Piping Materials (Revised 1990)

ES24 Piping Bending Tolerances - Minimum Bending Radii - Minimum Tangents (Revised 1984) (Reaffirmed
1990)

ES25 Random Radiography of Pressure Retaining Girth Butt Welds (Revised 1988)

ES26 Welded Load Bearing Attachments to Pressure Retaining Piping Materials (Revised 1984) (Reaffirmed
1990)

ES27 Visual Examination - the Purpose, Meaning and Limitation of the Term (Revised 1986) (Reaffirmed 1989)

ES29 Abrasive Blast Cleaning of Ferritic Piping Materials (Revised 1990) ES30 Random Ultrasonic Examination
of Butt Welds (Revised 1986) (Reaffirmed 1989)

ES31 Standard for Protection of Ends of Fabricated Piping Assemblies (Revised 1988)

ES32 Tool Calibration (Reaffirmed 1988)

ES33 Circumferential Butt Welds in the Arc of Pipe Bends (Reaffirmed 1988)

ES34 Painting of Fabricated Piping (Reaffirmed 1989)

ES35 Nonsymmetrical Bevels and Joint Configurations for Butt Welds (Revised 1984) (Reaffirmed 1990)

Standard No. Title

ES36 Branch Reinforcement Work Sheets (Revised 1986) (Reaffirmed 1989)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 14 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

SAE STANDARDS (SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS)

(To be provided at a later date)

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9856
Publication Date 31Oct95
Attachment 15 Page 1 of 1

FLUOR DANIEL

UL STANDARDS (UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC.)

Standard No. Title

125 Valves for Anhydrous Ammonia and LP Gas (Other Than Safety Relief)

144 Pressure Regulating Valves for LP Gas

260 Dry Pipe and Deluge Valves for Fire-Protection Service

262 Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service

312 Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service

401 Portable Spray Hose Nozzles for Fire-Protection Service

525 Flame Arrestors for Use on Vents of Storage Tanks for Petroleum Oil and Gasoline

536 Flexible Metallic Hose

567 Pipe Connectors for Flammable and Combustible Liquids and LP Gas

569 Pigtails and Flexible Hose Connectors for LP Gas

668 Hose Valves for Fire-Protection Service

789 Indicator Posts for Fire-Protection Services

842 Valves for Flammable Fluids

860 Pipe Unions for Flammable and Combustible Fluids and Fire-Protection Service

888 Steel Pipe for Underground Water Service

1091 Butterfly Valves for Fire-Protection Service

1285 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Couplings for Underground Fire Service

1486 Quick Opening Devices for Dry Pipe Valves for Fire-Protection Service

1713 Glass Fiber-Reinforced Pressure Pipe and Couplings for Under-ground Fire Service

Piping Engineering
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 1 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

PURPOSE
This practice lists abbreviations for terms and phrases that are customarily used on
drawings and in engineering text. Abbreviations that are not listed will not be used
unless properly defined on the drawing or in the text.

When an abbreviation has more than 1 meaning, the intended meaning will usually be
apparent from the context.

Note!!! DO NOT use these abbreviations to signify equipment type!

Refer to General Engineering Practice 000.200.1005: Numbering Systems, for the

2 digit, alpha identifiers that are used in the equipment number to represent equipment
type.

APPLICATION
Abbreviations will be used where necessary to save time and space, but only where their
meaning is unquestionably clear to the reader.

WHEN IN DOUBT, SPELL IT OUT!!!!!

REFERENCES
General Corporate
Practice 000.000.9911: Abbreviations: Societies, Codes, Standards, And Agencies

General Corporate
Practice 000.000.9912: Abbreviations: Units Of Measure / Related Scales

ABBREVIATIONS
On Dwgs In Text Meaning

A ...................... Analog Signal, Auto

A ...................... COMPAir Compressor
A/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning
A/L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoustically Lined
AAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airstream Averaging Thermostat

AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anchor Bolt
ABS . . . . . . abs . . . . . . . . Absolute
ABSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Absorber
ABSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Break Switch
ABT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About

ABV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Above
AC . . . . . . . . AC . . . . . . . . Aligning Connector, Alternating Current, Acoustical
ACB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Circuit Breaker
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accelerator, Access
ACCESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessory

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 2 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

ACCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Account
ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access door
ACFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access floor
ACP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access panel
ACPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoustical plaster

ACR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acrylic plastic

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoustical tile
ACU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning Unit
AD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Area Drain
ADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addendum

ADH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adhesive
ADJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjacent
ADJT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustable
ADMIN . . . Admin . . . . Administration
ADN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addition

ADPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adapter
AF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Filter, Ampere Frame Size, Antifreeze
AFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Fire Alarm
AFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approved for Construction
AFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approved for Design

AFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Above Finished Floor

AG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aboveground
AGG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aggregate
AGL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armored Glass
AGV . . . . . . AGV . . . . . Automatic Guided Vehicle

AGVS . . . . . AGVS . . . . Automatic Guided Vehicle System

AHU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Handling Unit
AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Iron (iron to iron seats)
AIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Amber Indicating Light
AL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm

ALB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Bell

ALD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Louver Damper
ALH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Horn
ALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alignment
ALLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allowance

ALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Altitude
ALTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternate
ALUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum, Aluminized
ALV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Check Valve
AM SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ammeter Switch

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 3 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

AMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ambient
AMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ammeter
AMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Amount
ANAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analysis, Analyze
ANC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anchor, Anchorage

ANN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annunciator
ANOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anodized
AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access Panel
APD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Pressure Drop
APPAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apparatus

APPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applicable
APPROX . approx . . . Approximate
APPURT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appurtenance
APPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approve
APVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approved

APVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approval
ARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architectural
ARM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armature
ARR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrange, Arrangement
AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Sprinklers, Air Supply

ASB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Asbestos
ASC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Above Suspended Ceiling
ASD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allowable Stress Design
ASFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Sliding Fire Door
ASP . . . . . . . ASP . . . . . . . Aisle Space Percentage

ASPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Asphalt
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Sprinkler Riser
AS/RS . . . . AS/RS . . . . Automatic Storage and Retrieval System
ASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Association
ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly

ASYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Asymmetrical
AT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Asphalt Tile, Amperes Trip (setting)
AT WT . . . at wt . . . . . . Atomic Weight
ATM . . . . . . atm . . . . . . . Atmosphere, Atmospheric
ATT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autotransformer

AUTO. . . . . auto. . . . . . . Automatic

AUX . . . . . . aux . . . . . . . Auxiliary
AVAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available
AVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Asbestos and Varnished Cambric Insulated Wire
AVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avenue

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 4 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

AVG . . . . . . avg . . . . . . . Average

AVN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aviation
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Award
B ....................... Bell
B & F .................. Bell and Flange

B PL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base Plate
B TO B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back to Back
B&B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bell and Bell
B&G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bolts & Gaskets
B&S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bell and Spigot

B/M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bill of Material

B/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bending Schedule
BAR . . . . . . bar . . . . . . . Non-SI Unit of Pressure
BARO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barometer, Barometric
BAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery

BB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bolted Bonnet
BBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bulletin Board
BBE . . . . . . BBE . . . . . . Bevel Both Ends
BBH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseboard Heater
BBL . . . . . . . bbl . . . . . . . . Barrel

BC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beginning of Curve, Between Centers, Bolt Circle

BCCSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bituminous Coated Corrugated Steel Pipe - Arch
BCCSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bituminous Coated Corrugated Steel Pipe
BCG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bracing
BD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Banded, Blowdown, Bus Duct, Board

BDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bundle
BDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bend Down
BDNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bedding
BDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus Differential Relay
BE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bell End, Beveled End

BEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Below
BEP . . . . . . . BEP . . . . . . . Both Ends Plain
BERTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Berthing
BET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Between
BEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bevel

BF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blind Flange, Boiler Feed Unit with Pumps, Tanks, etc.

BFD . . . . . . BFD . . . . . . Block Flow Diagram
BFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Below Finished Floor
BFV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Butterfly Valve
BG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Below Grade, Blast Gate

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 5 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

BH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brinell Hardness, Boiler House

BHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bulkhead
BHP . . . . . . . bhp . . . . . . . Brake Horsepower
BI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brass to Iron Seats
BID SUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bid Summary

BIL .................... Blue Indicating Light, Basic Impulse Level

BIN. ................... Binary
BIT .................... Bituminous
BJT .................... Bed Joint
BKT ................... Bracket, Bucket

BL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bend Line, Battery Limit, Building Line, Blueline, Blue,

Branch Line
BLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blind
BLDG . . . . . bldg . . . . . . Building
BLE . . . . . . . BLE . . . . . . Bevel Large End
BLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black, Blank, Block

BLKG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blocking
BLKT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blanket
BLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower
BLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boiler
BLST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ballast

BLVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boulevard
BM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bench Mark, Beam
BMEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Mean Effective Pressure
BOC,B/C . . BOC,B/C . Bottom of Concrete, Bottom of Curb
BOD . . . . . . BOD . . . . . . Biochemical Oxygen Demand

BOD,B/D . BOD,B/D . Bottom of Duct

BOP,B/P . . BOP,B/P . . Bottom of Pipe
BOS,B/S . . BOS,B/S . . Bottom of Steel
BOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottom
BP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back Pressure, Base Plate, Boiling Point, Boiler Pressure,
Back Plaster

BR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bending Radius, Branch

BRCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Breeching
BRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bearing
BRK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brick
BRKR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Breaker

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 6 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

BRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brown
BRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brass
BRZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bronze
BS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Both Sides
BSE . . . . . . . BSE . . . . . . . Bevel Small End

BSHG / BUSH . . . . . . . . . Bushing

BSMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basement
BSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Booster
BT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bent
BUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bend Up

BUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Built-up Roof

BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus Bar
BV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ball Valve
BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Butt Weld, Busway, Both Ways
BWE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Butt Weld End

BYP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypass
BZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Buzzer
C TO C . . . c to c . . . . . . Center to Center
C TO E . . . c to e . . . . . . Center to End
C TO F . . . . c to f . . . . . . Center to Face

C/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling Coil

C/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Care of
C&F . . . . . . C&F . . . . . . Cost and Freight
CA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corrosion Allowance
CAB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet

CAE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Computer Aided Engineering

CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrate
CALC . . . . . calc . . . . . . . Calculate, Calculation
CAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacitor, Capacity, Corrugated Aluminum Pipe
CAT. . . . . . . cat. . . . . . . . Catalogue, Catalyst

CATR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Tray

CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catch Basin, Commercial Bolt, Circuit Breaker
CBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Blowdown
CBG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cribbing
CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contamination Control, Cooling Coil, Closing Coil,
Controller Contact

CC . . . . . . . . cc . . . . . . . . . Carbon Copy
CCKT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closing Circuit
CCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central Control Panel
CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cast Carbon Steel
CCW . . . . . . CCW . . . . . Counterclockwise

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 7 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Card, Cold Drawn

CD PL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cadmium Plate
CDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Certified Dimensional Outline
CDR . . . . . . CDR . . . . . . Conductor
CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convector

CEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cement Lined, Cement

CER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ceramic
CERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Certified
CF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cold Finished
CFB&G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Companion Flanges, Bolts, and Gaskets

CFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemical Feed

CFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Counterflashing
CFW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Fillet Weld
CG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center of Gravity, Corner Guard
CGB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ceiling Box

CH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chiller
CHAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chamfer
CHAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel
CHBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chalkboard
CHEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemical

CHG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Charge
CHK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check
CHKD PL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checkered Plate
CHNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change
CHOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chain Operator, Chain Operated

CHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ceiling Height

CHV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Valve
CI . . . . . . . . . CI . . . . . . . . . Cast Iron, Curb Inlet
CID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Computer Integrated Design
CIE . . . . . . . CIE . . . . . . . Computer Integrated Engineering

CIF . . . . . . . CIF . . . . . . . Cost, Insurance, and Freight

CIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear Indicating Light
CIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cast Iron Pipe
CIPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cast In Place Concrete
CIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circle

CIRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circular, Circulate, Circumference

CISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cast Iron Soil Pipe
CJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Joint
CK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calking
CKT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 8 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

CKT BRKR . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Breaker

CL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center Line
CL . . . . . . . . Cl . . . . . . . . . Class
CLASS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classification
CLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Limiting Fuse

CLG ................... Ceiling, Cooling

CLL .................... Contract Limit Line
CLN ................... Clean
CLO ................... Closet
CLR ................... Clear, Clearance

CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closure
CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross Main
CMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corrugated Metal Pipe
CMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ceramic Mosaic (tile)
CMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concrete Masonry Unit

CND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conduit
CNTFGL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugal
CNTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Counter
CNVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conveyor
CO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleanout, Converter (steam to water), Change Order, Cutout

CO . . . . . . . . Co. . . . . . . . . Company
COD. . . . . . COD. . . . . . Continued On Drawing, Chemical Oxygen Demand
COEF . . . . . coef . . . . . . . Coefficient
COL . . . . . . col . . . . . . . Column
COLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collector

COM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common
COMB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combination, Combustion
COML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commercial
COMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication
COMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compression

COMPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Complete
COMPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Composition, Composite
COMPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressor, Composition Roof
COMPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compartment
COMPTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Computer

COMPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component
CONC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concrete
CONCEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concentric, Concentrated
COND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condenser, Condensate
COND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condition

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 9 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

CONDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conductor
CONF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conference
CONN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection, Connections
CONSERV . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conservation
CONST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Construction

CONST JT . . . . . . . . . . . . . Construction Joint

CONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous, Continue, Continuation, Control, Controller
CONT V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Valve
CONTD . . . contd . . . . . . Continued
CONTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contractor, Contract

CONV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conveyor, Convection

COORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate
COP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleanout Plug
CORP . . . . . Corp. . . . . . Corporation
CORR . . . . . corr . . . . . . . Corrugated

CPCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemically Pure, Chrome Pendent

CPD . . . . . . CPD . . . . . . Cascade Potential Device
CPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Power Interlock
CPK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cathodic Protection Kit
CPLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coupling

CPLRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capillary
CPM . . . . . . CPM . . . . . . Critical Path Method
CPS . . . . . . . CPS . . . . . . . Certified Professional Secretary
CPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Power Transformer, Carpeted
CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central Processing Unit

CPVCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe

CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condensate Return Unit with Pumps, Tanks, etc., Control
Relay, Chromium (plated)
CRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross Grain
CRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Course(s), Cold Rolled Steel
CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cathode Ray Tube

CS . . . . . . . . CS . . . . . . . . Carbon Steel, Control Switch, Cold Spring

CSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Casing
CSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Countersink
CSMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Casement
CSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corrugated Steel Pipe

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 10 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

CST . . . . . . . CST . . . . . . Cast Steel

CSTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Casting
CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center Tap, Cooling Tower, Column Tie, Ceramic Tile,
Copper Tube, Current Transformer
CTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Counterflashing
CTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coal Tar Enamel Lined

CTR . . . . . . ctr . . . . . . . . Center, Counter

CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control
CTSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Countersunk
CTWT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Counterweight
CTZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Transformer, Zero Sequence

CU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Condensing Unit, Copper

CUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cubicle
CUH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Unit Heater
CV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Valve, Cleaning Vacuum
CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Weld

CW . . . . . . . CW . . . . . . . Clockwise
CWC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chilled Water Coil
CWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cadweld
CWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cold Working Pressure
CYL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder

D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Density, Drain, Derivative Control Mode (Demand), Degree

of Curve
D/P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differential Pressure
DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doubleacting
DB . . . . . . . . DB . . . . . . . . Dry Bulb
DB . . . . . . . . dB . . . . . . . . Decibel

DBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double
DBT . . . . . . DBT . . . . . . Dry Bulb Temperature
DC . . . . . . . . DC . . . . . . . . Direct Current
DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry Chemical, Draft Curtain
DCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distributed Control System

DDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drip and Dust Tight

DEA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deaerator
DEG . . . . . . deg . . . . . . . Degree
DELV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deluge Valve
DEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demolish, Demolition

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 11 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

DEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depressed
DEPT . . . . . dept . . . . . . . Department
DES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design
DET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail
DETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detector Check

DETECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detector
DEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Develop, Device
DEV LG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Developed Length
DF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drinking Fountain, Drain Funnel
DG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Grille

DGP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Gathering Panel

DH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duct Heater, Double Hub, Double Hung, Door Heater
DI . . . . . . . . . DI . . . . . . . . Ductile Iron
DIAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram, Diagonal
DIFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differential, Diffuser

DIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dilute
DIM. . . . . . . dim. . . . . . . Dimension
DIMJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ductile Iron Mech Joint Pipe
DIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ductile Iron Pipe
DIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Acting

DISC. . . . . . disc. . . . . . . Disconnect

DISCH . . . . disch . . . . . . Discharge
DISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ductile Iron Sewer Pipe
DISTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distribution
DIV . . . . . . . Div . . . . . . . Division

DJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Joist
DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dead Load, Drip Leg, Dummy Leg, Damaged Loads Ratio
DM (MOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . Damper Motorized - Modular
DM (2 POS) . . . . . . . . . . . . Damper Motorized - 2 Position
DMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demountable

DN . . . . . . . . DN . . . . . . . Down
DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dissolved Oxygen, Draw Out
DO. . . . . . . . do. . . . . . . . . Ditto
DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design Pressure, Double Pipe, Damp-proofing
DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel Pump Controller

DPDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Pole, Double Throw

DPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dispenser, Damper
DPST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Pole, Single Throw
DPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dew Point
DPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Processing Unit

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 12 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

DPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry Pipe Valve

DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drill, Drive, Door, Drain
DRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drainboard
DRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Relay Panel
DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disk System, Downspout, Digital Signal

DSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect Switch Fused

DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disk Drive
DSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect Switch Nonfused
DSPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal
DSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Switch

DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dust Tight, Design Temperature, Drain Tile

DTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dovetail Anchor
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dovetail Anchor Slot
DTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry Type Transformer (Refer to OTT)
DUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duration

DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diaphragm Valve
DW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dummy Weld, Dumbwaiter
DWG . . . . . dwg . . . . . . . Drawing
DWL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dowel
DWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawer

DX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Expansion
DXCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Expansion Cooling Coil
DYB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Breaking
. . . . . . . . . . . . e.g. . . . . . . . For Example (exempli gratia)
E ...................... East

E to E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End to End
EA . . . . . . . . ea . . . . . . . . . Each
EAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Air Grille
EAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Air Louver
EAO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Air Opening

EAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust Air Register

EAR . . . . . . EAR . . . . . . Environmental Assessment Report
EAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Air Temperature
EB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Baseboard Heater, Expansion Bolt
EBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eddy Current Brake, Electric Baseboard Radiation

EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of Curve
EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaporative Condenser, Electric Connector
ECC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eccentric
ECL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Economizer Logic Center
ECL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eddy Current Clutch

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 13 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

ED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Duct
EDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Dry Bulb
EDR . . . . . . EDR . . . . . . Equivalent Direct Radiation
EF . . . . . . . . EF . . . . . . . . Electric Furnace (steel)
EF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Each Face, Exhaust Fan

EFF . . . . . . . eff . . . . . . . . Efficiency

EFW . . . . . . EFW . . . . . . Electric Fusion Welded
EHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Heating Coil
EIA . . . . . . . EIA . . . . . . . Environmental Impact Assessment
EIR . . . . . . . EIR . . . . . . . Environmental Impact Report

EIS . . . . . . . EIS . . . . . . . Environmental Impact Statement

EL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation (Height)
ELEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric
ELEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation (View), Elevator
ELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elbow

ELLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ellipsoidal
ELM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elementary
ELTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Lighting
EM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Motor
EMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency

EMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromotive Force

EMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Metallic Tubing
ENC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure
ENGR . . . . . engr. . . . . . . Engineer
ENGRG . . . engrg. . . . . . Engineering

ENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entrance
ENV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Envelope
ENVIR . . . . ENVIR . . . . Environment
EO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrically Operated
EOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elbolet

EP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explosionproof, Electric Pneumatic Switch Device, Electrical

Panelboard
EPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Pump Controller
EPRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Erasable Programmable RAM
EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Erasable Programmable ROM
EQ . . . . . . . . eq . . . . . . . . . Equation, Equal

EQUIP . . . . equip. . . . . . Equipment

ERAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Erasable RA
EROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Erasable ROM
ERW . . . . . . ERW . . . . . Electric Resistance Welded
ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Supply

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 14 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Escalator
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Static Pressure
EST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimate
ESVCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extra Strength Vitrified Clay Pipe
ETA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimated Time of Arrival

ETC . . . . . . etc. . . . . . . . . And So On (et cetera)

ETL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effective Tube Length, Electric Testing Laboratories
EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Unit Heater
EU . . . . . . . . EU . . . . . . . . Equipment Utilization
EVAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaporator

EVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evaporative Cooler

EW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Weld, Electric Wall Heater, Each Way
EWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Wet Bulb
EWC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Water Cooler
EWT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Water Temp

EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example
EXC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exciter
EXCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Excavate, Excavation
EXEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executive
EXH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust, Exhauster

EXIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Existing
EXMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expanded Metal Plate
EXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion
EXP JT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion Joint
EXPSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exposed

EXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External, Exterior

F ....................... Flush, Flushing, Filter
F DAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fire Damper
F TAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluidic Target
F TO F . . . . f to f . . . . . . Face to Face

F&D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Faced and Drilled

F&D HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flanged and Dished Head
F&T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Float and Thermostatic
F/FAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Fabricated
FA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flame Arrestor, Fire Alarm

FAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fabricate, Fabrication

FACIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facility
FAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Alarm High
FAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Alarm Low
FAO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finish All Over

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 15 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

FAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fire Alarm Panel

FAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fasten / Fastener
FAS . . . . . . . FAS . . . . . . . Free Alongside Steamer
FAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Final Air Temperature
FB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat Bar, Flat Bottom

FBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fiberboard
FBG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat Bottom Groove
FBO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Furnished By Others
FBQ . . . . . . fbq . . . . . . . Firebox Quality
FBRK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firebrick

FC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan Coil Unit, Flow Controller, Flexible Connector, Fail

Closed
FCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facebrick
FCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan Coil Unit
FD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Drain, Fire Department, Fire Damper
FDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foundation

FDPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fire Department Pumper Connection

FDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feeder
FDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fire Detection Unit
FE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flanged End, Fire Escape, Fire Exit, Fire Extinguisher
FEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fire Extinguisher Cabinet

FEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Female
FEP . . . . . . . FEP . . . . . . . Teflon (Fluorinated Ethylene- Propylene)
FES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flared End Section
FF . . . . . . . . FF . . . . . . . . Flat Faced, Factory Finish
FFA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full Freight Allowed

FFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flanged, Faced, and Drilled

FFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finished Floor Line
FFW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Fit Weld
FGL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fiberglass
FGRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field Ground Resistor

FH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat Head, Flexible Hose, Fire Hose, Fire Hydrant

FHMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flathead Machine Screw
FHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fire Hose Rack
FHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fire Hose Station
FHWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flathead Wood Screw

FHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fire Hydrant

FI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Indicator, Fail Indeterminate
FIFO . . . . . . FIFO . . . . . . First In - First Out
FIG. . . . . . . . fig. . . . . . . . . Figure
FIGNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure Number

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 16 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

FIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finish
FINFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finished Floor
FINGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finished Grade
FJT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush Joint
FL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor, Fail Locked

FLA . . . . . . . FLA . . . . . . Full Load Amperes

FLAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow Alarm
FLASH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flashing
FLCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Cleanout
FLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field

FLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flange
FLGD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flanged
FLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flotation
FLPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plate
FLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor / Flooring

FLTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter
FLUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluorescent
FLX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexible
FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency Meter
FMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexible Metal Conduit

FMH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexible Metal Hose

FND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Found
4PDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Pole Double Throw
4PST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Pole Single Throw
FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Only, Floor Opening, Fail Open

FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat on Bottom

FOB . . . . . . FOB . . . . . . Free on Board
FOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face of Flange, Face of Finish
FOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face of Masonry
FOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face of Stud

FOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat on Top

FOV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Oil Vent, Freezing Point, Fire Protection, Fireproof,
Fire Pump
FPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fireplace
FPRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fireproof
FPT . . . . . . . FPT . . . . . . . Female Pipe Thread

FQ . . . . . . . . fq . . . . . . . . . Flange Quality
FR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame, Framing, From
FRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air
FRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fire Resistant Coating
FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 17 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

FRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forged
FRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic
FRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freight, Fire Retardant
FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Far Full Size
FS (160°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firestat (cut off at indicated)

FSB .................... FS Box Terminal

FSC .................... FS Box Thru
FSH .................... Flow Switch High
FSL .................... Flow Switch Low
FSS .................... Forged Stainless Steel

FST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forged Steel

FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fin Tube Radiation
FTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting to Fitting
FTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitting, Footing
FTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foot Switch

FU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse
FUR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Furred, Furring
FURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Furnish
FUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Future
FV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valve

FV&S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foot Valve and Strainer

FVNR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full Voltage Nonreversing
FVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full Voltage Reversing
FW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weld, Fillet Weld
FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward

FXTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixture
FZ (34°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freezestat (cut off at temp indicated)
G ...................... Ground Wire
GA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Arrangement
GA . . . . . . . . ga . . . . . . . . Gage, Gauge

GAL . . . . . . gal . . . . . . . . Gallon

GALV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Galvanize
GAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gasoline
GAUV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gage Valve
GAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gate Valve

GB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Burner, Grab Bar

GC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Contract, General Contractor
GCMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concrete Concrete Masonry Units
GCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grade Cleanout
GCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Current Transformer

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 18 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

GD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Duct Heater

GE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grooved End
GEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generator
GENL . . . . . genl . . . . . . . General
GF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault, Ground Face

GFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault Current

GFCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault Current Interrupter
GFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault Interrupter
GFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault Relay
GI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Galvanized Iron

GIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green Indicating Light

GJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Joint
GKT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gasket, Gasketed
GL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glass, Girt Line
GLB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glass Block

GLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glass Fiber

GLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glass Lined
GLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glass Valve
GNB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Bus
GND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground

GND JT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Joint

GNR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Rod
GNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Triad
GNW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Well
GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear Operated

GOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gang Operated Switch

GOV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Governor
GOVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Government
GP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose, Guard Post, Galvanized Pipe
GPDW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gypsum Dry Wall

GPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gypsum Tile

GPPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gypsum Plaster
GPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gypsum Tile
GR . . . . . . . . gr . . . . . . . . . Grade, Guardrail
GRC . . . . . . GRC . . . . . . Galvanized Rigid Conduit

GRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Granite, Green

GRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group
GRPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphite
GRTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grating
GRVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grooved

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 19 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

GS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Supply
GSR . . . . . . GSR . . . . . . Ground Sensor Relay
GSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Galvanized Steel Sheet
GST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glazed Structural Tile
GT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grout

GT-TIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Tungsten Inert Gas Welding

GV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gravity Vent
GVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gravel
GW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oxyacetylene Gas Welding
GYBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gypsum Board

GYP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gypsum
H ...................... Hydraulic Signal
H/W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware
H CPLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Half Coupling
H&S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hub and Spigot

H-STAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Humidistat
HAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Actuated Device
HALON 1211 . . . . . . . . . . Bromochlorodi- fluoromethane
2HALON 1301 . . . . . . . . . Bromotrifluoro- methane
HAZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hazard

HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hose Bibb, Wall Hydrant

HBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardboard
HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hose Connection, Hand Control, Hydrocarbon, Hollow Core,
Heating Coil
HCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Halon Control Panel
HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head, Hand, Heavy Duty Duct Insertion Humidistat

HD DRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hard Drawn

HDCLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headroom Clearance
HDPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Density Polyethylene Pipe
HDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Header
HDSS . . . . . HDSS . . . . . High Density Storage System

HES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Early Strength Cement

HEX . . . . . . hex . . . . . . . Hexagonal
HEX HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hexagon Head
HF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hard Faced
HFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hard Face Seats

HG . . . . . . . . Hg . . . . . . . . Hydrargyrum- Mercury
HGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hanger
HJT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head Joint
HH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handhole
HHV . . . . . . hhv . . . . . . . Higher Heating Value

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 20 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

HI LIM (99°) . . . . . . . . . . . High Limit (cut off at temp. indicated)

HI S SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Signal Selector
HID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Intensity Discharge (lamps)
HK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hook
HL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Lift

HLS . . . . . . . HLS . . . . . . Highest Line of Sprinklers

HM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hollow Metal
HN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horn
HO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Home Office
HOA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand Off Automatic

HOLDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hold Down

HOMX . . . . HOMX . . . . Home Office Management Control System
HORIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal
HP . . . . . . . . hp . . . . . . . . High Pressure, HP Structural Shapes, Hot Press
HPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Point

HR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handrail, Hot Rolled, Air to Air Heat Recovery Unit, Hand

Reset, Hose Rack, Hose Reel, Hanger Rod
HRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handrail Post
HRSS . . . . . HRSS . . . . . High Riser Storage System
HS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hook Stick Switch, Hydraulic Supply
HSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Strength Bolt

HSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . House
HT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Tracing, Heat Traced, High Temperature, Height
HTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Trace Cable
HTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating
HTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater

HU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Humidifier
HUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Humidifier (steam injection)
HV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating and Ventilating, High Voltage (above 15 kV)
HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating, Ventilating, & Air Conditioning
HVU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating and Ventilating Unit

HVY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heavy
HW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headwall
HWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hallway
HWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardwood
HWH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hot Water Heater

HYDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydraulic
HYDRO . . . HYDRO . . Hydrostatic (Test)
HYDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydrant
HYPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hypotenuse
H1, H2, H3 . . . . . . . . . . . . Primary Terminals at Power Transformer

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 21 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

. . . . . . . . . . . . i.e. . . . . . . . . That Is (id est)

I .......... I .......... Incinerator, Current (Electrical) Signal
I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Out (Electronic)
IAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interlocked Armored Cable
IBBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iron Body Bronze Mounted

IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupting Capacity
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside Diameter, Induction Unit
IDENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identify, Identifier
IDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inductor
IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside Frosted, Inside Face

IFA .................... Issued for Approval

IFC .................... Issued For Construction
IFD .................... Issued for Design
IFI ..................... Issued for Information
IFR .................... Issued for Review (& Comment)

IGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition
IHP . . . . . . . ihp . . . . . . . . Indicated Horsepower
IL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating Light
IMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermediate Metal Conduit
INC. . . . . . . Inc. . . . . . . . Incorporated

INCIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incinerator
INCL . . . . . incl . . . . . . . Include, Inclusive
INCLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intercooler
INCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incoming
INCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Increaser

IND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicate
IND . . . . . . . IND . . . . . . . Investigational New Drug (application)
INDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial
INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information
INIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial

INJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Injection
INL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inlet
INQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inquiry
INS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insulated, Insulation
INS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside

INSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insulating Concrete

INSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insulating Fill
INSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspect, Inspector
INST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Institute, Instantaneous
INSTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 22 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

INSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument, Instruction

INSTR V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument Valve
INT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal, Interior, Integral
INTCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnection
INTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermediate

INTFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface
INTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intake
INTLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interlock
INTMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermittent
INTRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference

INTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integral Seats

INTSCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intersect
INTVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interval
INV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invert
INV EL, I.E. . . . . . . . . . . . . Invert Elevation

IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iron Pin
IPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iron Pipe Size
IR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside Radius, Infrared
ISARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISA Recommended Practice
ISD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ionization Smoke Detector

ISNRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside Screw Nonrising Stem

ISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isometric
ISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insurance Service Office
ISOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolation
ISRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside Screw Rising Stem

ISS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside Stainless Steel Seats, Issue

IT . . . . . . . . . IT . . . . . . . . . Inventory Turnover
ITC . . . . . . . ITC . . . . . . . Investment Tax Credit
ITSAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intrinsically Safe
J ....................... Joist

JB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Junction Box - Power, Control, Lighting

JBI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Junction Box - Instrument
JBLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Junction Box - Loop Remote (Bldg Automation)
JBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pull Box
JBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Splice Box - Feeder Cables

JBT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Junction Box - Telephone

JC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Janitor's Closet
JCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Junction
JF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joint Filler
JIT . . . . . . . . JIT . . . . . . . . Just In Time

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 23 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

JKT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jacket
JP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jockey Pump
JT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joint
K ...................... Kirk Key Interlock
KA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyed Alike

KB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Knee Brace
KCPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keene's Cement Plaster
KD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kiln Dried
KD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Knock Down
KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kitchen

KL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kynar Lined
KO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Knockout
KOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Korduct Rigid Conduit (Transite)
KPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kickplate
KR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Knuckle Radius

KRSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kerosene
KX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antikiss Relay
L ...................... Induction, Structural Angle, Length of Curve
L-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Left to Right
L/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lockout

LA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lightning Arrestor, Load Analyzer, Level Alarm

LAB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Laboratory
LAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ladder
LAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Alarm High
LAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Alarm Low

LAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Laminate, Laminated

LAT . . . . . . LAT . . . . . . Latitude, Leaving Air Temperature, Latent
LATL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lateral
LAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lavatory
LB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conduit Elbow - Back Cover, Lag Bolt

LBH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conduit Elbow - Back Cover Heavy Duty

LBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conduit Elbow - Left Side Cover, Label
LBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conduit Elbow - Right Side Cover; Lumber
LBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conduit Elbow - Corner Cap Heavy Duty
LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Controller, Locked Closed, Load Center, Lead Covered,
Light Control

LD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load
LDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leaving Dry Bulb
LDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landing
LEB . . . . . . . LEB . . . . . . Large End Beveled
LEL . . . . . . . LEL . . . . . . . Lower Explosive Level

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 24 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

LEP . . . . . . . LEP . . . . . . . Large End Plain

LEPRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Erasable Programmable RAM
LEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Erasable Programmable ROM
LERAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Erasable RAM
LEROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Erasable ROM

LF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Fixture
LFAVN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Fixture - Aviation
LFEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Fixture - Emergency
LFEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Fixture - Exit
LFFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Fixture - Fluorescent

LFIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Fixture - Incandescent

LFLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Fixture - Level Gage
LFMH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Fixture - Metal Halide
LFMV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Fixture - Mercury Vapor
LFQZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Fixture - Quartz

LFSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Fixture - Sodium Vapor High Pressure

LFSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Fixture - Sodium Vapor Low Pressure
LFTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Fixture - Tank (internal)
LG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Long
LGG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Gage Glass

LGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Length
LH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Left Hand
LHV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower Heating Valve
LI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Indicator
LIFO . . . . . . LIFO . . . . . . Last In - First Out

LIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear, Lineal

LIQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liquid, Liquor
LJF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lap Joint Flange
LKR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locker
LL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Live Load, Liquid Level

LLBB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Long Leg Back To Back

LLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liquid Level Controller
LLSPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Limit Suction Pressure Controller
LLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Long Leg Vertical
LMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limestone

LN . . . . . . . . ln . . . . . . . . Logarithm (to base e)

LND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lined
LNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lining, Liquified Natural Gas
LO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locked Open Level Operated
LO LIM (50°) . . . . . . . . . . Low Limit (cut off at temp. indicated)

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 25 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

LO S SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Signal Selector

LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locate, Location, Local
LOG. . . . . . . log. . . . . . . . Logarithm (to base 10)
LONG. . . . . long. . . . . . . Longitude, Longitudinal
LOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lockout Relay

LOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liquid Oxygen

LP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Pressure, Lighting Panel, Low Point, Light Pole
LPG . . . . . . . LPG . . . . . . Liquified Petroleum Gas
LPGF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Pressure Gas Filled
LPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Power Transformer

LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Ratio, Latching Relay, Long Radius

LRA . . . . . . LRA . . . . . . Locked Rotor Amperes
LRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Long Radius Elbow
LS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limit Switch
LSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Switch High

LSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Switch Low

LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light, Left, Low Temperature, Long Tangent
LTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Tap Changer (Transformer)
LTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Long Tangent Fitting
LTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting, Large Tongue and Groove

LTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lintel, Less Than Truckload

LUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lubricate
LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Voltage (below 600 V)
LVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Louver
LW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lap Weld

LWB ................... Leaving Wet Bulb

LWC . . . . . . LWC . . . . . . Lightweight Concrete
LWN ................... Long Weld Neck
LWT ................... Leaving Water Temperature
LYT ................... Layout

L1, L2, L3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incoming Terminals or Bus

M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor, Motor Control Coil & Contacts in Starter,
Miscellaneous Structural Shapes
M1E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Milled 1 End
M2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Milled 2 Ends
MA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Actuator

MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Air Connection

MACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine
MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnetic
MAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance
MAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malleable

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 26 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

MANF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manifold
MAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Masonry
MATL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material
MAU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Up Air Unit
MAWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum Allowable Working Pressure

MAX . . . . . max . . . . . . . Maximum

MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mixing Box, Machine Bolt
MBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnetic Brake, Member
MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Moment Connection, Multiple Contact, Miscellaneous
Channels, Medicine Cabinet
MCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Control Center

MCE . . . . . . MCE . . . . . . Manufacturing Cycle Efficiency

MCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnetic Clutch
MECH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical
MED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium
MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mean Effective Pressure

MET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal
MEZZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mezzanine
MF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Male and Female
MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal Floor Decking
MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Flow Diagram

MFDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Feeder

MFG . . . . . . mfg . . . . . . . Manufacturing
MFR . . . . . . mfr . . . . . . . Manufacturer
MG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Generator
MGB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multigang Box

MH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manhole
MHHW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mean Higher High Water
MHL . . . . . . MHL . . . . . . Materials Handling Labor
MHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manhour
MHW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mean High Water

MI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Malleable Iron
MIN . . . . . . min . . . . . . . Minimum
MIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror
MISC . . . . . misc . . . . . . Miscellaneous
MJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Joint

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 27 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

MK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mark
MKD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marked
ML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Match Line
MLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Molding
MLLW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mean Lower Low Water

ML-S/RS . ML-S/RS . . Miniload - Storage and Retrieval System

MLW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mean Low Water
MMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Membrane
MNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual
MNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Starter

MNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintained
MNTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintained Contact
MO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Molybdenum, Masonry Opening
MOD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modular, Model
MOL WT . mol wt . . . . Molecular Weight

MOM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Momentary
MOMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Momentary Contact
MON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moment, Monument, Monitor
MOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor
MOV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Operated Valve, Movable

MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manpower
MPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Pull Station
MPT . . . . . . MPT . . . . . . Male Pipe Thread
MR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mop Receptor
MRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marble

MRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal Roof Decking

MSNR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multispeed Nonreversing
MSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Switch
MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mixing Tee, Structural Tee (cut from M Shape), Mount
MTD . . . . . . mtd . . . . . . . Mean Temperature Difference

MTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounted
MTFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal Furring
MTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting
MTHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal Threshold
MTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material

MTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Takeoff

MTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meter (Instrument)
MU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Makeup
MULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mullion
MV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium Voltage (600 V to 15 kV)

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 28 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

MW . . . . . . . MW . . . . . . . Minimum Wall
MWK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Millwork
MWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum Working Pressure
MZI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multizone Unit
N ......... N ......... North / Neutral (Drawings Only)

N/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not Applicable

(N)B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Neutral Bus
N/R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not Required
NA . . . . . . . . NA . . . . . . . Not Applicable, Next Assembly
NARR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Narrative

NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Natural
NATL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . National
NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normally Closed, No Change, No Comment
NDE . . . . . . NDE . . . . . . Nondestructive Examination
NEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative

NEUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Neutral
NF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Near Face, Not Furnished
NG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No Good
NGF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Natural Gas Firm
NGI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Natural Gas Interruptible

NI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nickel Iron
NIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not In Contract
NIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Neon Indicating Light
NIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nipple
NL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Neoprene Lined, Nailable

NMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nonmetallic Box

NMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nonmetallic
NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normally Open
NO. . . . . . . No. / # . . . . Number
NOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nipolet

NOM . . . . . nom . . . . . . . Nominal

NONFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nonfreeze
NORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal
NOZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nozzle
NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nameplate

NPS . . . . . . . NPS . . . . . . . Nominal Pipe Size

NPSH . . . . . NPSH . . . . . Net Positive Suction Head
NPT . . . . . . . NPT . . . . . . American National Taper Pipe Thread
NR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Noise Reduction
NRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Noise Reduction Coefficient

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 29 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

NRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nonrising Stem

NS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Near Side, Nonsprinklered
NSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal Set Point
NTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not to Scale
NV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Needle Valve

O ...................... Off, Electromagnetic or Sonic Signal

O TO O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Out to Out
OA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overall
OAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside Air Damper
OAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside Air Intake

OB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Burner
OBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opposed Blade Damper
OBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obscure, Obsolete
OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On Centers
OCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Circuit Breaker

OCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overcurrent Relay

OCRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Circuit Recloser
OCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Octagon
OD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside Diameter
ODR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor

ODT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil & Dust Tight

OEM . . . . . . OEM . . . . . . Original Equipment Manufacturer
OET . . . . . . OET . . . . . . 1 End Threaded
OF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Bath Air Filter, Overflow, Outside Face
OFCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Office

OFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offsite
OH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Hearth (steel), Overhead
OHMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ovalhead Machine Screw
OHWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ovalhead Wood Screw
OI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Insulated

OIFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Insulated Fan Cooled

OISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Insulated Self-Cooled
OIWC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Immersed Water Cooled
OL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overload Relay
OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Pressure, Opaque

OPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating
OPNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening
OPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opposite
OPP HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opposite Hand
OPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operate

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 30 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

OPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimizing Control Mode

OPTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional
OR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside Radius
ORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordinary
ORF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orifice

ORG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Organization
ORIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Original
OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Switch, Open Sprinkler
OS&Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside Screw & Yoke
OSBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside Battery Limits

OSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outstanding Leg

OT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Tight, Operating Temperature, Overtime
OTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Tight Box
OTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Over Temperature Relay
OTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Type Transformer

OUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outgoing, Outlet, Outside

OVFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overflow
OVHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead
OVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overvoltage Relay
OVV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overvoltage

OWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil-Water-Gas
OWJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Web Joist
P ....................... Pole, Page, Plain, Pneumatic Signal
(P)BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Potential Bus
P COM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Proportional Comulator

P SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Selector

P&D . . . . . . P&D . . . . . . Pickup And Deposit Station
P&ID . . . . . P&ID . . . . . Piping and Instrumentation Diagram
P/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Of
PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pipe Anchor, Public Address

PAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaged Air Conditioner

PAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Alarm High
PAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Alarm Low
PAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pneumatic Averaging Relay, Parallel
PARA . . . . . para . . . . . . . Paragraph

PART. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partial
PATT . . . . . patt . . . . . . . Pattern
PAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plasma Arc Welding
PAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Private Automatic Exchange
PB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Push Button, Pull Box / Panic Bar

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 31 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

PB STA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Push Button Station

PBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Particle Board
PBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plain Both Ends
PBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Push Button & Light
PBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Push Button Maintained Position

PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Private Branch Exchange

PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug Cock, Point of Curvature, Point of Curve, Pulsating
Current, Pile Cap, Personal Computer
PC MK . . . . pc mk . . . . . Piece Mark
PC(S) . . . . . pc(s) . . . . . . Piece, Pieces
PCB . . . . . . . PCB . . . . . . Polychlorinated Biphenyl

PCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precast Concrete, Point of Compound Curve

PCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pile Cutoff
PCPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Portland Cement Plaster
PCSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable Controller Solid State
PCT / % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Percent

PCV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Control Valve

PD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pitch Diameter
PDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Distribution Center
PDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Distribution Panel
PE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polyethylene, Plain End, Porcelain Enamel, Pneumatic
Electric Switch

PE . . . . . . . . PE . . . . . . . . Professional Engineer
PEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plain End Beveled
PEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Photoelectric Cell
PED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pedestal
PERF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perforated

PERIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perimeter
PERM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Permanent
PERP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perpendicular
PERT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance Evaluation and Review Technique
PES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Photoelectric Scanner

PETRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Petroleum
PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Factor, Plain Face
PFA . . . . . . . PFA . . . . . . . Teflon (perfluoroalkoxy)
PFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prefabricate, Prefabricated
PFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prefer

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 32 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

PFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preferred, Process Flow Diagram

PFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Factor Meter
PFN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prefinished
PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate Glass, Pipe Guide
PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phase

pH . . . . . . . . pH . . . . . . . . Hydrogen Ion Concentration

PHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preheat Coil
PHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pneumatic Hesitation Relay
PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point of Intersection, Pressure Indicator
PICV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Indicating Control Valve

PITO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point of Intersection of Turnout

PIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post Indicator Valve
PK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking
PKGD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaged
PL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate, Plug, Property Line

PLAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plastic Laminate

PLAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plaster
PLATF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Platform
PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable Logic Controllers
PLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Light (Green)

PLMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plumbing
PLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Light (Red)
PLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plant
PLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Loaded Valve
PNEU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pneumatic

PNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel
PNL BD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel Board
PNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paint
PO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purchase Order
POCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phase Overcurrent Relay

PORC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Porcelain
POS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
POSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position
POSUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point of Support
POT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Potentiometer

PP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personnel Protection, Power Pole, Power Panel

PPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polypropylene Lined
PR . . . . . . . . pr . . . . . . . . . Pair
PR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pipe Rack
PRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable RAM

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 33 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

PRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Controller

PRCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process
PRCST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precast
PRECIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precipitator
PREFAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prefabricated

PRELIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary
PREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare, Preparation
PRESS. . . . press. . . . . . Pressure
PRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preformed
PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Primary

PRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parallel
PRMLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Premolded
PROD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product, Productivity
PROJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project, Projection
PROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable ROM

PROP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Property
PROT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protective, Protection
PRR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pneumatic Ratio Relay
PRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer
PRV . . . . . . PRV . . . . . . Pressure Reducing Valve

PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pipe Support, Point of Switch, Pipe Stub, Pressure Switch

PSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prestressed Concrete
PSD . . . . . . . PSD . . . . . . . Prevention of Significant Deterioration of Air Quality
PSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Switch High
PSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Switch Low

PSLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pipe Sleeve

PSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Safety Valve
PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point, Point of Tangency, Potential Transformer, Pipe Tap,
Pressure Tap
P/T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure / Temperature
PTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post Tensioned Concrete

PTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paper Towel Dispenser

PTHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pothead
PTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partition
PTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paper Towel Receptor
PU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pickup

PURCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purchase
PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug Valve, Paved, Paving
P/V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure / Volume
PVC . . . . . . PVC . . . . . . Polyvinyl Chloride, Point of Vertical Curve
PVCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polyvinyl Chloride Lined

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 34 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

PVCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe

PVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point of Vertical Intersection
PVMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pavement
PVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point of Vertical Tangent
PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Bus

PWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plywood
PWHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Postweld Heat Treatment
PWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power
PWRH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powerhouse
PWT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Transformer

QA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quality Assurance, Quick Acting

QC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quality Control
QDRNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quadrant
QOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Opening Device
QOV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Opening Valve

QT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quarry Tile
QTY . . . . . . qty . . . . . . . . Quantity
QUAL . . . . qual . . . . . . . Quality
R ....................... Relief Valve (hot water), Radius, Relay, Resistance, Red
R FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return Fan

R-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right to Left

R/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Readout (electronic)
RA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return Air
RAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Room Air Conditioner
RACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverse Acting

RAD ................... Return Air Damper

RAD. .................. Radius, Radian
RAF ................... Return Air Fan
RAG ................... Return Air Grille
RAH ................... Radiant Heating

RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Random Access Memory

RAO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return Air Opening
RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Annunciator Panel
RAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return Air Register
RB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubber Base

RBB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Round Bolted Bonnet

RBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubble Stone
RBT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubber Tile
RC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reheat Coil, Receiver Controller
RC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Control

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 35 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

RCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receptacle Box

RCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Record
RCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refrigerant Compressor
RCP . . . . . . . RCP . . . . . . Reinforced Concrete Pipe
RCVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Received

RCVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver
RCVY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recovery
RD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rupture Disc, Round, Roof Drain
RDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof Drain Conductor
RDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radial

RDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rain & Dust Tight, Sleet Resistant

RE-BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcing Bar
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording
RECEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receptacle
RECIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reciprocate, Reciprocal

RECIRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recirculate
RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectangular, Rectifier
RED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reducer, Reducing
REDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reducing Flange
REF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference

REFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refrigerator, Refrigeration

REG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regulator, Register
REGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regenerator
REINF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reinforce
REM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove

REQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request
REQD . . . . . reqd . . . . . . Required
REQN . . . . . reqn . . . . . . Requisition
REQT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirement
RES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resilient, Resistor

RESTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrictor
RET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return
REV . . . . . . rev . . . . . . . . Revise / Revision
RF . . . . . . . . RF . . . . . . . . Raised Face
RFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roofing

RFH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof Hatch

RFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflect, Reflected, Reflective, Reflector
RFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request for Purchase
RFQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request for Quotation
RFRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refractory

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 36 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

RFSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Raised Face Smooth Finish

RG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ring Gasket
RH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relative Humidity / Rubber Hose / Right Hand
RHEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rheostat
RHL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Resisting, Rubber Insulated, and Lead Covered Cable

RIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red Indicating Light

RK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack
RL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rail, Railing
RL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubber Lined, Removable Link
RLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Railing

RLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay
RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Room
RMS . . . . . . RMS . . . . . . Root Mean Square
RN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Riser Nipple
RND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Round

RO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rough Opening
RO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restriction Orifice
ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Only Memory, Rough Order of Magnitude
ROW, R/W . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right of Way
RP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receptacle Panel

RPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receptacle Power Transformer

RR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Railroad
RRLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Residual Voltage Relay
RS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rising Stem, Resistor
RSB . . . . . . . RSB . . . . . . Rack Supported Building

RSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rigid Steel Conduit

RSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reducing Street Elbow
RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resistance Thermometer
RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right, Raintight & Sleet Resistant
RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resistance Temperature Detector

RTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rating
RTHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Hand
RTJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ring Type Joint
RTRP . . . . . RTRP . . . . . Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe
RTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary

RV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relief Valve, Roof Vent (Intake or Discharge)

RVP . . . . . . RVP . . . . . . Reid Vapor Pressure
RVNR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduced Voltage Nonreversing
RVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduced Voltage Reversing
RVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverse (Side)

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 37 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

RVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rivet
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . South, Strainer, Safety Valve (steam), Beam (American
Standard), Solenoid Actuator, Starter
S/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed / Current
S/FAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shop Fabrication
S/L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Line

S/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid Neutral

S/R . . . . . . . . S/R . . . . . . . Store / Retrieve
S/RM . . . . . S/RM . . . . . Store / Retrieve Machine
S/T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed / Torque
S/W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software

SA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supply Air
SAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supply Air Diffuser
SAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safe, Safety
SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supply Air Grille
SALV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Salvage

SAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sanitary
SAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saturate
SAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Submerged Arc Welding
SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stud Bolt
SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Connection, Solid Core, System Control, Shear
Connector

SCH . . . . . . sch . . . . . . . . Schedule

SCHEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic
SCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen
SCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Silicon Controlled Rectifier
SCRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screwed

SCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Clay Tile

SCV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Control Valve
SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smoke Detector, Supplier Document
SDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Siding
SDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saddle

SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Street Elbow, Screwed End

SEB . . . . . . . SEB . . . . . . . Small End Beveled
SEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second, Secondary
SECT . . . . . sect . . . . . . . Section
SEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Segment

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 38 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

SEHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Entrance Head

SELB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Entrance Elbow
SEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Separate
SEP . . . . . . . SEP . . . . . . . Small End Plain
SER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series

SERR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serrated
SEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sewer
SF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serrated Finish, Seal Fitting, Spot Face, Semifinished
SFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seal Fittings with Drain
SFGL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Glass

SG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheet Glass, Safety Gate, Sight Glass

SGL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single
SH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steam Heating Coil, Shelf, Shelving, Single Hub, Shower
SH ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shock Absorber
SHLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shield

SHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shore, Shored, Shoring

SHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheet
SHTG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheeting
SHTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheathing
SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Similar

SIW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shut In Winter

SJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solder Joints
SK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketch, Sink
SKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skylight
SKT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Socket, Skirt

SKU . . . . . . SKU . . . . . . Stock Keeping Unit (or Part Number)

SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saran Lined, Sea Level, Sleeve
SLBB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short Leg Back to Back
SLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short Leg Vertical
SMAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shielded Metallic Arc With Covered Electrodes

SMLS STL . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seamless Steel

SN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swage Nipple, Spray Nozzle
SNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Substitute or Synthetic Natural Gas
SNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sealant
SOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slip On Flange

SOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solenoid, Sockolet

SOL ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid State
SOLN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solution
SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static Pressure, Spare, Spiral, Set Point, Soil Pipe, Spool,
Soundproof
SP GR . . . . sp gr . . . . . Specific Gravity

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 39 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

SP HT . . . . . sp ht . . . . . . Specific Heat
SPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space, Spacer
SPCG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spacing
SPDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Pole Double Throw
SPEC . . . . . spec . . . . . . . Specification

SPHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sphere, Spherical

SPK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speaker
SPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special
SPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sprinkler, Spring
SPS-AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Switch Antiplugging

SPS-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Switch Plugging

SPST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Pole Single Throw
SQ . . . . . . . . sq . . . . . . . . Square
SQH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square Head
SQRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square Root

SR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short Radius, Stress Relief, Steel Roll Up

SRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short Radius Elbow
SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch
SSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slow Speed Contactor
SSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Sink

SST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Substation Service Transformer, Stainless Steel, Saturated

Suction Temperature, Solid State Trip
SSU . . . . . . . SSU . . . . . . . Storage Space Utilization Ratio
ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Tee (cut from S Shape), Sound Trap
ST SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Straight Seam
STA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Station

STAB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stabilizer
STCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stress Cone
STD . . . . . . . Std . . . . . . . . Standard
STD WT . . std wt . . . . Standard Weight
STEL . . . . . STEL . . . . Short Term Exposure Limit

STG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seating, Stage

STIFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stiffener
STIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stirrup
STK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stack, Stock
STL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel

STM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steam
STM TR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steam Tracing, Steam Trace
STO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage
STR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnetic Starter, Strainer, Straight
STRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combination Magnetic Starter with Circuit Breaker

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 40 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

STRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combination Magnetic Starter with Fused Disconnect Switch

STRK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starter Rack
STRUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural
STWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steam Working Pressure
STWY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stairway

SUBST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Substitute
SUBSTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Substation
SUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suction
SUPPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplement
SUPSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supersede

SUPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Support, Superintendent

SUPVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supervisor
SURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surface
SUSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspended
SUSP CLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspended Ceiling

SV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Valve, Solenoid Valve

SVCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service
SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Socket Weld
SW . . . . . . . . sw . . . . . . . . Switch
SWBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switchboard

SWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swage
SWGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switchgear
SWRK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switchrack
SYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symmetrical
SYMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol

SYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronous, Synthetic

SYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System
T ....................... Tee, Ton, Temperature, Trap
T TO B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top to Bottom
T TO T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tangent to Tangent

TDAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Delay After Deenergizing

TDAE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Delay After Energizing
T&B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top and Bottom
T&C . . . . . . T&C . . . . . . Thread and Couple
T&G . . . . . . T&G . . . . . . Tongue and Groove

T/SLAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top of Slab

TACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer
TAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Air Grille
TAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Alarm High
TAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Alarm Low

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 41 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

TAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tangent
TAO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Air Opening
TAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Air Register
TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Block, Trolley Beam, Terminal Board, Towel Bar
TBE . . . . . . . TBE . . . . . . Thread Both Ends

TC . . . . . . . . TC . . . . . . . . Thermocouple, Trip Coil, Time Closing, No Load Tap

Changer (Transformer), Total Carbon, Terra Cotta
TCS . . . . . . . TCS . . . . . . Time Charge System
TD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Difference, Time Delay
TDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Delay Relay
TDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total Dissolved Solids

TE . . . . . . . . TE . . . . . . . . Threaded End
TEFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled
TEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone
TELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone Pole
TEMP . . . . . temp . . . . . . Temperature, Temporary

TENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tension
TERM. . . . . term. . . . . . . Terminal
TF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threaded Flange, Transfer Fan
TFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Teflon (polytetra-fluoroethylene)
3 WAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Way

3/C . . . . . . . . 3/C . . . . . . . 3 Conductor Cable (or 4, 7, 12, etc.)

3/W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Wire
3 PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Phase
THD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threaded, Thread
THERMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermostat

THK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thick, Thickness

THR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold
TI . . . . . . . . . TI . . . . . . . . . Temperature Indicator
TIP . . . . . . . TIP . . . . . . . Total Implied Precision
TIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total Indicator Reading

TK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tank
TKBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tackboard
TKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tackstrip
TL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tangent Line, Tangent Length, Total Load
TLE . . . . . . . TLE . . . . . . Thread Large End

TLV . . . . . . TLV . . . . . . Threshold Limit Value

TM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer
TMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer Programmable
TO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Opening, Turnout
TOC . . . . . . TOC . . . . . . Total Organic Carbon

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 42 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

TOC . . . . . . TOC . . . . . . Top of Concrete, Top of Curb

T/C . . . . . . . T/C
TOD . . . . . . TOD . . . . . . Top of Duct
T/D . . . . . . . T/D
TOE . . . . . . TOE . . . . . . Thread 1 End

TOF . . . . . . . TOF . . . . . . Top of Footing

T/F . . . . . . . . T/F
TOG . . . . . . TOG . . . . . Top of Grate
T/G . . . . . . . T/G
TOJ . . . . . . . TOJ . . . . . . Top of Joist

T/J . . . . . . . . T/J
TOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thredolet, Tolerance
TOP . . . . . . . TOP . . . . . . Top of Pipe
T/P . . . . . . . . T/P
TOR . . . . . . TOR . . . . . . Top of Rail

T/R . . . . . . . T/R
TOS . . . . . . . TOS . . . . . . Top of Steel, Top of Soil
T/S . . . . . . . T/S
TOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total
TOW . . . . . . TOW . . . . . Top of Wall

T/W . . . . . . . T/W
TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toe Plate
TPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Controller
TPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toilet Paper Dispenser
TPI . . . . . . . TPI . . . . . . . Throughput Performance Index

TPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toe Plate Only

TPTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toilet Partition
3PDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Pole Double Throw
3PST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Pole Single Throw
TR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermal Relay, Trace, Tracing, Trench, Transom

TRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque
TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Tubing, Tray Support
TSE . . . . . . TSE . . . . . . . Thread Small End
TSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Switch High
TSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Switch Low

TSS . . . . . . . TSS . . . . . . . Total Suspended Solids

TST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temporary Strainer
TT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tell Tale; Tee (Side Cover)
TTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tee (Back Cover)
TURB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turbine

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 43 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

TV . . . . . . . . TV . . . . . . . Television
2SCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Speed Consequent Pole (Starter)
2SSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Speed Separate Winding (Starter)
TW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermowell
TWA . . . . . . TWA . . . . . Time Weighted Average

TXB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tee, (Cross) Back Cover

TYP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical
TZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terrazzo
T1, T2, T3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outgoing Terminals to Motor
U/L . . . . . . . U/L . . . . . . . Unit Load

UA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Air Conditioner (with compressor)

UB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Union Bonnet
UC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Undercut
UD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underdrain
UEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upper Explosive Level

UG, U/G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underground

UGB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underground Direct Burial
UGD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underground Duct Bank
UH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Heater
UN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Union

UNF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unfinished
UNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unless Noted Otherwise
UNST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unistrut
UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utility Pole
UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uninterruptible Power Supply

UR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Urinal
USA . . . . . . USA . . . . . . United States of America
USD . . . . . . USD . . . . . . Ultimate Strength Design
UTIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utility
UTS . . . . . . . UTS . . . . . . Ultimate Tensile Stress

UV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Ventilator, Under Voltage

UVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under Voltage Device
UVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Under Voltage Relay
V ...................... Valve, Vent, Vibration Isolator, Shear
VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vacuum

VAM .................. Voltammeter

VAR ................... Variable, Varnish
VAT ................... Vinyl Asbestos Tile
VAV ................... Variable Air Volume
VAX . . . . . . VAX . . . . . . Virtual Address Extended

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 44 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

VB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vapor Barrier, Vinyl Base, Valve Box

VC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical Curve
VCP . . . . . . VCP . . . . . . Vitrified Clay Pipe
VD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vapor Density
VD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Damper

VEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Velocity
VENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ventilate, Ventilation
VERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical
VEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vestibule
VF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vinyl Fabric

VG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical Grain
VIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vibrate, Vibrating, Vibrator
VICT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Victaulic
VIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vinyl
VISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viscosity

VIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vitreous
VIZ . . . . . . . viz . . . . . . . . Namely
VJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-Joint, V-Jointed
VM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltmeter
VNR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Veneer

VOL . . . . . . vol . . . . . . . . Volume

VOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volt-Ohm Milliammeter
VP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vapor Pressure, Velocity Pressure
VR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Regulator
VRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical Lift

VRLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Relay

VRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vermiculite
VS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volt Meter Switch, Vent Stack, Versus, Vent Set
VT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vinyl Tile
VTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertex

VU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ventilating Unit
W ......... W ......... West, Wide, Width, Wide Flange, White
W/ . . . . . . . . w/ . . . . . . . . . With
W/O . . . . . . w/o . . . . . . . Without
WB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welded Bonnet, Wet Bulb, Wood Base

WC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weld Cap, Watercloset, Water Chiller

WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wide, Width, Wood
WDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Water and Dust Tight
WDTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Water and Dust Tight, and Corrosion Resistant
WF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wide Flange

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 45 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

WFAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Water Flow Alarm

WG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wired Glass
WGP . . . . . . WGP . . . . . . Wire Guidance Path
WGS . . . . . . WGS . . . . . . Wire Guidance System
WH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Heater, Wall Hung

WHM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watthour Meter

WHMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watthour Meter Demand
WHSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warehouse
WI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wrought Iron, Weir Inlet
WIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White Indicating Light

WIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Window
WKWY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Walkway
WL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wind Load
WM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watt Meter, Wire Mesh
WMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watt Meter Demand

WN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welding Neck
WNF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welding Neck Flange
WOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Water-Oil-Gas
WOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weldolet
WP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working Point, Working Pressure, Weatherproof,
Waterproofing

WR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Water Repellent, Water Resistant

WRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather Resistant Box
WROT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wrought
WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Waterstop
WSCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wainscot

WSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working Stress Design

WSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allowable Working Steam Pressure
WSTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weatherstrip
WT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Thickness, Watertight, Structural Tee
WT . . . . . . . wt . . . . . . . . Weight

WTW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall to Wall

WW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireway
WWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Welded Wire Fabric
X ...................... Auxiliary Relay to Prefixed Relay, Unclassified Instrument
XA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outlet Body, Hazardous Area - Terminal

XC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outlet Body, Hazardous Area - Through

XFMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformer
XFRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Switch
XH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extra Heavy
XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outlet Body, Hazardous Area - Elbow

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 000 000 9910
Publication Date 29Dec95
Page 46 of 46

FLUOR DANIEL

ABBREVIATIONS: TERMS AND PHRASES

On Dwgs In Text Meaning

XLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross Linked Polyethylene

XLPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross Linked Polyethylene, Lead Covered
XMTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter
XNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Contact Normally Closed
XNO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Contact Normally Open

XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explosionproof
XPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explosionproof Dust Tight
XPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explosionproof Gastight
XPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explosionproof Rain, Gas, and Dust Tight
XPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explosionproof Spin Top, Gas, and Dust Tight

XR . . . . . . . . XR . . . . . . . X-Ray
XS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extra Strong
XT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outlet Body Hazardous Area - Tee
XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outlet Body, Hazardous Area - Cross
XXH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Extra Heavy

XXS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Extra Strong

X1, X2, X3, X0 . . . . . . . . Secondary Terminals at Power Transformer (X0 is Neutral)
Y ...................... Yellow
YIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yellow Indicating Light
YP . . . . . . . . YP . . . . . . . Yield Point

YS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yield Strength
Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Impedance (Diagram), Zone
ZS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freezestat

GENERAL CORPORATE
 Practice 670 250 9965
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 1 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS OF FEET AND INCHES

64ths 32nds Decimals of a Foot Decimals

of an Inch
0" 1" 2" 3" 4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 10" 11"
0 0.0000 0.0833 0.1667 0.2500 0.3333 0.4167 0.5000 0.5833 0.6667 0.7500 0.8333 0.9167
1 0.0013 0.0846 0.1680 0.2513 0.3346 0.4180 0.5013 0.5846 0.6680 0.7513 0.8346 0.9180 0.015625
1/32 0.0026 0.0859 0.1693 0.2526 0.3359 0.4193 0.5026 0.5859 0.6693 0.7526 0.8359 0.9193 0.031250
3 0.0039 0.0872 0.1706 0.2539 0.3372 0.4206 0.5039 0.5872 0.6706 0.7539 0.8372 0.9206 0.046875

1/16 0.0052 0.0885 0.1719 0.2552 0.3385 0.4219 0.5052 0.5885 0.6719 0.7552 0.8385 0.9219 0.062500
5 0.0065 0.898 0.1732 0.2565 0.3398 0.4232 0.5065 0.5898 0.6732 0.7565 0.8398 0.9232 0.078125
3/32 0.0078 0.0911 0.1745 0.2578 0.3411 0.4245 0.5078 0.5911 0.6745 0.7578 0.8411 0.9245 0.093750
7 0.0091 0.0924 0.1758 0.2591 0.3424 0.4258 0.5091 0.5924 0.6758 0.7591 0.8424 0.9258 0.109375

1/8 0.0104 0.0937 0.1771 0.2604 0.3437 0.4271 0.5104 0.5937 0.6771 0.7604 0.8437 0.9271 0.125000
9 0.0117 0.0951 0.1784 0.2617 0.3451 0.4284 0.5117 0.5951 0.6784 0.7617 0.8451 0.9284 0.140625
5/32 0.0130 0.0964 0.1797 0.2630 0.3464 0.4297 0.5130 0.5964 0.6797 0.7630 0.8464 0.9297 0.156250
11 0.0143 0.0977 0.1810 0.2643 0.3477 0.4310 0.5143 0.5977 0.6810 0.7643 0.8477 0.9310 0.171875

3/16 0.0156 0.0990 0.1823 0.2656 0.3490 0.4323 0.5156 0.5990 0.6823 0.7656 0.8490 0.9323 0.187500
13 0.0169 0.1003 0.1836 0.2669 0.3503 0.4336 0.5169 0.6003 0.6836 0.7669 0.8503 0.9336 0.203125
7/32 0.0182 0.1016 0.1849 0.2682 0.3516 0.4349 0.5182 0.6016 0.6849 0.7682 0.8516 0.9349 0.218750
15 0.0195 0.1029 0.1862 0.2695 0.3529 0.4362 0.5196 0.6029 0.6862 0.7695 0.8529 0.9362 0.234375

1/4 0.0208 0.1042 0.1875 0.2708 0.3542 0.4375 0.5208 0.6042 0.6875 0.7708 0.8542 0.9375 0.250000
17 0.0221 0.1055 0.1888 0.2721 0.3555 0.4388 0.5221 0.6055 0.6888 0.7721 0.8555 0.9388 0.265625
9/32 0.0234 0.1068 0.1901 0.2734 0.3568 0.4401 0.5234 0.6068 0.6901 0.7734 0.8568 0.9401 0.281250
19 0.0247 0.1081 0.1914 0.2747 0.3581 0.4414 0.5247 0.6081 0.6914 0.7747 0.8581 0.9414 0.296875

3/16 0.0260 0.1094 0.1927 0.2760 0.3594 0.4427 0.5260 0.6094 0.6927 0.7760 0.8594 0.9427 0.312500
21 0.0273 0.1107 0.1940 0.2773 0.3607 0.4440 0.5273 0.6107 0.6940 0.7773 0.8607 0.9440 0.328125
11/32 0.0286 0.1120 0.1953 0.2786 0.3620 0.4453 0.5286 0.6120 0.6953 0.7786 0.8620 0.9453 0.343750
23 0.0299 0.1133 0.1966 0.2799 0.3633 0.4466 0.5299 0.6133 0.6966 0.7799 0.8633 0.9466 0.359375

3/8 0.0312 0.1146 0.1979 0.2812 0.3646 0.4479 0.5312 0.6146 0.6979 0.7812 0.8646 0.9479 0.375000
25 0.0326 0.1159 0.1992 0.2826 0.3659 0.4492 0.5326 0.6159 0.6992 0.7826 0.8659 0.9492 0.390625
13/32 0.0339 0.1172 0.2005 0.2839 0.3672 0.4505 0.5339 0.6172 0.7005 0.7839 0.8672 0.9505 0.406250
27 0.0352 0.1185 0.2018 0.2852 0.3685 0.4518 0.5352 0.6185 0.7018 0.7852 0.8685 0.9518 0.421875

7/16 0.0365 0.1198 0.2031 0.2865 0.3698 0.4531 0.5365 0.6198 0.7031 0.7865 0.8698 0.9531 0.437500
29 0.0378 0.1211 0.2044 0.2878 0.3711 0.4544 0.5378 0.6211 0.7044 0.7878 0.8711 0.9544 0.453125
15/32 0.0391 0.1224 0.2057 0.2891 0.3724 0.4557 0.5391 0.6224 0.7057 0.7891 0.8724 0.9557 0.468750
31 0.0404 0.1237 0.2070 0.2904 0.3737 0.4570 0.5404 0.6237 0.7070 0.7904 0.8737 0.9570 0.484375

Piping Engineering
 Practice 670 250 9965
Publication Date 31Oct95
Page 2 of 2

FLUOR DANIEL

DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS OF FEET AND INCHES

64ths 32nds Decimals of a Foot Decimals

of an Inch
0" 1" 2" 3" 4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 9" 10" 11"
1/2 0.0417 0.1250 0.2083 0.2917 0.3750 0.4583 0.5417 0.6250 0.7083 0.7917 0.8750 0.9583 0.500000
33 0.0430 0.1263 0.2096 0.2930 0.3763 0.4596 0.5430 0.6263 0.7096 0.7930 0.8763 0.9596 0.515625
17/32 0.0443 0.1276 0.2109 0.2943 0.3776 0.4609 0.5443 0.6276 0.7109 0.7943 0.8776 0..9609 0.531250
35 0.0456 0.1289 0.2122 0.2956 0.3789 0.4622 0.5456 0.6289 0.7122 0.7956 0.8789 0.9622 0.546875

9/16 0.0469 0.1302 0.2135 0.2969 0.3802 0.4635 0.5469 0.6302 0.7135 0.7969 0.8802 0.9635 0.562500
37 0.0482 0.1315 0.2148 0.2982 0.3815 0.4648 0.5482 0.6315 0.7148 0.7982 0.8815 0.9648 0.578125
19/32 0.0495 0.1328 0.2161 0.2995 0.3828 0.4661 0.5495 0.6328 0.7161 0.7995 0.8828 0.9661 0.593750
39 0.0508 0.1341 0.2174 0.3008 0.3841 0.4674 0.5508 0.6341 0.7174 0.8008 0.8841 0.9674 0.609375

5/8 0.0521 0.1354 0.2188 0.3021 0.3854 0.4688 0.5521 0.6354 0.7188 0.8021 0.8854 0.9688 0.625000
41 0.0534 0.1367 0.2201 0.3034 0.3867 0.4701 0.5534 0.6367 0.7201 0.8034 0.8867 0.9701 0.640625
21/32 0.0547 0.1380 0.2214 0.3047 0.3880 0.4714 0.5547 0.6380 0.7214 0.8047 0.8880 0.9714 0.656250
43 0.0560 0.1393 0.2227 0.3060 0.3893 0.4727 0.5560 0.6393 0.7227 0.8060 0.8893 0.9727 0.671875

11/16 0.0573 0.1406 0.2240 0.3073 0.3906 0.4740 0.5573 0.6406 0.7240 0.8073 0.8906 0.9740 0.687500
45 0.0586 0.1419 0.2253 0.3086 0.3919 0.4753 0.5586 0.6419 0.7253 0.8086 0.8919 0.9753 0.703125
23/32 0.0599 0.1432 0.2266 0.3099 0.3932 0.4766 0.5599 0.6432 0.7266 0.8099 0.8932 0.9766 0.718750
47 0.0612 0.1445 0.2279 0.3112 0.3945 0.4779 0.5612 0.6645 0.7279 0.8112 0.8945 0.9779 0.734375

3/4 0.0625 0.1458 0.2292 0.3125 0.3958 0.4792 0.5625 0.6458 0.7292 0.8125 0.8958 0.9792 0.750000
49 0.0638 0.1471 0.2305 0.3138 0.3971 0.4805 0.5638 0.6471 0.7305 0.8138 0.8971 0.9805 0.765625
25/32 0.0651 0.1484 0.2318 0.3151 0.3984 0.4818 0.5651 0.6484 0.7318 0.8151 0.8984 0.9818 0.781250
51 0.0664 0.1497 0.2331 0.3164 0.3997 0.4831 0.5664 0.6497 0.7331 0.8164 0.8997 0.9831 0.796875

13/16 0.0677 0.1510 0.2344 0.3177 0.4010 0.4844 0.5677 0.6510 0.7344 0.8177 0.9010 0.9844 0.812500
53 0.0690 0.1523 0.2357 0.3190 0.4023 0.4857 0.5690 0.6523 0.7357 0.8190 0.9023 0.9857 0.828125
27/32 0.0703 0.1536 0.2370 0.3203 0.4036 0.4870 0.5703 0.6536 0.7370 0.8203 0.9036 0.9870 0.843750
55 0.0716 0.1549 0.2383 0.3216 0.4049 0.4883 0.5716 0.6549 0.7383 0.8216 0.9094 0.9883 0.859375

7/8 0.0729 0.1562 0.2396 0.3229 0.4062 0.4896 0.5729 0.6562 0.7396 0.8229 0.9062 0.9896 0.875000
57 0.0742 0.1576 0.2409 0.3242 0.4076 0.4909 0.5742 0.6576 0.7409 0.8242 0.9076 0.9909 0.890625
29/32 0.0755 0.1589 0.2422 0.3255 0.4089 0.4922 0.5755 0.6589 0.7422 0.8255 0.9089 0.9922 0.906250
59 0.0768 0.1602 0.2435 0.3268 0.4102 0.4935 0.5768 0.6602 0.7435 0.8268 0.9102 0.9935 0.921875

15/16 0.0781 0.1615 0.2448 0.3281 0.4115 0.4948 0.5781 0.6615 0.7448 0.8281 0.9115 0.9948 0.937500
61 0.0794 0.1628 0.2461 0.3294 0.4128 0.4961 0.5794 0.6628 0.7461 0.8294 0.9128 0.9961 0.953125
31/32 0.0807 0.1641 0.2474 0.3307 0.4141 0.4974 0.5807 0.6641 0.7474 0.8307 0.9141 0.9974 0.968750
63 0.0820 0.1654 0.2487 0.3320 0.4154 0.4987 0.5820 0.6654 0.7487 0.8320 0.9154 0.9987 0.984375

Piping Engineering